2007 高考英语阅读专题训练 153页

‎2007年高考英语阅读专题训练50篇 ★ 专题（1）‎ ★ A ‎ We arranged that Kissinger（基辛格）would fly to Vietnam early in July and then stop in Pakistan on the way back. There he would develop a stomachache that would require him to stay in bed and not be seen by the press. Then with President Yapha’s help, he would be taken to an airport where a Pakistani jet would fly him over the mountains to China.‎ ‎ Kissinger’s trip was given the name Polo after Marco Polo, another Western traveler who made history by journeying to China. Everything went quite smoothly. His slight illness in Islamabad received only small attention from reporters covering him. They accepted the story that he would be kept shut up for at least a few days and began making arrangements for their own activities.‎ ‎ Because of the need for complete secrecy and the lack of any direct communication facilities（联络设备）between Beijing and Washington, I knew that we would have no word from Kissinger while he was in China. Even after he had returned to Pakistan, it would still be important to keep it secret, so before Kissinger left, we agreed on a single code word-Eureka-which he would use if his mission（任务，使命）was successful and the presidential trip had been arranged.‎ ‎ On July 11, Al Haig, who knew our code word, phoned to say that a cable（电报）from Kissinger had arrived.‎ ‎ “What’s the message? ”I asked . “Eureka, ”he replied. ‎ ‎56．Kissinger stopped in Pakistan because D B .‎ ‎ A．he had a stomachache B．he needed President Yapha’s help in carrying out a secret plan ‎ C．he did not want to be seen by the press ‎ D．he would like to take a Pakistani jet on his way back.‎ ‎57．The reporters in Islamabad believed that C D .‎ ‎ A．Marco Polo made a trip to China B．Kissinger would make a jourey to China.‎ ‎ C．Kissinger was making arrangements for their activities. D．Kissinger was sick.‎ ‎58．Washington would have no word form Kissinger while he was in China, mainly because C A .‎ ‎ A．his trip must be kept secrect B．President Yapha would not fly together with Kissinger ‎ C．Communication between China and Islamabad was impossible ‎ D．Al Haig would phone to the author to tell him about Kissinger’s trip.‎ ‎59．From the passage we can infer that Kissinger’s cable carrying the message“Eureka”must have been sent D B .‎ ‎ A．before he had left Beijing B．soon after he had returned to Pakistan from China.‎ ‎ C．as soon as he had arrived in Washington on July 11‎ ‎ D．before he returned to Pakistan on July 11‎ B ‎ Good evening. Chinese President Jiang Zemin and his American counterpart Bill Clinton have acknowledged their political differences, but they wrapped up their historic summit（高级会晤）emphasizing（强调）the importance of their common interest. As Mark Thun reports from Washington, the two leaders hammered out agreements on a number of issues（问题，争论点）,although human rights remains a sticking point.‎ ‎ The two sides came to agreements over plenty of items, which could shake the world for a long time to come. The most important is probably the high-level dialogues and consultations（磋商）. The Presidents will visit each other regularly, there will be a Washington-Beijing communications link for direct contact, and there will be regular exchanges or visits by cabinet（内阁）and other officials on political and security（安全）issues. On nuclear cooperation, Mr Clinton promises the sale of nuclear technology to China for peaceful use, something not possible now with an American ban after the 1989 Tiananmen crackdown（严厉取缔）.The two countries have agreed to strengthen military maritime safety（加强海军方面的安全合作）.And Beijing and Washington are both working towards China’s entry into the WTO, with China aiming to make substantial tariff reductions（大幅度降低关税）. Taiwan is considered the most important issue, but there’s little breakthrough（突破）here. The two sides agreed that there should be only one China, and that the Chinese should be allowed to resolve the problem by themselves. It’s over the matter of human rights which the two countries have the most obvious differences.‎ ‎ The autumn air might have been chilly（寒冷的），but the welcoming ceremony for the Chinese ‎ President was anything but cold. Mr and Mrs Jiang Zemin were greeted by the American President and the First Lady. The two heads of state inspected the honour guard and national anthems were played with the twenty-one gun salute as the background. With a chime swinging leisurely only a few steps away, President Bill Clinton spoke of a better future,“Let us strengthen the bonds between us, let us pursue common causes, let us address our differences openly and with respect, let us build a better world for our children.”And Mr Jiang gave a similarly optimistic reply, partly in English, “Let us, the Chinese and the Americans, join hands, and together with people around the world, work hard to bring about the new century of peace, stability and the prosperity.” ‎ ‎60．What style is this short passage?‎ ‎ A．TV news broadcasting. B．A document（文件）on state affairs.‎ ‎ C．A summary of Bill Clinton’s speech at the welcoming ceremony for the Chinese President. D．A newspaper report.‎ ‎61．“The autumn air might have been chilly, but the welcoming ceremony for the Chinese President was anything but cold.”What does the sentence mean to the reader or the listener?‎ ‎ A．Even though the weather was cold, all the people at the welcoming ceremony still felt fairly warm.‎ ‎ B．Both the autumn air and the welcoming ceremony were not a bit warm.‎ ‎ C．People thought it really interesting to hold the warm ceremony in the chilly autumn air.‎ ‎ D．People at the ceremony talked about anything but the cold weather.‎ ‎62．After the meeting of the two presidents, we can hope that .‎ ‎ A．the two countries will together devote themselves to the study of nuclear weapons ‎ B．Taiwan will soon come back to the embrace of its motherland ‎ C．China will adopt the same system as that of the ‎USA ‎ D．the two presidents will call on each other regularly, which will make the two sides understand each other better.‎ ‎63．What President Bill Clinton spoke of at the ceremony shows that .‎ ‎ A．he hopes for a better future for the two sides with better understanding ‎ B．he sincerely hopes that the children in the two contries will grow well and healthily ‎ C．he hopes that all the world will understand why the two countries have joined together ‎ D．he thinks that only by addressing their differences openly and with respect can they build a better world for the children.‎ C ‎ Four months ago Mrs B ordered a rug from a store, which promised to deliver it in about two weeks. Three weeks passed, but the rug did not arrive. When Mrs B telephoned the store to talk about it, she was told that the rug had been lost and that the store would send her another one.‎ ‎ Weeks later, when Mrs B telephoned again, the store told her that the second rug had been delivered and left on her front porch（门廓）.She didn’t believe the story, as she had been at home as usual, and her doorbell was in good working order. However, the store promised her that a third rug would be delivered within a week. It wasn’t. What could she do? How could she get action?‎ ‎ Mrs B did what many other Americans have done-with excellent results. She wrote a letter to the newspaper in her town, explaining the problem. A few days later her letter appeared in the newspaper and this sentence was printed below it:‎ ‎ “The store found a way to safely deliver your rug immediately after hearing from us.”‎ ‎ In this age of machines, it is often hard to get action from businesses that have made mistakes. An individual（个别的）person can complain, but his complaints may accomplish nothing. Luckily, newspapers now employ people to help with such problems, and the results are published in a special section of the paper.‎ ‎ Mrs B’s letter appeared in a column called Mr FLX-IT. During the same week the following letter from Mrs J was printed in the ACTION LINE column of another newspaper.‎ ‎ “Many weeks ago I bought some living room furniture from the House and Garden Shop in Parkkersvile. They have set three delivery dates, and each time I had to stay home from work and wait for the truck, which never came. I have called the store at least fifteen times, and each time they said they would look for the furniture. This has been going on for two months. I guess they are still looking.”‎ ‎ The ACTION LINE writer’s reply was printed below Mrs J’s letter:‎ ‎ “They found it. Action Line made one telephone call to the president of the company, who told us: ‘the customer will get satisfaction.’ The furniture was found, and it arrived at your home yesterday.”‎ ‎64．It seemed that the purpose of Action Line in a newspaper was to .‎ ‎ A．employ people and publish their letters of complaints ‎ B．help consumers correcting wrongs and getting problems solved ‎ C．find what was lost by the business and delivered them to the consumers ‎ D．make telephone calls to the consumers and business which had made mistakes ‎65．How long was if after Mrs B called the store again that she wrote to the local newspaper?‎ ‎ A．About a week. B．Three weeks. C．Two weeks. D．Four months.‎ ‎66．The passage points out that in the machine age people’s complaints usually .‎ ‎ A．bring about mistakes B．cause more serious trouble ‎ C．prove useless D．prove effective ‎67．The passage implies that .‎ ‎ A．there are too many mistakes in businesses to be corrected nowadays.‎ ‎ B．customers can find what they have lost through the help of newspapers ‎ C．newspapers will be the only means that can help people solve problems of all kinds ‎ D．the influence（影响）of newspapers can sometimes solve problems when individual efforts have failed D ‎ The producers of instant coffee found their product strongly resisted（抵制）in the market places despite their product’s obvious advantages. Furthermore, the advertising expenditure（费用）for instant coffee was far greater than that for regular coffee. Efforts were made to find the cause of the consumers’（消费者）seemingly unreasonable resistance to the product. The reason given by most people was dislike for the taste. The producers doubt that there might be deeper reasons, however. This was confirmed (证实，确信) by one of motivation research’s classic studies, one often cited (引用) in the trade. Mason Haire of the University‎ of ‎California constructed two shopping lists that were identical except for one item. There were six items common to both lists: hamburger, carrots, bread, baking powder, canned peaches, and potatoes, with the brands or amounts specified. The seventh item, in fifth place on both lists, read “11b. Maxwell House coffee” on one list and “Nescafe instant coffee” on the other. One list was given to each one in a group of fifty women, and the other list to those in another group of the same size. The women were asked to study their lists and then to describe, as far as they could, the kind of woman ( personality and character ) who would draw up that shopping list. Nearly half of those who had received the list including instant coffee described a housewife who was lazy and a poor planner. On the other hand, only one woman in the other group described the housewife, who had included regular coffee on her list as lazy; only six of that group suggested that she was a poor planner. Eight women felt that the instant-coffee user was probably not a good wife! No one in the other group drew such a conclusion about the housewife who intended to buy regular coffee.‎ ‎68．The result of the investigation showed that .‎ A．women who used regular coffee were good planners B．most of the women investigated were good at reasons C．many women believed that wives who used instant coffee were lazy D．housewives who used instant coffee were lazy ‎69．In the study, the women were supposed to give the opinions about .‎ A.which was better, instant coffee or regular coffee ‎ B．women’s attitude towards shopping C．the necessity of making such a shopping list D．the personality of a woman who would prepare such a list ‎70．Judging by the result of the study many women were not interested in instant coffee because ‎ .‎ A．they didn’t trust advertisements B．instant coffee was not suited to their taste C．they wanted to show that they were intelligent D．they had a sense of shame about using instant coffee ‎71．The word “instant ” probably has the meaning of .‎ A．which can be made up slowly for use B．which can be made up quickly for use C．expensive D．cheap E Here are four pieces of news from China Daily:‎ SHANGHAI – The Huachen Group, which has put 83 million yuan in the development of the ecommerce market since its official registration late last year, recently held a meeting in Shanghai to show the use of its newly opened tourism business payment network. The network aims so serve tourists from all over the world,but especially from Europe and the United‎ ‎State where credit cards are popularly used. After ‎ opening the www. Chinaecent. com website, netizens can get information about hotels and tourism services on tourism page. Hotels and services can be reserved and payments made through credit cards. The network opened in February in Beijing.‎ SYDNEY – The Sydney Olympic flame will travel underwater on Australia’s Great Barrier Reef during the torch relay（火炬接力）following a successful test.‎ Scuba diver Wendy Craig, a marine biologist, will carry the torch on a three-to-four-minute underwater journey at Agincourt Reef on June 27, creating Olympic history, organizers said yesterday.‎ Burning at 2,000 degrees, the torch is expected to remain alight（点燃着的）three metres under-water because of a special kind of technology which creates a “fierce flame” too powerful to be drowned out by water. Charles Tegner, managing director of torch creator, said the flame would burn like a flare from oxygenproducing chemicals.‎ BEIJING‎ – The election of a new leader in Taiwan can not change the fact that Taiwan is a part of Chinese territory. “Taiwan Independence” in whatever form will never be allowed, according to a statesman of China’s central government.‎ ‎“We should listen to what the new leader in Taiwan says and watch what he does. We will observe where he will lead cross-Straits relations. We are willing to exchange views on cross-Straits relations and peaceful reunification with all parties, organizations and persongages in Taiwan who favor（赞同）the one China principle.” says the statesman, which was released（发布）by the Taiwan Affairs Office of the CPC Central Committee.‎ HAIKOU – Customs officers in Haikou, capital of South China’s Hainan Province, recently stopped a boat loaded with 781 cases of foreign-brand cigarettes being smuggled（走私）into China. The cigarettes are estimated to be worth more than 1.8 million yuan, said a customs officer, they discovered the smuggling boat as they were going around the northern sea area of ‎Yangpu‎ ‎Port.‎ The smuggled cigarettes cases, packed into two containers, were disguised to avoid（回避）being examined. The boat was registered（登记）in the coastal city of Xiamen in East China’s Fujian Province. All eight suspects（疑犯）aboard the boat were kept by the police in Haikou.‎ ‎72．Why does the network aim to serve tourists especially from Europe and the USA?‎ A．Because they are from developed countries.‎ B．Because the payments of hotels and services should be made through credit cards.‎ C．Because people in these countries travel much more than other countries.‎ D．Because they have more computers than others.‎ ‎73．Which of the following statements is Not true according to the second piece of news?‎ A．The whole torch relay will be held three metres underwater.‎ B．The underwater journey of the torch will play an important part in Olympic history.‎ C．A test has been made before this activity.‎ D．Some chemicals will help the flame burn by the producing oxygen.‎ ‎74．Which is the best title for the third piece of news?‎ A．Ready to Fight. B．No Good End. C．Wait and See. D．Peace Comes First.‎ ‎75．Which of the following best explains the underlined word “disguised” in the last piece of news?‎ A．Made different from normal. B．Designed for a good purpose.‎ C．Hidden. D．Pretended.‎ ‎★专题（2）‎ ‎（A）‎ ‎ Tim was born after his elder brother and sister. He could learn many things from them. Soon, he developed his own way of doing things by developing his mind through his interest in creating stories. He would read more than most children and he gathered his inspiration from history books. In school, his athletic interests were basketball and track, especially high jump. When he found he could jump a little higher than most students, he decided that jumping over a high bar would be his specialty.‎ ‎ Tim continued his learning interest in history which included serious college study, and a Master’s degree. He is now a university professor at a small university in Los Angeles. In the United States there are many schools that have history departments. There are large universities with as many as 60 thousand students and small universities with as few as 2000 students. His degree from a large university with a strong history department has helped him get a good job.‎ ‎ Tim and Kelli like cats. They have two of them and they are special members of the family. Their grey and white cat is Toby. The coal black colored cat is called Buddha because he sits so quietly. Cats are popular ‎ with many people in America.‎ ‎56．Which of the following statements is true?‎ ‎ A．Tim is the second child in his family B．Tim has a younger sister. ‎ ‎ C．Tim is the third child in his family. D．Tim is the only child in his family.‎ ‎57．What was he good at when he was at school?‎ ‎ A．Basketball B．High jump C．Running D．Football ‎58．We can infer from the above passage that .‎ ‎ A．all the Americans like to keep cats ‎ ‎ B．the cat is called Buddha because he is always quiet ‎ ‎ C．the population of a small university is only one third of that of the largest one ‎ ‎ D．it is easier for a graduate from a large university with a famous department to do job hunting.‎ ‎（B）‎ ‎ What to do if a fire starts?‎ ‎ Imagine it’s late at night. You hear the smoke detectors go off. You smell smoke when you wake up. Do you know what to do?‎ ‎ If a fire starts in your home, remember your escape plan and leave as quickly as possible. Keep the following things in mind to make a safe escape.‎ ‎●Call“Fire!”to warn everyone in your family.‎ ‎●If you know where the fire is, close as many doors as possible between you and the fire.‎ ‎●If you’re in bed, roll out of bed and onto the floor. Crawl on the floor next to a wall. Being near the ground makes it easier to breathe. If possible, cover your mouth and nose with a wet cloth.‎ ‎●Feel the entire surface of a door before you open it. If the door is warm or hot, do not open it. The fire is probably right outside your room. Find another way to leave the room. If the door is cool, open it a little.‎ ‎●Look out and try to see the fire. If it is safe, leave the room. Remember to stay on the floor.‎ ‎●If your clothes catch fire, stop immediately. Drop to the ground and roll. Remember：Stop, drop and roll.‎ ‎●Call the fire department from outside and wait for help to arrive.‎ ‎59．What is the first thing you should do if a fire starts in your home?‎ ‎ A．Call the fire department B．Call“Fire”to warn your family members. ‎ ‎ C．Collect your favorite belongings to save from the burning house. ‎ ‎ D．Have a white sheet from a window to let the fire department know where to go.‎ ‎60．What should you do if a fire starts and you are in bed?‎ ‎ A．Jump out of bed and run away. B．Roll out of bed and stand on the floor. ‎ ‎ C．Stay in bed and then jump out of the window. D．Roll out of bed and onto the floor.‎ ‎61．What is not true according to the passage?‎ ‎ A．Never go back into a burning building. ‎ ‎ B．If your clothes catch fire, stop moving immediately. ‎ ‎ C．You should call the fire department before you leave the burning building. ‎ ‎ D．Cover your mouth and nose with a wet cloth if possible.‎ ‎（C）‎ ‎ Thirty-two people watched Kitty Genovese being killed right below their windows. She was their neighbor. Yet none of the 32 helped her. Not one even called the police, Was this in gunman cruelty? Was it lack of feeling about one’s fellowman?‎ ‎ “Not so, ”say scientists John Barley and Bib Fatane. These men went beyond the headlines to research into the reasons why people didn’t act. They found that a person has to go through two steps before he can help. First he has to notice that is an emergency（紧急情况）. Suppose you see a middle-aged man fall to the side-walk. Is he having a heart attack? Is he in a coma（昏迷）from a headache? Or is he about to sleep off a drunk?‎ ‎ Is the smoke coming into the room from a leak（漏洞）in the air conditioning? Is it“steam pipes”? Or is it really smoke from a fire? It’s not always easy to tell if you are faced with a real emergency. Second, and more important, the person faced with an emergency must feel personally responsible（负责任的）. He must feel that he must help, or the person won’t get the help he needs.‎ ‎ The researchers found that a lot depends on how many people are around. They had college students in to be“tested.” Some came alone. Some came with one or two others. And some came in large groups. The researchers started them off on the“tests.”Then they went into the next room. A curtain divided the“testing room”and the room into which they went. Soon the students heard a scream, the noise of book shelves falling and a cry for help. All of this had been prerecorded on a tape recorder.‎ ‎ Eight out of ten of the students taking the test alone acted to help. Of the students in pairs, only two out of ten helped. Of the students in groups, none helped.‎ ‎ In other words, in a group, Americans often fail to act. They feel that others will act. They, themselves, needn’t. They do not feel and direct responsibility.‎ ‎ Are people bothered by situations where people are in trouble? Yes. Scientists found that the people were shocked, they sweated, and they had trembling hands. They felt the other person’s trouble. But they did not act. They were in a group. Their actions were shaped by the actions of those they were with. ‎ ‎62．The purpose of this passage is .‎ A.to explain why people fail to act in emergencies ‎ B.to explain when people will act in emergencies ‎ C.to explain what people will do in emergencies ‎ D.to explain how people feel in emergencies ‎63．Which of the following is NOT true?‎ ‎ A．When a person tries to help others, he must be clear that there is a real emergency. ‎ ‎ B．When a person tries to help others, he should know whether they are worth his help. ‎ ‎ C．A person must take the full responsibility for the safety of those in emergencies if wants to help.‎ ‎ D．A person with a heart attack needs the most.‎ ‎64．The main reason why people fail to act when they stay together is that .‎ ‎ A．they are afraid of emergencies B．they are not willing to get themselves involved ‎ ‎ C．others will act if they themselves hesitate D．they do not have any direct responsibility for those who need help.‎ ‎65．The author suggests that .‎ ‎ A．we shouldn’t blame a person if he fails to act in emergencies ‎ ‎ B．a person must feel guilty if he fails to help ‎ ‎ C．people should be responsible for themselves in emergencies ‎ ‎ D．when you are in trouble, people will help you anyway ‎（D）‎ ‎ Animation means making things which are lifeless come alive and move.‎ ‎ Since earliest times, people have always been astonished by movement. But not until this century have we managed to take control of movement, to record it, and in the case of animation, to retranslate it and recreate it. To do all this, we use a movie camera and a projector（放映机）.‎ ‎ In the world of cartoon animation, nothing is impossible. You can make the characters do exactly what you want them to do.‎ ‎ A famous early cartoon character was Felix the Cat, created by Pat Sullivan in America in the early nineteen twenties. Felix was a wonderful cat. He could do all sorts of things no natural cat could do like taking off his tail, using it as a handle and then putting it back.‎ ‎ Most of the great early animators lived and worked in America, the home of the moving picture industry. The famous Walt Disney cartoon characters came to life after 1928. Popeye the Sailor and his girl friend Olive Oyo were born at Max Ficischer in 1933.‎ ‎ But to be an animator, you don’t have to be a professional（专业人士）. It is possible for anyone to make a simple animated film without using a camera at all. All you have to do is to draw directly on to an empty film and then run the film through a projector. ‎ ‎66．What does the passage mainly discuss?‎ ‎ A．Animal world. B．Movie camera. C．Cartoon making. D．Movement.‎ ‎67．Which of the following statements is TRUE?‎ ‎ A．People were unable to cause the movement to last or record it in the last century. ‎ ‎ B．Pat Sullivan was a famous early cartoon character. ‎ ‎ C．It is impossible to make cartoon characters do what they are designed to do. ‎ ‎ D．In ancient times people were surprised by movement.‎ ‎68．According to the passage, Felix the Cat .‎ ‎ A．was created by the American cartoonist Felix ‎ ‎ B．was designed by Pat Sullivan in the early twentieth century ‎ ‎ C．was unable to do what natural cats could not do ‎ ‎ D．was created in the United States in the nineteenth century ‎69．It can be inferred from the passage that .‎ ‎ A．Walt Disney’s cartoon characters were born earlier that Pat Sullivan’s ‎ ‎ B．only professionals can create cartoon characters ‎ ‎ C．Popeye the Sailor and Olive Oyo were famous cartoonists ‎ D．the cartoon industry started in the ‎United States ‎70．Which of the following statements best describes the author’s attitude towards cartoon making?‎ ‎ A．Cartoon making is an easy job. Anyone can do it. ‎ ‎ B．Only trained people can be employed in cartoon making industry. ‎ ‎ C．Anyone can make cartoons under the instructions of professionals. ‎ ‎ D．Cartoon making is no easy job. You have to spend much time drawing onto the empty film.‎ ‎（E）‎ ‎ One of the strongest arguments for the raising of the school leaving age（ROSLA）has been that it will bring us some way nearer to“equality of opportunity”.‎ ‎ Many people like to think of our present system of schooling as providing plenty of steps up the ladder of success for clever children. It would be good to think that no one who is really bright can be missed out when the state system is obviously so complete. It is obvious, for instance, that many children from less wealthy homes reach university or do well in other ways.‎ ‎ Unfortunately we now have plenty of proofs that many children of every level of ability do much less well than they could. For instance, during the years of national military service it was possible to test the intelligence（智力）of all male 18 – to – 20 – year – olds. Half of those soldiers who were placed in the two highest ability groups had left school at 15.‎ ‎ It has also been shown that the percentage of working class children going to university is almost the same now as it was in 1939. One study of 5,000 children from birth to 21 years old shows that up to half the bright pupils from working class homes left school when they reached 16 years old. Moreover, there is no difference in intelligence between the sexes, but far more boys than girls stay in education after 16.‎ ‎ It is clear from this and many other proofs that many children are still leaving school too early to benefit from the prizes—money, social respectability, and interesting jobs—which higher education gives. It is clear too that the reasons why such children leave have much to do with their social background. Their parents often need the extra money another money-earner would bring in; they don’t value education for itself because their own was probably dull and unhappy. It is not so much that they force their sons and daughters to leave school, rather that they tend to say, “it’s up to you”.‎ ‎71．It is hoped that ROSLA will give all children .‎ ‎ A．a more enjoyable time at school B．the same chances in society ‎ ‎ C．the right to a better school D．higher scores in intelligence tests ‎72．People would like to think that .‎ ‎ A．equal numbers of poor and wealthy children reach university ‎ ‎ B．those with the least money get the best education ‎ ‎ C．intelligent children are always selected by the system ‎ ‎ D．only really clever children do well ‎73．Working class children are thought to be at a disadvantage because .‎ ‎ A．many of the clever ones leave school early B．fewer go to university than ever before ‎ C.more than half leave school when they are 16 ‎ ‎ D．fewer boys than girls stay at school after 16‎ ‎74．Many children leave school early because .‎ ‎ A．their social background makes them unhappy ‎ ‎ B．they have to give something to their family’s income ‎ ‎ C．their school is a dull and unhappy place ‎ ‎ D．their parents don’t allow them to make their own decisions ‎75．This article shows that equal opportunity in education .‎ ‎ A．is a thing of the past B．has not yet been achieved ‎ ‎ C．is there for those who deserve（值得拥有）it D．has greatly improved our society ‎★专题（3）‎ A ‎ Haikou: A shark was killed after being dragged to shore at Yalong Berth beach in Sanya, South China’s Hainan‎ ‎Province, on Sunday afternoon.‎ ‎ It was the first time a shark had been caught in the beach area, a popular tourist site in Hainan.‎ ‎ Local fishermen said they caught the 3-meter-long, l-ton shark by chance When they were fishing in sea ‎ water 1,000 metres deep near the beach.‎ ‎ Police temporarily（暂时）protected the shark while oceanographers decided whether it was a species belonging to State protection.‎ ‎ Fishermen later killed and sold the shark after oceanographers confirmed that it was a whale shark and therefore not under State protection.‎ ‎ The shark was believed to have drifted into the area from the deep sea due to strong waves caused last week by Typhoon Imbudo. It had no open injuries but experts said they believed it suffered from internal（内部的）bleeding.‎ ‎ Local police officer Fu Chenggeng said beachgoers should not feel threatened by sharks because the fish never attack human beings on their own initiative. Fu said he had never heard of any shark attacks at the Sanya beach since he first started work there eight years ago.‎ ‎ However, police said they will improve the security system to safeguard tourists’ safety on the beach. ‎ ‎56．A possible title of the article should be .‎ ‎ A．Tourists in Danger B．Killing Whale Shark ‎ C．Shark Caught in Beach Area D．Whale Shark in Danger ‎57．From the article it can be learned .‎ ‎ A．the shark was caught because of obvious injuries B．the number of the whale shark may be small ‎ C．typhoon Imbudo may have brought the shark to the area ‎ D．it’s not unusual to see a shark on the beach ‎58．The underlined word“confirmed”probably means .‎ ‎ A．said B．believed C．thought D．made sure B ‎ There are some very good things about open education. This way of teaching allows the students to grow as people, and to develop their own interests in many subjects. Open education allows students to be responsible for their own education, as they are responsible for what they do in life. Some students do badly in a traditional classroom. The open classroom may allow them to enjoy learning. Some students will be happier in an open education school. They will not have to worry about grades or rules. For students who worry about these things a lot, it is a good idea to be in an open classroom.‎ ‎ But many students will not do well in an open classroom. For some students, there are too few rules. These students will do little in school. They will not make good use of open education. Because open education is so different from traditional education, these students may have a problem getting used to making so many choices. For many students it is important to have some rules in the classroom. They worry about the rules even when there are no rules. Even a few rules will help this kind of students. The last point about open education is that some traditional teachers do not like it. Many teachers do not believe in open education. Teachers who want to have an open classroom may have many problems at their schools.‎ ‎ You now know what open education is. Some of its good points and bad points have been explained. You may have your own opinion about open education. The writer thinks that open education is a good idea, but only in theory. In actual fact, it may not work very well in a real class or school. The writer believes that most students, but of course not all students, want some structure in their classes. They want and need to have rules. In some cases, they must be made to study some subjects. Many students are pleased to find subjects they have to study interesting. They would not study those subjects if they did not have to.‎ ‎59．Open education allows the students to .‎ ‎ A．grow as the educated B．be responsible for their future ‎ C．develop their own interests D．discover subjects outside class ‎60．Open education may be a good idea for the students who .‎ ‎ A．enjoy learning B．worry about grades ‎ C．do well in a traditional classroom D．are responsible for what they do in life.‎ ‎61．Some students will do little in an open classroom because .‎ ‎ A．there are too few rules B．they hate activities ‎ C．open education is similar to the traditional education D．they worry about the rules ‎62．Which of the following is NOT mentioned in the passage?‎ ‎ A．Some traditional teachers do not like it. B．Many teachers do not believe in open education.‎ ‎ C．Teachers may have problems in open classrooms.‎ ‎ D．The teacher’s feelings and attitudes are important to the students.‎ ‎63．Which of the following best summarizes the passage?‎ ‎ A．Open education is a really complex idea.‎ ‎ B．Open education is better than traditional education.‎ ‎ C．Teachers dislike open education.‎ ‎ D．The writer thinks that open education is a good idea in practice.‎ C Pocket Tape-Recorders“Family and Home Magazine”test what’s on the market now.‎ ‎ 1）Pearlcorder S702 $64‎ This simple model at the bottom of the Olympus range scored the most points for its excellent quality of recording. Background noise hardly affects the sound and recording from a pocket is perfectly possible, but it doesn’t turn off automatically.‎ Tape length: 30 minutes per side. Weight:‎240g.‎ ‎2）Sony M9 $49.95‎ ‎ Small and very good looking, sony’s latest offering scored most for appearance. Sounds clear, but there is slight machine noise. The big control buttons are a great improvement on some of the complicated little controls on other tape-recorders. Doesn’t switch off automatically but a red light shows if the machine is still running.‎ ‎ Tape length: 60 minutes per side. Weight: ‎195g.‎ ‎3）Sony M400 $115‎ ‎ Lots of little control buttons that make a noise and are difficult to use . Recording was good but machine noise lost points. Tape counter and automatic switch-off when tape has finished recording or rewinding are useful Tape length: 60 minutes per side. Weight: ‎230g.‎ ‎ 4）Imperial OEM. MC $29.95‎ ‎ Cheap and simple compared with the rest, but recording was good as long as there was no background noise. Use only its own make of cassette. No light to show it is on; no fast forward button and the record button makes a loud noise.‎ ‎ Tape length: 30 minutes per side. Weight: ‎285g.‎ ‎5）Philips 585 $80‎ ‎ Handsome and simple to use, but recording is very poor at more than the recommended distance of ‎5 cm-designed for dictation. No recording light. Tape length: 15 minutes per side. Weight: ‎220g.‎ ‎64．The machine that produces the best recording with the least unwanted noise is the .‎ ‎ A．Pearlcorder S702 B．Sony M‎9 C．Sony M400 D．Imperial OEM MC7‎ ‎65．It you want a machine which turns off automatically and weighs very little you should choose the .‎ ‎ A．Pearlcorder S702 B．Sony M‎9 C．Sony M400 D．Philips 585‎ ‎66．Which machine is unsuitable for general use?‎ ‎ A．Pearlcorder S702 B．Imperial OEM MC7‎ ‎ C．Sony M400 D．Philips 585‎ ‎67．What disadvantage does only the Imperial OEM MC7 have?‎ ‎ A．No light shows when it is on B．It requires a special cassette.‎ ‎ C．It picks up background noise. D．The record button makes a noise.‎ D ‎ Having reached the highest point of our route according to plan, we discovered something the map had not told us. It was impossible to climb down into the Kingo valley. The river lay deep between mountain sides that were almost vertical（垂直）.We couldn’t find any animal tracks, which usually show the best way across country, and the slopes were covered so thickly with bushes that we could not see the nature of the ground. We had somehow to break through to the river which would give us our direction out of the mountains into the inhabited lowlands.‎ ‎ Our guide cut a narrow path through the bushes with his long knife and we followed in single file. Progress was slow. Then, when we thought we had really reached the river, we found ourselves instead on the edge of a cliff with a straight drop of 1,000 feet to the water below. We climbed back up the slope and began to look for another way down. We climbed slipped, sweated and scratched our hands to pieces and finally arrived at the river. Happily we came downhill along its bank without having to cut our way. However, after a few miles the river entered a steep-sided gap between rocks and suddenly dropped thirty-five feet over a waterfall. There was no path alongside it and no way round it.‎ ‎ Then one of the guides saw a way of overcoming the difficulty. There was a fallen tree lying upside down over the waterfall with its leafy top resting on the opposite bank below the falls. Without hesitation he climbed down the slippery trunk to show us how easy it was. Having got to the fork of the tree, he moved hand over hand along a branch for four or five feet with his legs hanging in space, then he dropped onto the ‎ flat bank the other side, throwing his arms in the air like a footballer who has scored goal, and cheerfully waving us on.‎ ‎68．Having reached the highest point on their route, the travelers expected to be able to .‎ ‎ A．track animals to the river B．put away the maps they had been using ‎ ‎ C．come near to the river from a different direction ‎ D．get down to the river without much difficulty.‎ ‎69．The travelers wanted to get to the river because .‎ ‎ A．it would lead them to the waterfall B．it would show them which way to go ‎ C．it was the only possible way out of the mountains ‎ D．it was a quicker way than going over the mountains ‎70．One reason why the travelers took so long to get to the river was that .‎ ‎ A．it was too hot to move quickly B．there was no proper path ‎ C．they all tried to go different ways D．they could not follow the animal tracks ‎71．To get past the waterfall the guide had to .‎ ‎ A．use a fallen tree as a kind of bridge B．cross the river above the waterfall ‎ C．slide down a steep river bank D．swing across the river from a high branch E ‎ Anxiety is the appropriate（适当的）emotion when the immediate personal terror—of a volcano, an arrow, a stab（刺伤）in the back and other disasters, all directed against one’s self-disappears.‎ ‎ The kind of world that produces anxiety is actually a world of relative safety, a world in which no one feels that he himself is facing sudden death. The anxiety exists as an uneasy state of mind, in which one has a feeling that something unspecified（不具体的）and indeterminable may go wrong. If the world seems to be going well, this produces anxiety—for good times may end. If the world is going badly—it may get worse. Anxiety tends to be without focus; the anxious person doesn’ t know whether to blame himself or other people. He isn’t sure whether it is the current year of the administration or a change in climate or the atom bomb that is to blame for this undefined sense of unease.‎ ‎ It is clear that we have developed a society which depends on having the right amount of anxiety to make it work…While we agree that too much anxiety is harmful to mental health, we have come to rely on anxiety to push us into seeing a doctor about a symptom（症状）which may indicate cancer, into checking up on that old life-insurance policy which may have out-of-date provisions in it, into having a conference with Billy’s teacher even though his report card looks all right.‎ ‎ People who are anxious enough keep their car insurance up, have the brakes checked, don’t take a second drink when they have to drive. People who are too anxious either refuse to go into cars at all—and so complicate the ordinary course of life—or drive so tensely and carefully that they help cause accidents. People who aren’t anxious enough take chance after chance, which increases the terrible accidents of the roads.‎ ‎72．According to the author, anxiety is the emotion when .‎ ‎ A．one is filled with a sudden sense of uneasiness B．one sees no immediate danger ‎ C．one has a vague sense about his life D．one feels that the world may go badly ‎73．The author holds that .‎ ‎ A．anxiety is a good thing B．anxiety is a symptom of mental illness ‎ C．some anxiety can lead to changes for the better D．no anxiety is bad for society ‎74．According to the author, accidents of the road tend to be caused by .‎ ‎ A．all those who are too anxious B．all those who have anxiety ‎ C．those who have no anxiety D．those who are not anxious enough ‎75．The best title for the passage would be .‎ ‎ A．One Man’s Thought about Anxiety B．The Right Amount of Anxiety ‎ C．Anxiety versus Safety D．Different Attitudes to Anxiety ‎★专题（4）‎ A ‎ The total area of land on earth is about 149 million square kilometers, or about 39 percent of the total area of the earth.‎ ‎ The average height of the land is about 750 metres above the sea level .The Eurasian（欧亚的）land mass is the largest with an area of 54,527,600 square kilometers .The smallest continent is the Australian mainland, with an area of about 7,614,600 square kilometers, which together with Tasmania, New Zealand, New Guinea and the Pacific Islands, is described as Oceania .The total area of Oceania is about 8,935,500‎ ‎ square kilometres, including West Iran which is political in Asia .‎ ‎ The world’s largest peninsula（半岛）is Arabia ,with an area of about 3,327,500 square kilometres .‎ ‎ The largest island in the world is Greenland, with an area of about 2,175,600 square kilometres. The largest island surrounded by fresh water is the Ilha de Marajo (4,022 square kilometres) in the mouth of the Amazon River, Brazil .The largest island in a lake is Manitoulin Island (2,766 square kilometres) in the Canadian section of Lake Huron . This island itself has on it a lake of 106 square kilometres called Manitou lake, in which there are several islands.‎ ‎56．The area of Tasmania, of New Zealand, of New Guinea and of the Pacific Islands add up to ‎ ‎ about square kilometres .‎ ‎ A.8,935,500 B‎.1,320,900 ‎C.7,614,600 D.16,550,100‎ ‎57．Oceania is made up of .(Suppose I: Australia ;II: Tasmania and New Zealand ; III: ‎ New Guinea‎ and the Pacific Is –lands )‎ ‎ A.I and II B.II and III C.I and III D.I,II and III ‎58．Which of the following diagrams （图解）shows the correct relationship between Manitoulin ‎ ‎ Island(MI), Lake Huron (LH), Manitou Lake (ML) and the “several islands” (SI) mentioned at the end of the passage ?‎ ‎59．The largest island surrounded by fresh water is in .‎ ‎ A.a river B.a lake C.a sea D.an ocean ‎ B ‎ Tea drinking was common in China for nearly one thousand years before anyone in Europe had ever heard about tea . People in Britain were much slower in finding out what tea was like , mainly because tea was very expensive . It could not be bought in shops and even those people who could afford to have it sent from Holland did so only because it was a fashionable curiosity . Some of them were not sure how to use it . They thought it was a vegetable and tried cooking the leaves . Then they served them mixed with butter and salt . They soon discovered their mistake but many people used to spread the used tea leaves on bread and give them to their children as sandwiches .‎ Tea remained scarce and very expensive in England until the ships of the East India Company began to bring it direct from China early in the seventeenth century . During the next few years so much tea came into the country that the price fell and many people could afford to buy it .‎ At the same time people on the Continent were becoming more and more fond of tea . Until then tea had been drunk without milk in it , but one day a famous French lady named Madame de Sevigne decided to see what tea tasted like when milk was added . She found it so pleasant that she would never again drink it without milk . Because she was such a great lady that her friends thought they must copy everything she did ,they also drank their tea with milk in it . Slowly this habit spread until it reached England and today only very few Britons drink tea without milk .‎ At first , tea was usually drunk after dinner in the evening . No one ever thought of drinking tea in the afternoon until a duchess （公爵夫人）found that a cup of tea and a piece of cake at three or four o’clock stopped her getting “a sinking feeling” as she called it . She invited her friends to have this new meal with her and so , tea-time was born .‎ ‎60．This passage mainly discusses .‎ ‎ A. the history of tea drinking in Britain B. how tea became a popular drink in Britain ‎ ‎ C. how the Britons got the habit of drinking tea D. how tea-time was born ‎ ‎61．Tea became a popular drink in Britain .‎ ‎ A. in the eighteenth century B. in the sixteenth century ‎ ‎ C. in the seventeenth century D. in the late seventeenth century ‎62．People in Europe began to drink tea with milk because .‎ ‎ A. it tasted like milk B. it tasted more pleasant C. it became a popular drink ‎ ‎ D. Madame de Sevinge was such a lady with great social influence that people tried to copy ‎ ‎ the way she drank tea ‎ ‎63．We may infer from the passage that the habit of drinking tea in Britain was mostly due to the ‎ ‎ influence of .‎ ‎ A. a famous French lady B. the ancient Chinese ‎ ‎ C. the upper(上层的) social class D. people in Holland ‎ C ‎ Six chimps(猩猩) were introduced to a slot machine called the Chimp- O- Mat, which would give out one grape when a white coin was insert into the slot. When Dr Wolf showed a young chimp named Moos how he could win himself a grape by inserting a coin, Moos immediately picked up another coin, pushed it into the slot, then stuck out his paw and waited for a grape to drop out..‎ Besides white coins, the chimps were given yellow coins to insert into the slot, but nothing came out because they were worthless. The chimps soon learned this fact. When a handful of white and yellow coins were thrown into the cage housing, Bula, Bimba and Alpha, the three chimps rushed for the white coins and never touched the yellow ones.‎ Now the chimps were madly in love with money. Would the six chimps value money enough to work for it? To find the answer, Dr Wolfe designed a work machine. The chimps were shown that when a large handle was lifted, they could pick one grape. When they had learned the skill of lifting the handle to get the grape, Dr Wolf made a change to the machines so that instead of the grape they would find a white coin. This coin would still buy them one grape at the Chimp- O- Mat.‎ Thus the complexity of getting a grape was not only doubled, but also the money to buy the grape could be achieved only by honest work. The handle they had to lift to get the coin weighed eighty pounds. Great effort is needed for a young chimp to raise that weight, yet the formerly lazy chimps not only quickly mastered the new operation, but also showed great eagerness to work for money.‎ ‎64．The purpose of the Chimp- O- Mat experiment was to discover whether chimps would learn to________. ‎ A. enjoy themselves B. work together C. use coins D. operate a machine ‎65．In the first part of the experiment the chimps learned to __________.‎ A. tell the difference between the useful and the worthless coins ‎ B. use yellow coins to get grapes C. wait for the grapes to drop out D.buy grapes with coins ‎66．Which of the following shows the correct order of the things a chimp did in the second part of the experiment? ‎ a. got a white coin b. got a grape c. lifted the heavy handle d. inserted a coin into the Chimp- O- Mat A. c a b d B. c a d b C. a b d c D. a d c b ‎67．The passage showed that _________.‎ ‎ A. Dr Wolfe was disappointed with his experiment ‎ B. The chimps could do everything if taught ‎ C. The chimps were willing to work if something was paid back ‎ D. The chimp’s understanding was as good as a man’s ‎ ‎ D Career education is instruction intended to help young people identify, choose, and prepare for a career. Such instruction may focus on a person’s role in work, leisure, or family life. Career education differs from vocational education, which is designed to teach specific occupational skills.‎ Career education includes the formal and informal learning that occurs in the family, in the community, and in schools. In schools, career education consists of instructive activities included in many courses. These activities are designed to improve the attitudes, knowledge, and skills important for work roles. Career education helps students develop self- understanding and use it to plan their education and working life.‎ A complete career education program in school begins in kindergarten and continues at least through high school. Many colleges and universities also offer career education through their counseling(咨询) programs. In kindergartens and elementary schools, youngsters learn about different types of work. In middle schools or junior high school, children begin to explore the occupations and leisure activities that interest ‎ them most. In high school, students get more specific information about occupations and life styles. They may be in classroom, small group, or individual sessions where they learn how to make career decisions. They also should obtain the skills they need for further study or for a job after graduation. Counselors provide information on such matters as how to locate and apply for jobs and how to be successful in interviews. Teachers and counselors use a variety of methods to provide career education, including films about occupations or industries. Children may invite parents or other adults to come to school and describe their jobs. A student may accompany a worker on the job. Cooperative education combines classroom study with practical work experience.‎ ‎68．According to the passage, which statement is true?‎ ‎ A. Career education is carried out in primary schools only.‎ ‎ B. Career education is carried out in middle schools only.‎ ‎ C. Career education is carried out in colleges only.‎ ‎ D. Career education is carried out in the whole process of people’s education – from kindergarten to university.‎ ‎69．It may be inferred from the passage that _________. ‎ ‎ A. not only teachers but also parents are responsible for youngsters’ career education ‎ B. in high schools, students know more specific information about occupations ‎ C. career education may be in classroom, small group, or individual sessions ‎ D. teachers use a variety of methods to provide career education, including films ‎70．A child may get career education in all the following places EXCEPT _________.‎ ‎ A. schools B. homes C. communities D. public places ‎71．The underlined word “combine” in the last paragraph means “to ________”.‎ ‎ A. connect B. force C. provide D. attempt ‎ ‎ E One hundred and thirteen million Americans have at least one bank-issued credit card. They give their owners automatic credit in stores, restaurants, and hotels, at home, across the country, and even abroad, and they make many banking services available as well. More and more of these credit cards can be read automatically, making it possible to withdraw or deposit money in scattered locations, whether or not the local branch bank is open. For many of us the “cashless society” is not on the horizon----it’s already here.‎ While computers offer these conveniences to consumers, they have many advantages for sellers too. Electronic cash registers can do much more than simply ring up sales. They can keep a wide range of records, including who sold what, when, and to whom. This information allows businessmen to keep track of their list of goods by showing which items are being sold and how fast they are moving. Decisions to reorder or return goods to suppliers can then be made. At the same time these computers record which hours are busiest and which employees are the most efficient, allowing personnel and staffing assignments to be made accordingly. And they also identify preferred customer for promotional campaigns. Computers are relied on by manufacturers for similar reasons. Computer analyzed marketing reports can help to decide which products to emphasize now, which to develop for the future and which to drop. Computers keep track of goods in stock, of raw materials on hand, and even of the production process itself.‎ Numerous other commercial enterprises, from theaters to magazine publishers, from gas and electric utilities to milk processors, bring better and more efficient services to consumers through the use of computers.‎ ‎72．According to the passage, the credit card enables its owner to .‎ ‎ A. withdraw as much money from the bank as he wishes ‎ B. obtain more convenient services than other people do ‎ C. enjoy greater trust from the storekeeper ‎ D. cash money where he wishes to ‎73．From the last sentence of the first paragraph we learn that .‎ ‎ A. in the future all the Americans will use credit cards ‎ B. credit cards are mainly used in the United States today ‎ C. nowadays many Americans do not pay in cash ‎ D. it is now more convenient to use credit cards than before ‎74．The phrase “ring up sales” most probably means .‎ ‎ A. make an order of goods B. record sales on a cash register ‎ C. call the sales manager D. keep track of the goods in stock ‎75．It can be inferred that .‎ ‎ A. computers will bring disaster B. computer industry will not develop faster ‎ C. computers will bring about more convenience to people’s life D. None ‎★专题（5）‎ A ‎ Friend is better than fortune. Friend is worse than poison in some cases. The two sentences above are opposite and seem to be unreasonable but they can be explained as follows: the first refers to all good friends who drive us towards good while the second all bad ones who lead us to wrong ways.‎ ‎ My ideal(理想的) friend is of course a good friend whose goodness is shown below-he has no bad likings, such as smoking and drinking. He lives in frugality(节俭). He studies hard so as not to waste his golden time. At home he honors his parents and loves his brothers; at school he respects his teachers and shares feelings of his classmates. He treats those truly who are true to him. In a word, he has all the good characters better than mine. I can follow him as a model. With his help I am free from all difficulties,‎ ‎ Indeed, if I have such a person as my friend, I shall never fear difficulty and I shall never know the existence of the word "failure".‎ ‎56. This passage tells us __‎ ‎ A. how to make friends with others B. how the writer' s friend helps him ‎ C. what kind of person the writer's friend is D what kind of person we should make friends with ‎57. An ideal friend means A. a true friend B. a false friend C. an imaginary friend D. an excellent friend ‎58. From the passage we can learn that ‎ A. the writer and his ideal friend have a lot to learn from each other ‎ B. the writer has a lot to learn from his ideal friend ‎ C. the writer's ideal friend has a lot to learn from him ‎ D. the writer has only a little to learn from his ideal friend ‎ 59. From the second paragraph, we can infer the writer is sure that ‎ A. nothing cannot be done with friend B. only the first sentence is reasonable ‎ C. he who does not smoke or drink must be a good friend ‎ D. good friends should always help each other B ‎ Life gets noisier every day and very few people can be free from noise of some sort or another. It doesn't matter where you live--in the middle of a modern city, or a faraway village--the chances are that you' 11 be disturbed by jet planes, transistor radios, oil - powered engines, etc. We seem to be getting used to noise, too. Some people feel quite lonely without background music while they' re working.‎ ‎ Scientific tests have shown that total silence can be a very frightening experience for a human being. However, some people enjoy listening to pop music which is very loud, and this can do harm to their eardrums(耳鼓). The noise level in some discos is far above the usual safety level for heavy industrial areas.‎ ‎ One recent report about noise and concentration(专心) suggested that although a lot of people say that any noise disturbs their concentration, what really influences their ability to concentrate is a change in the level of noise. It goes on to say that a background noise which doesn't change too much(music, for example) may even help people to concentrate.‎ ‎60. According to this passage, the noise pollution __‎ ‎ A. has become the worst in the countryside B. has become better in big cities ‎ C. has spread from cities to villages D. has been controlled in modern cities ‎61. What does background music refer to?‎ ‎ A. Music played while people are working. B. Music played in the backyard.‎ ‎ C. Noise that continues while you' re listening to other noises.‎ ‎ D. Music used to help people to concentrate.‎ ‎62. Some people have their hearing harmed __‎ ‎ A. while listening to pop music B. in complete silence ‎ C. when speaking loudly D. while watching TV ‎63. Which of the following isn't included among the things causing noise?‎ ‎ A. trucks B. motorcycles C. electric engines D. jet planes ‎64. Scientists have discovered that what prevents people from concentrating on something is ‎ A. all kinds of noise B. great changes in the level of noise ‎ C. background noise D. popular music C Sheffield Lincoln‎ ‎College‎ of English ‎ Classes for foreign students at all levels.‎ ‎ 3 months, 6 months, 9 months and one year course.‎ ‎ Open all year.‎ ‎ Small class (maximum 12 students).‎ ‎ Library, language laboratory and listening center.‎ ‎ Accommodation(住宿) with selected families.‎ ‎ 25 minutes from London.‎ ‎ Course fees for English for one year are ￡ 1,380 with reduction (减少 )for shorter periods of study.‎ ‎65. This passage is probably taken from __‎ ‎ A. an advertisement B. a notice C. a poster D. a piece of news ‎66. Who are admitted in?‎ ‎ A. Both foreign and native students. B. Only foreign beginners and the advanced.‎ ‎ C. Foreign students from beginners to the advanced. D. Only( foreign students advanced.‎ ‎67. While you stay there, who will take care of you?‎ ‎ A. The school where you study. B. Your classmates.‎ ‎ C. The family you have chosen. D. Your parents.‎ ‎ D ‎ Have you ever been in a meeting while someone was making a speech and realized suddenly that your mind was a million miles away? You probably felt sorry and made up your mind to pay attention and always have been told that daydreaming is a waste of time.‎ ‎ "On the contrary, "says L. Giambra, an expert in psychology, "daydreaming is quite necessary. Without it, the mind couldn't get done all the thinking it has to do during a normal day. You can' t possibly do all your thinking with a conscious(有意识)mind. Instead, your unconscious mind is working out problems all the time. Daydreaming then may be one way that the unconscious and conscious states of mind have silent dialogues."‎ ‎ Early experts in psychology paid no attention to the importance of daydreams or even considered them harmful. At one time daydreaming was thought to be a cause of some mental illnesses. They did not have a better understanding of daydreams until the late 1980s. Eric Klinger, a professor of psychology, is the writer of the book Daydreaming. Klinger says, "We know now that daydreaming is one of the main ways that we organize our lives, learn from our experiences, and plan for our futures. Day- dreams really are a window on the things we fear and the things we long for in life."‎ ‎ Daydreams are usually very simple and direct, quite unlike sleep dreams, which may be hard to understand. It's easier to gain a deep understanding of your life by paying close attention to your day- dreams than by trying to examine your sleep dreams carefully. Daydreams help you recognize the difficult situations in your life and find out a possible way of dealing with them.‎ ‎ Daydreams cannot be predicated (预料). They move off in unexpected directions which may be creative( 创造性的 ) and full of ideas. For many famous artists and scientists, daydreams were and are a main source of creative energy.‎ ‎68. The writer of this passage considers daydreams ‎ A. hard to understand B. important and helpful ‎ C. harmful and unimportant D. the same as sleep dreams ‎69. The writer quoted( 引用 )L. Giambra and Eric Klinger to __________.‎ ‎ A. point out the wrong ideas of early experts B. list two different ideas ‎ C. support his own idea D. report the latest research on daydreams ‎70. Which of the following is TRUE?‎ ‎ A. An unconscious mind can work all the problems out.‎ ‎ B. Daydreaming can give artists and scientists ideas for creation.‎ ‎ C. Professor Eric Klinger has a better idea than L. Giambra.‎ ‎ D. Early experts didn't understand what daydreams were.‎ ‎71. What is the main difference between daydreams and sleep dreams?‎ ‎ A. People have daydreams and sleep dreams at different times.‎ ‎ B. Daydreams are the result of unconscious mind while sleep dreams are that of conscious mind.‎ ‎ C. Daydreams are more harmful. D. Daydreams are more helpful in solving problems.‎ ‎ E ‎ When nature is left alone, a balance is reached among the animals and plants living in one area. But when man starts his work in nature, the balance is likely to be destroyed. He grows a crop and takes it away to eat ;then there are no dead leaves to fall on the ground, holding water while it sinks into the surface, or decaying(腐烂) and adding humus(腐殖质) to the soil. Unless a farmer acts with knowl- edge and skill, he is therefore most likely to make the land poorer. To take the place of the useful matter in the crops that he removes, he uses some kind of fertilizer(肥料). Chemical fertilizers are of great help, but the waste products of animals and decaying remains of plants should also be put on the land. In some places, it is a habit to burn waste material lying about, but such burning destroys the useful matter in the dead plants. Although the ashes that are left are valuable when put on the land, a better practice is to bury the waste so that it decays and increases the humus in the soil.‎ ‎ In the past, when the world population was much lower than it is now, a man had little difficulty in ordinary times in growing the food that was needed. When a field had been used some years and had become tired, the farmer could move to another place. The tired land then slowly recovered. Gradually grasses and other plants would appear on it and its productive power would slowly return to normal through their decay. But nature, left alone, would take a long time to bring back the land to its former state; the length of time required would depend on local conditions, but it might well be ten years.‎ ‎ It is a bad practice to grow the same crop in a field year after year. If the crop is changed, the land will suffer less because it is treated and used in a different way. Different plants have different effects on the soil. Therefore, a change of crop will do less harm than the growing of the same crop year after year and a regular change to grass will do good to the soil. Much will therefore be gained if different crops are grown one after another, a method known as the rotation(轮作) of crops.‎ ‎72. According to the passage, the land will become poorer ‎ A. if all the dead leaves are cleared away B. if the humus is increased after the harvest ‎ C. if dead leaves decay in the soil by themselves D. if waste plant material lying about is buried ‎ ‎73. We can learn from the passage that the tired land has gradually recovered ‎ A. when grasses and other plants appear again ‎ B. when the treatment is given by nature alone ‎ C. after new grasses and other plants have decayed again D. after nature has been left alone for several months ‎ ‎74. A modern farmer can hardly move to another place as he did before because ‎ A. the productive power of a new field isn't higher than that of an old one ‎ B. there are few free fields left for him to do farming ‎ C. it takes a farmer more than ten years to start farming in a new field D. there will be too many grasses in a new field to grow crops ‎ ‎75. It is most likely that the author will go on to ______ in the paragraph following the passage above.‎ ‎ A. introduce other methods of planting crops B. deal with how to prevent land getting tired ‎ C. start another topic of how to make use of land D. further explain what the rotation of crops is ‎★专题（6）‎ A Wanted Project management Assistant ‎ Responsibility:‎ ‎ —Provide service for the project in Chongqing.‎ ‎ —Provide assistance to the project manager for everyday work.‎ ‎ —Responsible for file management, customer service for students and parents.‎ Requirements:‎ ‎—College degree and above.‎ ‎—Good English and computer skills.‎ ‎—Related working experience in the international organization.‎ ‎—Patient, careful, supportive. Has strong teamwork spirit.‎ English Teacher ‎ Responsibility:‎ ‎ —Conduct English teaching according to British education system.‎ ‎ Requirements:‎ ‎ —University degree and above in English major or normal English.‎ ‎ —Eager to learn and open-minded with creativity.‎ ‎ —With deep understanding and respect for different cultures. （Warmly welcome the fresh graduates to apply for this position.）‎ Marketing Assistant ‎ Responsibility:‎ ‎ —Responsible for the local management of marketing and sales activities according to the instruction from the head office.‎ ‎—Collect related information to the head office .‎ ‎—Develop relationship with local media and customers .‎ Requirements :‎ ‎—College degree and above with good English (speaking and writing).‎ ‎—With basic idea of sales and marketing, related experience is preferred.‎ ‎—Working experience in the international organization is a must .‎ ‎—Good communication and presentation skills .‎ Accountant Responsibility:‎ ‎—Accountant （会计）work for Chongqing office and project .‎ ‎—Perform the finance （金融）management locally according to the rules and policy of the company.‎ Requirements:‎ ‎—College degree and above in finance area .‎ ‎—Good English and computer skills .‎ ‎—Good sense of finance management .‎ ‎—At least two years of experience as accountant in the international organization is a must ‎ ‎—Self—management ,hard –working ,independent and able to deal with pressure.‎ You can go to http://www.51 job.com for the information.‎ Please mail or fax your resume (both in English and Chinese ),diploma ,training certificates（证书）and expected salary to the following address within two weeks .Please write “应聘”on the envelope .No personal visit or telephone call before that. Your materials will be kept in ACE files .‎ ‎ Add :Room 1607,Plaza Building ,Yuzhong District ,Chongqing,400100‎ ‎ Fax No : 023—63728428‎ ‎ E—mail: acercq@ cta. cq. cn ‎36．If you have just graduated from a university ,you should apply for the position as .‎ ‎ A．a project management assistant B．an English teacher ‎ ‎ C．a marketing assistant D．an accountant ‎ ‎37．If you want to get the position as the project management assistant ,in your resume you’d better say , .‎ ‎ A．you always have new ideas and can’t wait to see them realized ‎ ‎ B．you can decide everything for yourself and have your plan carried out ‎ ‎ C．you are always ready to listen and help carry out good decisions ‎ ‎ D．you are good at persuading others to follow you ‎ ‎38．If you want to apply to position ,you can .‎ ‎ A．go to the company or make a phone call at any time ‎ ‎ B．go to acercq @ cta. cq.cn for the information about the employment ‎ ‎ C．tell the company how much money you want for your position ‎ D．write about yourself either in English or in Chinese .‎ B ‎ “Mummy ,I don’t know what to play with “Steve interrupts his mother ,who is talking to a friend ,for the fourth time .”You’ve got a room full of toys !”his mother says ,impatiently .In fact it is the jumble of toys which is to blame for four –year –old Steve’s lack of interest in his dolls ,cars and stuffed (packed )animals .Each morning he tips out three washing baskets of toys all over his floor ,listlessly pulls out something and shortly after is standing at his mother’s desk or following her into the kitchen saying : “Mummy, I am bored .”‎ ‎ A family therapist （心理医生）explains why children lose interest when they have a whole “toy shop” at home : “According to their brain development ,little children are not in a position to judge the quality of a variety of things at once .There is always just one favorite toy for the moment .All the rest is left lying about . “What can parents do to stop their children from being oversupplied with toys ? Under no conditions should we simply make something disappear without the child’s knowledge .If he /she takes no more notice of a ‎ toy ,a parent can ask if it can be stored or given away .Be warned though the child will always say he /she wants it then ! A talk with relatives and friends may also help .Lyn is the mother of four –year –old Jessie ,and we like her way .A small set of shelves in her child’s room holds the toys and books that are the current (at present ) favorites .When it seems to her that her daughter is tired of these toys ,they put them away in a box together and select some other toys from a cupboard in another room .The box of “old” toys goes into the cupboard .When her child says she is “bored”, they also get something from her cupboard –it may be something she has had for some time but because she hasn’t seen it for a while it is almost like a new toy .‎ ‎ Some favorite toys stay out all the time ,and there is collection of dolls which sits in the corner ,but in this way Lyn has found that she has fewer toys to put away at the end of the day and her daughter always has something “fresh” to play with .‎ ‎39．Steve interrupted his mother several times because .‎ ‎ A．he felt uninterested in his toys B．he disliked his mother’s guest ‎ ‎ C．he didn't have enough toys to play with D．he hoped his mother would play with him ‎ ‎40．According to the therapist ,children often complain that they have nothing to play with because .‎ ‎ A．they can’t play alone for a long time B．they are too young to play with so many toys ‎ C．they are too lazy to pick out their favourites ‎ D．they lack the ability to value too many things at a time ‎ ‎41．Which of the following can be used in place of “jumble”?‎ ‎ A．Simple choice . B．Mixture in disorder . C．Ordinary appearance .D．Same shape .‎ ‎42．Which is the advice given to parents in the text ? ‎ ‎ A．Buy fewer toys for their children . B．Form good habits for their children ‎ ‎ C．Spare some time to play with their children. D．Arrange the toys in a proper way .‎ C ‎ The total area of land on earth is estimated （估计）as 149 million square kilometers ,or about 39 percent of the total area of the earth .‎ ‎ The average height of the land is about 750 metres above the sea level .The Eurasian（欧亚的）land mass is the largest with an area of 54,527,600 square kilometers .The smallest continent is the Australian mainland ,with an area of about 7,614,600 square kilometers ,which together with Tasmania ,New Zealand ,New Guinea and the Pacific Islands ,is described as Oceania .The total area of Oceania is about 8,935,500 square kilometres ,including West Iran which is political in Asia .‎ ‎ The world’s largest peninsula（半岛）is Arabia ,with an area of about 3,327,500 square kilometres .‎ ‎ The largest island in the world is Greenland ,with an area of about 2,175,600 square kilometres. The largest island surrounded by fresh water is the Ilha de Marajo (4,022 square kilometres) in the mouth of the Amazon River ,Brazil .The largest island in a lake is Manitoulin Island(2,766 square kilometres) in the Canadian section of Lake Huron . This island itself has on it a lake of 106 square kilometres called Manitou lake ,in which there are several islands .‎ ‎43．The area of Tasmania ,of New Zealand ,of New Guinaea and of the Pacific Islands add up to ‎ ‎ about square kilometres .‎ ‎ A．8,935,500 B．‎1,320,900 ‎C．7,614,600 D．16,550,100‎ ‎44．Oceania is made up of .(Suppose I: Australia ;II: Tasmania and New Zealand ; III: ‎ New Guinea‎ and the Pacific Is –lands )‎ ‎ A．I and II B．II and III C．I and III D．I,II and III ‎45．Which of the following diagrams （图解）shows the correct relationship between Manitoulin ‎ ‎ Island(MI), Lake Huron (LH), Manitou Lake (ML) and the “several islands” (SI) mentioned at the end of the passage ?‎ ‎46．The largest island surrounded by fresh water is in .‎ ‎ A．a river B．a lake C．a sea D．an ocean ‎ D ‎ China recorded fewer traffic accidents in 2001 than in 2000 and a lower going continued in January this year .‎ ‎ The traffic accidents in 2001 totaled 270,000,fewer by 20,000 than in 2000.‎ ‎ But the number of the dead for 2001 was 54,000,an increase of 1,000 from the year before .The increase was not as slow as that in recent years .‎ ‎ A government official said in Beijing yesterday that 3,821 persons were killed in highway traffic accidents last month ,a drop of 12.8 percent from January 2001.He also said there were 21.201 traffic accidents in the first month of the year ,10.1 percent fewer than January last year ,and 11,700 people injured .‎ ‎ The traffic accidents last year caused a loss worth 27.32 million yuan ,about 2.9 million US dollars .‎ ‎ Economic Daily also said 170,000 persons were injured in the traffic accidents in 2001,fewer by 10,000 than in 2000.‎ ‎ (From China Daily ,February 16,2002)‎ ‎47．In 2000 the total number of the traffic accidents was .‎ ‎ A．20,000 B．‎250,000 ‎C．290,000 D．310,000‎ ‎48．In 2000 persons were killed in the traffic accidents .‎ ‎ A．1,000 B．‎53,000 ‎C．54,000 D．55,000‎ ‎49．Which is true according to the news report ? ‎ ‎ A．The traffic accidents in 2002 will go up continuously.‎ ‎ B．Economic Daily said the traffic accidents caused a loss worth 2.9 million US dollars in 2000.‎ C．In January 2002 , there were 3,821 highway traffic accidents .‎ ‎ D．There were more traffic accidents in January 2001 than in January 2002.‎ ‎50．The best title for this news report should be .‎ ‎ A．Road accidents 2001 B．Road Accidents 2000‎ ‎ C．Death Up or Down This Year D．$2.9 Million loss in Traffic Accidents ‎ E ‎“I’ve changed my mind . I wanted to have a telescope , but now I want my daddy back .” Lucien Lawrence’s letter to Father Christmas written after his schoolteacher father had been knifed to death outside his school gate ,must have touched every heart . Lucien went on to say that without his father he couldn’t see the stars in the sky . When those whom we love depart from us , we cannot see the stars for a while .‎ But Lucien , the stars are still there , and one day , when you are older and your tears have gone , you will see them again . And , in a strange way , I expect that you will find your father is there too , in you mind and in your heart .I find that my parents , long dead now , still figure in many of my dreams and that I think of them perhaps more than I ever did when they were alive . I still live to please them and I’m still surprised by their reactions . I remember that when I became a professor , I was so proud , or rather so pleased with myself , that I couldn’t wait to cable my parents . The reply was a long time in coming , but when it did , all Mother said was ” I hope this means that now you will have more time for the children!” I haven’t forgotten . The values of my parents still live on .‎ It makes me pause and think about how I will live on in the hearts and minds of my children and of those for whom I care . Would I have been as ready as Philip Lawrence have been to face the aggressors (挑衅者), and to lay down my life for those in my care ? How many people would want me back for Christmas ? It’s a serious thought , one to give me pause .‎ I pray silently , something , in the dead of night , that ancient cry of a poet “Deliver my soul form the sword (剑), and my darling form the power of the dog .”Yet I know that death comes to us all , and sometimes comes suddenly . We must therefore plan not to live forever , but live as if we will die tomorrow . We live on , I’m sure , in the lives of those we loved , and therefore we ought to have to care for what they will remember and what they will treasure . If more parents knew this in their hearts to be true , there might be fewer knives on our streets today .‎ ‎51．According to the whole text we can see that the first paragraph .‎ ‎ A．puts forward the subject of the text B．shows the author’s pity on the kid ‎ ‎ C．acts as an introduction to the discussion D．makes a clear statement of the author’s views ‎ ‎52．In the second paragraph the author mainly wants to explain to us .‎ ‎ A．how much he misses his parents now B．why his parents often appear in his dream ‎ ‎ C．when Lucien will get over all his sadness D．how proud he was when he succeeded in life ‎ ‎53．What feeling did the author’s mother express in her reply ?‎ ‎ A．Proud B．Happy C．Disappointed D．Worried ‎ ‎54．In the author’s opinion ,the value of a person’s life is .‎ ‎ A．to leave behind a precious memory to the people related .‎ ‎ B．to have a high sense of duty to the whole society ‎ ‎ C．to care what others will remember and treasure ‎ ‎ D．to share happiness and sadness with his family ‎ ‎55．What does the writer mean by the sentence taken from an old poem ?‎ ‎ A．Call on criminals and murders to lay down their guns .‎ ‎ B．Advise parents to stay with their children safely at home .‎ ‎ C．Spend every day meaningfully in memory of the death .‎ ‎ D．Try to keep violence and murder far away from society .‎ ‎★专题（7）‎ A ‎ Haikou: A shark was killed after being dragged to shore at Yalong Berth beach in Sanya, South China’s Hainan‎ ‎Province, on Sunday afternoon.‎ ‎ It was the first time a shark had been caught in the beach area, a popular tourist site in Hainan.‎ ‎ Local fishermen said they caught the 3-meter-long, l-ton shark by chance When they were fishing in sea water 1,000 metres deep near the beach.‎ ‎ Police temporarily（暂时）protected the shark while oceanographers decided whether it was a species belonging to State protection.‎ ‎ Fishermen later killed and sold the shark after oceanographers confirmed that it was a whale shark and therefore not under State protection.‎ ‎ The shark was believed to have drifted into the area from the deep sea due to strong waves caused last week by Typhoon Imbudo. It had no open injuries but experts said they believed it suffered from internal（内部的）bleeding.‎ ‎ Local police officer Fu Chenggeng said beachgoers should not feel threatened by sharks because the fish never attack human beings on their own initiative. Fu said he had never heard of any shark attacks at the Sanya beach since he first started work there eight years ago.‎ ‎ However, police said they will improve the security system to safeguard tourists’ safety on the beach. ‎ ‎56．A possible title of the article should be .‎ ‎ A．Tourists in Danger B．Killing Whale Shark ‎ C．Shark Caught in Beach Area D．Whale Shark in Danger ‎57．From the article it can be learned .‎ ‎ A．the shark was caught because of obvious injuries ‎ B．the number of the whale shark may be small ‎ C．typhoon Imbudo may have brought the shark to the area ‎ D．it’s not unusual to see a shark on the beach ‎58．The underlined word“confirmed”probably means .‎ ‎ A．said B．believed C．thought D．made sure B ‎ There are some very good things about open education. This way of teaching allows the students to grow as people, and to develop their own interests in many subjects. Open education allows students to be responsible for their own education, as they are responsible for what they do in life. Some students do badly in a traditional classroom. The open classroom may allow them to enjoy learning. Some students will be happier in an open education school. They will not have to worry about grades or rules. For students who worry about these things a lot, it is a good idea to be in an open classroom.‎ ‎ But many students will not do well in an open classroom. For some students, there are too few rules. These students will do little in school. They will not make good use of open education. Because open education is so different from traditional education, these students may have a problem getting used to making so many choices. For many students it is important to have some rules in the classroom. They worry about the rules even when there are no rules. Even a few rules will help this kind of students. The last point about open education is that some traditional teachers do not like it. Many teachers do not believe in open education. Teachers who want to have an open classroom may have many problems at their schools.‎ ‎ You now know what open education is. Some of its good points and bad points have been explained. You may have your own opinion about open education. The writer thinks that open education is a good idea, but only in theory. In actual fact, it may not work very well in a real class or school. The writer believes that most students, but of course not all students, want some structure in their classes. They want and need to have ‎ rules. In some cases, they must be made to study some subjects. Many students are pleased to find subjects they have to study interesting. They would not study those subjects if they did not have to.‎ ‎59．Open education allows the students to .‎ ‎ A．grow as the educated B．be responsible for their future ‎ C．develop their own interests D．discover subjects outside class ‎60．Open education may be a good idea for the students who .‎ ‎ A．enjoy learning B．worry about grades ‎ C．do well in a traditional classroom D．are responsible for what they do in life.‎ ‎61．Some students will do little in an open classroom because .‎ ‎ A．there are too few rules B．they hate activities ‎ C．open education is similar to the traditional education D．they worry about the rules ‎62．Which of the following is NOT mentioned in the passage?‎ ‎ A．Some traditional teachers do not like it. B．Many teachers do not believe in open education.‎ ‎ C．Teachers may have problems in open classrooms.‎ ‎ D．The teacher’s feelings and attitudes are important to the students.‎ ‎63．Which of the following best summarizes the passage?‎ ‎ A．Open education is a really complex idea.‎ ‎ B．Open education is better than traditional education.‎ ‎ C．Teachers dislike open education.‎ ‎ D．The writer thinks that open education is a good idea in practice.‎ C Pocket Tape-Recorders“Family and Home Magazine”test what’s on the market now.‎ ‎ 1）Pearlcorder S702 $64‎ This simple model at the bottom of the Olympus range scored the most points for its excellent quality of recording. Background noise hardly affects the sound and recording from a pocket is perfectly possible, but it doesn’t turn off automatically.‎ Tape length: 30 minutes per side. Weight:‎240g.‎ ‎2）Sony M9 $49.95‎ ‎ Small and very good looking, sony’s latest offering scored most for appearance. Sounds clear, but there is slight machine noise. The big control buttons are a great improvement on some of the complicated little controls on other tape-recorders. Doesn’t switch off automatically but a red light shows if the machine is still running.‎ ‎ Tape length: 60 minutes per side. Weight: ‎195g.‎ ‎3）Sony M400 $115‎ ‎ Lots of little control buttons that make a noise and are difficult to use . Recording was good but machine noise lost points. Tape counter and automatic switch-off when tape has finished recording or rewinding are useful Tape length: 60 minutes per side. Weight: ‎230g.‎ ‎ 4）Imperial OEM. MC $29.95‎ ‎ Cheap and simple compared with the rest, but recording was good as long as there was no background noise. Use only its own make of cassette. No light to show it is on; no fast forward button and the record button makes a loud noise.‎ ‎ Tape length: 30 minutes per side. Weight: ‎285g.‎ ‎5）Philips 585 $80‎ ‎ Handsome and simple to use, but recording is very poor at more than the recommended distance of ‎5 cm-designed for dictation. No recording light. Tape length: 15 minutes per side. Weight: ‎220g.‎ ‎64．The machine that produces the best recording with the least unwanted noise is the .‎ ‎ A．Pearlcorder S702 B．Sony M‎9 C．Sony M400 D．Imperial OEM MC7‎ ‎65．It you want a machine which turns off automatically and weighs very little you should choose the .‎ ‎ A．Pearlcorder S702 B．Sony M‎9 C．Sony M400 D．Philips 585‎ ‎66．Which machine is unsuitable for general use?‎ ‎ A．Pearlcorder S702 B．Imperial OEM MC‎7 C．Sony M400 D．Philips 585‎ ‎67．What disadvantage does only the Imperial OEM MC7 have?‎ ‎ A．No light shows when it is on B．It requires a special cassette.‎ ‎ C．It picks up background noise. D．The record button makes a noise.‎ D ‎ Having reached the highest point of our route according to plan, we discovered something the map had ‎ not told us. It was impossible to climb down into the Kingo valley. The river lay deep between mountain sides that were almost vertical（垂直）.We couldn’t find any animal tracks, which usually show the best way across country, and the slopes were covered so thickly with bushes that we could not see the nature of the ground. We had somehow to break through to the river which would give us our direction out of the mountains into the inhabited lowlands.‎ ‎ Our guide cut a narrow path through the bushes with his long knife and we followed in single file. Progress was slow. Then, when we thought we had really reached the river, we found ourselves instead on the edge of a cliff with a straight drop of 1,000 feet to the water below. We climbed back up the slope and began to look for another way down. We climbed slipped, sweated and scratched our hands to pieces and finally arrived at the river. Happily we came downhill along its bank without having to cut our way. However, after a few miles the river entered a steep-sided gap between rocks and suddenly dropped thirty-five feet over a waterfall. There was no path alongside it and no way round it.‎ ‎ Then one of the guides saw a way of overcoming the difficulty. There was a fallen tree lying upside down over the waterfall with its leafy top resting on the opposite bank below the falls. Without hesitation he climbed down the slippery trunk to show us how easy it was. Having got to the fork of the tree, he moved hand over hand along a branch for four or five feet with his legs hanging in space, then he dropped onto the flat bank the other side, throwing his arms in the air like a footballer who has scored goal, and cheerfully waving us on.‎ ‎68．Having reached the highest point on their route, the travelers expected to be able to .‎ ‎ A．track animals to the river B．put away the maps they had been using ‎ ‎ C．come near to the river from a different direction D．get down to the river without much difficulty.‎ ‎69．The travelers wanted to get to the river because .‎ ‎ A．it would lead them to the waterfall B．it would show them which way to go ‎ C．it was the only possible way out of the mountains ‎ D．it was a quicker way than going over the mountains ‎70．One reason why the travelers took so long to get to the river was that .‎ ‎ A．it was too hot to move quickly B．there was no proper path ‎ C．they all tried to go different ways D．they could not follow the animal tracks ‎71．To get past the waterfall the guide had to .‎ ‎ A．use a fallen tree as a kind of bridge B．cross the river above the waterfall ‎ C．slide down a steep river bank D．swing across the river from a high branch E ‎ Anxiety is the appropriate（适当的）emotion when the immediate personal terror—of a volcano, an arrow, a stab（刺伤）in the back and other disasters, all directed against one’s self-disappears.‎ ‎ The kind of world that produces anxiety is actually a world of relative safety, a world in which no one feels that he himself is facing sudden death. The anxiety exists as an uneasy state of mind, in which one has a feeling that something unspecified（不具体的）and indeterminable may go wrong. If the world seems to be going well, this produces anxiety—for good times may end. If the world is going badly—it may get worse. Anxiety tends to be without focus; the anxious person doesn’ t know whether to blame himself or other people. He isn’t sure whether it is the current year of the administration or a change in climate or the atom bomb that is to blame for this undefined sense of unease.‎ ‎ It is clear that we have developed a society which depends on having the right amount of anxiety to make it work…While we agree that too much anxiety is harmful to mental health, we have come to rely on anxiety to push us into seeing a doctor about a symptom（症状）which may indicate cancer, into checking up on that old life-insurance policy which may have out-of-date provisions in it, into having a conference with Billy’s teacher even though his report card looks all right.‎ ‎ People who are anxious enough keep their car insurance up, have the brakes checked, don’t take a second drink when they have to drive. People who are too anxious either refuse to go into cars at all—and so complicate the ordinary course of life—or drive so tensely and carefully that they help cause accidents. People who aren’t anxious enough take chance after chance, which increases the terrible accidents of the roads.‎ ‎72．According to the author, anxiety is the emotion when .‎ ‎ A．one is filled with a sudden sense of uneasiness B．one sees no immediate danger ‎ C．one has a vague sense about his life D．one feels that the world may go badly ‎73．The author holds that .‎ ‎ A．anxiety is a good thing B．anxiety is a symptom of mental illness ‎ C．some anxiety can lead to changes for the better D．no anxiety is bad for society ‎74．According to the author, accidents of the road tend to be caused by .‎ ‎ A．all those who are too anxious B．all those who have anxiety ‎ C．those who have no anxiety D．those who are not anxious enough ‎75．The best title for the passage would be .‎ ‎ A．One Man’s Thought about Anxiety B．The Right Amount of Anxiety ‎ C．Anxiety versus Safety D．Different Attitudes to Anxiety ‎★专题（8） （A）‎ He has lived through various dangers but time may be running out for the Palestinian leader , Yasser Arafat .‎ On September 11, Israel（以色列）announced its decision to remove him , following several Palestinian suicide bomb attacks on Israel . “He should be punished for the killings ,” an Israeli official said , “He has done nothing to stop the terrorist groups .”‎ But the decision has angered many other countries . China said that Arafat is the true leader , elected by the Palestinian people , and removing him would harm the peace in the Middle East . This idea is shared by other governments .‎ Arafat himself said : “They can kill me , but never get me out of my country .” He has spent most of his life in danger as the most important aim of Israel .But , just like a cat with nine lives , Arafat escaped every time .‎ For years he has made a practice of sleeping in a different bed each night , thinking a moving person is harder to hit . In 1985 , Israel sent fighter planes to kill Arafat . The wild bombing destroyed his office in Tunis but Arafat himself was unhurt . In 1992 , the aircraft in which he was flying over north Africa broke in two during a crash landing . The pilot was killed but he managed to remain alive .‎ What is so unbelievable is that he always remains calm in great danger .‎ Israeli tanks and planes attacked his office building in Ramallah in December , 2001 . When they saw the attackers coming , Arafat’s bodyguards ignored his orders to stay still and carried him to safety underground . Seconds later , several bombs were dropped nearby . Though safe , his bodyguards were so frightened that they were wet in sweat .‎ But , Arafat , with Israeli tanks only 200 meters away , showed no fear at all . He stayed in the damaged office , talking by phone with foreign leaders in hope of preventing further attacks from Israel . ‎ All these experiences have made him a beloved leader to his people and an enemy to some others .‎ But has he used up the last of his nine lives ? Only time will tell .‎ ‎56．Which of the following statements cannot be used to describe Arafat ?‎ ‎ A．He went to visit a few foreign countries last year. B．He is not afraid of death in face of his enemy.‎ ‎ C．His office used to be in Tunis. D．He remained alive during an air crash in 1992.‎ ‎57．According to the passage, which statement is true?‎ ‎ A．In 1992, Arafat’s plane crashed in south Africa.‎ ‎ B．Israeli officers thought Arafat himself sent the terrorist groups to Israel.‎ ‎ C．China is the only country against Israel’s decision of removing Arafat.‎ ‎ D．Being Palestinian leader, Arafat would rather die in his own country than be driven away from his people.‎ ‎58．What did the author mean by saying “just like a cat has nine lives” when he talked about Arafat? A．Arafat is as clever as a cat. B．Arafat can live as long as a cat.‎ ‎ C．Arafat can stay alive after accidents or disasters as if he has nine lives.‎ ‎ D．Arafat should have died for at least 8 times.‎ ‎59．The underlined word “ignore” can be replaced by __________.‎ ‎ A．obey the instructions B．take no notice of ‎ ‎ C．pay much attention to D．give out orders ‎60．What’s the writer’s attitude towards Arafat’s future, judging from the last sentence of the passage? A．Hopeful. B.Interesting. C．Satisfactory. D．Doubtful.‎ ‎(B)‎ A new period is coming. Call it what you will: the service industry, the information age, the knowledge society. It all translates to a great change in the way we work. Already we’re partly there, the percentage of people who earn their living by making things has fallen sharply in the Western World. Today the majority of jobs in America, Europe and Japan (two thirds or more are in many of these countries) are in the service industry, and the number is on the rise. More women are in the work force than ever before. There are more part-time jobs. More people are self-employed. But the breath of the great change can’t be measured by ‎ numbers alone, because it also is giving rise to new way of thinking about the nature of work itself. Long-held opinions about jobs and careers, the skills needed to succeed, even the relation between workers and employers-all these are being doubted.‎ We have only to look behind us to get some sense of what may lie ahead. No one looking ahead 20 years possibly could have seen the ways in which a single invention, the chip(芯片), would change our world thanks to its uses in personal computers, and factory equipment. Tomorrow’s achievements in biotechnology or even some still unimagined technology could produce a similar wave of great changes. But one thing is certain: information and knowledge will become even more important, and the people who own it, whether they work in factories or services, will have the advantage and produce the wealth. Computer knowledge will become as basic a requirement as the ability to read and write. The ability to deal with problems by making use of information instead of performing regular tasks will be valued above all else. If you look ahead 10 years, information service will be leading the way. It will be the way you do your job.‎ ‎61．Information age means _____________.‎ ‎ A．the service industry is depending more and more on women workers ‎ B．heavy industries are rapidly increasing ‎ C．people find it harder and harder to earn a living by working in factories ‎ D．most of the job chances can now be found in the service industry.‎ ‎62．Knowledge society brings about a great change that __________.‎ ‎ A．the difference between the workers and employers has become smaller ‎ B．people’s old ideas about work no longer exist ‎ C．most people have to take part-time jobs D．people have to change their jobs from time to time ‎63．What does the author mean by referring to computers and other inventions?‎ ‎ A．People should be able to act quickly to the advancement of technology.‎ ‎ B．Future achievements in technology will bring about big changes.‎ ‎ C．The importance of high technology has been paid no attention to.‎ ‎ D．Computer science will play a leading role in the future information services.‎ ‎64．The future will probably belong to those who _________.‎ ‎ A．own and know how to make use of information B．can read and write well ‎ C．devote themselves to service industries D．look ahead instead of looking back ‎(C)‎ ‎ One of the United States’ social problems is the breakdown of the two-parent family. Today, millions of American children grow up without fathers. Too often, these children lack the love and help they badly need and which they would ordinarily receive from not one but two parents. In the old days, American parents placed the needs of their children above their own. At present, however, nearly one half of all new marriages end in divorce(离婚), with often troubling results for their children. Worse, every year, thousands of teenage, unmarried Americans become mothers outside marriage, with generally terrible results for the mothers and children alike and for American society more generally. However, Chinese continue to value whole marriages. This is not to say that Chinese marriages are all perfect-they certainly are not, judging from increasing rates of divorce and extramarital affairs－but the willingness of Chinese to set aside their own needs and stay together for the sake of the children is admirable and worthy of study.‎ ‎ Families, in whatever form they may take, are important to Americans. If one was to ask a group of Americans what is dearest to them, the majority would say“family”.And yet, so many Americans spend much more time at work-that is, beyond the formal forty-hour work week-than they do with their own families. Obviously, the USA is one of the most powerful in the world, owing in large measure to“workaholism”（工作狂）.It seems to me that Chinese generally find a better balance between work and family needs than many Americans do. I don’t see the number of workaholics in China that I do in the United States（or American organizations in China）.Instead, average Chinese usually head home right after work（in the office or field），have meals together, and spend time with their family members. What’s more, Chinese try to make more time for grandparents, uncles, aunts and cousins than many Americans; in many cases, multigenerational families live together. Of course, like many facts of Chinese society, this is all changing; increasing numbers of“New Chinese”are working longer hours and spending less time with their families than ever before. Still, while Americans do value their loved ones. I think we have something to learn from the Chinese about finding the proper balance between work and family.‎ ‎65．The main point of the passage is .‎ ‎ A．family plays a very important role in America.‎ B．there is something about family for Americans to learn from China.‎ C．a proper balance between work and family needs to be found for Chinese D．the Chinese have a proper balance between work and play ‎66．According to the passage, the American family value in the past is that .‎ ‎ A．Americans love their families more than their jobs.‎ B．Americans often set aside their children’s needs C．Americans have a strong work desire D．American parents place the needs of their children above their own ‎67．It can be concluded from the passage that .‎ ‎ A．in the author’s eyes, the breakdown of the two-parent family in China will be more serious than that in ‎ the U. S.‎ in the future.‎ B．today young Americans should reduce their material comforts in the interests of their children’s future C．Chinese marriage is said to be all perfect D．at present, nearly one half of all new marriages end in divorce in ‎China ‎68．What does the author think according to the passage?‎ ‎ A．Children living in one-parent families badly need their parents’ love and help B．Children with one-parent need their parents’ money badly.‎ C．Chinese value whole marriage more than before. D．Work is dearest to most Chinese.‎ ‎（D）‎ In many ways, the earliest periods of photography are the most satisfying. Learning to use the controls is easy and comes quickly, and you can measure the results in terms of sharp and correctly developed pictures. Once you have mastered that, you can start on the second step of your photographic work. Using these basic skills in a wide variety of situations to give the pictures you want, noticing what you see through the viewfinder and turning that into the most effective picture becomes totally interesting.‎ All good photographs have one thing in common; there is no doubt what the subject of the picture is meant to be. Every photographer must use those same standards to his or her work, not only to the finished results but to the subject before he or she takes it. Always work out quite clearly what the subject of the picture is to be and why you are taking the picture. For example,“I am going to take a picture of this street to show the different styles and ages of the buildings and that people have been living, working and shopping in them since time began.”By doing this you have a better idea of what to include in the picture and what to leave out. How often have you been shown photographs taken by people away on a trip somewhere? The judgment is always similar, something about“the car park is out of the picture to the left”, or“you can’t quite see from this picture but if you go up the street”. The photographs are usually collections of buildings, people, parked cars, possibly a distant look of an ancient church, and best of all, a figure which you are told is Aunt Henrietta, disappearing in the middle distance. When photographers show you their pictures, they have a clear idea of what they want to bring to your attention, but it often does not appear in the picture. If they had given just a little of their time to think about their future judgment before taking the picture, then the picture would relate its own story. Good pictures can show their subjects quickly and easily.‎ ‎69．What does the author mean by saying“in many ways, the earliest periods of photography are the most satisfying”?‎ ‎ A．The skills of photography are not as satisfactory nowadays as before B．The earliest pictures were the best pictures people have ever taken C．The present-day photography depends more on technology than on art D．Learning to produce a sharp and correctly developed picture is only the first step in photography and is easily learned.‎ ‎70．What will it bring you if you decide the purpose of the photograph in advance?‎ ‎ A．Allows you to leave out unnecessary material B．Allows you to stand in the best place C．Helps you to vary the subjects of your pictures D．Means you waste less time.‎ ‎71．Many photographers fail because .‎ A.their pictures include the buildings and people B.the details are not clear in their pictures C．the subjects of their pictures are not obvious D．the explanation given for their pictures is mistaken ‎72．What book is this passage most likely taken from?‎ ‎ A．A book on photography for news reporters B．A book on how to photograph people C．A book on choosing the right camera. D．A book on improving photographic techniques.‎ E ‎ Read the following two advertisements and answer the questions below:‎ ‎73．What is the best time for drivers to get gas filled?‎ ‎ A．Monday. B．Tuesday. C．Wednesday. D．Thursday.‎ ‎74．We can get all kinds of services from Paiges Basic except .‎ ‎ A．giving advice for free. B．changing pets’ bad behavior.‎ C．going to hosts’ home for training. D．curing Pets’ disease.‎ ‎75．Of these two advertisements, which one doesn’t provide the exact address?‎ ‎ A．The first one. B．The second one. C．Neither one. D．We have no idea.‎ ‎★专题（9）‎ A Nearly everyone is shy in some ways. If shyness is making you uncomfortable, it may be time for a few lessons in self-confidence. You can build your confidence by following some suggestions from doctors and psychologists.‎ Make a decision not to hold back in conversations. What you have to say is just as important as what other people say. And don’t turn down party invitations just because of your shyness.‎ Prepare yourself for being with others in groups. Make a list of the good qualities you have. Then make a list of ideas, experiences, and skills you would like to share with other people. Think about what you would like to say in advance. Then say it.‎ If you start feeling self-conscious in a group, take a deep breath and focus your attention on other people. Remember, you are not alone. Other people are concerned about the impression they are making, too.‎ No one ever gets over being shy completely, but most people do learn to live with their shyness. Even entertainers admit that they often feel shy. They work at fighting their shy feelings so that they can face the cameras and the public. Just making the effort to control shyness can have many rewards. But perhaps the best reason to fight shyness is to give other people a chance to know more about you.‎ ‎56．Where would this article probably appear?‎ ‎ A．In a popular magazine. B．On the front page of a newspaper.‎ ‎ C．In a science textbook. D．In an encyclopedia.(百科全书)‎ ‎57．The main purpose of the article is to .‎ ‎ A．explain how shyness developed B．recommend ways of dealing with shyness ‎ C．persuade readers that shyness is natural D．prove that shyness can overcome ‎58．Which of these can you conclude from reading the article?‎ ‎ A．Shy people never have any fun. B．Entertainers choose their work to fight shyness.‎ ‎ C．The attempt to overcome shyness is always successful.‎ ‎ D．The attempt to overcome shyness is always worthwhile.‎ ‎59．What is the source of the suggestions for fighting shyness?‎ ‎ A．The author of the article. B．Shy men and women.‎ ‎ C．doctors and psychologists D．Popular entertainers.‎ B As we know, it is very important that a firm should pay attention to the training of its staff as there exist many weak points in its various departments. Staff training must have a purpose, which I defined(解释) when a firm considers its training needs, which are in turn based on job descriptions and job specifications.‎ A job description should give details of the performance that is required for a particular job, and a job specification should give information about the behaviour, knowledge and skills that are expected of an employee who works in it. When all of this has been collected, it is possible to make a training specification. This specifies that the training department must teach for the successful performance of the job, and also the best methods to use in the training period.‎ There are many different training methods, and there are advantages and disadvantages of all of them. Successful training performances depend on an understanding of the difference between learning about skills and training in using them. It is frequently said that learning about skills takes place “off the job” in classroom, but training in using these skills takes place “on the job,” by means of such activities as practice in the workshop.‎ It’s always difficult to evaluate the costs of a training programme. The success of such a programme depends not only on the methods used but also on the quality of the staff who do the training. The evaluation of management training is much more complex than that.‎ ‎60．To be successful in our training programme, we must understand the difference between ‎ ‎ .‎ A．a job description and a job specification B．what is taught, and how it is taught C．the costs and the quality of the programme D．the training contents and training in using ‎61．According to passage, which of the following statements is NOT true?‎ ‎ A．As there exist weak points in different departments of a firm, the training of its staff is ‎ highly necessary.‎ ‎ B．A training specification is based on the information collected from a job description and a job specification.‎ ‎ C．Training in using skills and learning about skills usually do not happen at the same time.‎ ‎ D．It’s easier to evaluate management training than to evaluate the training of workers and technicians.‎ ‎62．The best title for the passage might be .‎ ‎ A．Staff training and its evaluation B．A successful training programme ‎ C．How to describe and specify a job D．The importance of training the staff ‎63．From the passage we know the success of a training programme lies in .‎ ‎ A．the training methods and the quality of the training staff ‎ B．the performance of the trainees in the programme ‎ C．the places where the training programmes take place ‎ D．the way to evaluate the training programme C ‎ Five years ago, David Smith wore an expensive suit to work every day.“I was a clothes addict（有瘾的人）”he jokes.“I used to carry a fresh suit to work with me so I could change if my clothes got wrinkled.” Today David wears casual clothes—khaki pants and a sports shirt—to the office. He hardly ever wears a necktie.“I am working harder than ever.”David says,“and I need to feel comfortable.”‎ ‎ More and more companies are allowing their office workers to wear casual clothes to work. In the United States, the change from formal to casual office wear has been gradual. In the early 1990s, many companies allowed their employees to wear casual clothes on Friday（but only on Friday）.This became known as“dress-down Friday”or“casual Friday”.“What started out as an extra one-day-a-week benefit for employees has really become an everyday thing.”said business consultant Maisly Jones.‎ ‎ Why have so many companies started allowing their employees to wear casual clothes?One reason is that it’s easier for a company to attract new employees if it has a casual dress code.” “A lot of young people don’t want to dress up for work,” says the owner of a software company,“so it’s hard to hire people if you have a conservative（保守的）dress code.”Another reason is that people seem happier and more productive when they are wearing comfortable clothes. In a study conducted by Levi Strauss and Company, 85 percent of employers said that they believe that casual dress improves employee morale（心境，士气）. Only 4 percent of employers said that casual dress has a negative influence on productivity. Supporters of casual office wear also argue that a casual dress code helps them save money. “Suits are expensive, if you have to wear one every day,”one person said. “For the same amount of money, you can buy a lot more casual clothes.”‎ ‎64．David Smith refers to himself as having been“a clothes addict,”because .‎ ‎ A．he often wore khaki pants and a sports shirt B．he couldn’t stand a clean appearance ‎ C．he wanted his clothes to look neat all the time D．he didn’t want to spend much money on clothes ‎65．David Smith wears casual clothes now, because .‎ ‎ A．they make him feel at ease when working B．he cannot afford to buy expensive clothes ‎ C．he looks handsome in casual clothes D．he no longer works for any company ‎66．According to this passage, which of the following statements is FALSE?‎ ‎ A．Many employees don’t like a conservative dress code.‎ ‎ B．Comfortable clothes make employees more productive.‎ ‎ C．A casual clothes code is welcomed by young employees.‎ ‎ D．All the employers in the U. S.‎ are for casual office wear.‎ ‎67．According to this passage, which of the following statements is TRUE?‎ ‎ A．Company workers started to dress down about twenty years ago.‎ ‎ B．Dress-down has become an everyday phenomenon since the early 90s.‎ ‎ C．“Dress-down Friday”was first given as a favor from employers.‎ ‎ D．Many workers want to wear casual clothes to impress people.‎ ‎68．In this passage, the following advantages of casual office wear are mentioned ‎ EXCEPT . A．saving employees’ money B．making employees more attractive ‎ C．improving employees’ motivation D．making employees happier D BUS SERVICE New York City-Brennan, ‎New Jersey ‎（Trip time: 30 minutes each way）‎ Timetable ‎●Buses leave the Railway Station, New York 7:00 am and every half-hour thereafter（此后）until1 11:30 pm （7days a week）.‎ ‎●Buses leave Brennan Station 20 minutes before and after every hour from 6:20 am to 10:40（7days a week）.‎ ‎●Evening rush hours（5:00 pm to 7:00 pm）buses leave the Railway Station, New York every 15minutes（Monday-Friday）.‎ ‎●Holidays: buses leave every hour on the hour time, each direction.‎ ‎ All tickets must be bought at Window 12, the Railway Station, New York, or at the Brennan Station Window before boarding buses.‎ ‎69．What time does a bus leave New York for Brennan on Thursdays?‎ ‎ A．10:20 am B．6:30 am C．6:45 am D．4:40 am ‎70．Which is the latest bus you should take from Brennan if you have to arrive at the Railway Station, New York before 4:00 pm on Monday?‎ ‎ A．The 3:20 pm bus B．The 3:00 pm bus C．The 3:30 pm bus D．The 3:40 pm bus ‎71．What time does a bus leave Brennan for New York on Christmas Day?‎ ‎ A．1:00 pm B．9:40 pm C．3:15 pm D．8:30 pm E ‎ Twelve European nations with a total population of 300 million people have given up their national currencies（货币）and now have a new currency—the euro.‎ ‎ The decision to give up the French franc or German deutschmark has not been an easy one. Both were known as strong currencies across the world, so it is not surprising that Britain wants to have its people vote about changing currencies before making a decision. In the 15-member European Union, Britain, Denmark and Sweden chose not to adopt the euro.‎ ‎ The decision about a single currency was taken 10 years ago. On January 1,1999,11 European countries began to use the new euro currency: Austria, Belgium, Finland, France, Germany, Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg, the Netherlands, Portuguese, Spain. Greece became the 12th country to adopt the euro on January 1,2002. It became the official, single currency of these nations on January 1,2002.‎ ‎ At present, all prices in 12 countries are valued in euro. Each“old”currency stopped being used completely on February 28.‎ ‎ The coins have one side the same in all 12 countries. The other side is different in each country. The notes will look the same throughout the euro area. On the notes, pictures of gateways and bridges represent European openness and co-operation.‎ ‎ As the euro becomes the only currency in the euro-zone, its symbol will become as well-known as the US dollar or Coca-Cola symbols. But Arthur Eisenmenger, now 86 and the designer of the symbol, seems to have been forgotten. He now lives in an old people’s home in Germany.‎ ‎ European Commission President, Jacques Santer, introduced the euro symbol to the world in 1997. He said it was a sign of the weight of European civilization, and “E”for Europe, and the lines crossing through stand for the euro being a dependable currency. Even then, he never mentioned Eisenmenger, who designed the euro symbol more than a quarter of a century ago.‎ ‎72．The euro symbol was designed by Eisenmenger .‎ ‎ A．in the 1970s B．in the 1980s C．in 1997 D．in 1999‎ ‎73．Which of the following is not mentioned in the passage?‎ ‎ A．The euro is the official single currency of Italy.‎ ‎ B．Germany used to use German deutschmark as its currency.‎ ‎ C．All the 15-member European Union doesn’t adopt the euro.‎ ‎ D．France can’t use French franc after January, 1,2002‎ ‎74．Europe’s new currency will help to .‎ ‎ A．make people live a peaceful life in Europe.‎ ‎ B．make it convenient for people to travel in twelve European counties.‎ ‎ C．settle the problem of banknote forgery（伪造）‎ ‎ D．make Europe much stronger than it used to be ‎ ‎75．Britain wants to have its people vote about changing currencies before making a decision because .‎ ‎ A．people have the right to decide important things.‎ ‎ B．the government of Britain is willing to do things against people’s will ‎ C．the currency of Britain-pound is known as a strong currency ‎ D．Britain has not the tradition to use the same currency with other European countries ‎★专题（10）‎ A ‎ Hillside‎ ‎Secondary School year is divided into two 18-week semesters. Semester one runs from September to the end of January. Semester two runs from February to late June.‎ ‎ The school day runs from 8 : ‎45 a. m. to 3 : 15 p. m. and is made up of five 78-minute periods. Students take four classes and have one period for lunch.‎ ‎ In February, 2000, the school introduced a new system of computerized attendance in order to provide accurate records of student lates and absences and to enable communication with parents.‎ ‎ Student evaluation is a continual process based upon class performance, tests, homework and reports, as well as special projects or formal examinations held at the end of the semester. There will be at least three reports to parents during each semester. After five weeks of class, students carry Early-bird Report home. The semester one Parent/Teacher interview date appears on this report. Mid-term Report is at the ninth week. Marks are then calculated. Mid-term Reports are prepared and mailed in mid November and late April.‎ ‎ Students with marks under 60% after 11 weeks of class will receive an In-Danger Report to remind them that more effort is required as well as careful preparation for final exams. Those notices are mailed home. Final Reports are mailed home in February and July.‎ ‎ The Newsletter is an excellent way for the school to communicate with parents. In addition to providing a profile of our many activities, it contains key dates and information-upcoming events such as parent interviews or exams, changes being considered at the school. Messages from school office-Parents regularly tell us they value and appreciate learning about what is happening in their children’s school. Parents receive four newsletters each year. Keep them on the refrigerator!‎ ‎56．Each semester, the parents may get at least from the school.‎ ‎ A．an Early – bird Report, a Mid – term Report and the Newsletters.‎ ‎ B．an Early – bird Report, a Mid – term Report and the Final Report.‎ ‎ C．a Mid – term Report, an In – Danger Report and a Final Report.‎ ‎ D．a Mid – term Report, a Final Report and the Newsletters.‎ ‎57．We can infer from the passage that .‎ ‎ A．parents get little information about their children’s performance at school ‎ B．a student has to spend more than 5 periods learning lessons at school.‎ ‎ C．both school and parents think highly of the newsletters.‎ ‎ D．students with a mark above 95% might fail the exams ‎58．The purpose in writing this passage is .‎ ‎ A．to tell about the contents in different report cards to parents ‎ B．to tell about the duration of a school year and a school day ‎ C．to introduce a new method to record student attendance ‎ ‎ D．to give some general information of school B ‎ The results of the US/NATO bombing of Yugoslavia are to be judged by history. I shall not be the one to do it. But being in the center of actual events that are creating that history, I cannot stay away from what is going on in my country.‎ ‎ First of all, the aim of the bombing was to prevent a human suffering in Kosovo. Today, after many days of frequent bombing, that aim is more distant than before. The bombing only brought tens of thousands of people running away from their homes. Not to mention the large number of the death and injury, buildings and factories. Suppose that the US/NATO really had a wish to prevent the human suffering, they should realize they were wrong when they thought the bombing would solve the problem.‎ ‎ So, what’s left? Back off or ground troops? But who is going to join the ground troops? It would take at least 200,000 armed soldiers, not the 20,000 that the US/NATO have prepared in Macedonian. It should also be clear that the Serbs（塞族）will not give up on Kosovo.‎ ‎ I live under continuous bombing for more than a week now. And it doesn’t frighten me any more. I don’t turn to the shelter at the sound of warning. It’s the thought of ground troops that frightens me. Vietnam would seem like a picnic compared to a bloodshed in Kosovo if the ground troops appear. Is that what the US/NATO wants?‎ ‎59．Which of the following statements is true?‎ ‎ A．The US/NATO really intends to stop the human suffering.‎ ‎ B．The result of the war will be judged by people in Kosovo.‎ ‎ C．The bombing made tens of thousands of people homeless.‎ ‎ D．The continuous bombing will make the Serbs give up of Kosovo.‎ ‎60．What worries the writer most?‎ ‎ A．The continuous bombing. B．The coming of ground troops.‎ ‎ C．The sound of bomb warning. D．The idea of ground troops.‎ ‎61．What’s the writer’s attitude towards the bombing in Kosovo?‎ ‎ A．It is the US/NATO ’s duty to defend Kosovo.‎ ‎ B．It is wrong to solve the problem by bombing Kosovo.‎ ‎ C．The aim of bombing Kosovo is to stop a human suffering.‎ ‎ D．The bombing can solve the problem on Kosovo.‎ ‎62．The underlined sentence means .‎ ‎ A．the war in Vietnam wasn’t serious at all ‎ B．the war in Vietnam was different from that in Kosovo.‎ ‎ C．the US will send more troops to Kosovo than that to ‎Vietnam ‎ D．ground troops to Kosovo will cause an even greater disaster C ‎ For centuries, people wondered how big the Earth was. Unfortunately, as long as they thought the Earth was flat, no one was able to figure out its size. Gradually, however, people began to realize that the Earth was really round.‎ ‎ Then, in the third century BC（2,300 years ago）, a Greek man named Eratosthenes had an idea. Eratosthenes was sure that the Earth was a sphere. He used the sun and geometry to figure out the size of the Earth. He calculated that the circumference of the Earth was 28,600 miles（46,000 kilometers）.The true size of the Earth is 25,000 miles（40，000 kilometers）.Eratosthenes’ measurement was wrong, but it was very close to the truth.‎ ‎ For many centuries after Eratoshenes lived, people made maps of the Earth. However, they did not know very much about the world outside of Europe, Asia, and north Africa. Mapmakers could not draw accurate maps of the Earth until people began traveling around the world in the fifteenth century, mapping small areas each time. In the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries, people began making correct maps of countries, but the first accurate maps of the world were not made until the 1890s.‎ ‎ Maps today are reliable, inexpensive, and easy to understand. People depend on maps every day. What would our lives be like without them?‎ ‎63．A sphere is a .‎ ‎ A．large shape B．planet C．ball D．member of the sun family ‎64．What’s a synonym（同义词）for figure out?‎ ‎ A．geometry B．calculate C．make out D．understand ‎65．Look at the four drawings below. Which one shows the circumference of the Earth?‎ ‎66．A measurement is a .‎ ‎ A．calculation B．kilometer C．true statement D．wrong statement ‎67．Accurate means .A．big B．nice C,small D．correct D ‎ Sarah Williams went to a boarding（寄宿）school. Here is one of the letters she wrote to her parents from the school.‎ ‎ Wentworth Girls’School ‎ Beachside ‎ July 25th Dearest Mom and Dad,‎ ‎ I’m afraid I have some very bad news for you. I have been very naughty and the school principal is very angry with me. She is going to write to you. You must come and take me away from here. She does not want me in the school any longer.‎ ‎ The trouble started last night when I was smoking a cigarette in bed, This is against the rules, of course. We are not supposed to smoke at all.‎ ‎ As I was smoking, I heard footsteps coming towards the room. I did not want a teacher to catch me smoking, so I threw the cigarette away.‎ ‎ Unfortunately, the cigarette fell into the waste-paper basket, which caught fire.‎ ‎ There was a curtain near the waste paper-basket which caught fire, too. Soon the whole room was burning.‎ ‎ The principal phoned for the fire department. The school is a long way from the town and by the time the fire department arrived, the whole school was in flames. Many of the girls are in the hospital.‎ ‎ The principal says that the fire was all my fault and you must pay for the damage. She will send you a bill for about a million dollars.‎ ‎ I’m very sorry about this.‎ ‎ Much love,‎ ‎ Sarah ‎ P.S. None of the above is true, but I have failed my exams. I just want you to know how bad things could have been!‎ ‎68．The title of the passage is .‎ ‎ A．A Naughty Girl B．A Fire Accident C．A Home Letter D．The Exam ‎69．Which of the following is true?‎ ‎ A．Sarah wrote home to ask for a million dollars.‎ ‎ B．Sarah said she had failed her exams, so the principal was angry with her.‎ ‎ C．Sarah told her parents about the fire to make them less angry at her real news.‎ ‎ D．The letter before the P. S. was completely true.‎ ‎70．What does the word principal mean in Chinese in the first paragraph of the letter?‎ ‎ A．经理 B．局长 C．法官 D．校长 ‎71．According to Sarah, the fire department took so long to get to the school because .‎ ‎ A．it was a long way from the nearest town ‎ B．the principal didn’t phone for the fire department immediately ‎ C．there’s something wrong with the fire engine D．in fact, it was not far from the town E ‎ Beijing—Beijing is to spend up to US $ 20 billion to change the Chinese capital into a 21st century one for the 2008 Olympics.‎ ‎ The government managed to host the 2008 games. The general aim is for Beijing to have the same environmental standards as Paris, London or Washington by 2008.‎ ‎ Hundreds of millions of dollars will be spent to pipe natural gas to the city’s home, taking away dirty coal burning gradually while 60, 000 buses will be changed to liquefied（液化）gas.‎ ‎ The money also will be used for relocating the polluting factories and building green belts. By 2008 around 90 percent of Beijing’s waste will be treated, compared to only 40 percent at present.‎ ‎ Olympic officials realize the city has a long way to go to match the environmental standards of such cities as Paris, Toronto, Istanbul and Osaka.‎ ‎ City officials have already announced that around 50 large projects are being dealt with to improve traffic congestion（拥挤）and cut down pollution. They include construction of Beijing’s first light railway, a 40.5—kilometer line which is expected to be complete in 2005.‎ ‎ Beijing, besides, plans to build an 82.25—kilometre – long subway to add to existing 53 kilometres. Nine major roads will be rebuilt or eidened.‎ ‎ Beijing also plans to build a 70–metre–wide green belt along the waterways to protect water quality as well as increase the green areas.‎ ‎72．The government will pipe natural gas to the city’s home in order to .‎ ‎ A．solve the problem of being short of fuel B．bring down the cost of daily life ‎ C．reduce the pollution of our capital D．keep up with the development of modern society ‎73．The underlined word“relocating”in this report means .‎ ‎ A．removing B．pulling down C．rebuilding D．dealing with ‎74．From the last three paragraphs we know the fact that .‎ ‎ A．lengthening the existing 53-kilometre subway is among the 50 large projects ‎ B．a 40.5-kilometer line will be added to Beijing’s first light railway ‎ C．the length of the subway will be up to 135.25-kilometres in 2005‎ ‎ D．a 70-metre-wide green belt will supply us with enough water ‎75．Which of the following is true according to the passage?‎ ‎ A．The environment of London is better than Toronto.‎ ‎ B．In the first paragraph“a 21 st century one”refers to a modern and advanced capital ‎ C．Beijing is badly polluted mainly by coal burning. D．Liquefied gas is more expensive than petrol.‎ ‎★专题（11） A ‎ At first sight the planet Mars（火星）does not appear very welcoming to any kind of life. It has very little oxygen and water, the temperature at night is below-50 degrees and winds of 100 miles （161 kilometres）per hour cause severe dust storms. However, the surface of the planet seems to show that water flowed across it at some time in the past, and it is believed that there is enough ice at the poles to cover the planet with water if it melted. Although there is no life on Mars now, some scientists think that there may have been some form of life a long time ago. At that time, the planet had active volcanoes（火山）; the atmosphere was thicker and warmer; and there was water. In fact, in some ways Mars may have been similar to Earth, where life exists.‎ ‎ Some people believe that Mars could support life in the future if the right conditions were produced. The first step would be to warm the planet using certain gases which trap the sun’s heat in the planet’s atmosphere. With warmth, water and carbon dioxide（三氧化碳）, simple plants could begin to grow. These plants could slowly make Mars fit to live on. It is judged that the whole process might take between 100,000 and 200,000 years. In the meantime, people could begin to live on the planet in special closed environments. They would provide a lot of useful information about conditions on Mars and the problems connected with living there.‎ ‎56．According to the passage, the planet Mars has no on it.‎ ‎ A．wind B．dust C．mountains D．animals ‎57．It is believed that on Mars now .‎ ‎ A．there is a large amount of ice at the poles. B．there is a thicker and warmer atmosphere ‎ C．there are some kinds of simple plants D．there are so many active volcanoes.‎ ‎58．What is the topic discussed in the second paragraph?‎ ‎ A．Certain gases should be used to warm Mars. B．Plants should be grown to make Mars fit to live on.‎ ‎ C．Mars could support life on right conditions in the future.‎ ‎ D．People could live on Mars in special closed environments.‎ ‎59．A most suitable title for the passage is .‎ ‎ A．No life on MarsB． B.study of Mars C．The possibility of life on Mars ‎ D．The Future conditions on Mars B ‎ December 06 —Canada: For those of you who have been Following this story, the third suspect（嫌疑犯）in the Canadian Cat Mutilation（残害）case has been caught. On March 8, after just under a year of searching, the Find Matt Campaign received information that would comfort many. Now known as Mattew Kaczorowski, 21 years old, this cat mutilator was picked up by the Police from the streets of Vancouver.‎ In May 2001, three young men took a young cat, named “Kensington” after the area of town from where she was taken,. from the street to a house. They began to cruelly treat and mutilate her to death, videotaping the attack. Two of the suspects, recognized as 21-year-old Jesse Champlain Power and 24-year –old Anthony Ryan Wennekers, were arrested shortly after the incident. Neither helped the police in an effort to find the third suspect, at the time known only as“Matt.”‎ In May 2002, Katie set up the “Find Matt Campaign”, with the goals of raising public awareness（意识）about animal cruelty and having as many eyes as possible look for Matt.‎ ‎“I don’t think Matt would have been caught had it not been for Katie Woodward’s information, ”said Detective Gordon Scott, one of the arresting officers.‎ Kaczorowski faces the charges of animal cruelty, theft under $ 5,000 and possession of property taken by crime, but one charge remains absent：that of animal cruelty. According to Canadian law, this kind of crime must be charged within six months.‎ The case is now before the Courts.‎ While finding Matt is a big step in the right direction of this case, it is not over. It remains that Kensington’s guardian（监护人）has not yet come forward. It is important that her guardian speak out to lessen the possibility of the charges being dropped.‎ ‎60．What does the passage mainly talk about?‎ ‎ A．A cat was killed cruelly in Canada. B．A Canadian cat mutilator was caught.‎ ‎ C．People pay attention to animal protection. D．No crimes can escape from being charged.‎ ‎61．Which of the following is in correct order according to the time when the events happened?‎ ‎ a．Matt was caught by the police.‎ ‎ b．“Find Matt Campaign”was set up.‎ ‎ c．Jesse and Anthony were soon arrested.‎ ‎ d．Three young men mutilate a cat to death.‎ ‎ e．Katie got the information about the third suspect.‎ ‎ A．b, e, a, d, c B．e, a , d, c, b C．d, c, b, e, a D．a, d, b, e, c ‎62．Which one of the charges does Matt certainly have to face?‎ ‎ A．Stealing less than $ 5,000. B．His possession of property.‎ ‎ C．The crime of animal cruelty. D．A six-month imprisonment.‎ ‎61．What can we infer from the passage?‎ ‎ A．Catching Matt was easy for the police. B．Very few people care about Matt’s case.‎ ‎ C．Katie started the Find Matt Campaign to protect animals.‎ ‎ D．The final result of the case depends on the cat’s guardian.‎ C Mickey’s Goal ‎ Last night was the last game for my eight-year-old son’s soccer team. It was the final quarter. The score was two to one, my son’s team in the lead. Parents surrounded the playground, offering encouragement.‎ ‎ With less than ten seconds remaining, the ball suddenly rolled in front of my son’s teammate, Mickey O’ Donnel. With shouts of“Kick it!” echoing（回响）across the playground, Mickey turned around and gave it everything he had. All around me the crowd erupted（沸腾）.O’ Donnel had scored!‎ ‎ Then there was silence. Mickey had scored all right, but in the wrong goal, ending the game in a tie. For a moment there was a total hush. You see, Mickey has Down syndrome（综合症）and for him there is no such thing as a wrong goal. All goals were celebrated by a joyous hug from Mickey. He had even been known to hug the opposing players when they scored.‎ ‎ The silence was finally broken when Mickey, his face filled with joy, hugged my son tightly and shouted,“I scored! I scored. Everybody won! Everybody won!” For a moment I held my breath, not sure how my son would react. I need not have worried . I watched, through tears, as my son threw up his hand in the classic high-five salute and started chanting,“Way to go Mickey! Way to go Mickey!” Within moments both teams surrounded Mickey, joining in the chant and congratulating him on his goal.‎ ‎ Later that night, when my daughter asked who had won, I smiled as I replied,“It was a tie. Everybody won.”‎ ‎64．What was the score of the soccer match?‎ ‎ A．Two to two, equal to both the teams. B．Three to one in Mickey’s team’s favor.‎ ‎ C．Two to one in the opposite team’s favor. D．Everybody won because of Mickey’s goal.‎ ‎65．The underlined word“hush”in paragraph 3 means .‎ ‎ A．cheer B．cry C．laughter D．silence ‎66．What did the author worry about when Mickey scored and hugged his son?‎ ‎ A．The result of the match would fail his son. B．His son would shout at Mickey for his goal.‎ ‎ C．Mickey would again hug the opposing players.‎ ‎ D．His son would understand Mickey’s wrong goal.‎ ‎67．It can be inferred from the passage that .‎ ‎ A．both teams liked and respected Mickey. B．both teams were thankful to Mickey for his goal.‎ ‎ C．Mickey didn’t mind though his goal was wrong.‎ ‎ D．Mickey was a kind-hearted boy and hoped everybody won.‎ ‎68．The purpose of the author in writing the passage is .‎ ‎ A．to tell a joke to make readers laugh. B．to suggest we should not mind losing .‎ ‎ C．to show enjoying a game is more than winning a game.‎ ‎ D．to present his son’s fine qualities of understanding others D All over the country these days, electronic mail messages are ending with this strange little mark:-) or one of its many variants（变体），like :-（.‎ ‎ It was 20 years ago that Scott Fahlman taught the Net how to smile. The Carnegie Mellon computer scientist has devoted his life to man-made intelligence, the practice of teaching computers how to think like humans, but the bearded scientist is perhaps best known for a flash of inspiration（灵感）that helped to define（定义）Internet culture.‎ ‎ By the early ‎1980’‎s the Computer Science group at Carnegie Mellon was making heavy use of online bulletin boards or“bboards”.A good many of the posts were humorous. The problem was that if someone made a humorous remark, a few readers would fail to get the joke. This problem caused some people to suggest（only half seriously）that maybe it would be a good idea to clearly mark posts that were not to be taken seriously. After all, when using text-based online communication, we lack the body language or the tone of voice that communicates this information when we talk in person or on the phone.‎ ‎ So on Sept. 19, 1982, Fahlman typed :-) in an online message. “I had no idea I was starting something that would soon pollute all the world’s communications channels,” he wrote later. The“smiley face”has since become common in online communication, allowing 12-year-old girls and corporate lawyers alike to mark their messages with a quick symbol that says, “Hey, I’m only joking.”‎ ‎ This creation caught on quickly around Carnegie Mellon, and soon spread to other universities and research labs by means of the computer networks of the day. Since then, the smiling icons（marks）have taken the e-mail world by storm. Now called emoticons, short for emotive（情感）icons, Fahlman’s smiley face encouraged the creation of thousands of variants.‎ ‎ Yahoo, Microsoft and America Online all put emoticons into their instant-messaging systems, while telecom companies, jewelry makers and online merchants have sent in trademark applications（申请）for products and ads that include Fahlman’s smiley face.‎ ‎ But Fahlman has never seen a cent from his creation.“If it cost people a cent to use it, nobody would have used it. This is my little gift to the world, for better or worse,”he said.‎ ‎69．What do the underlined words this information in paragraph 3 refer to?‎ ‎ A．the body language. B．the suggestion of marking posts ‎ C．the tone of voice D．the humors behind the words ‎70．The purpose of Fahlman in typing the first smiley face was .‎ ‎ A．to explain to others that he didn’t take his message seriously.‎ ‎ B．to fill all the world’s communication channels with smiley faces.‎ ‎ C．to make money out of telecom companies and online merchants.‎ ‎ D．to show his happy feelings and to help to define Internet culture.‎ ‎71．What does the passage mainly talk about?‎ ‎ A．Internet culture B．Electronic mail message.‎ ‎ C．Fahlman’s creation. D．Online smiley face.‎ E ‎ The case for college has been accepted without question for more than a generation. All high school graduates ought to go, because college will help them earn more money, become“better”people, and learn to be more responsible citizens than those who don’t go.‎ ‎ But college has never been able to work its magic for everyone. And now that close to half our high school graduates are attending, those who don’t fit the pattern are becoming more and more, and more obvious. College graduates are selling shoes and driving taxis; college students get in the way of each other’s experiments and write false letters of recommendation（推荐）in the competition for admission to graduate school. Others find not interest in their studies, and drop out—often encouraged by college administrators（教导主任）.‎ ‎ Some observers say the fault is with the young people themselves—they are spoiled and they are expecting too much. But that is a condemnaiton（谴责）of the students as a whole, and does not explain all campus unhappiness. Others blame the state of the world, and they are partly right. We’ve been told that young people have to go to college because our economy cannot take in an army of untrained eighteen-year-olds. But disappointed graduates are learning that it can no longer take in an army of trained twenty-two-year-olds, either.‎ ‎ Some adventuresome educators and campus watchers have openly begun to suggest that college may not be the best, the proper, the only place for every young person after the completion of high school. We may have been looking at all those surveys（调查）upside down, it seems, and thinking of the rosy glow of our own remembered college experiences. Perhaps college does not make people intelligent（clever），ambitious, happy, liberal, or quick to learn things—maybe it is just the other way round, and intelligent, ambitious, happy, liberal, quick-learning people are only the ones who have been attracted to college in the first place. And perhaps all those successful college graduates would have been successful whether they had gone to college or not. This is heresy（异端邪说）to those of us who have been brought up to believe that if a little schooling is good, more has to be much better. But opposite evidence is beginning to mount up.‎ ‎72．According to the passage all the following statements are true EXCEPT that .‎ ‎ A．about half of the high school graduates continue their studies in colleges.‎ ‎ B．college graduates are believed to be able to earn more money.‎ ‎ C．administrators often encourage college students to drop out.‎ ‎ D．more and more young people are found unfit for college.‎ ‎73．Which of the following is one of some observers’ opinions?‎ ‎ A．The students expect so much that they are not satisfied with the hard college life.‎ ‎ B．The economic situation is so discouraging that the youth have to attend college.‎ ‎ C．Colleges should improve because of so much campus unhappiness.‎ ‎ D．Colleges provide more chances of good jobs than anywhere else.‎ ‎74．What does the underlined sentence in paragraph 4 mean?‎ ‎ A．Our college experiences prove that those surveys are incorrect.‎ ‎ B．The surveys may remind us of our beautiful college experiences.‎ ‎ C．The surveys should all be reexamined according to our college experiences.‎ ‎ D．Our college experiences may make us misunderstand the results of the surveys.‎ ‎75．What is the main purpose of this passage?‎ ‎ A．To value young people’s further education in colleges.‎ ‎ B．To put forward an idea that college should not be the first choice.‎ ‎ C．To argue against the idea that college is the best place for all young people.‎ ‎ D．To persuade young people into working after the completion of high school.‎ ‎★专题（12） A The Museum of Childhood is Australia’s most comprehensive collection of childhood items including toys , dolls , infant and school material .‎ Housed in a modern facility , the displays reflect Australian childhood experience over time including play , child rearing , orphanage childhood , and home , school , and war time experience .‎ There are many hands –on exhibits and education sessions including the famous ‘lesson’ in the 1920s One Teacher Bush Classroom .‎ The Museum also hosts national touring exhibitions and conducts special activities on Sundays and school holidays（ring for details ）.‎ Open: Tuesday- Friday 10am – 4pm , Sunday 10am – 4:30 pm , or by arrangement .‎ Special activities on Sundays as advertise .‎ Closed: Public holidays ,16 December-18 January .‎ Location: Edith Cowan University campus , Bay Road , Claremont (take bus 208 and alight at the Bay Road and Princess Road intersection . The Museum is 15 minutes’ walk from Claremont train station )‎ Tel :(08) 9442 1373 ; Fax ; (08 ) 9442 1314‎ ‎56．On you can stay at the Museum until half past four .‎ ‎ A．Wednesday B．Friday C．Sunday D．Monday ‎ ‎57．If you want to attend a special activity , you’d better come on .‎ ‎ A．Monday B．Tuesday C．Saturday D．Sunday ‎58．When you come on December 20th , Friday ,you will find the Museum .‎ ‎ A．closed B．holding special activities ‎ ‎ C．not closed until 4:00 D．not closed until 4:30‎ ‎59．The main purpose of the Museum of Childhood is to .‎ ‎ A．display toys , dolls , infant and school material ‎ ‎ B．reflect Australian childhood experience over time ‎ ‎ C．host national touring exhibition D．tell you the famous ‘lesson’ in the 1920s ‎ B WASHINGTON-Laura Straub is a very worried woman . Her job is to find families for French teenagers who expect to live with American families in the summer .‎ It’s not easy , even desperate .‎ ‎“We have many children left to place :40 out of 75,” said Straub , who works for a Paris-based foreign – exchange programme called LEC. When exchange programmes started 50 years ago , family life was more accommodating . For one thing , more mothers stayed home .‎ But now , increasing numbers of women work outside the home . Exchange-student programmes have struggled in recent years to sign up host families for the 30,000 teenagers who annually come from abroad to spend and academic year in the United States , as well as the thousands more who participate in summer programmes .‎ School systems in many parts of the US, unhappy about accepting non-taxpaying students , have also strictly limited the number of exchange students they accept . At the same time , the idea of hosting foreign students is becoming less exotic.‎ In searching for host families , who usually receive no pay , exchange programmes are increasingly broadening heir appeals to include everyone from young couples to retirees .‎ ‎“We are open to many different types of families,” said Vickie Weiner , eastern regional director for ‎ ASSE, a 25- year –old programme that sends about 30,000 teen-agers on academic –year exchange programmes worldwide .‎ For elderly people , exchange students “keep us young –they really do ,” said Jean Foster , who is hosting 16-year –old Nina Porst from Denmark .‎ ‎60．Viekie Weiner is the person who .‎ ‎ A．works for a programme called LEC B．works for a programme called ASSE ‎ C．is 25 years old D．hosts foreign students ‎ ‎61．The underlined word “exotic” means .‎ ‎ A．difficult B．wonderful C．exciting D．accommodating ‎ ‎62．From the passage we can learn that at the beginning of the exchange programmes , .‎ ‎ A．all the families cold host foreign students ‎ ‎ B．only young couples could host foreign students ‎ ‎ C．only those who were retired could host foreign students ‎ ‎ D．those who were not too old could host foreign students ‎ ‎63．Which of the following is the best title of this passage ?‎ ‎ A．US Struggle to Find Host Families B．Idea of Hosting Students Is Different ‎ ‎ C．Foreign-exchange Program Is Going On D．Exchange Students Keep Old People Young ‎ C Mosquitoes（蚊子）are very important in human history . The Guinness Book of Records says that mosquitoes have caused over 50 per cent of all human deaths since the Stone Age , excluding deaths from war and accidents !‎ Mosquitoes are found all over the world . Female mosquitoes usually feed on the blood of humans and animals . Mosquitoes often carry dangerous disease called malaria , which usually occurs during hot , rainy season .‎ If a mosquito feed on the blood of a person with malaria , it becomes a carrier of the disease . It injects the disease into the next person it bites . So , for example , a tourist could be infected with malaria during a visit to Indonesia . The same tourist might then visit Thailand where another mosquito may bite him . This mosquito could then bite another person and spread the disease .‎ People have used insecticides to kill mosquitoes and their eggs for a long time , but many insects are now resitant to these chemicals . This resistance is a big problem for doctors because it can stop the prevention and treatment of malaria . Also , several of the drugs which doctors use to prevent malaria do not work anymore because mosquitoes are resistant to them . Experts now believe that the world will never be free of malaria , so they tell people to protect themselves from the disease .‎ If you think that you have malaria , see a doctor immediately . Without treatment , malaria kills over 25 per cent of its victims in a maximum of two weeks . After treatment , mosquitoes that bite you will not pass malaria on to other people . Although doctors can treat malaria victims , you must remember ;prevention is better than cure .‎ ‎64．According to the Guinness Book of Records , which of the following causes most deaths ?‎ ‎ A．War . B．Accident . C．Malaria . D．Mosquitoes .‎ ‎65．Which of the following is the correct order for the spreading of malaria ?‎ ‎ a．A mosquito bites the person with malaria .‎ ‎ b．The same mosquito bites another person .‎ ‎ c．A person is infected with malaria .‎ ‎ d．That person may be likely to be infected , too .‎ ‎ A．a—b—c—d B．a—c—d—b C．c—a—b—d D．c—a—d—b ‎66．We could draw the conclusion that the best way of fighting against the spread of malaria is ‎ ‎ .‎ ‎ A．prevention B．treatment C．seeing a doctor immediately D．blood —test ‎ ‎67．Which of the following statements is true according to the passage ?‎ ‎ A．We will surely get rid of mosquitoes in the near future .‎ ‎ B．It’s believed that malaria will accompany human beings forever .‎ ‎ C．Insecticides are always effective in killing mosquitoes .‎ ‎ D．A mosquito can not pass the disease on to another person after it bites one with malaria .‎ D The report by 700 scientists estimates （估计）that economic losses from so-called natural disasters rose from US$ 4billion per year in the 1950s to US $ 40 billion in 1999.‎ One report released last month in Shanghai predicts global temperatures could rise by as much as 5.8 degrees centigrade over the next century . The increase is due to industrial pollution and waste gas from cars .‎ Scientists have warned of global warming for years .‎ ‎“The effects are expected to be greatest in developing countries in terms of loss of life and impact （冲击）on investment and the economy,” said the report issued Monday . Changing rainfall patterns coupled with population growth will lead to huge pressure on water supplies , it predicts , and that at present 1.7 billion people live in areas where water resources are tight , which will likely increase to 5.4 billion in the next 25 years . “ Climate change will be accompanied by an increase in heat-waves, with increased humidity（湿度）and urban(市区)air pollution causing more heat-related deaths and illnesses ,” it says .‎ Even more serious will be flooding as a result of rising sea levels in densely populated coastal areas .‎ ‎“The most widespread direct risk to human settlements is flooding and landslide,” it says . “Coastal settlements are particularly at risk but urban flooding will be a problem where storm drains , water supply and waste management systems are not well developed.”‎ ‎68．The underlined sentence in this passage suggests that the global warming .‎ ‎ A．must have been taken seriously B．may have been taken seriously ‎ ‎ C．couldn’t have been taken seriously D．shouldn’t have been taken seriously ‎ ‎69．From the report issued Monday we may conclude that among the following four countries , the one that will be affected most greatly is .‎ ‎ A．Japan B．America C．Britain D．India ‎ ‎70．The main idea of the passage is .‎ ‎ A．pollution and climate changes B．economic losses ‎ ‎ C．flooding and landslides D．tight water resources ‎ ‎71．According to the author , which of the following will not be affected by climate change ?‎ ‎ A．Economy . B．Population growth . C．Loss of life . D．Investment .‎ E While the threat of a reappearance of SARS is still there , it is reassuring to learn about the latest developments in vaccine research .‎ More than 1,400 vaccine shots for SARS have been produced in China , and an application for clinical tests has been referred to the State Food and Drug Administration(SFDA), according to a Xinhua report on Sunday .‎ ‎“If everything goes smoothly , conducting of clinical experiments will be agreed before the end of December,” said Yin Hongzhang , head of the Biological Product Section of the SFDA.‎ So far , China is far ahead of other countries in the search for a SARS vaccine , claimed Yin . At that time , volunteers will be sought in Beijing and Guangzhou to take part in experiments using the new vaccine .However , while cheering for the research breakthrough , voices of reason should also be heard .‎ What medical workers should always maintain is a cool head and careful attitude , which are essential in any scientific research . This is especially true when conducting experiments on human beings , because they are directly concerned with the volunteers’ health and even their lives ,and also because knowledge of the deadly virus is still to limited .‎ Media reports indicate that members of the public are reacting actively to the news of selecting volunteers and are expressing their readiness . Their courage is well worth our admiration . The trust they are placing in these medical researchers is the biggest support of their work .‎ The researchers have no other choice but to be highly cautious in the expected experiments . The safety of volunteers should always be the first consideration .Scientists from different countries have been put in a race in uncovering the mystery surrounding the virus . But to play a leading role should by no means be the ultimate pursuit（最终目标）of the scientific workers . It is people’s safety and health that remain the biggest concerns .‎ While there are still so many mysteries to be solved , it is too early to celebrate .‎ ‎(China Daily November 25 , 2003)‎ ‎72．According to the passage , which of the following is not true ?‎ ‎ A．The developments in vaccine research in SARS are encouraging .‎ ‎ B．More than 1,400 vaccine shots for SARS have been applied to clinical test .‎ ‎ C．China is now leading in the search for a SARS vaccine .‎ ‎ D．Experiments using the new vaccine will be carried out only in Beijing and Guangzhou .‎ ‎73．From the passage , we could see that the author’s attitude towards the new vaccine is quite .‎ ‎ A．praising B．critical C．matter-of –fact D．humorous ‎ ‎74．Which of the following may serve as the best title ?‎ ‎ A．Keep a Cool Head While Fighting SARSB．B. Breakthrough in Fighting SARS ‎ C．A Leading Role in Fighting SARS D．Volunteers Wanted While Fighting SARS ‎ ‎75．The underlined word cautious most probably means .‎ ‎ A．cheerful B．dutiful C．helpful D．careful ‎ ‎★专题（13） A ‎ For years, business people in Western Europe were worried. They knew they could not compete against business from the U.S.. The United States is much larger and had many more resources than any Western European countries Some European people realized that the European nations need to join together to help each other. If they could forget their language differences and the differences in customs, they might become strong competition against other countries.‎ In 1958, six of the European countries--- Belgium, the Netherlands, Luxembourg, France, Germany and Italy got together and decided to cooperate. They called their group the European Economic Community, or the Common Market. These countries agreed to join their resources together.‎ Within a few years, the European Economic Community had worked so well that its members were more prosperous than many other European nations. Soon, other nations began to realize the advantage of the Common Market. Today the Common Market includes most of the important countries in Western Europe. It is helping Western Europe to again take its place as a leader among the industrial nations of the world.‎ ‎56. From the passage we know the U.S. is much richer than ________ in resources.‎ A. any other Western European countries B. any other country in Western Europe C. any country in Western Europe D. every country in Europe ‎57. The members of the European Economic Community have developed fast because they ___.‎ A. share their resources and produce more goods B. can again take the place as a leader in the world C. forget the differences in their languages and customs D. have become strong competition against the U.S.‎ ‎58. Which statement is true?‎ A. The Common Market is only a political association.‎ B. The Common Market is an economic and political association C. The Common Market is only an economic association D. The Common Market is neither an economic association nor a political one.‎ ‎59. In order to ______ the Western European countries decided to cooperate.‎ A. join together to found a united country B. help each other to smooth away the differences in customs C. work and act together for common purpose D. work together and fight against the U.S.‎ B Ellis Island is located in New York Harbor. Ellis Island is open daily year round from 9:‎30 a.m. to 5 p.m., with extended hours during summer. It is closed December 25. There is no admission charge to Ellis Island; but donations are gratefully accepted. ‎ At Your Fingertips Park information (212) 363-7620‎ Emergencies (212) 363-3260‎ Ferryboat information (212) 269-5755‎ Lost and found (212)363-7620‎ Dining, gifts & audio tour 344-0996‎ Transportation Statue of Liberty and Ellis Island Ferry; Boats leave from Battery Park, Manhattan, and from Liberty State Park, New Jersey. They run about every 30 to 45 minutes beginning at 9:‎15 a.m.‎ ‎(The time for ferry is changeable)‎ Hours: May vary; call the number above Closed: December 25‎ Ferry fees (includes Liberty and Islands) adults, $7; senior citizens, $6; Children (age 3~17), $5. (Group rates are available for 25 or more adults.) ‎ ‎60. In summer, visitors will have ______ to visit Ellis Island. ‎ ‎ A. a limited time B. a longer time C. a shorter time D. a wonderful time ‎ ‎61. Which number would you call if our friend were suddenly ill? ‎ A. (212)344-0996 B. (212)363‎-7620 C. (212) 363-3260 D. (212) 269-5755 ‎ ‎62. Which of the following is NOT true. ‎ A. People can visit Ellis Island free of charge.‎ ‎ B. The boats departure time from Battery Park is at 9:15 all the year round.‎ C. Ferry fees for children are cheaper than for adults.‎ D. Ferry fees for group visitors can be reduced. ‎ ‎63. We may infer from the passage that______. ‎ ‎ A. visitors prefer to go to Ellis Island by boat B. there are more visitors in winter ‎ C. Ellis Island is open every day . Boat is the only transportation to Ellis Island ‎ C You get all sorts of demands, and the mark of a good hotel is to supply whatever is asked for without sounding surprised. If a guest asks for rubbers gloves, you don’t ask why. You say, “No problem. What color do you want?”‎ There have been some demands which, much as I would have liked to fill, I couldn’t. A Japanese businessman, for example, thought the manager of a hotel was like his girl friend so he asked me to marry him to the woman he loved. There was one time, however, we did help out. A young man thought that if he asked his girlfriend to marry him at the Ritz (一家以豪华著称的瑞士大旅馆) she would say yes. He asked us to put the ring in a cake, and she accepted. ‎ Top hotels are used more and more to impress. They are used for doing business. If you’ve got something to sell, take your clients (客户) to the best hotel where the surroundings are quite helpful. A friend of mine working at Savoy Hotel tells the story about a man who gave him 5 pounds to say “Good morning, Mr. Smith” when he walked through the door with two other men. This he did, and could hear Mr. Smith saying, “I do wish they would leave me alone at this place.”‎ ‎ According to Julian Payne, the most powerful people in any hotel are the porters, who carry bags for hotel guests. “Porters can do almost anything. They can get you tables at the best restaurants or tickets for a popular concert. Don’t ask me how they do it or what their deal is because I don’t know. Most of them have been there for years. They know more about the history of the hotel and the guests than anyone else. They are invaluable. A head porter will come in even on his day off so he can say hello to someone he remembers visiting the hotel years ago.”‎ ‎64. When guests ask for something strange, the manager of a good hotel would think ______.‎ ‎ A. how he can meet their needs B. why they have such demands ‎ C. what problems the hotels has D. who is the best person to go to ‎ ‎65. Why are the porters considered the most powerful people in expensive hotels?‎ ‎ A. They sell tickets for concerts. B. They can complete difficult tasks.‎ ‎ C. They know the history of hotels. D. They usually work in a hotel for a long time.‎ ‎66. Which of the following examples explains “we did help out”?‎ ‎ A. The hotel bought a ring for a young lady. B. A Japanese married the woman he loved.‎ ‎ C. The manager once acted as a captain. D. A young lady agreed to marry her boyfriend.‎ ‎67. By saying “I do wish they would leave me alone at this place”, Mr. Smith ______.‎ A. showed that he disliked such people at the hotel B. gave the impression that he was a constant guest C. tried to make his clients feel sorry for him D. sounded as if he was tired of such greeting ‎ D Suppose a key man in your firm had just met with a terrible accident. The doctor tells you that this man upon whom you depend for directing sales, checking your books or for performing some other important roles will be laid up for months. You’d have to replace him, wouldn’t you? And probably at a pay about equal to his? ‎ Then you’d be faced with double paying for one job because stopping the pay of an injured man would simply be out of the question.‎ You can prevent this kind of unproductive out going on your payroll by providing your key man with the protection of Travelers Business Accident Insurance!--- This insurance provides total medical expense and a weekly income in case a key man is disabled for some time. Should the disability prove everlasting, and income for life is certainty. Why not make out a list of your key men now? Then get together with Travelers ‎ Insurance Company, and let us tell you how little it costs to apply this much needed protection to your business.‎ Write and we’ll serve you! ‎ ‎68. The above is most probably ______.‎ ‎ A. a report B. a letter. C. an announcement D. an advertisement ‎69. What is really true according to the above? ‎ A. Travelers Insurance Company provides services of accident insurance.‎ ‎ B. An important person of the firm has just had an accident.‎ ‎ C. Accident Insurance will protect the important person from accident.‎ ‎ D. Unfortunately the important person has become disabled.‎ ‎70. Whom might the writing be mainly for?‎ ‎ A. An important person in a firm. B. An employee of a firm. ‎ C. The boss of a company. D. Readers of a newspaper.‎ ‎71. Why would the pay be doubled? ‎ A. Because two persons are doing one job of the same.‎ ‎ B. Because the important job is worth double pay.‎ ‎ C. Because it is necessary that the injured person should be paid.‎ D. Because the double pay is for two persons.‎ ‎72. Travelers Insurance Company ______ for a person insured. ‎ A. will pay for all the cost of life B. will pay the weekly income or even that of lifetime ‎ C. won’t get much from the firm D. will provide everlasting pension as well as medical expense ‎ ‎ E On its departure from Edwards Air Force Base in California on December 14, 1986, the Voyager’s success seemed doubtful. The plane taxied to the very end of the runway before slowly becoming airborne. The tips of its wings dragged limply on the ground. With this menacing takeoff, the Voyager started on its history making flight around the world.‎ Circling the globe without stopping had been done before. However, the Voyager was the first plane to fly around the world without refueling.‎ To carry enough fuel for such a trip required a plane designed for efficiency. The wings of the Voyager are light and flexible, so flexible that they flap (拍动), bowing at a 12 meter arc. In rough air the plane pitches and rolls, like a row-boat in heavy swells.‎ To keep the plane light, the cockpit has only one seat. The crew, made up of Jeana Yeager and Dick Ruyan, had to roll over each other to switch off piloting duties. Finally, to maintain maximum efficiency, the plane can’t fly faster than ‎200km/hr. On average it goes no faster than a race car in the Indy 500. At this speed, it took nine cramped (难忍的) days to circle the globe. The journey of the Voyage was as much a testimony to human endurance as it was to innovative engineering.‎ The Voyager’s route was planned to avoid two dangers: rough weather and unpredictable or hostile countries. Even with the careful planning, the crew ran into both. They had to pass close by a hurricane, at one point doing a 180-degree turn to avoid heavy turbulence (猛烈地、无规则地气流). Refused emergency permission to fly over Vietnam, the Voyager skirted dangerously close to a wall of thunderstorms, looming more than 25,000 meters high. They suffered a broken wing tip before they even left the ground and came uncomfortably close to crashing in the 11th hour.‎ Limping home on dangerous low fuel tanks, the Voyager cruised over Edwards Air Force Base early on December 23, 1986. Thousands of people came out to watch the historic landing.‎ Today the Voyager is on display at the National Air and Space Museum in Washington, D.C.. It hangs with planes of other famous and daring pilots who dared to do the undoable.‎ ‎73. Which question is NOT answered in the reading?‎ A. What problems did the Voyager have on its trip around the world?‎ B. Why is the Voyager’s cockpit very small?‎ C. How much does the Voyager weight?‎ D. Where and where did the Voyager take off ‎74. Which statement can be inferred from the information in the reading?‎ A. Many planes have circled the globe without stopping.‎ B. It is possible to refuel a plane while it is in the air.‎ C. The Voyager didn’t use any fuel on its trip around the world.‎ D. Most people came out to watch the historic landing.‎ ‎75. According to the passage, Jeana Yeager and Dick Rutan ________.‎ ‎ A. took turns piloting the Voyager B. had a comfortable trip ‎ C. didn’t leave their seats on the trip D. were very excited ‎ ‎★专题（14）‎ A ‎ It was midnight in Paris and we were rolling toward the Avenue Bosguet. As we came to the Pont Alexander Ⅲ， the cab slowed down ,for the traffic light was red against us ,and then ,without stopping ,we sailed through the red light in a sudden burst of speed .The same performance was repeated at the Alma Bridge .As I paid the driver ,I asked him why he had driven through two red lights .‎ ‎ “You ought to be ashamed of yourself ,breaking the law and endangering your life that way,”I protested（抗议）.‎ ‎ He looked at me ,astonished . “Ashamed of myself ? .I am a law—abiding （遵纪守法的）citizen and have no desire to get killed either .” He cut me off before I could protest .‎ ‎“No, just listen to me before you complain. What did I do ?Went through a red light. Well ,did you ever stop to consider what a red light is ,what it means?”‎ ‎ “Certainly ,” I replied . “I t is a stop signal and means that traffic is falling in the opposite direction.”‎ ‎ “Half—right,” said the driver , “but incomplete .It is only an automatic signal .And it does not mean that there is cross traffic .Did you see any cross traffic during our trip ?Of course not .I slowed down the light ,looked carefully to the right and to the left .Not another car on streets at this hour .Well ,then !What would you have me do ?Should I stop like a dumb animal because an automatic ,brainless machine turns red every forty seconds ?No , monsieur （先生）,” he thundered ,hitting the door with a huge fist . “I am a man ,not a machine .I have eyes and a brain and judgement ,given by God . It would be a sin （过失）against nature to surrender（使屈服）them to the dictates of a machine .Ashamed of myself ,you say I would only be ashamed of myself if I let those blinking lamps do my thinking for me .Good night ,monsieur.”‎ ‎ Is this bad ,or is this good? Frankly I am no longer sure .I never doubted that it was wrong to drive through a red light ,but now I find my old Anglosaxon standards somewhat shaken.‎ ‎56．At the Alma Bridge .‎ ‎ A．the writer stopped the cab and paid the driver B．the cab went through a red light again ‎ C．there was a performance the writer had already watched ‎ ‎ D．the writer began to scold the driver ‎ ‎57．The chief reason that the driver dared to drive through the red light was that .‎ ‎ A．he found there was no cross traffic there and then ‎ ‎ B．he thought it a shame to be controlled by a machine ‎ ‎ C．he knew no others would see him at this hour ‎ ‎ D．he didn’t trust any brainless machine ‎58．According to the passage ,the driver thought what he had done as .‎ ‎ A．law-abiding B．law-breaking ‎ ‎ C．something to be proud of D．something to be ashamed of ‎ ‎59．The writer is probably .‎ ‎ A．an old man B．a French person C．an English person D．an American B The view over a valley of a tiny village with thatched（草盖的）roof cottages around a church ;a drive through a narrow village street lined with thatched cottages painted pink or white ;the sight over the rolling hills of a pretty collection of thatched farm buildings-these are still common sights in parts of England .Most people will agree that the thatched roof is an essential part of the attraction of the English countryside.‎ Thatching is in fact the oldest of all the building crafts practiced in the British Isles. Although thatch has always been used for cottage and farm buildings ,it was once used for castles and churches ,too.‎ Thatching is a solitary （独自的）craft ,which often runs in families .The craft of thatching as it is practiced today has changed very little since the Middle Ages .Over 800 full-time thatchers are employed in England and Wales today ,keeping and renewing the old roofs as well as thatching newer houses .Many property owners choose thatch not only for its beauty but because they know it will keep them cool in summer and warm in winter.‎ In fact ,if we look at developing countries ,over half the world lives under thatch ,but they all do it in different ways .People in developing countries are often unwinlling to go back to traditional materials and would prefer modern buildings .However, they may lack the money to allow them to get the necessary materials .Their temporary（暂时的）mud huts with thatched roofs of wild grasses often only last six ‎ months .Thatch which has been done the British way lasts from twenty to sixty years ,and is an effective defence against the heat .‎ ‎60．Which of the following remains a special feature of the English coutryside? ‎ ‎ A．Narrow streets lined with pink or white roses. B．Rolling hills with pretty farm buildings.‎ ‎ C．Cottages with thatched roofs. D．Churches with cottages around them.‎ ‎61．What do we know about thatching as a craft?‎ ‎ A．It is a collective activity . B．It is practised on farms all over England.‎ ‎ C．It is quite different from what it used to be.‎ ‎ D．It is in most cases handed down among family members.‎ ‎62．People in developing countries also live under thatch because .‎ A．thatched cottages are a big tourist attraction B．thatched roof houses are the cheapest ‎ C．thatch is an effective defence against the heat .‎ ‎ D．they like thatched houses better than other buildings ‎63．We can learn from the passage that .‎ A．thatched cottages in England have been passed down from ancient times ‎ B．thatching is a building craft first created by the English people ‎ C．the English people have a special liking for thatched houses D．most thatched cottages in England are located on hillsides ‎ C Many people consider spiders（蜘蛛）to be disgusting（讨厌的）creatures that are potentially destructive（破坏的）.However ,you may be amazed to learn that civilization（文明）as we know probably would not be able to exist were it not for spiders .People undoubtedly would die of starvation because insects such as locusts and grasshoppers would destroy grain crops were it not for spiders who eat them .There are plenty of spiders on the earth ,for example ,an acre of land may be inhibited by thousands of spiders.‎ Contrary to what many people believe ,a spider is not an insect .A spider has eight legs ,while an insect has six legs .In addition ,there are only two main divisions in a spider—the head and the thorax ,while an insect has a head ,thorax ,and an abdomen .A spider usually has eight simple eyes ,and has gland ,to produce strands of silk which come out of openings called spinnerets .‎ You also may be surprised to learn that spider silk has been used by man in such devices as astronomical telescopes ,guns and engineers ’ levels .The fibres are excellent for sighting marks .A spider silk is extremely strong and can be either dry or sticky .‎ There are four general types of webs which spiders can make .There are the irregular mesh web ,the orb web ,and the sheet web .A web can also be a combination of several different types .Perhaps the most lovely spider web is the orb web .Engineers believe that the orb web shows the fact that the suspension（悬）bridge actually was invented by the spider .Spiders often can make a web quite quickly ;for example ,it is possible for a spider to weave a large web in only one hour.‎ ‎64．What is the passage mainly concerned with ?‎ A．Civilization and spiders. B．A description of spiders.‎ C．People’s attitudes toward spiders. D．People’s knowledge of spiders.‎ ‎65．Which of the following is true of a spider ?‎ A．A spider has six short legs and two long legs. B．A spider has a head ,a thorax and an abdomen . ‎ C．A spider can produce much useful silk . D．A spider is considered to be an insect .‎ ‎66．Where could this passage most probably be seen?‎ A．On a front page of a newspaper. B．In a magazine for spider specialists .‎ C．In a special report for farmers. D．In a weekly magazine with a large audience.‎ D ‎ A good modern newspaper is an extraordinary piece of reading .It is remarkable first for what it contains ;the range of news from local crime to international politics ,from sport to business to fashion to science ,and the range of comments and special features（特写）as well, from editorial page to feature articles and interviews to criticism of books ,art ,theatre and music .A newspaper is even more remarkable for the way one reads it : never completely ,never straight through ,but always by jumping from here to there ,in and out glancing at one piece ,reading another article all the way through ,reading just a few paragraphs of the next .A good modern newspaper offers a variety to attract many different readers ,but far more than any reader is interested in .What brings this variety together in one place is its topicality（时事性）,its immediate relation to what is happening in your world and your locality now .But immediacy and the speed of ‎ production that goes with it mean also that much of what appears in newspaper has no more than transient（短暂的）value. For all these reasons ,no two people really read the same paper ;what each person does is to put together out of the pages of that day’s paper ,his own selection and sequence（连续）,his own newspaper. For all these reasons ,reading newspapers efficiently ,which means getting what you want from them without missing things you need but without wasting time ,demands skill and self-awareness as you modify and apply the techniques of reading.‎ ‎67．A modern newspaper is remarkable for all the following except its .‎ A．wide coverage B．uniform style C．speed in reporting news D．popularity ‎68．Acording to the passage ,the reason why no two people really read the “same” newspaper is that ___ __.‎ A．people scan for the news they are interested in ‎ B．different people prefer different newspapers C．people are rarely interested in the same kind of news ‎ D．people have different views about what a good newspaper is ‎ ‎69．It can be concluded from the passage that newspaper readers_____.‎ A．apply reading techniques skillfully B．jump from one newspaper to another ‎ C．appreciate the variety of a newspaper D．usually read a newspaper selectively ‎70．A good newspaper offers “a variety” to readers because .‎ A．it tries to serve different readers B．it has to cover things that happen in a certain locality C．readers are difficult to please D．readers like to read different newspapers ‎71．The best title for this passage would be ______.‎ A．The Importance of Newspaper Topicality B．The Characteristics of a Good Newspaper C．The Variety of a Good Newspaper D．Some Suggestions on How to Read a Newspaer E ‎ In the second half of each year ,many powerful storms are born in the tropical Atlantic and Caribbean Sea. Of these ,only about half a dozen produce the strong ,circling winds of 75 miles per hour or more that give them hurricane status ,and several usually make their way to the coast .There they cause millions of dollars of damage ,and bring death to large numbers of people.‎ ‎ The great storms that hit the coast start as innocent circling disturbances（扰乱）hundreds or thousands of miles out to sea .As they travel aimlessly over water warmed by the summer sun ,they are carried westward by the trade winds（信风）.When conditions are just right ,warm ,moist air flows in at the bottom of such a disturbance, moves upward through it and comes out at the top .In the process, the moisture in this warm air produces rain ,and with it the heat is changed into energy in the form of strong winds .As the heat increases ,the young hurricane begins to swirl（旋动）in a counterclockwise（逆时针方向）motion.‎ ‎ The average life of a hurricane is only about nine days ,but is contains almost more power than we can imagine .The energy in the heat released by a hurricane’s rainfall in a single day would satisfy the entire electrical needs of the United States for more than six months .Water ,rather than wind is the main source of death and destruction in a hurricane. A typical hurricane brings 6 to 12-inch downpours resulting in sudden floods .Worst of all is the powerful movement of the sea—the mountains of water moving toward the low—pressure hurricane center ,The water level rises as much as 15 feet above normal as it moves toward shore.‎ ‎72．When does an ordinary tropical storm turn into a hurricane?‎ A．When it begins in the Atlantic and Caribbean Sea. B．When it hits the coastline.‎ C．When it is more than 75 miles per hour. D．When its wind reaches 75 miles per hour.‎ ‎73．What is the worst thing about the hurricane?‎ A．The destructive effect of water. B．The heat it releases.‎ C．It lasts about nine days. D．Strong winds.‎ ‎74．The counterclockwise swirling of the hurricane is brought about by .‎ A．the low pressure center of the storm B．the force of waves of water ‎ C．the trade winds D．the increasing heat ‎75．Which of the following about the hurricane is true?‎ A．It often occurs around June. ‎ B．It is not so powerful as that of storm born in the Caribbean Sea.‎ ‎ C．It usually lasts about nine days . D．It can be easily detected and prevented.‎ ‎★专题（15）‎ A The story begins in 1801. Mr Lockwood has rented a house in Yorkshire, so he goes to visit his new ‎ landlord, Mr Heathcliff, at his house on the moors nearby, Wuthering Heights. He is not welcomed and the house is full of frightening dogs, but he decides to return the following afternoon, although a snowstorm is beginning.‎ This time he is met by an old servant, Joseph, and a beautiful young woman. He thinks she is Heathcliff’s wife, but she does not invite him to tea, and when Heathcliff comes in, asks his permission before pouring Lockwood a cup. When Lockwood mistakes her for Heathcliff’s wife, he is told she is his daughter-in-law, so he supposes she is married to a rough young man who has come in and is sitting silently in the background. This makes the young man angry, and Heathcliff says he is not his son. No one makes the mystery clear, so Lockwood asks for help to find the way home. Since no one will do anything for him, he takes a lantem to light his way over the moors but is attacked by the dogs. Heathcliff just laughs, but the maid Zillah, rescues him and puts him in a bedroom in the house without telling her master.‎ ‎56．Mr Lockwood has rented a house in Yorkshire, .‎ ‎ A．but he knows nothing about his landlord B．and he wants to find out some of the landlord’s secrets ‎ C．although he hates the cold weather there D．because he will stay there for a long time ‎57．Besides frightening dogs, the landlord’s house is full of .‎ ‎ A．servants B．strangers C．laughter D．mystery ‎58．In the landlork’s house, Mr Lockwood finds most people there .‎ ‎ A．helpful B．rude C．calm D．funny B Safeburn Planning a home demands great care. The fireplace should be distinctive (有特色) and elegant （美观）, with a fire that looks like a fire, giving your family the warmth and protection they need.‎ Every year 7,000 people die in fires in Britain, and hundreds of them are little children. Thousands more are disfigured for life.‎ When you choose a fire, choose Safeburn. It gives you the atmosphere of home comfort you are looking for, and sets your mind at rest.‎ Caithness Pride Caithness Pride. The ninth Duke of Caithness would only drink the best whisky. So he built his own private still, in the heart of the Highlands, with the fresh water running in the stream nearby. When we came into possession of the still, we paid the Duke’s heirs（后嗣）a lot of money for it. But it was worth it. After all, what was good for the Duke is too good to be kept a secret.‎ ‎59．The above two passages are .‎ ‎ A．the covers for two books B．the descriptions about two pictures ‎ C．the advertisements for two pictures D．the advice on home planning and whisky drinking ‎60．Fire can provide people with all the following except .‎ ‎ A．heat B．home comfort C．great care D．peace ‎61．In most British houses, you won’t miss seeing fireplaces in their sitting rooms, which suggests in British people’s family life fire is very .‎ ‎ A．warm B．important C．dangerous D．distinctive and elegant ‎62．From the second passage we’ve learnt that to make good whisky people need .‎ ‎ A．a famous person’s name B．a private still C．good water D．good land ‎63．In the second passage, they are trying to make it clear that .‎ ‎ A．their whisky was once drunk by a very famous person ‎ B．their whisky still was built by the ninth Duke of Caithness ‎ C．their whisky is not expensive D．their whisky is second to none C Ray Charles was born on September 23rd, 1930 into a poor family in Georgia, U.S.A. His father was a railwayman who had to travel a lot, so Ray was brought up mainly by his mother, who, though not very well educated, was full of common sense. When he went blind after a serious sickness at the age of seven, it was his mother who helped him to face up to the situation. She told him he was blind, not stupid, and that he had lost his eyes but not his mind, she made him sweep floors and chop wood to show him he was by no means helpless. She used to tell him that some day she would not be there to help him, and that then he would have to look after himself.‎ Soon after he went blind, Ray began to take an interest in music. A neighbour showed him how to play simple tunes on the piano, and he had a love for the music he heard, played and sung in the local church. In the blind school the schoolteachers encouraged him to study a variety of instruments, Then, one more blow ‎ came. His mother died suddenly, and Ray, who loved her deeply, was so shocked that for two weeks he was unable to eat. It was another neighbour who finally managed to persuade him that his mother would have wanted him to go on, and reminded him of how she had believed in him. When his father died a year later, Ray knew he was strong enough to keep going on his own.‎ Between the ages of fifteen and seventeen, Ray worked with bands in Florida, but in 1948, while still only seventeen, he decided that there wasn’t much future for him there and decided to go to Seattle, in the north-west of the U.S.A. ‎ Ray arrived in Seattle and went to a small hotel to sleep. When he woke up, he was hungry. It was two o’ clock in the morning, and everywhere was closed. Ray managed to find a small club and knocked on the door. A man on the door said they had no food, but “we’ ve got a talent night on here,” he added. Ray saw his chance and told the man he could play the piano and sing. The man tried to discourage him, but he was finally guided to the piano and sang a song. As he came off the stand, a man stopped him and said, “I’m from the Elks Club. I think you’ve got a weekend job.” That was Tuesday. By Friday he was working regularly, and after that he never looked back. It was the beginning of his climb to stardom. ‎ ‎64．Although he was blind, Ray’s mother made him sweep floors and chop wood for the purpose of making him . A．helpless B．independent C．encouraged D．useful ‎65．What played the most important part in Ray’s life?‎ ‎ A．His interest and talent in music. B．His work with bands in Florida.‎ ‎ C．His neighbours’ help and his teachers’ encouragement. D．His mother’s training.‎ ‎66．What happened that made him extremely sad when he was a teenager?‎ ‎ A．He went blind. B．He lost his mother.‎ ‎ C．He became fatherless. D．The man tried to discourage him.‎ ‎67．Ray got his big opportunity to success .‎ ‎ A．in Georgia B．in the blind school C．in Florida D．in Seattle D Electric shock Injuries caused by electric shock are fairly common. When a person has received an electric shock, no one should go near him/her until the current has been turned off. If a shock occurring at work or at home causes someone to lose consciousness（知觉）, electrical connection must be broken before anyone tries to give assistance. You should either turn off the switch at the mains or, if that is not possible, push the person away with a dry piece of wood.‎ Treatment of shock Look out for signs of shock. People who have been injured or who may have lost a lot of blood, or those who have had heart attacks, may be in deep shock. The signs to look for are faintness, paleness, a moist, sticky skin, shallow, rapid breathing and a fast but weak heartbeat.‎ Shock can prove fatal, and it is essential to do something to prevent its developing. The best way to treat or prevent shock is to keep the patient lying down, better with the legs higher than the head; if possible, raise the lower part of the body on a rolled-up packet or similar object. Make the patient as comfortable as possible, loosening any tight clothing, and comfort him/her because fright increases the effects of shock.‎ ‎68．Match the pictures with the passages.‎ ‎ ‎ A．Picture 2. Electric shock; Picture 3. Treatment of shock ‎ B．Picture 1. Electric shock; Picture 4. Treatment of shock ‎ ‎ C．Picture 4. Electric shock; Picture 2. Treatment of shock ‎ D．Picture 3. Electric shock; Picture 1. Treatment of shock ‎69．The above passages and pictures have something to do with .‎ ‎ A．how to deal with difficulties B．how to do first aid ‎ C．how to face danger D．how to match pictures with passages ‎70．What would happen if you didn’t turn off the current when you had to treat an unconscious ‎ person who had just received an electric shock?‎ ‎ A．He would regain his consciousness soon. B．He would die soon.‎ ‎ C．Electrical connection would be broken. D．You would be in danger of getting the shock yourself.‎ ‎71．Of the following adjectives chosen from above, which one has the meaning of “causing death”? A．Fatal. B．Sticky. C．Essential. D．Unconscious.‎ E Sir,‎ The majority of your readers must have been surprised and shocked to read a letter from Mr R. Hogg, published in last Wednesday’s Herald. Mr. Hogg seems to think that his own convenience and that of motorists in general are the only things that matter in our city.‎ I would have more sympathy（同情）with Mr Hogg if he just made suggestions to improve the situation. No doubt his problems would be partly solved if the local government built a multi-storey car park in the city center, instead of encouraging motorists to use public transport. All the same, judging from the tone of Mr Hogg’s letter, I suspect that motorists who are so careless of pedestrians’（行人）safety that they would rather park their cars on the pavement than hold up the traffic would probably be too lazy to use a multi-storey car park if they had to walk a few hundred yards to their destination（目的地）afterwards.‎ My main reason for writing, however, is much more important. Does Mr Hogg realize that, according to figures issued by the Department of Transport, 13,000 people were knocked down in Britain last year because of cars being illegally parked either on the pavement or on crossings? In fact, although the total pedestrian casualty（伤亡事故）rate has fallen over the last ten years, there has been an increase in accidents caused when pedestrians have to step out into the road to avoid parked cars on the pavement and cannot see oncoming traffic.‎ I cannot share Mr Hogg’s view that the government have paid little attention to “long-suffering motorists”; and I think the punishment for dangerous parking should be made severe enough to stop all motorists from breaking the law in this way.‎ ‎ A. WALKER,‎ ‎ Proudfoot Lane, Carchester ‎72．The letter above is written in answer to the letter by .‎ ‎ A．an editor B．a certain Mr R. Hogg C．some readers D．some motorists ‎73．The topic for the two letters is .‎ ‎ A．parking problems in the city center B．building a multi-storey car park in the city center ‎ C．public transport D．the increase in accidents caused by parked cars on the pavement ‎74．What Mr. A. Walker does want to make known in his letter is that .‎ ‎ A．the total pedestrian casualty rate has fallen ‎ B．careless parking may cause serious traffic accidents ‎ C．the convenience of motorists in general matters much ‎ D．the safety of pedestrians matters little ‎75．In Mr A. Walker’s opinion, serverer punishment should be given to .‎ ‎ A．all the careless motorists B．all the law breakers ‎ C．all who step out into the road D．all who do dangerous parking ‎★专题（16）‎ A ‎ An American man from Las Vegas opened a dog and cat hotel recently. Pets can rest on soft rugs(小地毯),watch television and get to know some new friends while their masters have fun in the city.‎ ‎ The American Dog and Cat Hotel opened officially on a Wednesday in March. There is everything a pet could want-and more.‎ ‎ “We hear time and time again. ‘This is so nice , I’ d like to stay here.’” the hotel manager said in an interview. He believed that people would want for their pets what they wanted for themselves.‎ ‎ Kennels (狗舍)have been around for a long time, but nowadays masters want to put their loved pets in some better places, he added.‎ ‎ He said the cats and dogs like to watch images(图象)on TV although they may not understand them. Anyway, they don’t have to know Britney Spears or Emimem to enjoy the pop music. Also, “The dogs don’t know it is a rug, but they know it is soft, ”he said.‎ ‎ Pet masters can book a dog suite(套房)for $‎79 a night. Baths and other services are also offered.‎ ‎ The pet hotel manager believes that all the animal lovers in the world will love this great idea.‎ ‎56．By “—and more” in the last sentence of the 2nd paragraph the writer means that _______.‎ ‎ A．there’re also things for the pet masters B．some of the things are unnecessary ‎ C．there’re things a pet cannot fully enjoy D．all the things are plenty in amount ‎57．Who made the expression that “This is so nice, I’d like to stay here.”?‎ ‎ A．Some pets B．Some pet masters C．The hotel manager D．The interviewer ‎58．In the pet masters’ opinion, the kennels are _________.‎ ‎ A．too old to live in B．not good enough ‎ C．just an equal choice D．no longer in existence ‎59．The underlined paragraph suggests that _________.‎ ‎ A．some pets know some pop stars B．”rug” is a difficult word for a pet to learn ‎ C．pets enjoy things the same way humans do D．pets enjoy things at a sensational level B ‎ A few days ago, he was just Colonel（上校）Yang; few people knew his name or recognized his face. But last Thursday, when he came back to the earth after a 21-hour trip to space, Yang Liwei’s smile was seen across the world above the magic words: “China’s first spaceman”.‎ ‎ The 38-year-old astronaut was sent into space at ‎9 a.m. last Wednesday by China’s Shenzhou V spacecraft, which orbited the earth 14 times. He landed safely at 6:‎23 a.m. the next day, making China the third country to successfully send a person into space, after the former Soviet Union and the US.‎ ‎ Yang was satisfied with his job. “I have seen many landing scenes before on video, and I think ours was one of the most successful,” he said on a special plane to Beijing after landing.‎ ‎ Born into an ordinary family in Liaoning Province, he became a pilot in the Chinese Air Force in 1987, spending 1,350 hours in the air. He joined the Chinese space programme 11 years later.‎ ‎ While in space, Yang recorded everything he saw as well as showing China’s national flag and the United Nation’s flag to the people watching on TV at home. He also ate a meal of diced chicken and fried rice, before taking a 3-hour nap. The whole project went according to plan, but space exploration is not as easy as it seems. Anyone who saw the destruction of the US space shuttle Columbia in February this year will know that Yang took a great risk.‎ ‎ He experienced extremely high temperatures, while the gravitational forces（重力）on takeoff and landing were strong enough to force tears from his eyes. He has spent five years training to become a spaceman. “I eat all of my meals at the space programme’s dining room and have never been able to take my son to kindergarten,” he said. “I’ve never met his teachers.” But becoming China’s first spaceman has made all the effort worthwhile.‎ ‎ “When I boarded the spacecraft for the first time, I couldn’t help feeling excited”, he said. “I decided that I had to fly it.”‎ ‎ To Chinese people, Yang is now a hero. One visitor to a Xinhua News Agency Online Forum（新华社网上论坛）said: “Yang’s trip is a giant leap forward for China.” Officials say the next Shenzhou will be launched by 2005. China also plans to develop space walking and a space lab. （From 21st Century, China Daily） 60．How long did each of Yang’s orbits take on average?‎ ‎ A．1 hour B．1.5 hours C．6 hours D．14 hours ‎61．Why did the writer mention the gravitational forces on takeoff and landing?‎ ‎ A．Because it was the most dangerous part of the flight.‎ ‎ B．Because it was a very special experience.‎ ‎ C．To show how much training he had for the flight.‎ ‎ D．To show that Yang is brave.‎ ‎62．Which of the following is true according to the passage?‎ ‎ A．The space flight showed China did better in space exploration than the US.‎ ‎ B．It is reported that Yang Liwei will do a space walk in the year 2005.‎ ‎ C．It is impossible for Yang Liwei to walk around in his first space exploration.‎ ‎ D．At the age of 28, Mr Yang Liwei became a pilot in the Chinese Air Force.‎ ‎63．What is the main idea of the story?‎ ‎ A．China’s first manned space flight. B．A hero with great courage.‎ ‎ C．The first Chinese man in space. D．How Yang Liwei became China’s first spaceman.‎ C ‎ A story from the Bible tells of old Babylon, where the men decided to build a tower that would touch the ‎ sky. But God was unhappy, and he made them speak different languages. They couldn’t understand each other, so their dream never came true.‎ ‎ Yet the dream remains alive: if all men speak the same language, they can do anything. L.L. Zamenhof from Poland was among the men who pursue this dream. He developed Esperanto（世界语）between 1877 and 1885.‎ ‎ As the most successful man-made world language, it is spoken by over two million people around the world. Last month, the World Esperanto Congress（大会）,dealing with language rights, ended in Sweden. The 2004 conference will be held in Beijing. Most Esperanto speakers are in Central and Eastern Europe and in East Asia, particularly Chinese mainland.‎ ‎ Esperanto has two advantages . First, it’s easy. Each letter has exactly one sound and there are just 16 basic grammar rules. The second advantage is that it belongs to no one country. But Esperanto has only reached a small number of people compared with natural languages widely used around the world-such as English or Chinese. While these languages are deeply connected with their nations and cultures, Esperanto doesn’t have this background.‎ Will Esperanto really become a global language? It remains a question.‎ ‎64．The writer tells us a story at the beginning to .‎ ‎ A．explain why men have been making the effort to create a language shared by all ‎ ‎ B．explain why men now speak different languages ‎ C．show the relationship between man and God ‎ D．prove that language is very important ‎65．What does the underlined word “pursue” in the second paragraph mean?‎ ‎ A． “Realize”. B． “Work for” C． “Be against”. D． “Follow”.‎ ‎66．What is the basic difference between Esperanto and English?‎ ‎ A．More people speak English than Espernto. B．Esperanto words are easier to spell.‎ ‎ C．Esperanto has fewer grammar rules. D．Esperanto is not supported by any country or culture.‎ ‎67．What does the story mainly talk about?‎ ‎ A．Advantages and disadvantages of Esperanto.‎ ‎ B．Men’s dream of sharing the same language.‎ ‎ C．The most successful planned language-Esperanto.‎ ‎ D．Comparison of Esperanto and other languages like English and Chinese.‎ D London-Sheep, like turkeys and ostriches, are not considered the most clever animals. British scientists said last Wednesday humans may have understimated（低估）the wooly creatures. They could be much smarter than we think.‎ Researchers at the Babraham Institute in Cambridge, southern England, have shown that the animals have a good memory system and are extremely good at recognizing faces-which they think is a sure sign of intelligence(cleverness).‎ Behavioral（行为的）scientist Keith Kendrick and his friends trained 20 sheep to recognize and distinguish（区别） 25 pairs of sheep faces and used electrodes（电极）to measure their brain activity, which showed they could remember 50 faces for up to two years.‎ ‎“If they can do that with faces, the fact is that they have to have reasonable intelligence; otherwise, what is the point of having a system for remembering faces and not remembering anything else,” Kendrick said in an interview.‎ So hours of seemingly mindless eating grass may not be so mindless after all.‎ Kendrick believes sheep got their reputation（名声）as dumb(unable to speak) animals because they live in large groups and do not appear to tend about everything.‎ ‎“All animals including humans, once they are frightened, don’t tend to show signs of intelligent action,” he explained.‎ In research reported in the science journal Nature, Kendrick and his team showed that sheep, like humans, have a specialized system in the brain which allows them to distinguish between many different faces which look extremely similar.‎ ‎“The most important finding(of the study) is that they are able, both from a behavioral point of view and from looking at the way the brain is organized, to remember a large number of faces of individual（个体） for a very long time.” Said Kendrick. “It is a very strange system. They are showing similar abilities in many ways to humans.”‎ ‎68．From what Kendrick said in the interview we learn that scientists .‎ ‎ A．have learned a lot about sheep’s intelligence B．have learned little about sheep’s intelligence ‎ C．can’t do anything more about sheep’s memory D．don’t have to research animals’ memory ‎69．As is shown in the passage, .‎ ‎ A．sheep are among the weak animals B．it is not right for people to raise sheep in groups ‎ C．when sheep eat grass in the fields, their minds may be active ‎ ‎ D．if people feel frightened, sheep may become more brave ‎70．When scientists found that sheep show similar abilities in many ways to humans they may think it . A．worrying B．moving C．frightening D．interesting ‎71．If this passage comes from a newspaper, in which page may it be?‎ ‎ A．Culture. B．Education. C．Science. D．Society.‎ E More Shanghai people are renting cars to travel over the coming Spring Festival, eastday. com reported today.‎ Most cars in large local car-rental companies such as Yongda, Anji and Dazhong are leased(=rented) so far with the Buick Sport Utility Vehicle（SUV） in high demand.‎ Santana and Jetta used to be the most popular car models rented by Shanghai people for travel, while the high-end Buick models have generated(=caused)great interest among locals renting cars this year. However, the rent on a Buick GL or GS model is between 650 yuan and 750 yuan a day, nearly double those of the Santana and Jetta cars.‎ Compared with Santana, Buick looks better, has greater capabilities and is safer and more comfortable, said a car leaser. “I’ don’t mind paying a higher cost for a Buick to enjoy the traditional holiday,” he said.‎ SUV cars are very popular in the car renting market, according to some car-rental firms.‎ ‎“All the 31 Buick GL8 SUV cars were leased out several days ago,” said an employee with the Shanghai Yongda Car Rental Company.‎ Local people prefer to go traveling with a group of friends, so SUV cars are a better choice, said an industry analyst（分析家）. Moreover, SUV cars are safer on rugged and rough roads, the analyst said.‎ According to the data（数据）, most people rented cars of seven days, a lesser number rented them for two or three days.‎ ‎ (Wendy Zhang)‎ ‎72．The cars mentioned in the passage fall into three major brands（品牌）, which are .‎ ‎ A．Yongda, Anji and Dazhong B．Buick, Santana and Jetta ‎ C．Yongda, Santana and Jetta D．SUV, GL and GS ‎73．If you want to rent a Santana for as long as most leasers do, how much should you expect to spend? A．About 1200 yuan. B．About 2100 yuan.‎ ‎ C．About 2500 yuan. D．About 3500 yuan.‎ ‎74．The underlined sentence “Buick…has greater capabilities…” in Paragraph 4 may mean that Buick is . A．able to run faster B．able to seat more passengers ‎ C．more powerful D．more valuable ‎75．What does the underlined phrase “the 31 Buick GL8 SUV cars” in the reading passage refer to?‎ ‎ A．The cars of the 31 Buick GL8 SUV model. B．The 31 cars of the GL8 or SUV model of Buick.‎ ‎ C．The 31 cars of the Buick or GL8 SUV model. D．The 31 cars of the GL8 SUV model of Buick. ‎ ‎★专题（17）‎ A Jean Driscoll can go faster in her wheelchair than the world’s best marathoners can run!‎ In April, Jean finished the Boston Marathon in 1 hour 34 minutes 22 seconds. That’s about 33 minutes faster than the winning male runner! She competed on the track, too. She was second in the 800 meter wheelchair race at the 1992 Olympics.‎ Jean doesn’t like to be told she’s brave. “I’m in sports because I’m a competitive person!” Jean was born with spina befida, a birth illness that damages the spine（脊椎）. She began to use a wheelchair to get around in high school. Then she tried wheelchair race and was amazed.” Players banged each other and fell out of their chair,” she says, “It was fun.”‎ Jean tried other wheelchair sports. At the University of Illinois, her wheelchair basketball team won two national titles.‎ Now Jean coaches and teaches. She tries to get people to set goals. “When I sign my autograph（亲笔签名）,says Jean, “I write, dream big and work hard.”‎ ‎56．What made Jean take part in sports?‎ ‎ A．She was brave. B．She was competitive. C．She was strong. D．She was disabled.‎ ‎57．What kind of education did she receive?‎ ‎ A．High school. B．Junior middle school. C．High education. D．Primary school.‎ ‎58．What is Jean’s advice on how to succeed?‎ ‎ A．Work hard. B．Hope for the best.‎ ‎ C．Dream a lot. D．Have great wishes and work hard.‎ B Among the four skills in learning English, which one of these is the “odd-man-out”? The answer is speaking. The other three you can do alone on your own. But you can’t really speak alone! Speaking to yourself can be “dangerous” because men in white coats may come and take you away!‎ Where can you find people to speak English? And how can you practise speaking when you are alone?‎ At school If you pay to go to a language school, you should use the opportunity to speak. If your teacher asks you to speak in pairs or groups with other students, try to say as much as possible. Don’t worry about your mistakes. Just speak!‎ Conversation Clubs Many cities around the world have conversation clubs where people can exchange one language for another. Look in your local newspaper to find a conversation club near you. They are usually free although some may charge a small entrance fee.‎ Shopping Even if you don’t want to buy anything, you can ask questions about products that interest you in a shop. “How much does this cost?” “Can I pay by cheque?” Often you can start a real conversation-and it costs you nothing!‎ Café and Bars There are often American, Britain, Irish and Australian bars in many large cities. If you can find one, you’ll probably meet many people speaking English as a first or second language.‎ Language is all around you Everywhere you go, you find language. Shop names, street names, advertisements, notices, and car numbers… When you walk down the street, practise reading the words and numbers that you see. Say them to yourself. It’s not exactly a conversation, but it will help you to “think” in English. But don’t speak too loud!‎ Songs and Video Repeat the words of an English-language song singing with the music until it becomes automatic. It’s good practice for your memory and for the mouth muscles that you need for English.‎ Above all, speak as much as possible! Make as many mistakes as possible! When you know that you have made a mistake, you know that you have made progress!‎ ‎59．What does “odd-man-out” probably mean according to the passage?‎ ‎ A．Someone or something appearing different from the others.‎ ‎ B．Someone or something standing out of the group.‎ ‎ C．Someone or something arranged in pairs.‎ ‎ D．Someone or something that can be easily mistaken for another ‎60．What might happen if you speak to yourself loudly in public?‎ ‎ A．The police will take you away and punish you.‎ ‎ B．The doctors will force you to stay in hospital.‎ ‎ C．You will have to pay to escape being punished.‎ ‎ D．You will be forbidden to be member of the club.‎ ‎61．In which places can you learn English NOT free of charge?‎ ‎ A．At school, in conversation clubs and café and bars. B．At school, in shops and café bars.‎ ‎ C．In conversation clubs, shops, songs and video. D．In conversation clubs and in the streets.‎ ‎62．Why does the writer say “Make as many mistakes as possible”? Because .‎ ‎ A．everyone will make mistakes in learning English.‎ ‎ B．everyone will meet people speaking English with some mistakes.‎ ‎ C．making mistakes is a must in making progress in learning English.‎ ‎ D．making mistakes can make one realize the importance of speaking ‎63．According to the passage, which way is NOT likely to be accepted by English beginners?‎ ‎ A．Recite poems loudly along the riverside. B．Listen to some English fashion songs and video.‎ ‎ C．Find an Englishman to speak English with. D．In class, try to practise in groups or pairs.‎ C The seas and rivers are being poisoned by radioactive wastes, by chemical discharges and by the dumping of dangerous raw swage(污水). The air we breathe is polluted by smoke and fumes from factories and motor vehicles; even the rain is poisoned.‎ It’s little wonder forests and lakes are being destroyed and everywhere wildlife is disappearing, and yet ‎ the destruction continues.‎ Governments and industries throughout the world are intensifying(加紧) their efforts to extract the earth’s mineral riches and to destroy its living resources.‎ The great rain-forest and the frozen continents alike are seriously threatened, despite（尽管，但是）the warnings of the scientific community and the deep concern of millions of ordinary people.‎ In fact, that we can create environmentally clean industries, use the power of the sun, wind and waves for our energy needs and manage the finite（有限的） resources of the earth in a way that will safeguard our future and protect all the rich variety of life-forms which share this planet with us.‎ ‎64．The main idea of the passage is that .‎ ‎ A．the seas and rivers are being poisoned B．we can protect natural environments ‎ C．the natural world is under violent attack from man ‎ D．governments and industries should be responsible for the destruction of the natural world ‎65．As to the destruction of forest and lakes, the author .‎ ‎ A．is surprised B．is unsure why C．wonders why D．understands why ‎66．Rain-forests are being destroyed because governments and industries .‎ ‎ A．are unaware of what they are doing wrong B．are rich and powerful ‎ C．choose to ignore criticism D．basically care about the environment ‎67．The earth’s resources .‎ ‎ A．should be only for the people B．can be made to last longer ‎ C．will last forever D．belong to just humans and animals D A world of opportunity The New York Times is now better than ever All the more reasons to order home delivery now.‎ NEW-Separate sections for The Arts, Monday through Thursday, and Sports 7 days a week that you can pull out, take with you or pass along.‎ NEW-The House & Home section. Thursday, filled with useful, interesting features and articles about making the most of all sorts of living spaces.‎ NEW-An expanded, two-part Weekend section. Fridays, with more ideas about movies, shows, art exhibitions, outdoor and indoor recreation.‎ Latest news and sports results daily. And of course, daily world and national news, Sunday’s special sections and all the other great features you’ll continue to find in The Times.‎ Find out just how much YOU can benefit from The Times everyday.‎ Call I-800-331-1969 or use the postage-paid order card convenient home delivery at 50% off our regular price.‎ ‎68．This is one of the advertisements put for a .‎ ‎ A．book store B．newspaper C．magazine D．restaurant ‎69．Detailed information about films can be found in section.‎ ‎ A．The Arts B．The Dining In, Dining Out C．The House & Home D．Weekend ‎70．The advertisement tells us The Times is .‎ ‎ A．of great benefit B．of little use C．paid D．priceless ‎71．The main idea of this advertisement is .‎ ‎ A．many opportunities will be provided just to those who order home delivery ‎ B．several new sections have been printed separately from now on ‎ C．readers can be well informed of the latest news and sports results ‎ D．people can pick up all the information they are interested in E British society is considered to be divided into three main groups of classes—the upper class, the middle class, and the lower or working class. This is known as the class system and it is important to know something about it if you mean to understand British people and society. Most British people grow up with a deep knowledge and understanding of the class system even if they are not very conscious（意识到的）of it. As a result, more people know which class they belong to and are able to tell which class other people come from by the way they speak, the kind of clothes they wear, their interests and hobbies or even the type of food they eat.‎ Social class is not only about behavior and attitudes. For example, although many upper class people are rich and may own a lot of land, having a lot of money does not necessarily make a person one member of the ‎ upper class. It is also important to come from a particular kind of family, have friends who are considered suitable, have been to a certain type of private school and speak with the right kind of accent. There are people who are poor but who do not think of themselves as working class because their family background, education, political opinions, etc. are basically different from those of most working-class people. Many people do not like the class system but it is impossible to pretend that these differences do not exist or that British people do not sometimes form opinions in this way.‎ ‎72．The idea of the class system in Britain .‎ ‎ A．exists only in the mind of foreigners B．is deeply rooted in the British people ‎ C．is now under attack D．is regarded as a long custom ‎73．If an Englishman has a lot of money, .‎ ‎ A．he belongs to the middle class B．he must be a member of the upper class ‎ C．he is not likely to be from the upper class D．he may buy an upper class title with money ‎74．What does the second paragraph mainly discuss?‎ ‎ A．Many rich people do not belong to the upper class.‎ ‎ B．Today many British people do not like the class system.‎ ‎ C．Many poor people do not consider themselves a slower class.‎ ‎ D．An Englishman’s social class is determined by many factors.‎ ‎75．What would be the best title for the passage?‎ ‎ A．An Unequal Society B．Social Class in Britain ‎ C．British People and Society D．Information about Britain ‎ ★专题（18）‎ A ‎ Like most people, I was brought up to look upon life as a getting. It was not until in my later thirties that I made this important discovery: giving-away makes life so much more exciting. One discovery I made about giving away is that it is almost impossible to give away anything in this world without getting something back, though the return often comes in an unexpected form. One Sunday morning the local post office delivered a letter to my home, though it was addressed to me at my office. I wrote the postmaster a note of appreciation. More than a year later I needed a post office box for‎4 a new business I was starting. I was told at the window that there were boxes left, and that my name would have to go on a long waiting list. As I was about to leave, the postmaster appeared in the doorway. He had overheard our conversation.“Wasn’t it you that wrote us a letter a year ago about delivering a special delivery to your home?”I said it was.“Well, you certainly are going to have a box in this post office if you have to make one for you. You don’t know what a letter like that means to us. We usually get nothing but complains.”‎ ‎56．At first the author looked upon life as a process of getting. He formed this view of life because .‎ ‎ A．other people were selfish B．he thought it exciting to get from others ‎ C．of his early education D．of his character ‎57．The author wrote a note of appreciation to the post office because .‎ ‎ A．he knew what such a note would mean to the post office.‎ ‎ B．he had discovered giving-away made life all the more exciting ‎ C．he believed he would get something back by doing so ‎ D．the post man delivered an important letter in time ‎58．When the author needed a post-office box., .‎ ‎ A．many had applied for post-office box before him B．he asked to put his name on a waiting list ‎ C．he tried to see the postmaster D．he wrote the postmaster a note of appreciation ‎59．The postmaster promised .‎ ‎ A．to make a new post-office box for the author B．to let the author have a post-office box ‎ C．to include the author’s name on the list D．to deliver the author’s mail to his home ‎60．The postmaster interfered because .‎ ‎ A．he overheard this conversation B．he had received a lot of complaints for lack of post-office box ‎ C．he was thankful for the letter the author had written ‎ D．he was proud of their good service.‎ ‎（B）‎ ‎ We can offer you a place at one of the best universities in Britain. We’ll provide you with a choice of 150 first class courses developed especially to enable you to study in your own time, backed by the Open University’s own special study method-OU supported open learning.‎ ‎ We’ll give you the support of a personal teacher, and the chance to meet your fellow students. You can ‎ take one-off courses, diplomas a degree or a post graduate degree. Subjects available include: Computing, Business Management, Technology, Modern Languages, Social Sciences, English Law, Arts, Science, and Health & Social Welfare.‎ Did you know?‎ ‎·the OU is in the top 15% of all UK universities for teaching quality ‎·25% of all British MBAs come from the OU ‎·Over 30,000 employers have offered chances to their staff on OU courses ‎·40,000 OU students are on line from home ‎·There are nine month courses and new diplomas as well as degrees ‎ AMBA Accredited ‎ ‎ Whether you want to study to improve your jobs or for your own personal interest, there is ‎ almost certainly a course for you. If you haven’t studied for a while, we’ll help you get started. No previous training or degrees are required you just need a lively power of learning and a willingness to learn. It’s real value for money and you can pay by monthly payments.‎ ‎ Open University course materials are of the highest quality and come in a variety of forms, including video and audio tapes as well as texts. The OU leads the world in its use of new technology for learning. A number of courses provide sourse material on CD Rom. What else can the Open University offer you? The best way to find out is to use the coupon below or phone us today.‎ Send for your free instructions now Send to: The Open University, PO Box 625, Milton Keyness MK7‎ Please send me a copy of the courses, Diplomas and BA/BSc Degrees instructions.‎ Please send me a copy of the postgraduate instructions Tick here if you have contacted the OU in the past Title Initials Surname ‎ Address ‎ Postcode ‎ Tel Date of Birth / / ‎ OU Hotline（24 hours）0870 9000 301‎ Website:www.open.ac.UK/advert/‎ ‎61．This is an advertisement of .‎ ‎ A．inquiring English learning B．selling books ‎ C．setting up Open University D．Attracting students ‎62．As a student of the Open University, you don’t need to .‎ ‎ A．buy any course materials B．have lessons all the time at the university ‎ C．choose which course to learn D．pay any money for your study ‎63．The Open University can supply you with .‎ ‎ A．a course for training your English B．a classroom and a library for study ‎ C．different kinds of free instructions D．different jobs to choose from ‎64．We can learn from the text that .‎ ‎ A．OU courses are popular in Britain B．Money for learning must be paid off at one time ‎ C．We can’t telephone the university during the night ‎ D．People can’t be employed without finishing OU courses ‎（C）‎ ‎ Death valley is one of the most famous deserts in the United States, covering a wide area with its alkali（碱性）sand. Almost 20 percent of this area is well below sea level, and bad water, a salt water pool, is about 280 feet below sea level and it is the lowest point in the United States.‎ ‎ Long ago the Panamint Indians called this place Tomesha—the land of fire. Death Valley’s present name dates back to 1849 when a group of miners coming across from Nevada became lost in its unpleasantness and hugeness and their adventure ended with a disaster. Today Death Valley has been declared a National Monument and is crossed by several well-marked roads where good services can be found easily. Luckily the changed created by human settlement has hardly ruined the special beauty of this place.‎ ‎ Here nature created a lot of surprising scenes, almost like the sights on the moon, every changing as the frequent wind moves the sand about, showing the most unusual colors. One of the most astonishing and variable parts of Death Valley is the Devil’s Golf Course, where it seems hard for one to tell reality from ‎ terrible dreams. Sand sculptures（泥雕）stand on a frightening ground, as evening shadows move and lengthen.‎ ‎65．The name of the valley comes from ‎ ‎ A．an Indian name B．the local people ‎ C．a National Monument D．the death of the miners ‎66．From the passage we can learn that .‎ ‎ A．people can find gas stations, cafes and hotels in the desert ‎ B．no one had ever known the desert before the miners ‎ C．it’s still not easy to travel across the desert ‎ D．people have changed the natural sights of the desert ‎67．From the passage we can see the writer the Death Valley.‎ ‎ A．is fearful of B．appreciates C．dislikes D．has never been to ‎（D）‎ ‎ Little by little Americans are turning to solar power, tapping the strength of sun for energy. Solar energy is only in its infancy but already sun—light is heating, cooling or doing both for homes and office buildings mostly in the sunny southwest. Experts say all signs point to the birth of the solar energy industry. Right now, at least twenty-three companies are selling solar heat collector panels to heat and cool homes, or to heat water. The glass and metal panels cost from $ 100 to more than $ 500 each and the three-bedroom home usually requires a dozen or more. They look like sandwiches, or very narrow flower boxes, 3to 6 feet in width, 8 to 10 feet long, and 4 to 8 inches thick. They are usually place on roof tops., Nobody knows how many have been sold, and in addition, many people have built their own units. It has been estimated that solar power equipment will be a $ 1.3 billion industry by 1985, and more than a million homes will be plugged into sunlight for heat, air –conditioning or to generate electricity.‎ ‎68．The sentence“tapping the strength of sun for energy”means ‎ ‎ A．making full use of sun to obtain more energy B．getting energy by giving a tap to the sun ‎ C．strengthening energy of the sun D．changing sunlight into energy ‎69．Which of the following four is false about solar heat collector panels?‎ ‎ A．They are relatively new ‎ B．They can be used to heat home or water in winter, not in other seasons ‎ C．They are usually found on the roof D．They are made of glass and metal ‎70．Two three-or four-bedroom houses usually need solar heat collector panels.‎ ‎ A．twelve or more B．more than two C．twenty-four at least D．about forty ‎71．Which of the following statements doesn’t go with the article?‎ ‎ A．The size of solar industry is expected to be a $ 1.3 billion industry in 1985‎ ‎ B．Experts think that solar energy industry has developed quickly by now ‎ C．People in the U.S come to realize the importance of solar energy ‎ D．Some companies are busy with sale of solar heat collector panels ‎72．A million homes will be fitted with solar heat collector panels .‎ ‎ A．for heat and air conditioning B．in order to get more light and heat ‎ C．to produce electricity D．Both A and C ‎（E）‎ ‎ In recent years, advances in medical technology have made it possible for doctors to extend people’s life to ma certain length. However, some people, including some doctors, are not in favor of these life-extending measures, and they argue that people should have the right to die when they want. They say that the quality of life is as important as life itself, and that people should not be forced to go on living when the conditions of life become unbearable. They say that people should be allowed to die with dignity（尊严）and to decide when they want to die. Others argue that life under any conditions is better than death and that the duty of the doctors is always to extend life as long as possible. And so that the battle goes on without a final answer.‎ ‎73．In recent years, people’s lives can be .‎ ‎ A．saved with less difficulty than in the past B．extended as long as people want ‎ C．saved with more difficulty than in the past D．used to do experiments by doctors ‎74． are in favor of these life-extending measures ‎ A．Patients B．Doctors C．Nurses D．Not all people ‎75．Those who are in favor of these life-extending measures think it is right that .‎ ‎ A．people’s lives needn’t be saved ‎ B．if a person’s health condition is too bad to be worth living, let him die ‎ C．doctors must try their best to save people’s lives ‎ D．one can end one’s life under any condition ‎★专题（19）‎ A Begin doing the work you love as soon as possible, even if you don’t get paid for it, or if you can only work at it part-time. Albert Einstein was unable to get a job as a physics professor. He could have said to himself, “Well, I just don’t have the work relative to physics. I should give up on it and settle for something else.” Instead, he wrote the two most famous papers while employed as a patent（专利）clerk. After their publication, there was not a major university in the world that would not have been glad to have him on their staff.‎ If you want to work as an artist and you are making a living as a waiter, don’t think of yourself as a waiter who hopes one day to become an artist. That puts the work you love somewhere off in the distant future. Rather, think of yourself as an artist, supporting yourself by waiter tables—and paint, or draw as much as you can. It is possible to earn a living wage as a waiter working 24 hours a week. That leaves plenty of time to devote to training or developing your craft（工艺）in the off hours.‎ While seeking the work you love, it helps to expand your awareness（意识）into the universe of all possibilities. You don’t want to be limited to the ideas of what you should do or what you have done before. Having opened to all possibilities, you can make a final decision and select the work you love as your own.‎ Doing the work you love requires that you be equally comfortable with the imaginative and the practical. It requires the ability to dream big dreams and the ability to face and master all the little details that make dreams come true.‎ ‎56．According to the passage, perhaps Einstein once said to himself, “_______.”‎ ‎ A．Well, I just don’t have the work relative to physics. I should give up on it and settle for ‎ something else ‎ B．The job is just what I want, I should work very hard at it ‎ C．I have to support myself by working as a patent clerk now, but I won’t give physics up ‎ D．I must wait until I find my favorite job ‎57．If a person works 24 hours a week, he can________.‎ ‎ A．have enough spare time for his hobbies B．have no time left to make his dream come true ‎ C．do nothing else D．make a good living ‎58．Which of the following is not implied in the last paragraph?‎ ‎ A．Sometimes the imaginative is different from the practical.‎ ‎ B．We have to take care of a lot of details before we make our dreams come true.‎ ‎ C．We shall do practical things rather than dream.‎ ‎ D．We shall dream big dreams and practice as well.‎ ‎59．According to the passage, the author encourages us to ________.‎ ‎ A．start work quickly B．select job carefully and patiently ‎ C．dream often D．make up our minds quickly B Ellis Island is located in New York. Harbor Ellis Island is open daily year-round from 9:‎30 a.m. to 5 p. m. , with extended hours during summer. It is closed December 25. There is no admission charge to Ellis Island; donations are gratefully accepted.‎ At Your Fingertips ‎ Park information (212)363-7620‎ ‎ Emergencies (212)363-3260‎ ‎ Ferryboat information (212)269-5755‎ ‎ Lost and found (212)363-7620‎ ‎ Dining, gifts, & audio tour (212)344-0996‎ Transportation ‎ Statue of Liberty and Ellis Island Ferry: Boats leave from Battery Park, Manhattan, and from Liberty State Park, New Jersey. They run about every 30 to 45 minutes beginning at 9:‎15 a. m. (ferry schedule subject to change)‎ Hours: May vary; call the number below Closed: December 25‎ Ferry fees: (Includes Liberty and Ellis Islands) adults, $7; senior citizens, $6; children(age 3 to 17), $3. (group rates are available for 25 or more adults)‎ Ticket & schedule information: (212)269-5755‎ ‎60．In summer, visitors will have ______ to visit Ellis Island.‎ ‎ A．no enough time B．a longer time C．a shorter time D．a wonderful time ‎61．Which number would you call if your friend were suddenly ill?‎ ‎ A．(212)344-0996 B．(212)363‎-7620 C．(212)363-3260 D．(212)269-5755‎ ‎62．Which of the following is not true?‎ ‎ A．People can visit Ellis Island free of charge.‎ ‎ B．The boats departure time from Battery Park is at 9:‎15 a.m. all the year round.‎ ‎ C．Ferry fees for children are cheaper than for adults.‎ ‎ D．Ferry fees for group visitors can be reduced.‎ ‎63．We may infer from the passage that _________.‎ ‎ A．visitors prefer to go to Ellis Island by boat B．there are more visitors in winter ‎ C．Ellis Island is open every day D．Boat is the only transportation to Ellis Island C A study of a university in Shanghai had found that many of the students there are using a quote（引语）from the Italian poet Dante as a kind of motto. The study of Fudan University, one of China’s top universities, of 489 students, found that 82 had chosen Dante’s “Follow your own path and don’t worry about what others say” as their motto, out of 278 people who said they had a motto. This was followed by “Believe yourself” and “Self-improvement without stop.”‎ Students also expressed a common hope for greater understanding and care and said they were always ready to give a hand to those in need.‎ Some researchers think that mottoes can play an important part in children’s growth and they say that a good motto can help children develop a better character.‎ ‎64．The study shows _________.‎ ‎ A．what poems are popular B．how many students like the motto “Believe yourself.”‎ ‎ C．which university should have mottoes ‎ D．the majority of the students like to choose their favorite mottoes ‎65．Of the students asked, _______ students have mottoes.‎ ‎ A．about 57% B．about 16% C．about 78% D．about 8%‎ ‎66．The motto “Self-improvement without stop” shares the similar meaning with ______.‎ ‎ A．growing by oneself continuously B．making oneself better and perfect continuously ‎ C．going on to improve rapidly D．becoming better without having a break ‎67．The best title for the passage should be _______.‎ ‎ A．Students and Poet B．Mottoes and Learning ‎ C．Mottoes and Character Developing D．Understanding Care ‎68．What do we know from the passage?‎ ‎ A．The students want to be understood and cared and are willing to help.‎ ‎ B．The students want to understand themselves deeper with a motto chosen.‎ ‎ C．The students need help and care greatly.‎ ‎ D．The students believe they understand mottoes better than others.‎ D ‎ “Business is war.” The traditional language of business certainly makes it sound that way: winning the competition, getting market share, beating up suppliers, locking up customers. There are the victors and the losers.‎ ‎ But today in doing business, you have to listen to stomers, work with suppliers, keep good relations-even with competitors. That doesn’t sound like war. Besides, there are few victors when business is looked upon as war.‎ ‎ Most businesses succeed only if others also succeed. Business is competition and cooperation as well. In other words, business is war and peace.‎ ‎ To bring together competition and cooperation, we turn to game theory. Game theory provides that whether one person wins or loses depends on what other people do. It is particularly effective when there are many interdependent（相互依存的）factors and no decision can be made in isolation（孤立）from other decisions.‎ ‎ Game theory breaks down the game into key elements（要素）:players, added values, rules, tactics（计谋）, and scope（范围）(PARTS).Every element affects the result of the game. This means that each of the five elements gives you a way to change an existing game into entirely new one. Change one of the PARTS,‎ ‎ and you change the whole.‎ ‎ Why change the game? An old Chinese saying explains: If you continue on the course you’re heading, that’s where you’ll end up. Sometimes that’s good, sometimes not. You can play the game very well, and still suffer great loss. That’s because you’re playing the wrong game: you need to change it. Even a good game can be made into a better one. Real success comes from actively shaping the game you play-from making the game you want, not taking the game you find.‎ ‎69．The author of this passage is _______ the idea that “Business is war.”‎ ‎ A．in favor of B．against C．considering D．doubtful of ‎70． “PARTS” stands for _______.‎ ‎ A．players, added values, rules, tactics and scope B．all of the elements in the game theory ‎ C．the parties in a game D．the parts that affect the result of the game ‎71．The correct understanding of the underlined sentence in the last paragraph is _______.‎ ‎ A．you are really good at playing the game, but you still lose it out ‎ B．you are so competitive that you beat up all of your competitors terribly ‎ C．you play the game too well to suffer great loss ‎ D．the competition is so hard that you have to put all your heart into it ‎72．The author emphasizes that _______.‎ ‎ A．we shall play very hard B．we shall continue in the course we are heading ‎ C．we shall play in the right direction D．we shall always change no matter the change is good or not E ‎“If I don’t get something to eat soon, I’ll climb the walls,” said Bryan.‎ Roger, Bryan’s fifteen-year-old bookworm brother kept on reading. Bryan searched the kitchen but found only three aged bananas with big brown spots.‎ ‎“Roger,” begged Bryan, “you’ve read two books already today. Let’s bake banana bread.”‎ Roger closed his book with a sigh. “Sounds good, but do you know how? I don’t.”‎ ‎“It’s easy,” said Bryan. “I’ve watched Mom make it.”‎ The boys found the recipe and gathered everything they needed. Bryan was mashing bananas when he noticed Roger filling a huge soupspoon with salt.‎ ‎“Wait!” shouted Bryan. “You need just a teaspoon of salt.”‎ Roger opened a drawer. “Which spoons are for tea?” he asked.‎ Bryan was amazed. He had always thought that his older brother knew everything. “Roger,” he said, “use this measuring spoon. See , it say’s teaspoon on the handle.”‎ Finally the batter（面料）was ready for baking. Soon a delicious smell of banana bread filled the house. An hour later, the boys opened the oven and found a beautifully rounded loaf, only a little burned around the edges.‎ ‎“Something smells wonderful,” said their mother when she arrived home. “Did you save a taste for me?”‎ The brothers laughed, brushing crumbs from their fingers.‎ ‎“Sorry, Mom,” said Roger. “Next time we will. My little brother is quite a baker!”‎ ‎73．If Roger had used the spoon he chose first, he would have ________.‎ ‎ A．saved time B．kept the bananas from spoiling ‎ C．ruined the banana bread D．made the batter too sweet ‎74．What did Roger probably do after he ate the banana bread?‎ ‎ A．ate an orange B．baked another loaf ‎ C．looked for another recipe D．continued reading his book ‎75．How did Bryan probably feel after the baking project?‎ ‎ A．upset that the banana bread was burned B．proud that he had made dessert for dinner ‎ C．proud that he had taught Roger something D．upset that he had needed help from his mother.‎ ‎★专题（20）‎ ‎（A）‎ Wind—even the slightest of winds can prevent frost (霜冻).That’s because wind is like a spoon in your cup of tea: it stirs （搅起）things down and brings down a lot of warm air that often floats just above housetops and trees .‎ It may seem strange , but ice itself sometimes can protect crops from frost . Some growers actually spray their crops with water on a freezing night . Water freezes quickly on plants and then a strange thing happens . As long as ice stays wet , it can’t get colder than ‎32°F, a temperaure many plants can stand . By continual spraying water on the ice , the growers keep it from going below 32 degrees even if the air is much colder .‎ ‎ This may defeat frost and saves plants .‎ This strange kind of “ice blanket” works only on plants that are strong enough to stand the weight of frozen spray . This is used even to protect banana plants on some Central American farms .‎ ‎56．If the ice became entirely frozen and dry , suppose what might happen .‎ ‎ A．The plants might be frozen to death . B．The plants might benefit from it .‎ ‎ C．It might save the plants . D．It might make the plants grow slowly .‎ ‎57．Ice can save plants rather than destroy them on condition that they are .‎ ‎ A．sprayed regularly B．quickly frozen C．not strong enough D．used to frost ‎ ‎58．The best title would be .‎ ‎ A．Frost Saves crops B．Ice Battle C．Ice Can Be Nice D．Ice Is Good ‎ ‎59．In which of the following sentences “stand” has the same meaning as in the last paragraph ?‎ ‎ A．He could hardly stand . B．This house stands the test of time .‎ ‎ C．The train stood for an hour . D．He stands in terrible danger .‎ ‎(B)‎ Build the highway and watch the town grow . At first a few shops appear and maybe a restaurant . Then a hotel opens . Eventually new houses are built . A village is born .‎ This is also how the virtual world has developed . Think of the Internet as the road carrying information between two computers . Think of the World Wide Web as the village . At first it is just a place on the virtual road where travelers meet . More travelers come bringing new kinds of information . New villages are started .‎ Every village has a founder . Tim Berners Lee is the man who wrote the software program that led to the foundation of the World Wide Web . How did he get the idea ? He tells us on his own website : “ One of the things computers were not able to do was store contacts from different sources . The dream behind the Web is of a common space in which we communicate by sharing information.”‎ Tim Berners Lee could have followed the Microsoft route by forming a company to sell the programs he invented . Or he could have joined an existing company . But in his view the Web is a language , not a product . Charging a fee for using his programs would have slowed the growth of the Web . And other companies would make similar products to compete . Instead of one World Wide Web there would be several smaller Webs . Each would use incompatible （不相容的）software . The Web is valuable because it uses a common computer language to reach people and share information . Competing Webs would lose this value .Imagine if somebody sent you a bill every time you spoke a word of English .‎ In 1994 Tim Berners Lee formed World Wide Web Consortium , or W‎3C. More than 200 leading companies and laboratories are represented by W‎3C. Together they make sure that everyone no matter what their equipment or software is can work equally on the Web .‎ ‎“The Web can help people to understand the way that others live and love . It helps us understand the humanity of people ,” he says .‎ ‎60．Which appeared first , the Web or the Internet ?‎ ‎ A．The Web . B．The Internet ‎ ‎ C．They appeared at the same time . D．There is no clue in the passage .‎ ‎61．What does the underlined part “ the virtual world” refer to ?‎ ‎ A．The computer system . B．Scientific research ‎ ‎ C．All the information on the Web and the Internet .‎ ‎ D．People working on the Web and the Internet ‎ ‎62．What can be inferred from the sentence “Imagine if somebody sent you a bill every time you spoke a word of English ?‎ ‎ A．The information on the Web should be shared by all .‎ ‎ B．The Web is where all kinds of information are stored .‎ ‎ C．People can get all kinds of information on the Web . D．People can communicate on the Web .‎ ‎63．Which is the main idea of the passage ?‎ ‎ A．How Tim Berners Lee founded the World Wide Web .‎ ‎ B．The advantage of working on the World Wide Web .‎ ‎ C．Why Tim Berners Lee wanted to found the World Wide Web .‎ ‎ D．The building of World Wide Web is similar to the building of highways .‎ ‎(C)‎ FOREIGN EXCHANGE A CLASS OE THEIR OWN Name: Susan Lane ‎ Age :22‎ Place: Reykjavik , Iceland , 1994‎ Cost :$7,000‎ Organization: AFS Experience: “I think it was a turning point in my life . I began to understand more about my own culture by experiencing another culture and seeing how other people live .”‎ Name : Sara Small ‎ Age :23 ‎ Place:Crivitz , Germany , 1996‎ Cost: $8,000‎ Organization : EF Foundation ‎ Experience: “I loved the traveling and I made a lot of friends . I found the European school system to be hard but I am fluent now in German so it was worth it . I did miss my family and friends in Australia but I would love to do it again .”‎ Name : Leanne Smythe ‎ Age : 20 ‎ Place: Minnesota , America , 1994‎ Cost: $6,000 ‎ Organization: Southern Cross Cultural Exchange ‎ Experience: “I learnt how to be really responsible . It was great to be on my own and I got on really well with the family I was with . I will definitely go back one day.”‎ Name : David Links ‎ Age : 16 ‎ Place: Stuttgart , Germany , 1996 .‎ Cost: $ 6,000‎ Organization: Southern Cross Cultural Exchange ‎ Experience: “I wanted to try something that was very different to Australia in culture . In Germany everything was different but I soon got settled . The family I was with were great and I really feel as though I have a second family .”‎ Name : Tom Jennings ‎ Age : 21‎ Place: Conflans , France , 1995‎ Cost: $7 ,000 ‎ Organization: Southern Cross Cultural Exchange ‎ Experience: “There were times when it was difficult but I liked it , experiencing a different culture . You just have to play each situation as it comes . If there is one thing you learn when you are on a student-exchange program it is how to take care of yourself .”‎ Name : Linda Marks ‎ Age : 19‎ Place: Chonburi Province , Thailand , 1994‎ Cost: $3,500‎ Organization: Rotary International ‎ Experience: “It’s like a roller-coaster ride , there are lots of ups and downs , but you always come back for more . I had a few problems but there was always someone to turn to and that was great.”‎ ‎64．The students who refer to both the good time and the bad time include .‎ ‎ A．Susan Lane and Sara Small B．Linda Marks and David Links ‎ ‎ C．Tom Jennings and Linda Marks D．Leanne Smythe and Tom Jennings ‎ ‎65．The writing above would probably be .‎ ‎ A．the records of students’ activities B．the foreign students’ name cards ‎ ‎ C．the notice about a visit to foreign countries ‎ ‎ D．the advertisement from an international travel service ‎ ‎66．The student who valued learning another language is .‎ ‎ A．Linda Marks B．Sara Small C．Tom Jennings D．Leanne Smythe ‎ ‎67．How many students mention the culture difference they have experienced ?‎ ‎ A．Three . B．Four . C．Five . D．Six .‎ ‎(D)‎ ‎ Take care about those who use the truth to deceive. When someone tells you something that is true , but ‎ leaves out important information that should be included , he can make a false impression . For example , someone might say, “I just won a hundred dollars on the lottery . It was great . I took that dollar ticket back to the store and turned it in for one hundred dollars !”‎ This guy is a winner , right ? Maybe , maybe not . We then discovered that he bought two hundred tickets , and only one was a winner .He is really a big loser ! He didn’t say anything that was false , but he intentionally left out important information . That’s called a half-truth . Half truths are not technically lies , but they are just as dishonest .‎ Untrustworthy candidates（候选人）in political campaigns often use this trick . Let’say that during Governor Smith’s last term , her state lost one million jobs and gained three million jobs . Then she seeks another term . One of her opponents (对手) runs and ad. saying , “During Governor Smith’s term , the state lost one million jobs !” That’s true . However ,an honest statement would have been , “During Governor Smith’s term, the state had a net gain of two million jobs .”‎ Advertisers will sometimes use half-truths . It’s against the law to make false statements so they try to mislead you with the truth . An ad might boast （吹嘘）, “Nine out of ten-doctors recommend Yucky Pills to cure nose pimples.” It fails to mention that they only asked ten doctors and nine of them work for the Yucky Corporation .‎ This kind of trick happens too often . It’s a sad fact of life: Lies are lies ,and sometimes the truth can lie as well .‎ ‎68．Which of the statements is true according to the article ?‎ ‎ A．All advertisements are lies . B．You can’t trust anyone who tells the truth .‎ ‎ C．The truth can be used in dishonest ways .‎ ‎ D．Whenever people tell the truth , they are really lying .‎ ‎69．What does the underlined word “deceive” probably mean ?‎ ‎ A．tell B．explain C．fool D．win ‎ ‎70．The writer suggests in this article that people should .‎ ‎ A．believe in nobody B．vote for female candidates ‎ ‎ C．stay away from political campaigns D．think carefully about what they read and hear ‎ ‎71．What is the best title for this article ?‎ ‎ A．Everyone Lies at Present B．Lying With the Truth ‎ ‎ C．Try to Be Honest to the People D．Don’t Believe People Who Tell the Truth ‎ ‎(E)‎ A new study says one part of the human brain may become smaller as the result of a condition known as jet lag . Jet lag results from flying long distances in an airplane . People with jet lag may feel extremely tired for several days . They may also have problems thinking clearly and remembering .‎ Recently a researcher at the University of Bristol in Britain reported the findings of his jet lag study , which involved twenty young women who worked for international airlines . They had served passengers on airplanes for five years . These flight attendants flew across many countries and at least seven time zones . In the study , the flight attendants had different amounts of time to recover from jet lag . Half the women spent five days or fewer in their home areas between long flights . The other half spent more than fourteen days in their home areas .‎ The researcher took some saliva from the women’s mouths to measure levels of a hormone （荷尔蒙）that increases during stress（紧张）. He tested them to see if they could remember where black spots appeared on a computer screen . And he took pictures of their brains to measure the size of the brain’s temporal lobes （脑叶）.‎ It was found that the women who had less time between flights had smaller right temporal lobes . This area of the brain deals with recognizing and remembering what is seen . The same group performed worse and had slower reaction times on the visual memory test . And their saliva samples showed higher levels of stress hormones .‎ The researcher believes the brain needs at least ten days to recover after a long trip . He says airline workers told him their ability to remember got worse after working on planes for about four years . Other studies have shown that increased feelings of stress can cause a loss of cells in the part of the brain that controls memory .‎ Scientists say more tests are needed to study the effects of jet lag on the brain . They want to find out if too much jet lag could permanently （永久性的）affect memory .‎ ‎72．According to the text , jet lag .‎ ‎ A．can cause difficulties in speaking B．can make people feel tired for a few weeks ‎ ‎ C．can be only found in flight attendants ‎ ‎ D．can be caused by flying over several time zones ‎ ‎73．It can be inferred from the text that .‎ ‎ A．the conclusion is refused by many scientists ‎ ‎ B．scientists fear that this research is not done properly ‎ ‎ C．every scientific conclusion needs the support from many tests ‎ ‎ D．the women who were examined in the research were not healthy ‎ ‎74．From the result of the research we can see that .‎ ‎ A．the women who have longer rest at home show better memory ‎ ‎ B．the women who fly in short time have smaller right temporal lobes ‎ ‎ C．the women who have longer flights fail the memory test ‎ ‎ D．the women who rest more than 14 days produce less hormones ‎ ‎75．What is the subject discussed in the text ?‎ ‎ A．The cause of jet lag . B．A story of a group of flight attendants .‎ ‎ C．The importance of having enough rest after flights .‎ ‎ D．A research about the effects of jet lag on the brain .‎ ‎★专题（21）‎ A ‎ Feeling tired lately? Has the doctor said he can’t find anything wrong with you? Perhaps he sent you to a hospital, but all the advanced equipment there shows that there is nothing wrong.‎ ‎ Then consider this, you might be in a state of subhealth（亚健康）.‎ ‎ Subhealth, also called the third state or grey state, is explained as an indefinate state between health and disease. According to an investigation by the National Health Organization, over 45 per cent of subhealthy people are middle-aged or elderly. The percentage is even higher among people who work in management position as well as students around exam.‎ ‎ Symptoms（症状）include a lack of energy, depression, slow reactions, insomnia（失眠）,Worries and poor memory. Others symptoms include shortness of breath, sweating and aching in the waist and legs.‎ ‎ The key to preventing and recovering from subhealth, according to some medical experts, is to form good living habits, alternate work with rest, exercise regularly, and take part in open-air activities.‎ ‎ As for meals ,people are advised to eat less salt and sugar. They should eat more fresh vegetables, fruits and fish, because they are rich in nutritional（营养的）elements—vitamins and tiny elements—that are important to the body.‎ ‎ Nutrition experts point out that it is not good to eat too much at one meal because it may cause unhealthy changes in the digestive tract. They also say that a balanced diet is very helpful in avoiding subhealth.‎ ‎56．According to this passage, when you are in a state of subhealth, you should .‎ ‎ A．stay home and keep silent B．go to see a doctor and buy some medicine.‎ ‎ C．have yourself examined in foreign countries ‎ D．find out the reasons and relax yourself ‎57．Middle-aged people may feel subhealthy, because they .‎ ‎ A．have used up their energy B．have lost their living hopes ‎ C．have more pressure in life and work D．began to get older and older ‎58．As for food, experts suggest that we should .‎ ‎ A．never eat meat B．have meals with less salt and sugar ‎ C．eat less D．have meals without salt or sugar ‎59．The underlined word“alternate”in this passage means .‎ ‎ A．arrange by turn B．cause to take place C．keep up D．take up ‎(B)‎ ‎ There are some special traditions（传统）in Hawaii. People are very friendly and always welcome visitors. They give visitors a lei—a long necklace of beautiful fresh flowers; Men wear bright flowered shirts, and women often wear long flowered dresses. There are traditional Chinese, Japanese and Filipino Holidays and all the holidays from the United States. They call Hawaii the Aloha State. Aloha means both hello and goodbye. It also means I love you.‎ ‎ Usually when people from different countries, races and traditions live together, there are serious problems. There are a few problems in Hawaii, but, in general, people have learned to live together in peace.‎ ‎ Hawaiians get most of their money from visitors, and most of the visitors come from the mainland and from Japan. There are so many people living in Hawaii now that there are residential areas（住宅区）where ‎ there used to be farms. Some of the big sugar and apple companies have moved to the Philipines, where they do not have to pay workers as much money. The families of the first people who came from the U. S. mainland own the important banks and companies. Japanese are also buying or starting businesses.‎ ‎60．A good title for this article might be“ ”.‎ ‎ A．Hawaii the Aloha State B．Living in Peace Together ‎ C．The Flowers of Hawaii D．The Problems of Hawaii ‎61．The author wants to show that .‎ A.we all should go to Hawaii. B．it is possible to learn to live together in peace.‎ ‎ C．it is not possible to live together in peace D．Hawaii is the only place where there is peace ‎62．The word“Lei”in the first paragraph is a .‎ ‎ A．group of flowers B．bright flowered shirt ‎ C．way to say hello and goodbye D．necklace of flowers ‎63． plays an important part in the development of Hawaii.‎ ‎ A．Modern industry B．Agriculture C．The air line D．Business in travel ‎(C)‎ ‎ More than 6000 children were expelled（开除）from US schools last year for bringing guns and bombs to school, the US Department of Education said on May 8.‎ ‎ The department gave a report on the expulsions（开除）as saying handguns accounted for 58 per cent of the 6093 expulsions in 1996 to 1997, against 7 per cent for rifles（步枪）or shotguns and 35 per cent for other types of firearms.‎ ‎ “The report is a clear sign that our nation’s public schools are cracking down（严惩）on students who bring guns to school,”Education Secretary Richard Riley said in a statement.“We need to be tough-minded about keeping guns out of our schools and do everything to keep our children safe.”‎ ‎ In March 1997, an 11-year-old boy and a 13-year-old boy using handguns and rifles shot dead four children and a teacher at a school in Jonesboro, Arkansas. In October, two were killed and seven wounded in a shooting at a Mississippi school. Two months later, a 14-year-old boy killed three high school students and wounded five in Daducah, Kentucky.‎ ‎ Most of the expulsions, 56 per cent, were from high schools which have students from about age 13, 34 per cent were from junior high schools and 9 per cent were from elementary schools, the report said.‎ ‎64．From the first paragraph we can infer that in the US schools .‎ ‎ A．students enjoy shooting B．students are eager to be soldiers ‎ C．safety is a problem D．students can make guns ‎65．The report from the US Department of Education shows that .‎ ‎ A．the number of the expulsions is not large B．the number of the expulsions is wrong ‎ C．there are soldiers hiding among the students D．guns are out of control in US schools ‎66．The main idea of paragraph four shows us .‎ ‎ A．some examples of shootings in US schools B．the Americans’ feeling ‎ C．some famous schools D．that some teachers were killed by students ‎67．How many students were shot dead in ‎1997 in US schools?‎ ‎ A．10 B．‎9 ‎C．12 D．22‎ ‎68．From this passage we know that .‎ ‎ A．every American cannot have guns B．only soldiers and police can have guns ‎ C．every American citizen can own guns D．teachers have no money to buy guns D WHAT’ SON STAGE ‎ Russian dances: The famous“Little White Birth”Dance Troupe will travel from Russia to Present performances in Beijing.‎ The troupe, founded in 1948, is famous for their combination of Russian folk dances and ‎ classical dancing art.‎ It has been invited by the Beijing Foreign Culture Exchange Co to give four performances in Beijing.‎ Tickets are available（可得到的）through ticket hotlines and website such as www, paio. com.cn, www.chinaticket. com and www.ticket. elong. com CONCERTS Folk music: A concert of classics of Chinese folk music will greet audiences on the first day of the Year of Snake at the Beijing Concert Hall.‎ The China Song and Dance Ensemble will perform dozens of traditional instrumental pieces, such as“Full of Joy,”“Colourful Cloud Chasing the Moon,”and “Spring Festival Suite.”‎ Time: 7:30 pm, January 24‎ Place: 1, Beixinhuajie, Xicheng District Tel: 6559—8285‎ EVENTS Time: 7:30 pm, January 18—21‎ Place: Beizhan Theatre, 135, Xiwai Dajie, Xicheng District Tel: 6606—4258‎ EXHIBITIONS Kite show: All together 81 kites collected by the China National Art Museum is on show in the Yanhuang Art Museum.‎ Kong Xiangze, an expert on Chinese kites, published a book on kites, explaining the origins of the Kite—making process. The exhibited kites are made in a traditional Chinese style.‎ Time: 9 am—5 pm until February 11‎ Place: 9 Huizhong Lu Tel: 6491—2902‎ Flower festival：The Beijing Botanical Garden is bringing people a blooming festival with the beautiful flowers in its tropical（热带）plants greenhouse.‎ The garden has introduced nearly 80 kinds of flowers from abroad for the exhibition.‎ There is also an exhibition of potted narcissus（水仙）landscapes（风景）.More than 300 mini landscapes involving imported narcissus will be displayed. People can get a preview of the show by visiting www. beijingbd. com, the garden’s website.‎ Time: 8:30 am -5pm until January 28‎ Place: Wofosi Lu near the Fragant Hills Tel: 8259—5547‎ ‎69．Suppose you are too far away from Beijing or you can’t spare time to go there in person,which of the following show can you enjoy all the same?‎ ‎ A．Russian dances B．Kite show C．Folk music D．Flower festival ‎70．The phrase“get a preview of”used in the passage means .‎ A.watch in advance B．see clearly C．get good position of D．get a general idea of ‎71．If you and your classmates have a free evening to spend on the 19th of January, which is a useful number to call? A．6606—4258 B．6491—‎2902 ‎C．6559—8285 D．8259—5547‎ E ‎ This year some twenty-three hundred teenagers（young people aged from 13—19）from all over the world will spend about ten months in U. S. homes. They will attend U.S. schools, meet U.S. teenagers, and form impressions of the real America. At the same time, about thirteen hundred American teenagers will go to other countries to learn new languages and gain a new understanding of the rest of the world.‎ ‎ Here is a two-way student exchange in action. Fred nineteen, spent last year in Germany with George’s family. In turn, George’s son Mike spent a year in Fred’s home in America.‎ ‎ Fred, a lively young man, knew little German when he arrived, but after two months’ study, the language began to come to him. The school was completely different from what he had expected-much harder. Students rose respectfully when the teacher entered the room. They took fourteen subjects instead of the six that are usual in the United States. There were almost no outside activities.‎ ‎ Family life, too, was different. The father’s word was law, and all activities were around the family rather than the individual. Fred found the food too simple at first. Also, he missed having a car.‎ ‎ “Back home, you pick up some friends in a car and go out and have a good time. In Germany, you walk, but you soon learn to like it.”‎ ‎ At the same time, in America, Mike, a friendly German boy, was also forming his idea.“I suppose I should criticize American schools,”he says.“It is far too easy by our level. But I have to say that I like it very much. In Germany we do nothing but study. Here we take part in may outside activities. I think that maybe your schools are better in training for citizens. There ought to be some middle ground between the two.”‎ ‎72．This year teenagers will take part in the exchange programme between America and other countries. ‎ A．twenty three hundred B．thirteen hundred C．over three thousand D．less than two thousand ‎73．The whole exchange programme is mainly to .‎ ‎ A．help teen agers in other countries know the real America ‎ B．send students in America to travel in Germany ‎ C．let students learn something about other countries ‎ D．have teen agers learn new languages ‎74．What is particular in America schools is that .‎ ‎ A．there is some middle ground between the two teaching buildings.‎ ‎ B．there are a lot of outside activities ‎ C．students usually take fourteen subjects in all ‎ D．students go outside to enjoy themselves in a car ‎75．After experiencing the Amercian school life, Mike thought .‎ ‎ A．a better education should include something good from both American and Germany ‎ B．German schools trained students to be better citizens ‎ C．American schools were not as good as German schools ‎ D．the easy life in the American school was more helpful to students ‎ ★专题（22）‎ A ‎ For those who were born in the year of the pig, good luck and much success! This is your year.‎ ‎ When talking to a Westerner, however, you’ve got to be a little careful when you talk about pigs. Chinese people think of the pig as a smart and prosperous（rich, luckily wealthy）animal. Western ideas tend to be a little more negative（否定的）.‎ ‎ A pig in the West is seen as a dirty, lazy and fat animal. If anyone ever called you a pig, you wouldn’t be smiling . When a person doesn’t like someone, sometimes he will call that person a pig.‎ ‎ If you ever met a Westerner who was born in the year of the pig, don’t say,“Oh, you’re a pig!” Most Westerners will be misunderstanding. They will be sure that you made some kind of mistakes. However, don’t take any chance. You might just offend（激怒）someone who does not share your positive（积极的）ideas about pigs.‎ ‎56．You have to be careful when you talk to a Westerner about pigs because .‎ ‎ A．they believe pigs best of all B．they consider pigs as bad animals ‎ C．they aren’t used to talking about pigs D．they don’t like the topic about pigs at all ‎57．According to the passage we can see that Chinese people think of the pig as a animal.‎ ‎ A．healthy B．lovely C．bad D．lazy ‎58．A Westerner will call someone a pig if he or she that man.‎ ‎ A．dislikes B．is afraid of C．looks up to D．makes fun of ‎59．When you call a Westerner a pig, who was born in the year of the pig, most of them .‎ ‎ A．will be happy B．will be very surprised ‎ C．understand you D．may laugh at you B ‎ October 24—the UN birthday is celebrated as United Nations Day. It is a day that belongs to everyone, and it is celebrated in most countries of the world. Some countries celebrate for a week instead of a day.‎ ‎ Every year the President of the United States, in a special announcement, asks Americans to remember United Nations Day.‎ ‎ In many parts of the world, schools plan programmes for this day. Boys and girls in some areas decorate（装饰）a United Nations tree, or plant a garden. In other areas young people put on plays about the United Nations. Some libraries show children’s art form around the world. Schools celebrate with songs and dances of other countries, or give parties where foods of other countries are served.‎ ‎ Always the purpose of these celebrations is to help everyone understand the United Nations and why it is important.‎ ‎ The UN encourages people to learn about other lands and their customs. In this way people can get a better understanding of people all over the world.‎ ‎60．Why is October 24 celebrated in many countries?‎ ‎ A．To celebrate the founding of the United Nations.‎ ‎ B．To make people understand what the United Nations means.‎ ‎ C．To warn people of the dangers of wars.‎ ‎ D．To tell people how the United Nations came into being.‎ ‎61．How do schools celebrate the day?‎ ‎ A．Children are given a holiday of one to seven days.‎ ‎ B．Different programmes are prepared to celebrate the day.‎ ‎ C．Children plant gardens or decorate UN trees.‎ ‎ D．Children and teachers hold parties.‎ ‎62．What does the United Nations encourage people to do, according to the passage?‎ ‎ A．To learn more about other nations and their customs.‎ ‎ B．To change programmes with other nations in science.‎ ‎ C．To understand more people from all over the world ‎ D．To understand the importance of the United Nations.‎ ‎63．The best title of the passage can be .‎ ‎ A．The UN B．The World Holiday C．Celebrations on Oct 24 D．The UN Birthday C ‎ This is news on the hour. Ed Wilson reporting. The President and First Lady will visit Africa on a good will tour in May. They plan to visit eight African countries.‎ ‎ Reports from China say the Chinese want closer ties between China and the U.S. and Western Europe. A group of top Chinese scientists start their ten-nation tour next month.‎ ‎ Here in Miami, the mayor is still meeting with the leaders of the teachers’ Union to try to find a way to end the strike. City schools are still closed after two weeks.‎ ‎ In the news about health, scientists in California report finding of a relationship between the drinking of coffee and the increase of heart disease among women. According to the report in the American Medical Journal the five year-study shows this: Women who drink more than two cups of coffee a day have greater chance of having heart disease than women who do not.‎ ‎ In sports, the Chargers lost again last night. The BBs beat them 1 to nothing. The Wingers had better results. They beat the Rifles 7 to 3. It was their first win in their last five matches.‎ ‎ That’s the news of the hour. And now back to more easy listening with Jan Singer.‎ ‎64．Who gave the news on the hour.‎ ‎ A．The mayor in Miami. B．Ed Wilson. C．Scientists in California .D．Jan Singer.‎ ‎65．To improve the ties between China and the U.S. and Western Europe, China .‎ ‎ A．will send a group of Chinese scientists to pay a visit to the U. S. and Western Europe.‎ ‎ B．will send some scientists to visit U. S. only ‎ C．has reached its aim. D．has given many reports to improve the ties ‎66．From the news in Miami we know .‎ ‎ A．a peaceful way will soon be found B．the teachers’ strike will last long ‎ C．students haven’t been to school for two weeks ‎ D．students can’t go into the school because the classrooms are locked ‎67．From the last news we don’t know .‎ ‎ A．the results of the two matches B．the teams which played last night ‎ C．how many wins the BBs has had altogether D．the Wingers had 1 win and 4 defeats D ‎ Editors of newspapers and magazines often go to extremes（极端）to provide their readers with unimportant facts and statistics（数据）.Last year a reporter had been requested by a well-known magazine to write an article on the president’s palace in a new African republic. When the article arrived, the editor read the first sentence and then refused to publish it. The article began:“Hundreds of steps lead to the high wall which surrounds the president’s palace.”The editor at once sent the reporter a fax（传真）asking him to find out the exact number of steps and the height of the wall.‎ ‎ The reporter immediately set out to do as he was asked to, but he took a long time to send them. Meanwhile, the editor was getting impatient, for the magazine would soon go to press. He sent the reporter two more faxes, but received no reply. He sent yet another fax telling the reporter that if he did not reply soon he would be fired. When the reporter again failed to reply, the editor had to publish the article as it had been originally（原始）written. A week later, the editor at last received a fax from the reporter. Not only had the poor man been arrested, but he had been sent to prison as well. However, he had at last been allowed to send a fax in which he told the editor that he had been arrested while counting the 1,084 steps leading to the fifteen-foot wall which surrounded the president’s palace.‎ ‎68．The editor didn’t want to publish the article because .‎ ‎ A．he wanted to find an excuse to fire the reporter ‎ B．he had not read the article wholly ‎ C．he was not pleased with the facts in the article ‎ D．he wanted to please the president of the new African republic ‎69．The reporter took a long time to send the information he was asked for .‎ ‎ A．because it took him a long time to count all the steps ‎ B．because he had not been allowed to fax the information he had found out ‎ C．because he did not realize how soon the magazine would go to press ‎ D．because he had been arrested before he had had time to find out the facts ‎70．The reporter must have been arrested when .‎ ‎ A．he acted too suspiciously（可疑地）B．he went to extreme to provide unimportant facts ‎ C．he climbed the palace wall in order to measure its height ‎ D．he learnt that his article was pressed originally ‎71．The purpose of the writer’s giving this very example is .‎ ‎ A．to provide ground reasons for his ideas of how to write a good article ‎ B．to ask readers for advice on how to get rid of extreme ‎ C．to tell readers how to write an article ‎ D．to show his opinion about extreme of some editors of newspapers and magazines.‎ E ‎ Last week’s topic: What’s your opinion about cheating in exams?‎ ‎ Willson822（Fujian）:An oath isn’t enough to prevent anyone from cheating. Who can tell that they won’t promise something that goes against their will? So I think the penalty（处罚）is more important. Penalties should be serious enough to prevent people from breaking the oath!‎ ‎ Wang Changling（Anhui）:The oath itself makes all test-takers think that others may consider them would-be cheaters, which can hurt their feelings. In my opinion, prevention is better than a penalty. Educators should set good examples for students to follow and be role models for them. Even if a few educators continue to copy other people’s work and their research papers, surely, students will follow suit.‎ ‎ Anonymous: I support the school’s action against cheating. Although the oath isn’t a duty, it can warn the would-be cheater.‎ ‎ Cathy Cheng: I find it’s hard to refuse a friend who wants help in exams. And I think the rule of Maryland University gives the students like me a good excuse to refuse.‎ ‎ Zzq8301: I think this is a promising step toward what we’re talking about when we say ‘fair play’ these days. Cheaters should be stopped because they make it different for the honest to succeed.‎ ‎ Freda（Tianjin）: I was told by my foreign teacher to write down the oath on the back of my test paper in the same way that was described in the article. It’s a rule everyone should obey in a fair game. Whether this method succeeds or fails is up to you. What I want to say is to be true to yourself.‎ ‎72．It is clear that the people above are talking about the rule made by .‎ ‎ A．Maryland University B．the Education Department ‎ C．some colleges D．the government ‎73．How many people are in fact for the rules?‎ ‎ A．Three B．Two C．Four D．Five ‎74．Who thinks teachers should set an example?‎ ‎ A．Willson822 B．Freda C．Cathy Cheng D．Wang Changling ‎75．The underlined word“oath”may have the same meaning as .‎ ‎ A．idea B．promise C．plan D．opinion ‎★专题（23）‎ A On Nov. 18, 1995, Itzhak Perlman, the violinist, came on stage to give a concert at Avery Fisher Hall at Lincoln Center in New York City.‎ If you have ever been to a Perlman concert, you know that getting on stage is no small achievement for him. He was stricken with polio(小儿麻痹症) as a child, and so he has braces(支架) on both legs and walks with the aid of two crutches(双拐).‎ He walks painfully, yet majestically, until he reaches his chair. Then he sits down, slowly, puts his crutches on the floor, undoes the clasps on his legs, tucks one foot back and extends the other foot forward. Then he bends down and picks up the violin, puts it under his chin, nods to the conductor and proceeds to play.‎ But this time, something went wrong. Just as he finished the first few bars(小节), one of the strings on his violin broke. You could hear it snap(嘣断)——it went off like gunfire across the room. There was no mistaking what that meant. There was no mistaking what he had to do.‎ We figured that he would have to get up, put on the clasps again, pick up the crutches and limp his way off stage——to either find another violin or else find another string for this one. But he didn’t. Instead, he waited a moment, closed his eyes and then signaled the conductor to begin again.‎ The orchestra began, and he played from where he had left off. And he played with such passion and such power and such purity as they had never heard before.‎ When he finished, there was an awesome silence in the room. And then people rose and cheered. He smiled, wiped the sweat from this brow, raised his bow to quiet us, and then he said in a quiet tone, “You know, sometimes it is the artist’s task to find out how much music you can still make with what you have left.”‎ ‎56．By saying “getting on stage is no small achievement for him”, the author really means ___.‎ ‎ A．it’s very difficult for Itzhak Perlman to play the violin with three strings ‎ B．it’s not easy for Itzhak Perlman to get on the stage because he is disabled ‎ C．it’s not easy for Itzhak Perlman to face such a large audience ‎ D．it’s really great achievements for Itzhak Perlman to play the violin with three strings ‎57．When one of the strings broke, people thought Itzhak Perlman would __________.‎ ‎ A．go on playing with the remaining three strings B．give up playing ‎ C．change or repair his violin D．get off the stage with shame ‎58．Itzhak Perlman ___________ when one of the strings of the violin broke.‎ ‎ A．gave up playing B．didn’t know what to do ‎ C．went on playing the same piece of music ‎ D．went on playing a different piece of music ‎59．What did the audience feel when Itzhak Perlman finished playing?‎ ‎ A．Surprised B．Disappointed C．Moved D．Satisfied ‎60．Itzhak Perlman can be best described as a man who is ____________.‎ ‎ A．clever B．strong willed C．humourous D．quite skilled B Come rain or come shine, it’s important to know how to check the weather forecast when you live abroad.‎ A quick look at the newspaper can tell whether you should carry an umbrella, sunscreen or a warm coat when you go out to face the world.‎ A weather report usually comes with the heading “Weather Outlook” or just simply “Weather”. To put as much information as possible into a small space, a weather report has some unusual language. Words are chosen not for their attractiveness, but for their simplicity and directness.‎ A weather report has these sections: a general forecast, a detailed forecast, the previous day’s reading, world weather, pollution levels, and times and tides.‎ Most forecasts begin with a “general situation” report with general characteristics(特点) of that day’s weather. Forecasts do not generally use normal sentences, but make use of verbs, adjectives and adverbs instead. For example, “Brief sunny periods and heavy thunder showers later.” People scan a weather page rather than spending a long time on it, so writers do not need full sentences.‎ Following the general forecast is more detailed information. In Britain, which is a small country, and the US, which is large, there are geographical separations like Northern, East coast, and so on. The focus is not on attractive sentences, but immediacy. ‎ There are of course temperature forecasts. Depending on where you are, they will be in Celsius or Fahrenheit. In Britain, temperatures are given in both. In the US, only Fahrenheit is used. To go from Fahrenheit to Celsius, take away 32 from the temperature and divide by 1.8.‎ Most newspapers also have a brief list of weather conditions in major cities around the world.‎ With pollution becoming a global problem, many forecasts give the day’s pollution levels. This may be important for asthma sufferers and people who are affected by air quality levels. In the summer, pollen levels (flower seeds in the air) are sometimes listed to help hay fever sufferers.‎ There is usually information also on when the sun will rise and set. This is useful for farmers and other early risers.‎ ‎61．If the highest temperature in London is ‎68F, then it is _________ in the Celsius scale.‎ ‎ A．30 B．‎20 ‎C．10 D．40‎ ‎62．If you are asked to write a weather report, you must make sure the language you use is ___.‎ ‎ A．interesting B．simple and direct C．unusual D．brief and attractive ‎63．The writer of this passage mainly wants to tell us _________ when we live abroad. ‎ ‎ A．how to write a weather forecast B．where to find a weather forecast ‎ C．when we most need a weather forecast ‎ D．what information we can get from a weather forecast ‎64．If you have a hay fever when you are out on a summer, you will pay special attention to _____. A．pollution level B．the changes of temperature ‎ C．the time the sun rises and sets D．pollen levels C At Turkish Airlines, it’s been one year since our first voyage in China. A time spent on providing nothing short of the finest, friendliest and most reliable air travel service around. A service which offers flyers simple booking, easy check－in, not to mention excellent in－flight services and entertainment.‎ It is with great pleasure then that we announce the introduction of the 3rd flight in our weekly service. From Beijing and Shanghai, we take you through both history and time. Flying over the Silk Road you arrive in the ancient capital of Istanbul at sunrise — an unforgettable experience — and from there we connect you ‎ to a further 100 destinations worldwide.‎ So come experience what it is to travel across one of the world’s ancient trading routes in true style and comfort.‎ Offer valid(有效) from June 7 to July 13. For terms and conditions, please contact your local travel agent at the Turkish Airlines Beijing and Shanghai offices:‎ Beijing Tel: (010) 64651867/68/69/70 Fax: (010) 64651865‎ E- mail: thybjs@ public 3. bta. net. cn Shanghai Tel: (021) 32220022 Fax: (021) 32220021‎ E- mail: thysha@ uninet. com. cn ‎65．The purpose of this passage is __________.‎ ‎ A．to introduce a new flight service by Turkish Airlines ‎ B．to show Turkish Airlines offers the best service in the world ‎ C．to invite you to visit Istanbul from China ‎ D．to announce the cheapest flight from Beijing to Istanbul ‎66．If you buy a 3rd –flight ticket, which is the right route of flight?‎ ‎ A．Shanghai→North Africa→Istanbul B．Beijing→Istanbul→Middle East ‎ C．Shanghai→Europe→Middle East D．Beijing→Istanbul→Shanghai ‎67．If you want to go to North Africa tomorrow (July 20) with Turkish Airlines, how much will you have to pay for the flight?‎ ‎ A．More than 5000 yuan B．As much as 7500 yuan ‎ C．No more than 7500 yuan D．Less than 5000 yuan D In early 1977, the authorities(当局) announced that the end of manual labor and arranged some type of work of us to do in the courtyard. The free time also allowed me to hunt what became two of my favorite hobbies on Robben Island; gardening and tennis.‎ To survive in prison, one must develop ways to take satisfaction in one’s daily life. One can feel fulfilled by washing one’s clothes so that they are particularly clean. Just as one takes pride in important tasks outside of prison, one can find the same pride in doing small things inside prison.‎ Almost from the beginning of my sentence on Robben Island, I asked the authorities for permission to start a garden in the courtyard. For years, they refused without offering a reason. But finally they gave in, and we were able to cut out a small garden on a narrow patch of earth against the far wall.‎ The soil in the courtyard was dry and rocky. In order to start my garden, I had to remove a great many rocks to allow the plants room to grow.‎ The authorities supplied me with seeds. I at first planted tomatoes, chilies, and onions——hardy plants that did not require rich earth or constant care. The early harvests were poor, but they soon improved.‎ I began to order books on gardening. I studied different gardening techniques and types of fertilizers. I did not have many of the materials that the book discussed, but I learned through trial and error. For a time, I attempted to grow peanuts(花生), and used different soils and fertilizers, but finally I gave up. It was one of my few failures.‎ A garden was one of the few things in prison that one could control. To plant a seed, watch it grow, to tend it and harvest it, offered a simple but long- lasting satisfaction. The sense of being the owner of the small patch of earth offered a taste of freedom.‎ ‎68．Which of the following is true according to the passage?‎ ‎ A．In order to keep alive in prison, one must be interested in doing small things.‎ ‎ B．One factor that the writer formed his two favorite favorite hobbies was his manual labor.‎ ‎ C．The writer asked to be permitted to start a garden, but was refused with a clear reason.‎ ‎ D．The condition of the writer’s garden was fairly good.‎ ‎69．Why did the writer devote himself to attending a garden? ‎ ‎ A．To kill his spare time and forget his sufferings.‎ ‎ B．To harvest vegetables and provide himself with food.‎ ‎ C．To gain satisfaction and sense the freedom as a human being.‎ ‎ D．To hide his political opinions by working hard in the garden.‎ ‎70．The underlined word “It” in this passage refers to _____________.‎ ‎ A．learning through trial and error B．attempting to grow peanuts ‎ C．using different soils and fertilizers D．studying different gardening techniques ‎71．What’s the main topic that is stated in the passage?‎ ‎ A．It’s hard to attend a garden. B．How to plant vegetables in prison.‎ ‎ C．Owning garden is a great pleasure. D．Madela’s garden in prison E The Colosseum(圆形大剧场) and Trevi Fountain(许愿泉) aren’t even mentioned in a hot-off –the –press guide to Rome. Instead, the pocketbook provides a guide to survival for homeless people in the Eternal(不朽) City. Some 5,000 people are homeless in Italy’s capital and up to 50,000 people are dependent on others for help——especially the elderly and the disabled, according to the Sant’ Egidio religious charity which drew up the book.‎ The 2003 edition of “Where to Eat, Sleep and Wash”, which has been called the “Poor-Man’s Michelin Guide (《米其林指南》) to Rome,” tells the needy and homeless where to find shelters, soup kitchens, public baths and health services. Demand for the book has skyrocketed since it was first published in 1990. The group printed 2,000 copies of the first edition but this year 13,000 copies of the 148-page “Bible” were printed, highlighting 760 locations(场所) that provide services for the needy.‎ ‎“It contains the secrets to survival in Rome,” said Mario Marazziti, a spokesman for the Sant’Egidio community. “This is a different face of Rome, and the guide tells us how to deal with its problems.” “Because of the economic crisis, more and more people are falling below the poverty line,” Marazziti added.‎ Indeed, it was the death of a beggar in 1983 after ambulance workers refused to pick him up that inspired Sant’Egidio to start publishing its pocket-sized guides to Rome. For the first time, San’t Egidio also included a fold-out plastic-coated map with symbols representing all of the eating, sleeping and washing hot spots across the city. Although the Golosseum is not marked in the guide, it appears on this map. “But it’s just a reference,” Marazziti said. “The normal Rome that tourists look at is a background for us.”‎ ‎72．Some famous places in Rome are not mentioned in the guide because ____________.‎ ‎ A．the homeless people in the city can’t afford to visit them ‎ B．the poor in the city are forbidden to go there ‎ C．they are not so important to the homeless people in the city ‎ D．beggars in the city never go there ‎73．The underlined word “skyrocket” in the second paragraph probably means _________.‎ ‎ A．increase sharply B．fly in the sky C．need badly D．attract greatly ‎74．Which of the following is true according to the passage?‎ ‎ A．The book contains the secrets to get money in Rome.‎ ‎ B．The fact that a beggar died made San’t Egidio publish the guide.‎ ‎ C．The author sings high praise for Rome.‎ ‎ D．The Colosseum is not marked in the guide because it is well known.‎ ‎75．The guide is called “Bible” because _________.‎ ‎ A．it is as useful as the Bible B．the poor use it as a bible ‎ C．it is as popular as the Bible D．it is of great value to the homeless people ‎★专题（24）‎ A Ed Jocelyn and Andy McEwen might have appeared to be a bit mad-the two set off on their own “Long March” through the remotest regions of China on October 16. The idea was to take a year to retrace one of the epic(史诗般的) movements of modern military history.‎ The two British men in their mid-30s were working as editors in Beijing when they decided to relive the tales of the original marches. “We hold these people in such esteem,” McEwen says.‎ They plan to keep diaries but will not share the contents during the trip. “When we get to the end we’ll put our heads together and try and come up with a book,” Jocelyn said.‎ Their trip has had some auspicious beginning, they have already met two Long March veterans(老战士) in less than a month of travel.‎ In this modern version, the pair are aided by high-tech equipment including a satellite phone,‎ ‎ mini-computer, video camera and solar panels to recharge batteries. A mountain tent and portable stove will help them in the remoter stretches.‎ They plan to average 35-40 kilometers a day, and rest about every third day. Ed admitted that their trip would be very tough..‎ If they succeed, they will be the first foreigners to complete the entire Long March route since Otto Braun, the German military advisor who accompanied the Red Army on the Long March.‎ ‎56．This text is mainly about .‎ ‎ A．high-tech equipment helpful to the Long March B．first foreigners to walk the Long March ‎ C．British editors’ adventure original in China D．British recall of the Long March spirit ‎57．The underlined word “auspicious” most probably means .‎ ‎ A．favourable B．friendly C．strange D．surprising ‎58．Which of the following statements is NOT true about the two foreigners?‎ ‎ A．They won’t use anything modern on the way.‎ ‎ B．They will do some cooking by themselves.‎ ‎ C．They will send off news about what happens day by day.‎ ‎ D．They’re planning to have a book published one year later.‎ B ‎ Situated in the South West of England, between Exeter and Plymouth, Torquay is one of the most popular holiday resorts（度假胜地）in Britain. It provides sophisticated（精致）entertainment, sports of every kind and cultural facilities, all set in a position of outstanding natural beauty. Visitors can choose between luxury hotels by the sea, with private suites（套房），swimming pools and saunas, and comfortable but less expensive guest houses. There are camping sites, too, and hundreds of houses displaying“B & B”signs.‎ ‎ As well as a number of small quiet bays, which are ideal for beach barbecues away from the crowds, Torquay has large sandy beaches where you can buy refreshments（饮料）and hire deck chairs, boats and even beach huts. There are large areas of grassland overlooking the sea, and miles of winding cliff paths for walkers who just want to enjoy the scenery and what is often said to be the healthiest air in the country. For the sportsmen and women there are opportunities not only for golf, tennis, squash and bowls, but also for water-skiing, hang-gliding and deep-sea fishing.‎ ‎ After a day in the open air, there’s lots to do in the evenings, too. There are plenty of discos, the occasional opera or ballet, and summer variety shows in the seafront theatres. For the children, there is a beautiful model village with a complicated railway layout which is remarkably realistic-especially when the lights are all on at night.‎ ‎ Of course, there’s no need to spend your whole holidays in Torquay. Only a short drive away is Dartmoor National Park, where you can walk for miles through dramatic, unspoiled countryside, or picnic by beautiful rivers and streams. Or, nearer to home, you can sail across Tor Bay to the lovely old fishing village of Brixham.‎ ‎ Torquay seems to have something for everyone. But don’t take my word for it-come and see for yourself.‎ ‎59．Which of the following best explains what “B & B” means on the signs?‎ ‎ A．Bed and breakfast B．Breakfast and bath ‎ C．Beach and barbecue D．Beautiful and British ‎60．According to the text Torquay might be described as .‎ ‎ A．comfortable and expensive B．crowed and lively ‎ C．remote and beautiful D．fresh and healthy ‎61．What is special about the model village?‎ ‎ A．It opens at night. B．It has something for the children ‎ C．It’s in the open air. D．It has a real railway system.‎ ‎62．What is the purpose of writing this text?‎ ‎ A．To introduce the geography of Torquay to students. B．To make some places known to visitors.‎ ‎ C．To show the beauty of resorts. D．To attract more tourists.‎ C ‎ It seems that the Englishman just cannot live without sports of some kind. A famous French humourist once said that this is because the English insist on behaving like children all their lives. Wherever you go in this country you will see both children and grown-ups knocking a ball about with a stick or something, as if in Britain men shall always remain boys and women girls! Still, it can never be bad to get exercise, can it?‎ ‎ Taking all amateur（业余）and professional sports in Britain into consideration, there can be no doubt ‎ that football is at the top of the list. It is called soccer in the United States. The game originated in Britain and was played in the Middle Ages or even earlier, though as an organized game, or“association football”, it dates only from the beginning of the 19th century.‎ ‎ The next is rugby, which is called“football”in the United States. It is a kind of football played by two teams of fifteen players rather than eleven. In rugby, an oval-shaped ball is used which can be handled as well as kicked. It is a pretty rough game.‎ ‎ In summer, cricket is the most popular sport. In fact, it has sometimes been called the English national game. Most foreigners find the game rather slow or even boring, but it enjoys great popularity among the British.‎ ‎ Tennis rates high on the list, too. It was introduced into England from France in the 15th century, but it was from England that it spread to practically every country in the world.‎ ‎ Table-tennis, or“ping-pong”,surely is not played on a great scale as it is in China or Japan. Basketball and volleyball were introduced into Britain during the late 19th century from America and are gaining popularity. Horse-back riding, swimming, rowing and golf all attract a lot of people.‎ ‎63．The main purpose of Paragraph 1 is to tell us that the English .‎ ‎ A．are all sports lovers B．behave like children ‎ C．like to kick a ball around D．can remain young all their lives ‎64．According to the passage, which of the following is NOT true about football and rugby?‎ ‎ A．They differ in the shape of the ball.‎ ‎ B．They are played by different numbers of players.‎ ‎ C．They both can be handled D．They both can be kicked.‎ ‎65．The game that was never played in Britain until the late 19th century is .‎ ‎ A．basketball B．tennis C．rugby D．football ‎66．What would be the best title for this passage?‎ ‎ A．The Most Popular Sports B．The English Sports ‎ C．History of Sports D．Sports in Britain D ‎ That“Monday morning feeling”could be a crushing pain in the chest which leaves you sweating and gasping for breath. Recent research from Germany and Italy shows that heart attacks are more common on Monday mornings and doctors blame the stress of returning to work after the weekend break.‎ ‎ The risk of having a heart attack on any given day should be one in seven, but a six-year study helped by researchers at the Free University of Berlin of more than 2,600 Germans showed that the average person had a 20 per cent higher chance of having a heart attack on a Monday than on any other day.‎ ‎ Working Germans are particularly not protected against attack, with a 33 per cent higher risk at the beginning of the working week. Non-workers, by comparison, appear to be no more at risk on a Monday than any other day.‎ ‎ A study of 11,000 Italians proved 8 am on a Monday morning as the most stressful time for the heart, and both studies showed that Sunday is the least stressful day, with fewer heart attacks in both countries.‎ ‎ The findings could lead to a better understanding of what is the immediate cause of heart attacks, according to Dr Stefan Willich of the Free University.“We know a lot about long-term risk factors such as smoking and cholesterol（胆固醇）but we don’t know what actually causes heart attacks, so we can’t give clear advice on how to prevent them,” he said.‎ ‎ Monday mornings have a double helping of stress for the working body as it makes a rapid change from sleep to activity, and from the relaxing weekend to the pressures of work.‎ ‎ “When people get up, their blood pressure and heart rate go up and there are hormonal（内分泌）changes in their bodies,” Willich explained.“All these things can have an unfavourable effect in the blood system and increase the risk of a clot（血凝块）in the arteries（动脉）which will cause a heart attack.”‎ ‎ “When people return to work after a weekend off, the pace of their life changes. They have a higher workload, more stress, more anger and more physical activity,” said Willich.‎ ‎67．Monday morning feeling, as this passage shows, .‎ ‎ A．is not so serious as people thought B．is harmful to working people in developed countries.‎ ‎ C．is the first killer in Germany and Italy. D．is created by researchers in Germany and Italy ‎68．To protect people from suffering from heart attack, doctors have paid much attention to . A．people’s working time B．people’s living place ‎ C．people’s diet and lifestyle D．people’s nationalities ‎69．It can be learned from this passage that heart attack has nothing to do with .‎ ‎ A．blood pressure B．heart rate C．hormonal changes D．blood group ‎70．If the researchers give us some advice to avoid Monday morning feeling, what might it be?‎ ‎ A．Stop working on Monday B．Greate a pleasant working environment ‎ C．Get up late on Monday morning D．Go to work with a doctor E In every British town, large and small, you will find shops that sell second-hand goods. Sometimes such shops deal mostly in furniture, sometimes in books, sometimes in ornaments（装饰）and household goods, sometimes even in clothes.‎ The furniture may often be“antique”,and it may well have changed hands many times. It may also be very valuable, although the most valuable piece will usually go to the London salerooms, where one piece might well be sold for hundreds of thousands of pounds. As you look around these shops and see the polished wood of chests and tables, you cannot help thinking of those long-dead hands which polished that wood, of those now-closed eyes which once looked at these pieces with love.‎ The books, too, may be antique and very precious; some may be rare first printings. Often when someone dies or has to move house, his books may all be sold, so that sometimes you may find whole libraries in one shop. On the border between England and Wales, there is a town which has become a huge bookshop as well. Even the cinema and castle have been taken over, and now books have replaced sheep as the town’s main trade.‎ There are also much more humble shops, sometimes simply called“junk shops”,where you can buy small household pieces very cheaply. Sometimes the profits from these shops go to charity（慈善事业）.Even these pieces, though, can make you feel sad; you think of those people who once treasured them, but who have moved on, to another country or to death.‎ Although the British do not worship their ancestors, they do treasure the past and the things of the past. This is true of houses as well. These days no one knocks them down, they are restored until they are often better than new. In Britain, people do not buy something just because it is new. Old things are treasured for their proven worth; new things have to prove themselves before they are accepted.‎ ‎71．Books found in second-hand book shops may .‎ ‎ A．be copies of the earliest printing. B．be on sale for the first time ‎ C．never be worth very much D．never be rare ‎72．What is the small town on the border between England and Wales famous for?‎ ‎ A．Its sheep. B．Its bookshops C．Its cinema. D．Its castle.‎ ‎73．Second-hand goods sometimes fill you with sadness because .‎ ‎ A．they are too expensive for average buyers B．they remind you of the original owner ‎ C．they are now neglected D．they are sold for charity ‎74．The average British person .‎ ‎ A．does not respect old things because they are not fashionable ‎ B．likes to build new houses simply because it is fashionable to do so ‎ C．likes to buy new things because they are fashionable ‎ D．does not like to buy things simply because they are fashionable ‎75．What does the underlined word“them”（Paragraph 4）refer to?‎ ‎ A．junk shops B．profits from shops C．old things D．old houses ‎★专题（25）‎ A I remember watching Saturday morning cartoons when I was little, in which Bugs Bunny would dig under the ground to China. Asia seemed as unreal to me as Mars.‎ Not many young people get to visit the other side of the world, but last summer I was fortunate to have the chance. With my teammates, I arrived in Beijing.‎ The most unforgettable experience in China was visiting the Great Wall. Its length and impressive（给人深刻印象的） construction made a lasting impression on my mind. Walking less than a mile on the wall was enough to leave me completely exhausted（累）. Most of the steps are very steep（陡的）. I used up three camera films in the four hours we walked on it.‎ Everywhere I looked in Beijing, I saw people on bicycles. I saw thousands of cars too, but for every car there were at least two bikes.‎ One night, six of us decided to borrow bikes from the hotel and ride around Beijing after dark. Since there were only three bikes we had to double up. So not only did we receive stares for being Americans, but also for falling off the bikes every 20 seconds!‎ Shopping was another very interesting part of the trip. At the Great Wall and the Silk Market, you can get the lowest prices because you can bargain.‎ ‎“Duo shao qian?”‎ ‎“Only 150 yuan. Good quality, 100 percent real cotton!”‎ ‎“Bu yao, I don’t want it, xie xie.”‎ ‎“Come back! Forty yuan, 40, I give you 40! Real cotton!”‎ All you have to do is walk away and the traders will lower the price, sometimes to a quarter of the figure they had asked for at first.‎ I have too many memories, experiences and observations to share. I could talk for days about the differences between China and the US. I feel so lucky to have seen such a culture so different from my own. I will remember my trip to China forever.‎ ‎56．What made the American worn out on the Great Wall?‎ ‎ A．Walking for quite a long distance. B．Using up four camera films.‎ ‎ C．The length of the Great Wall. D．A four-hour tiring climb.‎ ‎57．What attracted a lot of people’s attention was that .‎ ‎ A．the Americans were not skilled in riding bicycles ‎ B．the Americans were going around Beijing after dark ‎ C．the Americans borrowed bicycles from the hotel ‎ D．the Americans did not have enough bikes ‎58．From the passage it can be inferred that the writer .‎ ‎ A．liked the Chinese culture B．would come to China again ‎ C．bought something cheap in Beijing D．wanted to make his experiences in China known ‎59．What would be the best title for the text?‎ ‎ A．An Impressive Visit to the Great Wall B．Shopping in the Silk Market ‎ C．Bicycle Rides Around Beijing D．An Unforgettable Trip to China B ‎ A few weeks ago I was about to take my son to his ice hockey game when I noticed something unusual. He was fully dressed and ready to leave, except that one side of his shirt was tucked（塞） into his trousers while the other side remained hanging out.‎ ‎“John, you look great, but you forgot to tuck in your shirt,” I chided（责备）.‎ ‎“Dad, you don’t understand,” he replied. “I keep one side of my shirt out on purpose. It’s for good luck.”‎ And then I understood. Superstitions（迷信） and sports go hand in hand. In fact, I would bet that superstitious behavior has been a part of sports since the beginning of organized games.‎ Perhaps you’ve noticed your own young athlete developing some unusual pregame rituals （仪式）：putting on the same dirty undershirt game after game, wearing one sock up and one sock down, eating a particular pregame meal, listening to the same song on the tape while riding to the game.‎ In fact, from my experience of observing even top professional athletes, superstitions are nothing more than patterns that many athletes go through, not so much to ensure（保证） good luck, but rather to help them relax and be comfortable.‎ It is unusual for six-or seven-year-old children to have already developed some sports superstitions, but by the time they’re 10 or 11, your kids might begin displaying some odd behavior before a game. As a parent, don’t be overly concerned.‎ Of course, you’ll want to respect your child’s requests about wearing that special “lucky shirt” or making certain you feed him that “lucky breakfast” or whatever. Don’t put down the ritual. However, you should point out to your child that while it’s fine to develop a pregame ritual to help him or her prepare for a contest, you’ll also want to emphasize that one’s success in sports is much more a function of hard work, practice and determination. After all, those are the real values you want to put into your child’s mind.‎ Most superstitions last only as long as the athlete continues to experience “good luck”. Once that streak of good fortune runs out, he’ll be glad to drop that undershirt into the washing machine.‎ ‎60．Athletes’ superstitions always .‎ ‎ A．ensure them good luck B．enable them to perform well ‎ C．does harm to them D．make them feel comfortable ‎61．Which of the following statements is NOT true?‎ ‎ A．Most of the odd pregame behavior(as mentioned in the 5th paragraph) is harmless.‎ ‎ B．Following a pregame ritual gives the athletes a sense of comfort.‎ ‎ C．Even though the behavior is harmless to the child, a teammate or an opponent, we still can’t say the ‎ superstitious behavior is fine.‎ ‎ D．If a child begins displaying some odd behavior before a game as sports superstitions, a parent needn’t worry too much.‎ ‎62．What shouldn’t you do according to the passage?‎ ‎ A．Tell your young athlete: The harder they work at their sports, the luckier they’ll become.‎ ‎ B．Tell your kid more about the top athletes’ superstitions and encourage him to do so.‎ ‎ C．Some kids don’t want to talk about their superstitions, and so respect their rights and their privacy.‎ ‎ D．Keep a sense of humor about your kid’s superstitions, and let them do the same.‎ ‎63．The title of the passage should be .‎ ‎ A．Getting Rid of “Silly” Superstitions B．Dealing with Those “Silly” Superstitions ‎ C．Supporting Young Athlete’s Superstitions D．Talking about Superstitions C In deciding upon a unit of measurement, it is possible to pick anything. For example, the average height of a man could possibly have been a unit of measurement. In fact, some of the units used today in English-speaking countries are based on such things as the distance from a man’s elbow（肘） to the tip of his middle finger, or the weight of a grain（粒） of wheat.‎ Because there have been so many differences in weights and measures used in different countries, an international system has been urged. If one system were to be used by all countries of the world, it would probably be the metric system.‎ This is a system worked out by a committee（委员会） of scientists appointed（委任） in France in 1789. The English-speaking countries are almost the only ones that do not use the metric system in their measures. However, it is used in scientific work even in those countries. ‎ The metric system is based on a measure of length called the “meter”. This is approximately（近似）one ten-millionth of the distance on the Earth’s surface from pole to equator（赤道）.It is about 39.37 inches.‎ The metric system is based on 10 as is our number system, so that each unit of length is 10 times as large as the next smaller unit. There are square and cubic units for measuring area and volume（体积） which correspond to the units of length.‎ The unit of weight is the gram, which is the weight of a cubic centimeter of pure water. The liter is a measure used as the quart is used, but it is a little larger. The hectare（公顷）, which is 10,000 square meters, is used as the acre in Britain, but is 2.471 acres. The metric system is more convenient to use than the English system because its plan is the same as that of our number system.‎ Here are some equivalents for the metric and English systems: One foot equals 0.305 meter; one inch equals 2.540 centimeters; one mile equals 1.609 kilometers; one quart liquid equals 0.946 liter.‎ ‎64．Metric system should be used in the world, because .‎ ‎ A．man measured the distance which is based on the distance from a man’s elbow to the tip of his middle finger ‎ B．the English-speaking countries used their own measurement ‎ C．scientific work needs a unit of measurement ‎ D．based on the weight of a grain of wheat, an informal measure of weight is used today ‎65．In , a committee of scientists worked out “Metric system.”‎ ‎ A．America B．Japan C．France D．Germany ‎66．Which of the following units does NOT belong to “Metric system”?‎ ‎ A．Acre B．Hectare C．Kilometer. D．Gram.‎ ‎67．This passage is mainly about .‎ ‎ A．how to work out the Metric system B．what is the Metric system ‎ C．how to change other units into the Metric system D．the development of the Metric system D A new law has recently been announced which forbids people to disturb, annoy, harm, kill or interfere with any bats which choose to live in their houses. Anyone who disturbs a bat on its nest（鸟巢）,or handles one without a license will be fined ￡1,000.‎ There are some people who like bats. The late Mrs. Ian Fleming was one. She would crawl for miles to see them in caves or hanging from trees. Similarly, there are many people who do not like bats much but are not particularly troubled by them. The chance of a bat resting in their attics（阁楼） or spare bedroom curtains may seem for away from them. But there are others who do not fail into either of these categories and Mr. Auberon Waugh is one. Underneath his house are eight large celars which for some reason bats have chosen to claim for themselves. He finds it extremely disagreeable to have to fight his way through a colony ‎ of them every time he wants a bottle of wine. And as a wine-lover he gets a particular pleasure from the ownership of wine, which has nothing to do with drinking it. He has certain bottles in his cellar which he thinks are too good to serve to anyone he knows, but he likes to go down and enjoy looking at them occasionally. The bats entirely destroy this pleasure.‎ Until the recent law, he could keep the bat problem within manageable proportions by sending his children down on a bat hunt every three months armed with tennis rackets. They usually managed to kill one or two and discouraged the rest from settling. But now, Mr. Waugh fears that the bats will take over the house. To solve the problem he inquired what course of action he could take and was told by Dr Robert Stebbings of the Institute of Terrestrial Ecology, “I am sure that no one will mind if you pick up a bat and take it outside and hang it on a tree or the outside of the house.” The trouble with this, as Mr. Waugh explains, is that he would be fined a ￡1,000 if he had not already applied to the Nature Conservancy Council for a license to handle bats. And there is no certainty that he would automatically be granted one.‎ ‎68．Some people who dislike bats .‎ ‎ A．do not mind them hanging in trees B．run the risk of finding them in their attics ‎ C．think it strange they should roost（栖息） in the curtains ‎ D．think they are unlikely to be bothered by them ‎69．Mr. Waugh thinks that bats .‎ ‎ A．should be kept under control B．should all be destroyed ‎ C．interfere with his wine D．prevent him owning wine ‎70．Because he is a wine-lover, M. Waugh .‎ ‎ A．only wants to own the best wines B．stores only good wines ‎ C．keeps certain good wines D．refuses to drink good wines ‎71．Success in removing bats from your home depends on .‎ ‎ A．seeking help from the Institute of Terrestrial Ecology ‎ B．the granting of a Nature Conservancy Council license ‎ C．taking the course of action recommended by Dr Stebbings ‎ D．applying for a license from the Nature Conservancy Council E Like most people, you may have heard a lot about online banking but probably haven’t tried it yourself. You still pay your bills by mail much in the way your parents did, for you are probably afraid of not knowing how to deal with it. Actually, online banking isn’t out to change your money habits. Instead, it uses today’s computer technology to give you the choice of by-passing the time-consuming, paper-based ways of traditional banking in order to manage your money more quickly and efficiently.‎ The advantage of the Internet and the popularity of personal computers presented both an opportunity and a challenge for the banking industry. For years, financial（金融） institutions have used powerful computer networks to automate millions of daily transactions. Now that their customers are connected to the Internet from personal computers, banks begin to expect similar economic advantages by adapting（采用） those same internal electronic processes to home use.‎ Today, most large national banks, many regional banks and even smaller banks and credit unions offer some form of online banking, variously known as PC banking, home banking, electronic banking or Internet banking. Online banks are sometimes referred to as brick-to-click banks. The challenge for the banking industry has been to design this new service channel in such a way that its customers will readily learn to use and trust it. Most of the large banks can now offer fully secure, fully functional online banking for free or for a small fee. As more banks succeed online and more customers use their sites, fully functional online banking likely will become as common as automated teller machines.‎ Online banking has a lot of advantages. Unlike your corner bank, online banking sites never close; they’re available 24 hours a day, seven days a day, and they’re only a mouse click away. If you’re out of state or even out of the country when a money problem rises, you can log on instantly to your online bank and take care of business. Online bank sites generally execute and confirm transactions at or quicker than ATM processing speeds. Many online banking sites now offer advanced tools, including account aggregation, stock quotes, and portfolio managing programs to help you manage all of your assets（财产） more effectively.‎ ‎72．According to the passage nowadays online banks are so popular, but .‎ ‎ A．all the consumers still prefer to pay their bill by mail ‎ B．it can not take the place of automated tellers machines ‎ C．many people still worried about its safety ‎ D．not every consumer knows how to use it ‎73．The writer wrote this short passage in order to tell people .‎ ‎ A．banks just try to use online banking instead of ATM in the future ‎ B．how convenient online banking is ‎ C．how to use online banking to take care of consumers’ money ‎ D．online banking is much better than the corner banks ‎74．Online banking is a system .‎ ‎ A．that if you need money, it will help you to get it ‎ B．that helps banks to offer better services ‎ C．that will help consumers to save their money if necessary ‎ D．that you can find in your personal computers ‎75．We can imagine in the near future, .‎ ‎ A．online banking will be part of people’s life B．one can not live without online banking ‎ C．PC banking will completely takes the place of home banking ‎ D．people can only do their business through online banking ‎★专题（26）‎ A Everyone would like to be a millionaire but can you imagine having over $30 million and only being 20 years old ? Britney Spears from Kentwood , a small town in Louisiana , is only 20 years old ; she is an international pop superstar with not only $30 million but also a $2 million house in LA . At her young age , she can look after her family financially （经济上）all her life .‎ This year is a big year for Britney , she is currently on a 31 date tour of the US and every concert is a sell out . That means she plays in front of a crowd of around 18,000 every time . It’s tiring schedule （安排表）but brings great rewards . When touring , she goes to bed around lam and then has a lie-in until lpm or 2pm the next day . Her philosophy（人生观）is to take care of the body and relax but always make sure you work hard and have fun .‎ Spears is not satisfied with only touring and selling nearly 40 million records so she decided to branch out into the movie business and try a bit of acting .She made an appearance in “ Austin Powers ‎3”‎ this year and she is filming a teenage comedy that will be released in March 2003 . In this movie , she has a starring role . The movie was her own concept and she picked the writer .‎ For Britney , acting is another way to express herself and she is enthusiastic（热心）about it all . If her movies are successful , her bank account is sure to grow by another few million dollars but she has been quoted as saying she does it for the love , not the money .‎ ‎56．We can infer from the text that most millionaires are .‎ ‎ A．older than 20 B．around ‎20 ‎C．in their 30s D．in their 40s ‎57．Tickets for her concerts are .‎ ‎ A．cheap B．expensive C．on sale soon D．all sold ‎ ‎58．The underlined word “you” in the second paragraph refers to .‎ ‎ A．a person in general B．a particular person ‎ ‎ C．Britney Spear herself only D．the reader ‎ ‎59．Which of the following is not true according to the text ?‎ ‎ A．Though young , Britney can support her family now .‎ ‎ B．While touring , Britney sleeps about 12 hours a day .‎ ‎ C．The teenage comedy movie was based on Britney’s own story .‎ ‎ D．Britney will be even richer with her movies successful .‎ ‎60．According to Britney Spear , she works .‎ ‎ A．to be a great actress B．for the enjoyment ‎ ‎ C．for money D．to be more famous ‎ B In the world today , there are millions of surveillance cameras , or ‘spy cams’, watching and monitoring our daily activities . There are some benefits of course , as people who are breaking laws can be watched and caught using cameras and this helps keep out society and public places safe . ‎ These cameras are everywhere and most are openly visible on roads , in airports , businesses , shopping centers and government buildings and even in lifts . Even schools have started using spy cams to watch student activity and behaviour .‎ The cameras are so common now that we hardly ever even notice them . But the problem lies with the ones that are hidden away from our eyes and are unseen . Technology has helped develop tiny cameras that ‎ can be very well hidden and they can ‘spy’ on shoppers , workers , babysitters and people in hotels and clubs without the people even knowing .‎ ‎ It is these spy cams that people feel are an invasion of privacy . Recently , in the U.S ., there have been a number of court cases against babysitters whose actions have been recorded by their employers on hidden cameras .‎ The number of cameras in public and private areas is on the increase and with rising crime rates and the recent terrorist attacks , more and more surveillance cameras are being used to watch us . This means that we all have to be aware that our employers , department stores , police and even some of our friends could be spying on us at any time !‎ ‎61．In the writer’s opinion , surveillance cameras .‎ ‎ A．do more good than wrong B．are overused ‎ ‎ C．should be very popular D．ought to be more widely used ‎ ‎62．In what way can the surveillance camera benefit the public ?‎ ‎ A．By helping keep social safety . B．By monitoring the employees .‎ ‎ C．By watching the students in class . D．By spying on customers .‎ ‎63．According to paragraphs 3 and 4 , people the use of hidden cameras .‎ ‎ A．object to B．agree to C．feel happy about D．are fearful of ‎ ‎64．Spy cams will be more widely used in the future because .‎ ‎ A．all people want to spy B．of the invasion of privacy ‎ ‎ C．people enjoy being watched D．of terrorist attacks ‎ C OVER 22 million dead animals that have never been seen by the public before were on display last week in London , Britain . The selection is one of the biggest and the best in the world and the Natural History Museum hopes that it will help people understand nature better .‎ People were able to examine the animals , which range from tiny insects that lived millions of years ago to the bones of dinosaurs （恐龙）and butterflies （蝴蝶）in amazing detail .‎ The scientific specimens （标本）are all either stored in alcohol（酒精）or made in a fossil （化石）form and have been given to the new Darwin Centre by scientists and researchers over the last hundred years .‎ The center , named after the world famous scientist Charles Darwin , will be open free to the public . It is part of the much larger Natural History Museum , which attracts over 2 million visitors a year .‎ The new museum has actual specimens caught by Darwin , including a parrotfish and pipefish he caught while on his journey around the world . There are also lots of other specimens caught by famous explorers that lived over 150 years ago , which include a tusk （长牙）from an African elephant given by famous British scientist David Livingstone .‎ People can view specimens close up , watch videos of scientists at work , look at information on computers , and look up through the seven-storey storage hall to sense the huge scale of what’s inside . They are also able to take guided tours and join live events with scientists .‎ Another section of the museum is being planned . When it opens in 2007 , there will be an extra 28 million insects on display and 6 million plants .‎ ‎65．By visiting the museum , one can .‎ ‎ A．enrich his knowledge of the universe B．have a better understanding of the world ‎ ‎ C．get to know the animal world better D．see all kinds of dead animals ‎ ‎66．The dead animals on display .‎ ‎ A．were mainly caught by Charles Darwin B．are specimens presented by scientists and researchers ‎ ‎ C．have mostly been unseen by the public before D．are the best selection in the world so far ‎ ‎67．If you go to visit Darwin Centre , you .‎ ‎ A．will have to buy a ticket B．will be allowed to touch the exhibits ‎ ‎ C．won’t be charged D．will check information on a computer first ‎ ‎68．What would be the best title for the text ?‎ ‎ A．Natural History Museum B．A New Darwin Centre ‎ ‎ C．History of the animal D．Time You Can Touch ‎ D During the last ten years , several important new technologies have affected advertising considerably . One was the penetration（渗透）of cable television and satellite receivers into a vast number of American homes . Many cable channels are devoted to single types of programming , such as straight news , home shopping , sports , or comedy . This has changed television from the most widespread of mass media to a ‎ somewhat more specialized medium . Now smaller companies and companies with products that interest a limited market can use television to reach audiences with particular interests .‎ Another change in the TV world has been the growing presence of videocassette recorders . For many customers , watching movies on video at home has replaced going to the movie theater . Advertisers have watched this trend with interest . Some videos now begin with an ad , shot in a suitable cinematic cycle , that sells a product valued by that particular movie’s audience .‎ Computer technology has had its own effect , Personal computers , modems , electronic mails , electronic bulletin boards , even fax machines give advertisers new media for reaching potential（潜在的）customers . But these choices are largely replacements for print media , and their advertising trends to be more information-oriented than image-oriented . The increased number of computer users has benefited advertisers in another way as well . Now even the smallest companies can maintain a database（数据库）for direct mail . This , too , is an excellent medium for reaching people with particular interests .‎ Today advertising is a powerful means that announces the availability （实用性）and location of products , expresses the quality and value of those products , and even fills brands with personality while at the same time defining the personality of the people who buy them . In turn , advertising itself is shaped by the technology used to convey its message to potential customers .‎ ‎69． make it possible for small companies to send advertisements to audiences specially interested in their products .‎ ‎ A．Single types of TV programming B．Mass media ‎ ‎ C．Particular interests D．New technologies of TV sets ‎ ‎70．As more and more people have begun to use computers , advertisements can be directly sent to particular costumers .‎ ‎ A．by electronic bulletin board B．by post C．by e-mail D．by fax machines ‎ ‎71．The best title of this passage might be “ ”.‎ ‎ A．The Informaiton Age of Advertising . B．Mass Media and Advertising ‎ ‎ C．Technologies of Advertising D．Advertising and Customers ‎ E ‎ Science and technology have advanced at such a rate that cloning （克隆）has now become a reality . The possibility of cloning humans is a serious issue and raises ethical （伦理的）questions . In my opinion , cloning is useful for research into cures for disease .However ,I think that it needs to be approached with caution and carefully monitored by governments .‎ Research into cloning and stem cell（干细胞）production is primarily aimed at finding new treatments for currently incurable illnesses . While this would improve the quality of life for many ,not enough is understood about what effects cloning would have on the world in the future . This is primarily because we do not understand enough about the effects of cloning and both the physical and psychological effects that is likely to have on cloned humans and on the rest of the world . Furthermore , it is thought that a cloned human would be unlikely to survive birth and would suffer from complications resulting from malformed（畸形的）organs .‎ There are also quite serious ethical issues in danger . In essence , those who are against cloning would argue that scientists have no right to play God and to interfere with natural processes . Producing embryos （晶胚）for the purpose of harvesting stem cells for research presents important questions about the nature and status of the embryo being produced . It may also make us question whether throwing it away after use reduces the value we place on human life .‎ I conclusion I do not agree that research into cloning using human embryos should continue . This is not only because it may reduce the value we place on human life , but also because not enough is known about the effects . However , I do think that if there is a way to produce stem cells using cloning which does not put human life at risk , then governments should continue to support it .‎ ‎72．What is the writer’s general opinion on cloning ?‎ ‎ A．It is useful in every area of research ‎ ‎ B．It needs to be carefully controlled by governments .‎ ‎ C．It is useful for research into cures for disease if it is controlled .‎ ‎ D．It is only useful for research into cures for disease .‎ ‎73．The writer’s main reason against cloning is that .‎ ‎ A．not enough is known about the effects of cloning ‎ ‎ B．a cloned human would be likely to die of malformed organs ‎ ‎ C．cloning has negative physical and psychological effects on clones ‎ ‎ D．it would affect the quality of life for many ‎ ‎74．The main argument in Paragraph 3 is that .‎ ‎ A．scientists do not value human life B．the process of cloning needs to be questioned ‎ ‎ C．cloning devalues human life D．scientists should not interfere with natural processes ‎ ‎75．In Paragraph 4 , the writer thinks governments should .‎ ‎ A．not put human life at risk ‎ ‎ B．support all forms of research into stem cell production ‎ ‎ C．not support any form of research into stem cell production ‎ ‎ D．support research into stem cell production harmless to human life ‎ ‎★专题（27）‎ A Dear Jane, Barbara and Roger,‎ As you know, we’ve been looking for a new house for some time.Now that all our children have left home, we find that the house is too big for us. Also, since your father retired, there has been no reason for us to stay in this district. Although we like our neighbors, we’ve decided to move south for two reasons. First, the weather will suit us better, and second, we’ll be a little nearer to your Uncle George and Auntie Hilda. It will make visiting each other much simpler.‎ We stayed with your Uncle and Aunt last weekend and saw several houses. One of them sounded as if it were just what we wanted. The right number of rooms, a small garden, etc. When we saw it, we neafly died! It was in a terrible condition and would have cost a fortune to make babitable. The roof and all the walls needed repairing and the whole inside redecorating. After that, we were very eareful about believing details from the estate（房地产）agent. The next two that we saw were not much better, but the fourth house was exactly what we wanted. It was empty, so we’re going to move in immediately. We gave details of our house to the estate agent only last week, but it’s already been sold. We’ll put all your things in boxes and take them with us. You’ll have to sort them out, throwing away what you don’t want.‎ Can you all come next weekend? You can have a nice rest in the country. Telephone on Wednesday at the new number to let us know.‎ Lots of love,‎ Mum and Dad P.S. Bring some old clothes, because between the rests, you’ll be sorting out your belongings and digging the garden!‎ ‎56．What is implied in the sentence “When we saw it, we nearly died!”‎ ‎ A．We were so excited because the house was exactly what we wanted.‎ ‎ B．The house was in such an unexpected poor condition that we were greatly disappointed.‎ ‎ C．We were puzzled when we saw the house.‎ ‎ D．We were so tired since we had been to several houses.‎ ‎57．We understand from the passage that the estate agent .‎ ‎ A．overstated the exact condition of the house B.did not have enough houses for them to choose from ‎ C．talked them into buying a house in poor condition D．could not understand their needs ‎58．The children were not supposed to .‎ ‎ A．help their parents move house B．bring some old clothes ‎ C．sort out their belongings D．work in the garden ‎59．Which of the following is not a purpose in writing this letter?‎ ‎ A．Explaining to the children the reason for moving house?‎ ‎ B．Informing the children that they will move to a new house.‎ ‎ C．Inviting the children to visit the new house.‎ ‎ D．Expressing their regret for not being with their children.‎ B Advertisement ‎ ‎ ‎ Now available at Frandlin park one block from Indiana University. New unfurnished apartments. One bedroom at ＄135, two bedrooms at ＄155, three bedrooms at ＄170 per month. Utilities included except electricity. Children, and pets welcome. One month’s deposit required. Office open Monday through Saturday nine to five. Call 999-7415 for an evening or Sunday appointment.‎ ‎ ‎ ‎60．According to this ad, if two people rent an apartment together, they would pay a deposit of ‎ . A．＄270 B．＄‎170 C．＄155 D．＄135‎ ‎61．From this ad we can assume that .‎ ‎ A．the apartments are far from Indiana University B．the apartments have furniture in them ‎ C．gas and water bills are included in the rent D．cats and dogs not permitted in the apartments ‎62．The ad implies that interested persons must .‎ ‎ A．see the apartments on Monday or Saturday ‎ B．call for an appointment if they want to see the apartments from nine to five Monday through Saturday ‎ C．call for an appointment if they want to see the apartments on Sunday or in the evening ‎ D．see the apartments before five o’clock any day C A Tight Situation Sometimes funny memories are the most special way to remember a beloved lover. It helps take away some of the feeling of loss. Before he passed away, my husband loved to share this story with our friends. Now, it makes a smile to share this story with you.‎ Our neighbor’s son was getting married in 1971 at a church, and we were invited. We immediately rushed out of the store, and I bought a nice pink dress with a jacket. The dress was a little tight, but I had a month before the June 30 wedding and I would lose a few pounds.‎ June 29 came and, of course, I had not lost a single pound; in fact, I had gained two. But, I thought a new girdle（收腹健美裤）would solve my problem. So on our way to the wedding, we stopped once again at the store. I ran in and told the clerk I needed a size large girdle.‎ The clerk round the box with the described girdle, marked “L”, and asked if I would like to try it on. “ Oh, no, large will fit just right. I won’t need to try it on.”‎ The next morning was hot, so I waited to get dressed until about forty-five minutes before time to go. I opened the girdle box only to find a new ＄49.95 girdle in a size small. Since it was too late to find another one and the dress wouldn’t fit right without a girdle, a fight broke out between me and the girdle. Have you ever tried to shake twenty pounds of potatoes into a five-pound bag? Finally, my husband, laughing like crazy, got hold of each side and shook me down into it, and I was ready to go.‎ As we walked into the church, he asked if I could make it. Now, he was getting worried because I was breathing funny. I told him that it would last one hour, twenty-two minutes and eight-and-one-half seconds-the minister blessed everything except my girdle!‎ My knees were blue and my legs lost all the feeling. My husband was asking questions and trying to com-fort me.‎ As soon as the minister pronounced them married, I rushed out with my husband. “Please, just get me out of here!” I said.‎ We ran out to our car, and once there he opened the front and back passenger doors against the next car. Right there, before God, human and the wedding party, I took off that girdle. When the girdle flew out of my hand and landed under the car next to ours, my husband was laughing so hard and we drove away.‎ Over the years, he and I had often wondered what the people of that church thought the next morning when they found ＄49.95, size small girdle in their parking lot.‎ ‎63．When she was telling the story, she .‎ ‎ A．was sorry for her husband’s death B．was happy to share her funny memories ‎ C．was wondering who had picked up the girdle D．still couldn’t forget the trouble on that day ‎64．She still bought the tight pink dress, because she thought .‎ ‎ A．she would save some money B．she would gain a few pounds ‎ C．she would lose some weight D．she looked thinner in the dress ‎65．Which statement is true according to the story?‎ ‎ A．She changed the girdle for a larger size.‎ ‎ B．They tried hard to pour lots of potatoes into a small bag.‎ ‎ C．She put on the dress without the girdle in the end.‎ ‎ D．She managed to put on the girdle with her husband’s help.‎ ‎66．The title “A Tight Situation” really means .‎ ‎ A．she was dressed in a tight girdle B．she dressed herself in a limited time ‎ C．she got herself embarrassed D．the wedding lasted longer than she expected ‎67．The writer’s surpose of writing this story is .‎ ‎ A．to tell an interesting experience B．to prove her husband’s love ‎ C．to describe her tight girdle D．to describe her unspeakable feeling D When we think about people who are leaders, we often get a mental picture of someone who is older, smarter, and wiser than ourselves. Studies of leadership, though, have usually found that there is almost no relationship between skill as a leader and traditional measures of intelligence.‎ Some recent research by psychologist Red Fiedle and his colleagues suggests that both intelligence and experience may be important—but just now how important depends upon how stressful the work situation is and what kind of task is to be accomplished. The researchers obtained measures of intelligence, experience, performance, and stress.‎ Overall, these variables did not relate to one another. Men with high and low intelligence were equally likely to give good performance, as were men with more and less experience, or more and less stress with their bosses. However, when you look separately at those men who have high stress with their bosses, the picture changes.‎ In high stress situations, there was no association between intelligence and perfomance, but there was between experience and performance. In other words, in difficult situations, it was helpful to “know the ropes” . In low stress situations, the findings were just the opposite. Experience was not related to good perfomance, but intelligence was. That is, when things are going well, intelligence is very useful in leadership.‎ A study of fire fighters’ perfomance under high and low stress conditions also found the experienced officers performed best under situations of stress. None of this is really very surprising. If you have ever had a supervisory job, you probably found that at least as much energy went into handling（管理） people as went into handling the job itself. Tests of intelligence—at least the ones we have now—do not predict success in handling people.‎ ‎68．What kind of people can do the best job in stress situation?‎ ‎ A．intelligent people B．experienced people C．calm people D．skilled people ‎69．In the second sentence of the last paragraph , “a supervisory job” refers to .‎ ‎ A．a management job B．an advisory job ‎ C．a teaching job D．an organizing job ‎70．Which of the following statements is true according to the passage?‎ ‎ A．In stress situations, there are no association between experience and performance.‎ ‎ B．Some recent research suggests that most leaders are lack of intelligence.‎ ‎ C．In low stress situations, intelligence plays an important role in leadership.‎ ‎ D．Generally speaking leaders are likely to be cleverer than ordinary people.‎ ‎71．In the second sentence of the fourth paragraph, “to know the ropes”most probably means ‎ . A．to understand the situation B．to control the situation ‎ C．to get rid of the situation D．to make sure what to do about the situation E ‎“Life is speeding up. Everyone is getting unwell.”‎ This may sound like something someone would say today. But in fact, an unknown citizen who lived in Rome in AD 52 wrote it.‎ We all love new inventions. They are exciting, amazing and can even change our lives.‎ But have all these developments really improve the quality of our lives?‎ Picture this: You’re rushing to finish your homework on the computer. Your mobile phone rings, a QQ message from your friend appears on the screen, the noise from the television is getting louder and louder. Suddenly the computer goes blank and you lose all your work. Now you have to stay up all night to get it done. How calm and happy do you feel?‎ Inventions have speeded up our lives so much that they often leave us feeling stressed and tired. Why do you think people who live far away from noisy cities, who have not telephones, no cars, not even any electricity often seem to be happier? Perhaps because they lead simpler lives.‎ One family in the UK went “back in time” to see what life was like without all the inventions we have today. The grandparents, with their daughter, and grandsons Benjamin, 10, and Tomas, 7, spent nine weeks in a 1940s house. They had no washing machine, microwave, computer or mobile phones.‎ The grandmother, Lyn, said, “It was hard physically, but not mentally.” She believed life was less materialistic. “The more things you have, the more difficult life becomes,” She said. The boys said they fought less to fight over, such as their computer. Benjamin also noticed that his grandmother had changed from being a “trendy（时髦的）, beer-drinking granny, to one who cooked things.”‎ Here are some simple ways to beat the stress often caused by our inventions!‎ Don’t be available all the time, Turn off your mobile phone at certain times of the day. Don’t check your ‎ e-mail every day.‎ Don’t reply to somebody as soon as they leave a text message just because you can. It may be fun at first, but it soon gets annoying.‎ ‎72．The passage is mainly about .‎ ‎ A．problem with technology B．improvements of our life with technology ‎ C．the important roles technology plays in our everyday life ‎ D．major changes which will be likely to happen to technology ‎73．The writer quoted（引用） what a citizen in ancient Rome said at the beginning of the story in order to .‎ ‎ A．share a truth about life B．tell us what life was like long time ago ‎ C．make us wonder what causes such a thing to happen ‎ D．point out that you experience some big problems and they may be the same ‎74．Why did the family choose to spend some time in a ‎1940’‎s house? Because .‎ ‎ A．they liked to live simple lives ‎ B．they were curious about how people lived without modern inventions ‎ C．they were troubled by modern inventions ‎ D．living in a different time would be a lot of fun for them ‎75．What do you think the underlined word “available” in the 1st suggestion offered by the writer mean?‎ ‎ A．Busy on line B．Free. C．Be able to D．Be found by others.‎ ‎★专题（28）‎ A If you go to Brisbane, Australia, you can easily get a small book called “Discover Brisbane” free. The book tells you almost everything in Brisbane: the restaurants, the shops, the cinemas, the streets, the buses, the trains, the banks, etc.. Here is something about banks on page 49:‎ ANZ Banking Group Cnr. Greek & Queen Sts …………………………………………………………………228 3228‎ Bank of New Zealand ‎410 Queen Street …………………………………………………………………………221 0411‎ Bank of Queensland ‎229 Elizabeth Street ……………………………………………………………………229 3122‎ Commonwealth Banking Group ‎ ‎240 Queen Street ………………………………………………………………………237 3111‎ National Australia Bank Ltd ‎225 Adelaide Street………………………………………………………………………221 6422‎ Westpac Banking Corp ‎260 Queen Street…………………………………………………………………………227 2666‎ Banking Hours are Mon-Thurs 9:30 am to 4 pm.‎ Fri. 9:30 am to 5 pm. All banks close Sat. Sun. & Public Holidays.‎ Australia has a decimal currency with 100 cents to the Dollar.‎ Notes available are: $ 100, $ 50, $ 20, $ 10, $ 5‎ Gold coins are: $ 2 & $1.‎ Silver coins are: 50, 20, 10 & 5.‎ Copper coins are: 2 & 1 cent.‎ ‎56．You can find ANZ bank on _________.‎ ‎ A．Queen Street B．Elizabeth Street ‎ C．the corner of Greek Street and Queen Street ‎ D．the corner of Queen Street and Elizabeth Street ‎57．________ seems to be the most important street in Brisbane.‎ ‎ A．Greek Street B．Elizabeth Street C．Queen Street D．Adelaide Street ‎58．On Saturday, you can go to ________ to put your money in or take your money out.‎ ‎ A．ANZ Banking Group B．Bank of Queensland ‎ C．National Australia Bank Ltd D．no bank ‎59．In Australia, the banks have their longest service hours on _________.‎ ‎ A．public holidays B．Sundays C．Saturdays D．Fridays B My aunt Edith was a widow(寡妇) of 50, working as a secretary, when doctors discovered she had got ‎ what was then thought to be a very serious heart illness.‎ Aunt Edith doesn’t accept defeat easily. She began studying medical reports in the library and found an article in a magazine about a well-known heart doctor, Dr Michael Debakey, in Houston, Texas. He had saved the life of someone with the same illness. The article said Dr Debakey’s fees were very high; Aunt Edith couldn’t possibly pay them. But could he tell her of someone whose fees she could pay?‎ So Aunt Edith wrote to him. She simply listed her reasons for wanting to live: her three children, who would be on their own in three or four more years, and among them, a little girl who always dreamed of traveling and seeing the world. There wasn’t a word of self-pity－only warmth and humor and the joy of living. She mailed the letter, not really expecting an answer.‎ A few days later, my doorbell rang. Aunt Edith didn’t wait to come in; she stood in the hall and read aloud:‎ Your beautiful letter moved me very deeply. If you can come to Houston, there will be no charge for either the hospital or the operation.‎ That was seven years ago. Since then, Aunt Edith has been around the world. Her three children are happily married. For her age, she is one of the youngest, most lively people I know.‎ ‎60．In fact, Aunt Edith’s letter to Dr Debakey was full of __________.‎ ‎ A．courage B．thanks C．pity D．sadness ‎61．The reason why Aunt Edith remains young is that ________.‎ ‎ A．she had an operation by a famous doctor B．she has been light-hearted all the time ‎ C．her three children take good care of her D．her three children have been on their own C Governors, lawyers and business leaders have to deal with scientists, and every educated person finds his views affected by science. Yet our science teaching of non-scientists, in school and college, has built up mistaken ideas, dislikes, and the common boast, “I never did understand science.” Even those students who arrive at college with plans to become scientists usually bring a mistaken picture of science: some have a collection of unorganized facts about science, and some regard the study of science as a game which includes getting the right answer.‎ The first of these attitudes seems to come from a kind of course which provides various kinds of information; the second, from a training course on how to pass examinations that do not ask about the student’s understanding but simply require him to put the numbers in the right formulas(公式). Neither type of courses (in school or college) seems to give students an understanding of science as we find it among scientists. Neither shows students how real scientists work and think, how the facts are gathered, how discoveries are made, and what they mean. Young people need good teaching of science, not so much a great wealth of knowledge as a healthy understanding of the nature of science. They need an understanding of knowledge leading to sympathy with science and an eagerness of the way scientists work. Given these, it is easy to encourage later reading and learning.‎ ‎62．One of the reasons that cause mistaken ideas of science is due to __________.‎ ‎ A．a mistaken picture in students’ mind ‎ B．the unscientific way of teaching of science ‎ C．the fact that students fail to see the influence(影响) of science ‎ D．the fact that students have a collection of unrelated facts about science ‎63．According to the passage, we can safely say that the subject of the passage is ______.‎ ‎ A．need for good science teaching ‎ B．every person, including governors, lawyers and business leaders should study science ‎ C．young people should form a correct attitude to science ‎ D．students must know what science is and how scientists work and think ‎64．A good course of science is ______.‎ ‎ A．to teach students to do things according to formulas ‎ B．to provide students with all kinds of information ‎ C．to help students have a good understanding and form a correct attitude to science ‎ D．to encourage students to have a good command of knowledge ‎65．People such as governors, lawyers and business leaders deal with scientists mainly because ________. A．they can be affected by scientists when they are together ‎ B．scientists make discoveries and apply them to help people live a more comfortable, stable and safe life ‎ C．they owe much to scientists’ contributions D．scientists are great persons D Frank Lloyd Wright probably is the greatest architect that the United States has ever produced. He was very gifted and had a natural ability to design buildings. His buildings were not only beautiful, but they were also practical and useful. They fit their purposes very well. Wright’s churches, for example, make people feel like thinking and praying. His office buildings make people enjoy working, and his houses make people feel comfortable, at home. However, Fank Lloyd Wright’s beautiful, practical and useful buildings are not the only reason that he is famous. There is another reason.‎ Frank Lloyd Wright is called the greatest American architect because he started an American style in architecture. Most of the architecture in the United States before Wright was really European, not American. Wright’s buildings do not look like old European buildings. They have their own style. Wright’s idea about style are still used in the United States and in other parts of the world.‎ The most important idea in Frank Lloyd Wright’s Style of Architecture is that a building must fit its purpose and the land around it. His houses are often called “grass-land houses” because their lines are similar to the lines on the grassland. Both the lines of the grassland and the lines of Wright’s house are parallel to the horizon(与地平线平行), the place where earth and sky seem to meet. They are horizontal lines. Most European style houses, in contrast, have many vertical lines that form 90°angles with the horizon.‎ ‎66．Frank Lloyd Wright’s style in architecture was ________.‎ ‎ A．learned from some European countries B．not only limited to the U.S ‎ C．no longer popular D．somewhat similar to the European style ‎67．Which of the following best describes the character of the houses that Wright designed?‎ ‎ A．They were very large and beautiful. B．They were very comfortable.‎ ‎ C．They could be used as churches. D．They were beautiful in design but not practical in use.‎ ‎68．What is the most important idea in Wright’s style?‎ ‎ A．Architectural design should match natural surroundings.‎ ‎ B．A building must have grassland around it.‎ ‎ C．American style in architecture should be different from European’s.‎ ‎ D．Design should be more important than use.‎ ‎69．Which of the following is NOT true about Wright’s “grass-land houses”?‎ ‎ A．The lines of “grass-land houses” are similar to lines on the grassland.‎ ‎ B．The lines of “ grass-land houses” are horizontal.‎ ‎ C．The color of the lines of “grass-land houses” is green.‎ ‎ D．They are different from European style houses.‎ ‎70．The best title for this passage would be _________.‎ ‎ A．The Differences between the American and European Styles in Architecture ‎ B．“Grass-land” Houses Designed by Wright ‎ C．How to Make Your Houses More Beautiful ‎ D．The Influence of Wright on American Architecture E Is it possible to persuade manking to live without war? War is an ancient practice which has existed for at least six thousand years. It was always bad and usually foolish, but in the past, the human race managed to live with it. Modern cleverness has changed this. Either Man will end the existence of war, or war will end the existence of Man. For the present, it is nuclear weapons(核武器) that cause the most serious danger, but bacteriological or chemical weapons may, before long, offer an even greater threat. If we succeeded in ending the existence of nuclear weapons, our work will not be done. It will never be done until we have succeeded in ending war. To do this, we need to persuade manking to look upon international problems in a new way not as contests of force, in which the victory goes to the side which is most skilful in killing people, but by settling in accordance with agreed rules of law. It is not easy to change very old mental habits, but this is what must be attempted.‎ There are those who say that the acceptance of this or that ideology(意识形态) would prevent war. I believe this to be a big mistake. All ideologies are based upon dogmatic statements(强词夺理) which are, at best, doubtful, and at worst, totally false. Their supporters believe in them so deeply that they are willing to go to war in support of them.‎ The movement of world opinion during the past few years has been very largely such as we can welcome. It has become a commonplace that nuclear war must be avoided. Of course very difficult problems remain in the world, but the spirit in which they are coming nearer to is a better one than it was some years ago. It has begun to be thought, even by the powerful men who decide whether we shall live or die, that negotiations ‎ should reach agreements even if both sides do not find these agreements wholly satisfactory. It has begun to be understood that the important struggle nowadays is not between different countries but between Man and the atom bomb.‎ ‎71．This passage implies that war is now ________.‎ ‎ A．worse than in the past B．as bad as in the past ‎ C．not so dangerous as in the past D．as necessary in the past ‎72．In the sentence “To do this, we need to persuade mankind…” (Paragraph 1), “this” refers to _______. A．to end the existence of war B．to improve weapons ‎ C．to solve international problems D．to live a peaceful life ‎73．From Paragraph 2 we learn that the writer of the passage _________.‎ ‎ A．is a supporter of some modern ideologies ‎ B．does not think that the acceptance of any ideologies could prevent war ‎ C．believes that the acception of some ideologies could prevent war ‎ D．does not doubt the truth of any ideologies ‎74．According to the writer, ___________.‎ ‎ A．war is the only way to solve international arguments ‎ B．war will be less dangerous because of the improvement of weapons ‎ C．it is impossible for people to live without war ‎ D．war must be ended if Man wants to survive(生存)‎ ‎75．The last paragraph suggests that ____________.‎ ‎ A．international agreements can be reached more easily now ‎ B．Man begins to realize the danger of nuclear war ‎ C．nuclear war will surely not take place D．world opinion welcomes nuclear war ‎★专题（29）‎ A ‎ There is no other five-year –old like him. He has a potato-shaped head , thick eyebrows and a voice that is not easily forgotten. He is not evil, but trouble follows him wherever he goes.‎ ‎ Crayon Shinchan enjoys great popularity in China He has many fans in Hong Kong , Taiwan and on the mainland. And he is one of the hottest cartoon characters in his home country, Japan.‎ ‎ But, the trouble-maker’s show was ranked the No. 1 most unwanted cartoon program by Japan’s Parents’ Association on April 18.‎ ‎ More than half the parents who took part in the study thought Shinchan was a negative role model for children. They believed his actions and speech were adult in nature and not suitable for kids.‎ ‎ Many parents and education experts in China agree with them. Shinchan, they say, is really offensive. He looks out for pretty ladies on the street; at the bookstore he reads magazines full of sexy women; he pretends to be kidnapped by his teacher when he sees a police car; and he raises his mum’s skirt and shouts out the color of her underpants if she doesn’t buy him what he wants.‎ ‎ “Crayon Shimchan is full of dirty humor. The boy shows some terrible adult mentality(心态),which doesn’t match his age,” said Pang Lijuan, professor of the Education Department at Beijing Normal University. Pang further pointed out that Shinchan destroys the traditional image of a polite, hard-working boy. She fears that some teens may copy his behavior and harm their psychological development. Pang and many others in China think that Shinchan is a cartoon for adults-----not for children.‎ ‎ But some kids disagree. Jiangxin, a senior 2 student in Luhe Middle School in Beijing, became a fan of Shinchan after he first saw the cartoon two years ago. He said it is Shinchan’s humor , courage, and cleverness that makes him and his friends love and the little cartoon character . “Shinchan looks at the adults’ world with kid’s eyes. He uncovers the hypocrisy(虚伪) and selfishness in a childish way,” explained Jiang. “We watch it just for fun.” But Jiang also admitted that Shinchan is not good for all ages. “It may not be suitable for primary school kids. They may try to blindly copy him.”‎ ‎ Shinchan’s “father ”, Japan’s popular cartoonist, Yoshito Ushi, never thought Shinchan would cause such a heated discussion. He argued that Shinchan is a childish copy of Japan’s middle-aged men. The boy does everything adults would like, but don’t dare to do. “People can easily forgive him because he’s only five years old,” said Yoshito. ‎ ‎56. Teachers and parents dislikes Crayon Shinchan because _________.‎ ‎ A. he looks very ugly B. he caused a heated discussion ‎ C. the character was created by an adult cartoonist ‎ D. he was regarded as a negative role model for children to follow ‎ ‎57. Many children are crazy about Shinchan mainly because________.‎ ‎ A. he looks very funny B. the cartoon character is suitable for all ages ‎ C. they think he is humorous, clever and brave ‎ D. he is a childish copy of Japan’s middle-aged men ‎58. The underlined word “offensive” in Paragraph 5 probably means_________.‎ ‎ A. humorous B. ugly-looking C. funny D. unpleasant ‎ ‎ B Los Angeles-------- Say it’s Mickey Mouse , say it’s Goofy, but 35 years after Walt Disney’s death, he is having a successful career as an adviser.‎ Disney’s quotes are not as widely known as those of Benjamin Franklin or Winston Churchill , but Walt is increasingly mentioned, especially in business books , where such Disney sayings as “If you can dream it , you can do it” are fast becoming favorites.‎ Never regarded in life as particularly clever, Walt isn’t known to have said anything that sings like Churchill’s “riddle wrapped in a mystery inside an enigma(谜).” But however common the phrasing, Walt’s humor and wisdom are often quoted by today’s business writers.‎ Now, more than 200 of Walt’s best sayings have been collected in the book “The Quotable Walt Disney.” The little square book is filled with common sense sayings. Animation , the theme parks and making your dreams come true are favorite subjects.‎ And because Disney was frequently asked the secret of his success , it is no surprise to read , among Walt’s explanations: “I suppose my formula (准则，公式) might be: dream, diversify---- and never miss an angle.”‎ Business consultant Bill Capodagli of Indianapolis, Indiana, is one of several authors who advice their readers to use Disney’s principles as a model for how to run a business. Capodagli is the co-author of “The Disney Way: Harnessing the Management Secrets of Disney in Your Company” and “The Disney Way Field book: How to implement Walt Disney’s Vision of Dream, Believe, Dare and Do in your Own Company ” from McGraw-Hill.‎ One critic described the book as “so useful you may whistle while you work”. Those who actually knew Walt don’t remember him as being particularly talkative or flattering , especially employees who felt his anger. And while he loved to have clever people working for him, he had little tolerance(宽容) for the self-important. As he said: “Whenever I don’t have the answer to something, I find someone who does.”‎ Many businessmen found their favorite quote as “I only hope that we never lose sight of one thing -----that it was all started by a mouse.”‎ ‎59. What can be learned about Walt Disney form the first two paragraphs?‎ ‎ A. He once worked as a very successful adviser.‎ ‎ B. He was not famous as Benjamin Franklin or Winston Churchill.‎ ‎ C. His words and sayings are of great help to today’s businessmen.‎ ‎ D. He is becoming increasingly popular around the world as a cartoon-maker.‎ ‎60. Which is NOT true about Walt Disney’s sayings?‎ ‎ A. His sayings are not so clever as Winston Churchill’s.‎ ‎ B. More business writers are beginning to quote his sayings in their books.‎ ‎ C. His sayings are mainly about animation, the theme parks and making dreams come true.‎ ‎ D. Bill Capodagli must think highly of Walt Disney’s common sense sayings ‎61. Which would Walt Disney probably disagree about how to be successful?‎ ‎ A. People have to work hard. B. People need have a dream and plan.‎ ‎ C. People should look at things from different sides .‎ ‎ D. Everyone should learn from his common sense sayings.‎ ‎62. Which can be inferred from the last three paragraphs?‎ ‎ A. The critic mentioned in the passage didn’t think much of Disney’s sayings.‎ ‎ B. People around Disney all found it very hard to get along well with him.‎ ‎ C. Clever and self-important employees were greatly valued by Walt Disney.‎ ‎ D. The last paragraph infers that small things can lead to great successes. ‎ ‎ C ‎ The conventional(依照传统的) wisdom about what’s good for you and what’s bad changed over the years. Here’s what experts now say:‎ Off the Forbidden List ‎ What We Used to Think ‎ ‎ Eggs are so full of cholesterol(胆固醇) they might as well be poison. Stay away.‎ ‎ What Doctors Say Now Cholesterol in food doesn’t necessarily raise blood-cholesterol levels.‎ ‎ What to Do If you’ve got cholesterol problems avoid eggs. If not, they are fine in moderation.‎ Pass the Salt What We Used to Think ‎ It will send your blood pressure sky-high. Always choose low-sodium(低钠的)foods, and don’t touch the salt jar.‎ What Doctors Say Now ‎ It isn’t necessarily so, unless you’ve already suffered from high blood pressure.‎ What to Do ‎ A low-sodium diet won’t hurt and may help. But don’t eat your fill.‎ Cereals and Grains What We Used to Think ‎ Filling, but they don’t help the heart. ‎ What Doctors Say Now ‎ They replace higher-fat foods, and when fortified by vitamins B, they help scour(消除) potentially harmful homocysteine from the blood What to Do Eat plenty , especially the whole-grain kind ; the extra fiber could help reduce colon cancer(结肠癌)‎ Red Wine What We Used to Think Alcohol(酒精) is bad for you, no exceptions ‎ What Doctors Say Now ‎ ‎ A substance called resveratrol, found in grape skins, may reduce levels of bad cholesterol.‎ What to Do Alcohol in excess ( 过量) is still bad for you, but a glass of wine with dinner is probably fine for non-alcoholics.‎ ‎63. You are likely to find the passage in ________.‎ ‎ A. People’s Daily B. a magazine C. a story book D. Computer Daily ‎64. If you have high blood pressure , you________. ‎ ‎ A. should choose low-sodium foods B. should not eat foods with any sodium ‎ C. can eat anything as the others do D. can choose high-sodium foods ‎65. If a person has cholesterol problems, ________.‎ ‎ A. he can eat other food besides eggs B. he should keep off eggs ‎ ‎ C. he can not eat high-sodium foods D. he can not drink red wine ‎66.According to the passage, we know________.‎ ‎ A. the extra fiber will lead to colon cancer B. alcohol in excess is good for your health ‎ C. eggs are bad for people with cholesterol problems D. the greener, the worse ‎ D Since we are social beings, the quality of our lives depends in large measure on our interpersonal relationships. One strength of the human condition is our tendency to give and receive support from one another under stressful circumstances. Social support consists of the exchange of resources among people based on their interpersonal ties. Those of us with strong support systems appear better able to cope with major life changes and daily difficulties. People with strong social ties live longer and have better health than those without such ties. Studies over a range of illnesses, from depression to heart disease, reveal that the presence of social support helps people fend off(挡开) illness, and the absence of such support makes poor health more likely. Social support cushions stress in a number of ways. First, friends, relatives, and co-workers may let us know that they value us. Our self-respect is strengthened when we feel accepted by others despite our faults and difficulties. Second, other people often provide us with informational support. They help us to define and understand our problems and find solutions to them. Third, we typically find social companionship supportive. Engaging in leisure-time activities with others helps us to meet our social needs while at the same time distracting(转移...注意力)us from our worries and troubles. Finally, other people may give us instrumental support, a financial aid, material resources, and needed services -- that reduces stress by helping ‎ us resolve and cope with our problems. 67. Research shows that people's physical and mental health _______. ‎ ‎ A. relies on the social welfare systems which support them B. has much to do with the amount of support they get from others C. depends on their ability to deal with daily worries and troubles D. is closely related to their strength for coping with major changes in their lives 68. Which of the following is closest in meaning to the word "cushions"(Line 1, Para.3)? A. Adds up to. B. Does away with. C. Lessens the effect of. D. Lays the foundation for. 69. Helping a sick neighbor with some repair work is an example of _______. A. instrumental support B. informational support C. social companionship D. the strengthening of self-respect 70. Social companionship is beneficial in that _______. ‎ ‎ A. it helps strengthen our ties with relatives B. it enables us to get rid of our faults and mistakes ‎ ‎ C. it makes our leisure-time activities more enjoyable ‎ ‎ D. it draws our attention away from our worries and troubles ‎ ‎ E Believe it or not，optical illusion (错觉) can cut highway crashes. Japan is a case in point. It has reduced automobile crashes on some roads by nearly 75 percent using a simple optical illusion. Bent stripes，called chevrons (人字形)painted on the roads make drivers think that they are driving faster than they really are，and thus drivers slow down. Now the American Association Foundation for Traffic Safety in Washington D.C. is planning to repeat Japan's success. Starting next year, the foundation will paint chevrons and other patterns of stripes on selected roads around the country to test how well the patterns reduce highway crashes. Excessive speed plays a major role in as much as one fifth of all fatal traffic accidents, according to the foundation .To help reduce those accidents，the foundation will conduct its tests in areas where speed - related hazards are the greatest -curves，exit slopes，traffic circles，and bridges. Some studies suggest that straight，horizontal bars painted across roads can initially cut the average speed of drivers in half. However，traffic often returns to full speed within months as drivers become used to seeing the painted bar. Chevrons，scientists say，not only give drivers the impression that they are driving faster than they really are but also make a lane appear to be narrower. The result is a longer lasting reduction in highway speed and the number of traffic accidents. 71. The passage mainly discusses _______. ‎ ‎ A. a new way of highway speed control B. a new pattern for painting highways ‎ ‎ C. a new approach to training drivers D. a new type of optical illusion 72. On roads painted with chevrons drivers tend to feel that_______. ‎ ‎ A. they should avoid speed - related hazards B. they are driving in the wrong lane ‎ ‎ C. they should slow down their speed D. they are approaching the speed limit ‎ ‎73. The advantage of chevrons over straight，horizontal bars is that the former_________. ‎ ‎ A. can keep drivers awake B. can cut road accidents in half ‎ ‎ C. will have a longer effect on drivers D. will look more attractive 74. The American Association Foundation for Traffic Safety plans to_________ . ‎ ‎ A. try out the Japanese method in certain areas B. change the road signs across the country ‎ ‎ C. replace straight，horizontal bars with chevrons ‎ ‎ D. repeat the Japanese road patterns ‎ ‎75. What does the author say about straight，horizontal bars painted across roads? ‎ ‎ A. They are falling out of use in the United States.‎ ‎ B. They tend to be ignored by drivers in a short period of time.‎ ‎ C. They are applicable only on broad roads. ‎ ‎ D. They cannot be applied successfully to traffic circles.‎ ‎★专题（30）‎ A ‎ Interviewing is one of those skills that you can only get better at .You will never again feel so ill at ease as when you try it for the first time ,you’ll probably never feel entirely comfortable trying to get from another person answers that he or she is maybe too shy to reveal. But at least half of the skill is mechanical （机械的）.The rest is instinct（天赋）,which can all be learned with experience.‎ ‎ The basic tools for an interview are paper and two or three well-sharpened pencils .But keep your notebook or paper out of sight until you need it .There’s nothing less likely to relax a person than the arrival of ‎ someone with a note-talking pad .Both of you need time to get to know each other .Take a while just to chat ,judging what sort of person you’re dealing with ,getting him or her to trust you .Never go into an interview without doing whatever homework you can .If you are interviewing a town official ,know his voting record .If it’s an actor ,know what plays he has been in .You will not be liked if you inquire about facts that you could have learned in advance.‎ ‎ Many beginning interviewers are afraid that they are forcing the other person to answer questions and have no right to inquire about his personal secrets .The fear is almost 100 percent unnecessary .Unless the person really hates being interviewed ,he is delighted that somebody wants to interview him .‎ ‎ Most men and women lead lives that are uninteresting ,and they grasp any chance to talk to an outsider who seems eager to listen.‎ ‎ This doesn’t necessarily mean that it will go well. In general you will be talking to people who have never been interviewed before ,and they will get used to the process （程序）awkwardly（笨拙的）,perhaps not giving you anything that you can use .Come back another day ;it will go better .You will both even begin to enjoy it—proof that you aren’t forcing your victim to do something he doesn’t really want to .‎ ‎56．The underlined word “reveal” could best be replaced by “ ”.‎ ‎ A．ask B．question C．give D．seek ‎57．According to the passage ,during an interview note books or paper should .‎ ‎ A．never be used B．be used only when necessary ‎ C．be kept at home D．be given to the interviewer ‎58．The writer of the passage suggests that before interviewing a person ,you should .‎ ‎ A．have sharpened your pencil well and get your notebooks ready ‎ ‎ B．visit a town official and meet an actor ‎ C．read as many books as possible D．make good preparations ‎59．It can be inferred from Paragraph 4 that most men and women .‎ ‎ A．are afraid to meet interviewers B．hate being interviewed ‎ C．like being interviewed D．fear to speak to outsiders ‎60．According to the passage ,if a person being interviewed is too uneasy to give you anything ‎ ‎ useful ,what should you do?‎ ‎ A．Arrange another interview. B．Give him or her a bad score.‎ ‎ C．Wait until he or she calms down. D．Try to make him or her trust you .‎ B ‎ Friday ,June 13—NASA launched Spirit, the first of two of Mars-bound explorer robots ,on Tuesday .Spirit will roam the surface of Mars while taking pictures, hammering on rocks ,and looking for signs of life.‎ ‎ The cart-sized rover took off from Cape Canaveral ,Florida and should reach the Martian atmosphere by January .Eight seconds before crashing into the Red Planet ,giant airbags will inflate and brakes will stop Spirit in the air .The craft will fall the last 30 feet ,bounce when it hits the surface ,and come to rest in a crater that may once have been a lake .‎ ‎ “Getting to Mars and landing on Mars is not exactly easy ,” said NASA science chief Edward Weiler . “In fact ,there have been 30 attempts to go to Mars ,and only 12 have succeeded .”‎ ‎ On June 25, NASA plans to launch an identical( similar) rover ,Opportunity ,to search the opposite side of Mars .The two robots can each cover the length of a football field in a single day .Opportunity and Spirit were named by Arizona third-grader Sofi Collis in a NASA-sponsored contest .‎ ‎ Scientists are confident that long ago ,water flowed on Mars .Now they want to know when ,and for how long . “That’s the key question for life ,” says Weiler. “Whenever you find water lasts for thousands or millions or tens of millions of years , life seems to spring up .”‎ ‎ Spirit will carry in its mechanical arms a hammer to whack at Martian rocks and a microscope to peer at the pieces .Just as they do on Earth ,rocks contain information about what their world was like when they formed .Also on board are cameras ,magnets for collecting dust particles ,and other pieces of scientific equipment .‎ ‎ It’s a great time to send robots to the Red Planet .Mars and Earth pass near each other every 26 months ,but this time ,Mars is closer to Earth than it has been in 73,000 years .‎ ‎ The launch of Spirit and Opportunity marks NASA’s first return to the Mars since a pair of disasters four years ago .In 1999 ,they lost two crafts—one by an embarrassing mistake .This time ,the space agency spent $ 800 million to get it right . “We have done everything humanly possible to eliminate(smooth) as many of the risks as possible in this mission ,” said Weiler . “But there still is risk.”‎ ‎61．What dose the underlined word “inflate” mean in the second paragraph ?It means “ ”. A．rise into the air B．float in the air ‎ C．be filled with air D．explode in the air ‎62．How many attempts to go to Mars have been made?‎ ‎ A．30 B．‎12 ‎C．More than 1/3 D．Less than 30%‎ ‎63．Why is it a good time to send robots to the Red Planet ? Because .‎ ‎ A．the space agency wants to correct the embarrassing mistake four years ago ‎ B．Mars and Earth pass near each other every 26 months ‎ ‎ C．this time the Red Planet is the nearest to the earth since ‎ D．the space agency has got $ 800 million from the government ‎ ‎64．From the text we can infer that .‎ ‎ A．rocks on Mars can help know whether water used to flow on it ‎ B．rocks on Mars can help describe what the world was like long ago ‎ C．rocks on Mars are too hard to whack at D．rocks on Mars can not be easily peered at ‎ C ‎ Regular child care provided outside home or by someone other than the mother does not in itself undermine（削弱）healthy emotional connections between mothers and their 15-month-old infants（婴儿）,according to a long-term national study .The finding holds even if care begins during the first 3 months after birth and runs for 30 hours or more per week.‎ ‎ Among infants who receive unkind and unresponsive care from their mothers ,however ,the mother-child relationship may be damaged . “This research helps us put apart complexities（复杂性）regarding child care that have not previously been studied in detail ,” contends （主张）Jay Belsky , a psychologist from Pennsylvania State University .Belsky and several of his colleagues announced their findings last week at the international conference. ‎ ‎ The investigation consists of 1,153 children and their families living in or near Boston .The youngsters ,no more than 1 month old when they entered the study in 1991 ,will be tracked until the age of 7. Experimenters gave questionnaires（问卷）to mothers in their homes and videotaped baby caretakers interacting（相互影响）with the kids at ages 1.6 and 15 months .Independent observers rated the quality of each child care efforts and noted infant nervousness .Unlike most previous studies , this one allows researchers to observe each one studies ,this one allows researchers to observe each caretaker’s personality at child nursing ,and kids’ emotional reaction by the equipment .After taking family factors into consideration ,other psychologists state that the researchers found no relation between the quality of child care and infants’ response（反应）.But the experimenters contend that the boys who spent more than 30 hours per week in child care exhibited more emotion for their mothers than other boys who didn’t ,and the girls who spent the same hours per week in child care showed a modest（适度的） rise in this emotion .Therefore ,quality of child care outside home plays an important role on the connection between mothers and infants .‎ ‎65．From the first paragraph we know that .‎ ‎ A．mother care is the best according to a national study ‎ B．child care outside home is the best in accordance with the study ‎ C．regular child care outside home may play a role as a mother ‎ D．connections between mothers and infants are damaged by outside care ‎66．According to the passage ,unresponsive care from a mother may .‎ ‎ A．ruin a kid’s growth B．harm the mother-child tie ‎ C．injure a baby’s emotional reaction D．spoil（宠坏） child’s personality ‎67．Jay Belsky implies that the study of child care .‎ ‎ A．was not much done in detail in the past B．was never carried out in the past ‎ ‎ C．was greatly ignored（忽视） by psychologists and researchers ‎ D．was interesting ,but very difficult to make discovery ‎68．The girls who received the same hours of child care outside home as the boys show .‎ ‎ A．more emotion for their mothers B．less emotion for their mothers ‎ C．a modest rise in the mental development ‎ D．a slight decline（衰弱） in the personality development ‎ D ‎ After the September 11 terrorist attacks ,some high schools in America wanted the students to pledge allegiance（宣誓效忠）to the flag .Is it necessary or not ?Let’s see how the kids think of this requirement.‎ ‎ Lea Mouallem , Marymount High School ‎ ‎ I believe that saying the Pledge of Allegiance is a way of reminding our country that no matter what happens ,we are united . I don’t think our president wants us to go and join the army now ,but he wants to tell us that we will be able to overcome the disaster as a whole nation that is working together.‎ ‎ Harry Chin ,15,Culver City High School ‎ I am not for the Pledge of Allegiance and I am not against the Pledge of Allegiance because I just say it so many times that it loses meaning .I say it every day at school in the second period .It doesn’t mean anything any more.‎ ‎ David Tran , 15, Warren High School ‎ The Pledge of Allegiance is another sign of country .We should have some respect to it .In many school ,we don’t say the Pledge every morning—we just stand up and let the National anthem ring through the silence .We said the Pledge of Allegiance on Sept.12.‎ ‎ Danny Maryanor ,16 ,Santa Monica High School ‎ I wonder why we were suddenly asked to recite the Pledge when many of us stopped after elementary school ;and the Pledge was recited before the play of “Ode to Joy” （欢乐颂）with recorders .This was not to express patriotism（爱国主义）,or even to remember those who lost their lives on Sept .11.‎ ‎ I feel I cannot support a nation that in this time of crisis looks outward for revenge（报复）instead of inward for peace .Perhaps we should think more about our problems.‎ ‎69．Saying the Pledge of Allegiance to the flag first appeared in American schools ______.‎ ‎ A．after Sept.11, 2000 B．before Sept .11,2001‎ ‎ C．on Sept .11,2001 D．after Sept .11,2001‎ ‎70．Who were for the Pledge of Allegiance?‎ ‎ A．Lea Mouallem ;David Tran B．Harry Chin; Danny Maryanor ‎ C．Lea Mouallem ;Danny Maryanor D．Harry Chin; David Tran ‎71．Which of the following is TRUE?‎ ‎ A．Harry Chin thought the government required them to join the army.‎ ‎ B．Lea Mouallem thought the Pledge of Allegiance of no meaning.‎ ‎ C．Danny Maryanor felt the terrorist attacks happened partly because of America’s own ‎ problem.‎ ‎ D．The Pledge of Allegiance is of another country.‎ ‎72．According to the passage ,it can be imagined that .‎ ‎ A．all high school students say yes to the Pledge of Allegiance.‎ ‎ B．all high school students say no to the Pledge of Allegiance.‎ ‎ C．all kids don’t agree to the requirement of saying the Pledge of Allegiance.‎ ‎ D．all high schools will require their students to pledge allegiance to the tlag.‎ E ‎ All of us eat every day ,but most of us don’t understand nutrition（营养）.How much do you know about good nutrition? Are the following statements true or false?‎ ‎ 1. People who don’t eat meat can stay healthy.‎ ‎ True .As long as people eat enough milk ,eggs and meat alternates（替代物）,they can get enough protein（蛋白质）.‎ ‎ 2. Fresh vegetables cooked at home are always more nutritious than canned vegetables.‎ ‎ False .The difference depends more on how vegetables are prepared than whether they are fresh or canned .Vegetables cooked in too much water can lose a large quantity of vitamins .‎ ‎ 3. Food eaten between meals can be just as good for health as food eaten at regular meals.‎ ‎ True . Nutritional value depends on what types of food you eat ,not when you eat them .Eating an egg or an orange between meals can contribute to a good diet .‎ ‎ 4. Taking extra vitamins beyond the recommended daily allowances won’t give you more energy.‎ ‎ True .It’s widely believed that extra vitamins provide more energy .But taking more than the baby needs doesn’t make it function better ,just as overfilling your gas tank doesn’t make your car run better.‎ ‎ 5. Natural vitamins are better supplements（补充）for the diet than synthetic vitamins.‎ ‎ False .There is no difference .A vitamin has the same properties（性质）and specific chemical structure whether made in a laboratory or taken form plant or animal parts .‎ ‎ 6.Older people need the same amount of vitamins as younger people.‎ ‎ True .Older people need the same quantity of vitamins as younger people although they need fewer calories .Certain illnesses raise the requirements for some vitamins ,but that is true for the young as well as the ‎ old .‎ ‎ 7.Food grown in poor soil is lower in vitamins than food grown in rich sold .‎ ‎ False .The vitamins in our foods are made by the plants themselves .They don’t come from the soil .However ,the minerals in a plant depend on the minerals in the soil.‎ ‎ If you have answered these questions correctly ,you can say you know much about food and nutrition by today’s standards .But remember that nutrition is a growing science and that may be aged as new information is obtained.‎ ‎73．The main purpose of the passage is to_______.‎ ‎ A．list today’s standards of some food and nutrition ‎ B．introduce what should be eaten and what not ‎ C．explain what is helpful to your health and what is not ‎ D．test our nutrition IQ by judging the problems listed ‎74．From the surrounding words and sentences we know that the underlined phrase “contribute ‎ to” means .‎ ‎ A．help to bring about B．take the place of C．make room for D．turn to ‎ ‎75．The underlined word “synthetic” most probably means________in Chinese.‎ ‎ A．不同的 B．特别的 C．合成的 D．天然的 ‎★专题（31）‎ A I can’t count how many times people have complained , while shaking their heads in obvious disappointment , “just don’t know what is with teenagers today .”‎ The other day I was in my car on my way to the farmers market when I passes two teens standing by the side of the road with a car wash sign , my car was filthy and my heart was full , so I pulled over . There was a group directing the cars and another group spraying them down . As sponges (海绵) were wiped over every square inch of my dirty car , I sat enjoying the little water battles . I was amazed at how fourteen to fifteen teenagers had devoted their Saturday to washing cars .‎ After I handed them a twenty-dollar bill I asked what they were raising money for . They explained to me that a friend of theirs , C. T. Schmitz , had recently died of cancer . He was only fifteen years old . He had gone to school with a lot of the teenagers who were there that day ; each of them had memories of a boy sweeter than any they had known . His friend Kevin had decided to put this car wash together because he wanted to honor his friend and also bring together his classmates with his boy scout troop (童子军). He told me that they wanted to plant a tree in front of their school and if they raise enough money they would put a plaque (匾) there also . Both would be in memory of their friend C.T.‎ They handed me a bag of homemade cookies with my receipt saying “Thanks for helping us plant a tree of C.T.‎ Yeah !I don’t know what is with teenagers today !‎ ‎56．The boys were raising money because they intended to .‎ ‎ A．buy a plaque for their school B．help those who suffered from cancer ‎ ‎ C．plant a tree in memory of their friend D． put a plaque near his friend’s home ‎ ‎57．From the passage , we can infer that C. T Schmiz was .‎ ‎ A．kind-hearted but lonely B．brave and popular with his classmates ‎ ‎ C．shy and sensitive D．a boy you can get a good impression of ‎58．What does the underlined word “filthy” in paragraph 2 probably mean ?‎ ‎ A．New B．dirty C．good-looking D．ordinary ‎59．What would be the best title of the article ?‎ ‎ A．Teenagers today B．A special day ‎ ‎ C．My view on teenagers D．An exciting experience ‎ B It was on January 24, 1848, that James Wilson Marshall discovered gold in the territory of California . The news spread quickly . Thousands rushed west . By 1894 , the great gold was in full swing . ‎ Towns and cities sprang up overnight . One year later , California had enough people to be taken into the Union as a state . Throughout the territory , thousands searched for gold . Bedises food and blankets they had picks and pans .‎ Some found veins of mountain rock thick with gold . These men got rich . ‎ Others “panned” for gold in the mountain streams , They were looking for the leftovers . They searched for chunks of gold that the rains had washed down from above .‎ Panning was the only way to find gold . One put dirt in a pan and added water . Then the pan was swished around so that the water could wash the dirt . Slowly , the water was poured out of the pan . Each one hoped that the place he claimed “panned out well” ——that is , turned up gold .‎ The word California gold rush the miners turned to farming and ranching （牧业）. Some left for the state of Colorado where gold also had been discovered . For many , gold mining did not “pan out” . For a few , it panned out well . But in time , huge machines were built that could wash many tons of dirt at a time , “Panning” died out .‎ The word , however , remained in the language . Today , Americans still say , “It panned out well ,” when something they have done pleases them .‎ In recent years , “pan” has taken on another meaning . Today , it also means to criticize . How it got this meaning is hard to discover . But critics （批评家）are always “panning” some writer , artist or singer .‎ Sometimes , critics may pan a movie or play so severly that no one will go to see it . This can also happen to a book , if critics pan it strongly enough , There have been times , however , when a play became highly successful , even though most of the critics panned it without mercy .The pans should have made the play a washout . But , as actors have pointed out , sometimes a critic’s pan surprisingly turns up gold .‎ ‎60．The whole passage is mainly about .‎ ‎ A．different fortunes of the earliest gold miners B．the gold rush in California ‎ ‎ C．the word “pan” and its expressions D．some expressions created during the gold rush ‎ ‎61．We can know from the article that before the year 1894 .‎ ‎ A．California was not a state of the Union B．California had already had a large population ‎ ‎ C．There were few towns and cities in California D．There was not much gold left in California ‎ ‎62．What happened when the huge machine was built for the gold rush ?‎ ‎ A．The gold rush ended . B．Many people turned to farming and ranching ‎ ‎ C．People gave up the way of panning in time . D．It became more difficult to find gold ‎ ‎63．The author intends to tell us in the last paragraph .‎ ‎ A．a critic’s pan can cause different results to a book , or a play ‎ ‎ B．another meaning of the word “pan”‎ ‎ C．a critic’s pan can make a book , or a play an unexpected success ‎ ‎ D．actors usually welcome a critic’s pan ‎ C I love Charles Barkley like a brother but we disagree from time to time . Here’s an example of what I mean : I disagree with what Charles says in his Nike commercial , the one in which he insist , “I am not a role model.” Charles , you can deny being a role model all you want , but we don’t choose to be role models , we are chosen . Our only choice is whether to be a good role model or a bad one .‎ I don’t think we can accept all the glory and the money that comes with being a famous athlete and not accept the responsibility of being a role model , of knowing that kids and even some adults are watching us and looking for us to set an example .‎ I love being a role model , and I try to be a positive one . That doesn’t mean I always succeed . I’m not saint (圣贤的). I make mistakes , and sometimes I do childish things .‎ But you don’t have to be perfect to be a good role model , and people shouldn’t expect perfection . If I were deciding whether a basketball player was a positive role model , I would want to know : Does he influence people’s lives in a positive way away from the court(球场)? How much has he given of himself , in time or in money , to help people who look up to him ? Does he display the values ——like honesty and determination ——that are part of being a good person ?‎ Kids have lots of other role models——teachers , movies stars , athletes , even other kids . As athletes , we can’t take the place of parents , but we can help reinforce（巩固）what they try to teach their kids .‎ Constantly being watched by the public can be hard to stand at times . I don’t think most people can imagine what it’s like to be watched that closely every minute of every day .‎ But the good things about being a role model outweigh the bad , It’s a great feeling to think you’re a small part of the reason that a kid decided to give school another try instead of dropping out or that a kid had the strength to walk away when someone offered him drugs . But one thing I would encourage parents to do is to remind their kids that no matter which athletes they look up to , there are no perfect human beings . That way, if the kid’s heroes should make mistakes , it won’t seem like the end of the world to them .‎ ‎64．The author of this article holds the opinion that ‎ ‎ A．a famous athlete ought to set a good example to the public ‎ ‎ B．a famous athlete needn’t be a role model if he doesn’t want to ‎ ‎ C．a famous athlete can’t deny being a role model D．it’s hard to be a role model ‎ ‎65．According to the author , a positive role model ‎ ‎ A．can win more money and fame B．are not allowed to make mistakes ‎ ‎ C．are the most important examples a child can follow ‎ ‎ D．can have some positive influence on people’s follow ‎ ‎66．The underlined word “outweigh” in the last paragraph probable means ‎ ‎ A．be greater than B．be worse than C．be less than D．be lighter than ‎ ‎67．Which of the following is best supported by the last paragraph ?‎ ‎ A．A good role model can stop children taking drugs .‎ ‎ B．Kids usually expect too much of their role models ‎ ‎ C．Dropping out of schools and taking drugs are the two most serious problems American kids face .‎ ‎ D．Kids drop out of school or take drugs if seeing their heroes make mistakes .‎ ‎68．The author of this article is probably ‎ ‎ A．an admirer of Charles Barkley B．a famous athlete himself ‎ ‎ C．a sports reporter D．a famous writer ‎ D The latest FOX news has made several polls （民意测验）recently and it shows that more than 1 to 10 Americans are somewhat confident that Iraqi President Saddam Hussein will cooperate with the UN weapons inspectors . Most have little or no confidence . Polling was conducted by telephone in the evening . The sample is 900 registered voters nationwide with a margin of error of +/－3 percentage points .‎ ‎1．Do you support or oppose U.S military action to disarm （解除武装）Iraq and remove Iraqi President Saddam Hussein .‎ Support ‎ Oppose ‎ ‎(not sure )‎ ‎10-20Nov. 02‎ ‎68%‎ ‎18‎ ‎14‎ ‎22-23 Oct .02‎ ‎62%‎ ‎27‎ ‎11‎ ‎8-9Octo.02‎ ‎72%‎ ‎17‎ ‎11‎ ‎24-25Sep.02‎ ‎58%‎ ‎27‎ ‎15‎ ‎8-9Sep .02‎ ‎66%‎ ‎22‎ ‎12‎ ‎6-7Aug.02‎ ‎69%‎ ‎22‎ ‎9‎ ‎9-10Jul.02‎ ‎72%‎ ‎18‎ ‎10‎ ‎30Apr-1May.02‎ ‎70%‎ ‎20‎ ‎10‎ ‎30-31 Jan.02‎ ‎74%‎ ‎15‎ ‎11‎ ‎28-29Nov .01‎ ‎77%‎ ‎22‎ ‎11‎ ‎2．How confident are you that Iraqi President Saddam Hussein will cooperate fully with the UN inspection team .‎ ‎1.Very confident ‎ ‎2%‎ ‎2.Somewhat confident ‎ ‎10‎ ‎3.Not very confident ‎ ‎31‎ ‎4.Not at all confident ‎ ‎53‎ ‎5.(Not sure )‎ ‎4‎ ‎3．How confident are you that the UN inspection team will actually announce violations (违反) by Iraq , knowing that a violation could possibly lead to war ?‎ ‎1.Very confident ‎ ‎27%‎ ‎2.Somewhat confident ‎ ‎35‎ ‎3.Not very confident ‎ ‎15‎ ‎4.Not at all confident ‎ ‎11‎ ‎5.(Not sure )‎ ‎12‎ ‎69．What is the passage mainly about ?‎ ‎ A．Uses of polling . B．Dangers of war ‎ ‎ C．Public opinions about the political situation D．Problems caused by war .‎ ‎70．The public’s doubt about Iraq’s cooperation shows that .‎ ‎ A．only a few people believe his country will be at war ‎ ‎ B．a large majority of the public believe the country will soon be at war ‎ ‎ C．most Americans believe there will be no war ‎ ‎ D．most Americans are not sure about the present situation ‎ ‎71．With time going by , the sentiment (情绪) is slightly down by the end of September . But the latest poll shows .‎ ‎ A．support remains fairly strong for US military action to disarm Iraq and remove Saddam ‎ ‎ B．most Americans are confident that a violation of the UN inspection team will lead to war ‎ ‎ C．there is a steady rise at the number of the supporters ‎ ‎ D．few people think the US should attack Iraq with the UN’s agreement ‎ ‎72．The polling was carried out through .‎ ‎ A．interviews B．letters C．phones D．media ‎ E Would you like to know if your body is older or younger than it should be ? Dr David Wikenheiser has been studying ageing in Vancouver , Canada , for the past 10 years and has found the average person is 15 or more years older biologically than their actual age .‎ He says: “We all know people who are 30 but look over 40 , and others who are 70 yet look 50 . the difference comes down to lifestyle . Some peoples’ bodies get ‘rusty(生锈)’ faster than others , and this makes them age more quickly .”‎ After conducting more than 3,000 tests , Dr Wikenheiser believes that , on average , you can lower your biological age by 10 years in three months with the right lifestyle changes .‎ ‎“You can’t change your genetics (遗传学)but you can make other changes such as eating the right food , drinking enough water to flush out toxins （毒素）, exercising and managing stress.” he says .‎ But exercising too much is just as bad as not doing enough . Working out for more than two hours at a time every day puts too great a strain on your heart .‎ ‎“Multivitamin and antioxidant supplements are important even if you’re eating the right amount of fruit and vegetables . Today’s soil tends to lack important minerals so these are no longer found in the food we eat , in large enough quantities . We should also change bleached （漂白）white table salt for natural sea salt which is much better for us .”‎ It’s also important to eat three meals a day . Missed meals put a strain on your brain as your blood sugar level drops . Many of us are also eating the wrong fats or avoiding fat altogether , so we miss out important nutritional（营养）oils .‎ ‎73．The passage is mainly about .‎ ‎ A．How to live a healthier life B．how to lower your biological age ‎ ‎ C．How to keep young D．how to select a good diet ‎ ‎74．From the passage we can conclude that the most important factor in slowing your aging process is ‎ ‎ A．exercise B．diet C．lifestyle D．genetics ‎ ‎75．The author suggests in the passage that ‎ ‎ A．we should have natural sea salt instead of bleaches white table salt ‎ ‎ B．we should avoid gat of any kind ‎ ‎ C．we should have no more Multivitamin and antioxidant supplements ‎ ‎ D．we should exercise at least two hours every day .‎ ‎★专题（33） A Suppose you work in a big firm and find English important for your job because you often deal with foreign businessmen. Now you are looking for a place where you can improve your English, especially your spoken English. Here are some ads about English language training from newspapers. You may find the information you need.‎ Global English Center ‎*General English in all four skills: listening, speaking, reading and writing.‎ ‎*3—month(700 yuan),6—month(1,200 yuan) and one year(2,000 yuan) courses.‎ ‎*Choice of morning or evening classes, 3 hours per day, Mon. －Fri.‎ ‎*Experienced college English teachers.‎ ‎*Close to city center and bus stops.‎ Tel:67605270‎ Add:105 Zhongshan Road, 100082‎ Modern Language School ‎*Special courses in English for business, travel, banking, hotel management and office skills.‎ ‎*Small classes(12-16students) on Sat. & Sun. From 2:00 to 5:00 p.m.‎ ‎*Native English teachers from Canada and USA.‎ ‎*Language lab and computers supplied.‎ ‎*3-month(1,050 yuan), 6-month(1,850 yuan)‎ Write or phone:Modern Language School, 675 Park Road, 100056‎ Tel:67353019‎ The 2lst Century English Training Center ‎*We specialize in elective teaching at all levels.‎ ‎*We offer morning or afternoon classes, both of which last three months and a half at a cost of 800 yuan. Entrance exams: June I and Dec.1.‎ ‎*We also have a six-week TOFEL preparation class during winter and summer holidays. ‎ ‎*Only 15-minute walk from city center.‎ Call 67801642 for more information.‎ The International House of English ‎*3/6-month English courses for students of all levels at very low cost: 60 yuan for 12 hours per week; convenient class hours:9‎-12 a.m. and 2-5p.m.‎ ‎*A 4-month evening classes for developing speaking skills(same cost as day classes).‎ ‎*Well-trained Chinese and foreign teachers experienced in teaching English as a 2nd foreign language.‎ ‎*Free sightseeing and social activities.‎ ‎*Very close to the Central Park.‎ For further information call 67432308.‎ ‎56．You work from 9:‎00 a.m. to 4:30p.m. every day. Which schools will you choose?‎ ‎ A．Global English Center and Modern Language School.‎ ‎ B．Global English Center and International House of English.‎ ‎ C．Modern Language School and the 21st Century English Training Center.‎ ‎ D．The 21st Century English Training Center and the International House of English.‎ ‎57．The 21st Century English Training Center is different from the other 3 schools in that . ‎ ‎ A．its teaching quality is better B．it is nearest to the city center ‎ C．its courses are more advanced D．it requires an entrance examination ‎58．You’ll probably prefer to go to the International House of English because it .‎ ‎ A．offers free sightseeing and social activitiesB．has a special course in spoken English ‎ C．costs less that the other schools D．has native English teachers ‎59．If you take the evening classes at International House of English, you’ll pay about yuan.‎ ‎ A．60 B．‎240 ‎C．720 D．1,000‎ B There are three branches of medicine. One is called “doctor medicine”, or “scientific medicine.” Scientific doctors try to observe sicknesses, look for logical patterns, and then find out how the human body works. From there they figure out what treatments may work. This kind of medicine is believed to date from the 4th century BC. Although nowadays it is successful, in the ancient world this approach probably did not cure many patients.‎ A second kind of medicine is called “natural cures,” or “folk medicine,” in which less educated people try to cure sicknesses with various herbs（药草）. These folk healers also use observation and logic, but they are not so aware of it. They try things until they find something that seems to work, and then they keep doing that. Folk medicine flourished long before the development of scientific medicine and was more successful in ancient times than doctor medicine.‎ The third kind is called “health spas（矿泉疗养地）,” or “faith healing.” Sometimes this may be as simple as touching the holy man and being immediately healed. Other times, a magician may make you a magic charm, or say a spell, to cure you. Some religious groups organize special healing shrines for the sick. In these places people rest, get plenty of sleep, eat healthy food, drink water instead of wine, and exercise in various ways. They also talk to the priests and pray to the gods. If you are feeling depressed or you have been working too hard, going to these places may be just the right thing to make you feel better.‎ ‎60．Doctor medicine .‎ ‎ A．has a longer history than folk medicine B．has been practiced for around 1,600 years ‎ C．bases its treatments on observation and logic ‎ D．was very successful in curing sicknesses in ancient times ‎61．According to the passage, which of the following is NOT used in health spas?‎ ‎ A．Magic power. B．Various herbs. C．Religious faith. D．A healthy life style.‎ ‎62．According to the passage, which of the following statements is true?‎ ‎ A．Folk healers choose different herbs to cure diseases without any sound basis.‎ ‎ B．people who practice folk medicine need lots of formal education on herbs.‎ ‎ C．The success of folk medicine led to the development of doctor medicine.‎ ‎ D．Natural cures worked better than scientific medicine in ancient times.‎ ‎63．The author’s primary purpose in this passage is to .‎ ‎ A．describe different types of medicine B．argue for the importance of medicine in health care ‎ C．show the crucial role religion plays in medical treatments ‎ D．compare the educational background of three different types of patients C TUVALU, a tiny country in the Pacific Ocean, has asked for help as it fears it will be swallowed up by the sea.‎ Storms and huge waves are a constant threat and none of Tuvalu’s nine little islands is more than five meters above sea leavel, Salt water is already entering the country’s drinking water supply, as well as damaging plants that produce fruit and vegetable. Without urgent help, the country’s days are numbered.‎ But Tuvalu is not the first place to face sinking into the sea. Venice, a historic city in Italy best known for its canals, has sunk about ‎24 cm over the past 100 years. Experts say that it will have sunk another 20‎-50cm by 2050. A century ago, St. Mark’s Square, the lowest point in the city, flooded about nine times a year, Nowadays, it happens more that 100 times. While Venice is slowly sinking into the mud on which it stands, Tuvalu’s rising sea level is caused by global warming.‎ The average global temperature has increased by almost 0.5 centigrade degrees over the past century; scientists expect it to rise by extra 1-3 degrees over the next 100 years.‎ Warmer weather makes glaciers（冰川）melt, adding more water to the ocean. The warmer temperatures also make water expand, so it takes up more space, causing the sea level to rise. The sea level has risen about 10－‎25 cm in the last 100 years.‎ The main cause of global warming is human pollution. Through burning coal, oil and gas, people have been increasing the greenhouse gases in the atmosphere, such as CO2. This adds to the power of the greenhouse effect, making the planet even warmer.‎ Many scientists believe that, if the warming is not stopped, there will be huge climate changes. The sea level could rise by one meter this century.‎ Should this come true, the sea will swallow up millions of homes and the world will be flooded with “climate refugees” looking for somewhere to live.‎ ‎64．We can infer from the second paragraph that .‎ ‎ A．Tuvalu is in danger of being swallowed up by the sea ‎ B．all Tuvalu’s islands are about five meters above the sea level ‎ C．drinking water in Tuvalu has been destroyed ‎ D．Tuvalu is often flooded by storms and waves ‎65．The author uses Tuvalu and Venice as examples in order to explain .‎ ‎ A．they are the first places sinking into the sea ‎ B．they are both sinking into the mud where they stand ‎ C．they will disappear in the future D．their trouble is caused by global warming ‎66．What does “climate refugees” mean?‎ ‎ A．People who are forced away from their homeland by climate.‎ ‎ B．Climate changes. C．Rare animals. D．Climate effect.‎ ‎67．Which of the following is NOT true according to the passage?‎ ‎ A．Tuvalu’s nine little islands are less than five meters above the sea level.‎ ‎ B．The average global temperature has risen by 1-3 centigrade degrees over the past 100 years.‎ ‎ C．The warmer temperature causes the sea level to rise.‎ ‎ D．There will be huge climate changes unless the warming is stopped.‎ D Americans are proud of their variety and individuality, yet they love and respect few things more than a uniform, whether it is the uniform of an elevator operator or the uniform of a five-star general. Why are uniform so popular in the USA?‎ Among the arguments for uniforms, one of the first is that in the eye of most people they look more professional than civilian clothes（便服）.People have become conditioned to expect superior quality from a man who wears a uniform. The television repairman who wears a uniform tends to inspire more trust than one who appears in civilian clothes. Faith in the skill of a garage mechanic is increased by a uniform. What easier way is there for a nurse, a policeman, a barber, or a waiter to lose professional identity than to step out of uniform?‎ Uniforms also have many practical benefits. They save on other clothes. They save laundry（洗衣店）bills. They are tax-deductible（可减税的）.They are often more comfortable and more long-lasting than civilian clothes.‎ Primary among the arguments against uniforms is their lack of variety and the consequent（随之而引发的）loss of individuality experienced by people who must wear them. Though there are many types of uniforms, the wearer of any particular type is generally stuck with it, without change, until retirement. When people look alike, they tend to think, speak, and act similarly, on the job at least.‎ Uniforms also give rise to some practical problems. Though they are long-lasting, often their initial（最初的）expense is greater than the cost of civilian clothes. Some uniforms are also expensive to maintain, requiring professional dry cleaning rather than the home laundering possible with many types of civilian clothes.‎ ‎68．It is surprising that Americans who worship（崇尚）variety and individuality .‎ ‎ A．still judge a man by his clothes B．hold the uniform in such high regard ‎ C．enjoy having a professional identity ‎ D．will respect an elevator operator as much as a general in uniform ‎69．People are used to thinking that a man in uniform .‎ ‎ A．suggets quality work B．discards（抛弃）his social identity ‎ C．appears to be more practical D．looks superior to a person in civilian clothes ‎70．The chief function of a uniform is to .‎ ‎ A．provide practial benefits to the wearer B．make the wearer catch the public eye ‎ C．inspire the wearer’s confidence in himself ‎ D．provide the wearer with a professional identity ‎71．According to the passage, people wearing uniforms .‎ ‎ A．are usually helpful B．have little or no individual freedom ‎ C．tend to lose their individuality D．enjoy greater popularity E While the threat of a reappearance of SARS is still there, it is reassuring to learn about the latest developments in vaccine research.‎ More that 1,400 vaccine shots for SARS have been produced in China, and an application for clinical tests has been referred to the State Food and Drug Administration（SFDA）， according to a Xinhua report on Sunday.‎ ‎“If everything goes smoothly, conducting of clinical experiments will be agreed before the end of December,” said Yin Hongzhang, head of Biological Product Section of the SFDA.‎ So far, China is far ahead of other countries in the search for a SARS vaccine, claimed Yin. At that time, volunteers will be sought in Beijing and Guangzhou to take part in experiments using the new vaccine. However, while cheering for the research breakthrough, voices of reason should also be heard.‎ What medical workers should always maintain is a cool head and careful attitude, which are essential in any scientific research. This is especially true when conducting experiments on human beings, because they are directly concerned with the volunteers’ health and even their lives, and also because knowledge of the deadly virus（病毒） still too limited.‎ Media reports indicate that members of the public are reacting actively to the news of selecting volunteers and are expressing their readiness. Their courage is well worth our admiration. The trust they are placing in these medical researchers is the biggest support of their work.‎ The researchers have no other choice but to be highly cautious in the expected experiments. The safety of volunteers should always be the first consideration. Scientists from different countries have been put in a race in uncovering the mystery surrounding the virus. But to play a leading role should by no means be the ‎ ultimate pursuit（最终目标）of the scientific workers. It is people’s safety and health that remain the biggest concerns.‎ While there are still so many mysteries to be solved, it is too early to celebrate.‎ ‎72．According to the passage, which of the following is not true? ‎ ‎ A．The developments in vaccine research in SARS are encouraging.‎ ‎ B．More that 1,400 vaccine shots for SARS have been applied to clinical test.‎ ‎ C．China is now leading in the search for a SARS vaccine.‎ ‎ D．Experiments using the new vaccine will be carried out only in Beijing and Guangzhou.‎ ‎73．From the passage, we could see that the author’s attitude towards the new vaccine is quite . A．praising B．critical C．matter-of-fact D．humorous ‎74．Which of the following may serve as the best title?‎ ‎ A．Keep a Cool Head While Fighting SARS B．A Breakthrough in Fighting SARS ‎ C．A Leading Role in Fighting SARS D．Volunteers Wanted While Fighting SARS ‎75．The underined word “cautious” most probably means .‎ ‎ A．cheerful B．dutiful C．helpful D．careful ‎★专题（34）‎ A The next time you try for a high-ranking post, you could let your possible boss listen to a recommending（推荐）phone call “made” by US President George W. Bush or British Prime Minister Tony Blair.‎ Of course, neither of them could really do that for you—you would just “borrow” their voices.‎ AT & T labs will start selling speech software that, it says, is so good at reproducing the sounds of a human voice that it can recreate voices and even bring the voices of long – dead famous people back to life.‎ The software, which turns printed text into speech, makes it possible for a company to use recordings of a person’s voice to say things that the person never actually said.‎ Possible customers for the software, which is priced at the thousands of dollars, include telephone call centers, companies that make software that reads digital files aloud, and makers of automated voice devices. The advances raise several problems. Who, for example, owns the rights to a famous person’s voice? (Some experts even believe that new contracts will be drawn that include voice-licensing clauses.)‎ And although scientists say the technology is not yet good enough to commit fraud（假冒）, would the synthesized（合成的）voices at last be able to trick people into thinking that they were getting phone calls or digital audio recordings from people they knew?‎ Even Mr Fruchterman, one of AT & T lab’s possible first customers, said he wondered what the new technology might bring. “Just like you can’t trust a photograph any more,” he said, “you won’t be able to trust a voice either.”‎ ‎56．With the help of the speech software, it is most possible .‎ ‎ A．to improve a famous person’s speech B．to say what you want in another’s voice ‎ C．to make a speech much more easily D．to help you to find a better job ‎57．If the speech software is widely used, .‎ ‎ A．people would no longer believe each other ‎ B．it would not be necessary to go for a speech by a famous person ‎ C．no radio or TV broadcasters would be needed ‎ D．recording a voice alone would not be taken as a proof in the court ‎58．According to the passage, you can infer that .‎ ‎ A．the software will turn out to be an immediate success in the market ‎ B．the government will forbid the sale of the software in the market ‎ C．it’s hard to decide whether the software will enjoy popularity ‎ D．the software will soon prove to be nothing but rubbish ‎59．The passage mainly wants to .‎ ‎ A．introduce a new software B．explain the disadvantage of a new invention ‎ C．advertise a new kind of product D．describe the future market of a new product B Millions of women use cosmetics, often called ‘make-up’. The cosmetics industry is one of the biggest in the world. Most large stores sell cosmetics, and there are always shops at airports selling them cheaply.‎ The word ‘cosmetics’ refers to anything that people put on their faces to make them look better. Lipstick, face powder and cream, and eye make-up are the most popular. Although more women than men use cosmetics, there are cosmetics for men as well as women.‎ Some people even have cosmetic surgery to make their faces look different. They have the shape of their noses and eyes changed.‎ The most widely used cosmetic is probably lipstick, as many women who do not wear any other make-up will often put on a little lipstick.‎ Lipstick is made by mixing together different oils and colors. This mixture is then allowed to get hard and is cut into the shape of a small pencil. When a woman presses the lipstick to her lips, the end of it becomes soft, and some of it sticks to her lips, giving them extra color.‎ Cosmetics were probably first used in India, but it was the Egyptians, six thousand years ago, who made the most use of them. Rich Egyptian women painted their eyes green and black. They used a red color to paint pretty designs on their fingernails, the palms of their hands and the soles of their feet. Pictures of Cleopatra always show her wearing a lot of make-up.‎ The Romans also used cosmetics. They liked to make their skin very white and to paint their eyes. They also used a kind of lipstick.‎ In England at one time, very rich women had baths in milk to make their skin beautiful. They also used a lot of sweet-smelling powder to stop people smelling their bodies, which were often very dirty because they did not wash very often or change their clothes.‎ At one time, some cosmetics were not safe. They were bad for the skin, and some of the lipsticks and powders that people used were even poisonous. Nowadays, people in the cosmetics industry take great care to make sure that everything they use is completely safe.‎ ‎60．People use cosmetics .‎ ‎ A．only at airports B．to color their feet ‎ C．to make themselves look better D．instead of surgery ‎61．‘Cosmetics’ refers to .‎ ‎ A．lipstick B．make-up C．creams D．surgery ‎62．In earlier times, cosmetics were .‎ ‎ A．never used in milk baths B．never used on the eyes ‎ C．never used on the skin D．sometimes harmful to the skin C Have you ever noticed, when looking at a map of the world, that the east coast of South America and the west coast of Africa look as though they might fit together? If you have, you are not alone. In 1965 the English scientist Sir Edward Bullard used a computer to Text the fit of the two continents and found that at an ocean depth of 2000 meters the match was very close indeed.‎ It seems too remarkable to be possible, but there is a lot of evidence to suggest that Africa was once joined to South America. For example, there is a belt of ancient rocks along the east of Brazil which corresponds with the rocks across the South Atlantic in West Africa.‎ There is further evidence that existing land masses were once linked. The remains of a 400-to-500-million-year-old mountain chain has been found running down the eastern part of Greenland, western Scandinavia, and through north-west Scotland and Ireland, into western Canada, eventually finding their way to north-west Africa.‎ Then there is the evidence from life itself. In various parts of the world today the same animals and plants can be found on land masses separated by, in some cases, thousands of miles of oceans. Did they evolve（进化）at the same time in two different places? It seems unlikely. Biologists believe that there must have been land bridges which have now sunk beneath the sea. Also fossils found in sedimentary rocks(fossils are the preserved remains of life forms)have allowed geologists to trace the same plants from South America, and Antarctica in rocks perhaps 300 million years old.‎ The ice that is now confined to the polar regions has always been so limited in extent. Indeed, during a period of the Earth’s history known as the permocarboniferous（二叠石灰纪）age about 250-350 million years ago there is evidence from the rocks that there were glaciers covering South America, parts of Africa, and India Australia. On the other hand, in the northern hemisphere（北半球）there were deserts. If the continents were distributed（分布）as they are today, it is hard to understand how this could be.‎ So there is considerable evidence to show whole continents moved apart, and naturally many people have tried to discover how and why whole land masses moved.‎ ‎63．According to the author’s opinion, Africa and South America didn’t move apart until .‎ ‎ A．500 million years ago B．350 million years ago ‎ C．200 million years ago D．300 million years ago ‎64．The sentence “…eventually finding their way to north-west Africa” means ‎ ‎ A．We can find a way from the eastern part of Greenland to north-west Africa.‎ ‎ B．We can also find these remains in north-west Africa.‎ ‎ C．The mountain chain goes from the eastern part of Greenland to north-west Africa.‎ ‎ D．It is a long way from the eastern part of Greenland to north-west Africa.‎ ‎65．The best title for this passage would be .‎ ‎ A．The Evidence of the Continental Drift B．The Movement of the Two Continents ‎ C．The Continental Drift D．The History of the Earth.‎ ‎66．Which of the following is NOT true according to the passage?‎ ‎ A．We can find the same animals and plants on the two continents.‎ ‎ B．We can find the same remains of a 400-to-500-million-year-old mountain chain.‎ ‎ C．There are deserts in the northern hemisphere.‎ ‎ D．The same animals and plants evolved at the same time in two different places.‎ D Exchange a glance with someone, then look away. Do you realize that you have made a statement? Hold the glance for a second longer and you have made a different statement. Hold it for 3 seconds, and the meaning has changed again. For every social situation, there is a permissible time that you can hold a person’s gaze without being intimate, rude, or aggressive. If you are on an elevator, what gaze-time are you permitted? To answer this question, consider what you typically do. You very likely give other passengers a quick glance to size them up（打量）and to assure them that you mean no threat. Since being close to another person signals the possibility of interaction, you need to send out a signal telling others you want to be left alone. So you cut off eye contacts what sociologist Erving Goffiman（1963）calls “a dimming of the lights”. You look down at the floor, at the indicator lights, anywhere but into another passenger’s eyes. Should you break the rule against staring at a stranger on an elevator, you will make the other person extremely uncomfortable, and you are likely to feel a bit strange yourself.‎ If you hold eye contacts for more than 3 seconds, what are you telling another person? Much depends on the person and the situation. For instance, a man and a woman communicate interest in this manner. They typically gaze at each other for about 3 seconds at a time, and then drop their eyes down for 3 seconds, before letting their eyes meet again. But if one man gives another man a 3-second-plus stare, he signals, “I know you”. “I am interested in you.” or “You look peculiar and I am curious about you.” This type of stare often produces hostile feelings.‎ ‎67．It can be inferred from the first paragraph that .‎ ‎ A．every glance has its significance(meaning or importance)‎ ‎ B．staring at a person is an expression of interest ‎ C．a gaze longer than 3 seconds is unacceptable ‎ D．a glance carries more meaning than words ‎68．If you want to be left alone on an elevator the best thing to do is .‎ ‎ A．to look into another passenger’s eyes B．to avoid eye contacts with other passengers ‎ C．to signal you are not a threat to anyone D．to keep a distance from other passengers ‎69．By “a dimming of the lights”, Erving Goffiman means .‎ ‎ A．closing one’s eyes B．turning off the lights ‎ C．stopping glancing at others D．reducing gaze-time to the minimum.‎ ‎70．The passage mainly discusses .‎ ‎ A．the limitations of eye contacts B．the exchange of ideas through eye contacts ‎ C．proper behavior in situations ‎ D．the role of eye contacts in interpersonal communication E In Europe people hold the fork in the left hand and the knife in the right throughout the meal, a system that is generally agreed to be more efficient than the American zigzag（曲折的）method. Americans hold both the fork and the knife in their right hands throughout the meal, so they continually change their forks to the left hand when they have to cut their meat. It seems to be funny for the Europeans to see Americans busy changing their dinner sets, making a lot of noises. A few explanations for this American style are as follows:‎ ‎(1)Americans are practical and efficient. Since most of us are right-handed, it is reasonable to keep our working tools at all times in the right hand that can use them most efficiently.‎ ‎(2)Americans, the master of the New World are rebels（判逆者）. They use the zigzag method to break the rules in the Old World and in this way they are thumbing their nose at Mother England. Americans are a restless kind. They do not like to sit in one spot for very long ‎ when dining.‎ ‎(3)Forced to do so, they respond by “playing” with the silver.‎ Whatever the reason for the practice, it is now certainly as American as apple pie. Europeans recognize this and are quick to attack it as evidence of American innocence（无知）of form. Arguments against the zigzag method rest not only on grounds of efficiency but also on those of tradition. In Old World Dining, the knife is held in the right hand continually because it can serve as an instant defense against the uninvited intruders（入侵者）. However, such alertness（警觉）is out of place in the New World, as every American believes that this is the home of the brave. Americans juggle their silverware, perhaps, to show that they are not afraid and that one of them holding a fork is worth any number of them holding blades（刀）.‎ ‎71．Americans use to hold their fork to pick up the salad.‎ ‎ A．the right hand B．the left hand C．both hands D．either of the two hands ‎72．As the masters of the New World, Americans use a different cutting method from that in the ‎ Old World to .‎ ‎ A．show their independence of Mother England B．show their disrespect to Mother England ‎ C．add a new tradition to those in Mother England ‎ D．show off their creativeness to Mother England ‎73．In the sentence, the word “juggle” probably means .‎ ‎ A．hold B．play with C．pick up D．lay down ‎74．Also in the last sentence, the two “them” refer to .‎ ‎ A．Americans B．Europeans ‎ C．Americans and Europeans separately D．Europeans and Americans separately ‎75．Which of the following statements is NOT true? .‎ ‎ A．European people hold the fork in the left hand and the knife in the right hand.‎ ‎ B．The zigzag eating method is related to American characteristics.‎ ‎ C．The Zigzag eating method has become an American feature.‎ ‎ D．European people will use the American method because of its efficiency.‎ ‎★专题（35）‎ A On Serangoon Road in Singapore , something interesting is happening : fast food with a difference . This street is surrounded by skyscrapers , modern shopping malls , and office buildings . It looks like a South Indian bazaar . It has Indian shops . In the Thosai café , food is served on banana leaves . And it also has an Indian vegetarian fast food restaurant called Komala’s . This restaurant is becoming as popular as McDonald’s .‎ Komala’s looks like an American fast food restaurant . It has plastic chairs and tables that are attached to the floor . There’s also a children’s playground in the restaurant . What makes it differents is its menu , which is all Indian and vegetarian .‎ It offers more choices of food than most fast food restaurants do . The menu is on the wall above the cashiers . The prices are low , and once the orders are taken and paid for , the customer is given a token to present to the food counter . The customer turns in the token and picks up the food .‎ The food is ready in about two minutes. If it’s for takeout , it is wrapped and put in a bag . If the customer eats in the restaurant , they eat from metal plates and cups , on a tray covered with paper . This paper shows pictures of the food that is available at Komala’s . ‎ The menu offers more than ten kinds of thosai , steamed buns , and many other types of Indian foods . These come accompanied by curies and chutneys . There are also mini-meals for children , which include lassi , a sweetened yogurt drink , and ice cream .‎ On Sundays , a lot of Indian families come here for a vegetarian dinner after going to the nearby temple . Komala’s is air-conditioned , the seats are good , the service is very fast , and it’s very neat and clean . This isn’t true of other restaurants in the neighborhood .‎ ‎“This is an amazing place,” says Sim Tang , a Chinese office worker who eats at Komala’s after work . “My Indian friends told me about it . I have come here ever since . I enjoy some thosai and tea .”‎ Komala’s is so popular , it may open in India , Australia , and Malaysia . More will open in Singapore soon . The restaurant owner says that when people eat at Komala’s , they feel like part of the international community .‎ ‎56．It can be learned from the passage that fast food isn’t served in .‎ ‎ A．Thosai cafe B．Komala’s C．McDonald’s D．South Indian bazaar ‎57．Komala’s is quite different form other fast food restaurants because .‎ ‎ A．the food is all Indian and vegetarian B．it has a children’s playground ‎ C．it has more choices of food D．the customer is given a token ‎ ‎58．What can you infer from the passage ?‎ ‎ A．People can enjoy the same food in other restaurants nearby .‎ ‎ B．Children probably like Komala’s very much .‎ ‎ C．Komala’s will open in Singapore soon .‎ ‎ D．On Sundays , many Indian families go to the nearby temple .‎ ‎59．Which of the following could be the best title for the passage ?‎ ‎ A．Komala’s —Fast Food with a Difference . B．An Amazing Place .‎ ‎ C．More Choices for Food . D．Part of the International Community .‎ B Sharon Suarez dreams of the day when she won’t have to carry groceries from her car to her house . That day has come . A growing number of people are shopping the aisles of grocery stores on the Internet .‎ ‎“I’ve never done it , but it sounds great,” Ms. Suarez said . “It is so hot here in the summer . It’s also really cold in the winter . I would love to stay inside and have the groceries come to me .”‎ Of course , people already buy books , do their banking , and shop for gifts on the Internet . But when they need to shop for food , most still get in the car and go to the supermarket . In fact , fewer than 1 million people have bought groceries online . The average American visits a supermarket 2.2 times a week .‎ Part of the problem is obvious . Many shoppers want to see the food they buy . While they might buy a CD or a book without seeing it , most people don’t want to buy produce the same way . They also enjoy going to the supermarket . They like to walk in the aisles , and see what new items are available . Shoppers worry most about spoiled food , large delivery charges , and late deliveries . But , all this is slowly changing . Consumers are beginning to find that buying food online saves them time . And , they’re finding that delivery is fast , cheap , and the food is good .‎ ‎“I wasn’t sure what to expect when I started ordering online,” said Michael Koklos . Mr .Koklos started shopping online when he had to work longer hours . “I never had time to shop . It is really easy and convenient to buy over the Internet . The vegetables are better than ones I would pick out myself ,” he added . “And I never have to find a parking space .”‎ While online shopping appeals to a certain group of the people , there will always be some who enjoy shopping for their own groceries .‎ Marti Lavalle , a shopper in a local grocery store , says she’ll never shop for groceries online . “I still don’t know how to use a computer,” she explained .‎ ‎60．Ms. Suarez likes the idea of Internet grocery shopping because .‎ ‎ A．many others are shopping on the Internet B．it’s hot in the summer and cold in the winter ‎ ‎ C．she has never done it before D．she needn’t carry the groceries by herself ‎ ‎61．Food shopping online is not as popular as other types of online shopping NOT because .‎ ‎ A．people want to see the food they buy B．people enjoy going to the supermarket ‎ ‎ C．people have a lot of time to spend D．people like to walk in the aisles ‎ ‎62．What do people think will go wrong if they buy food on the Internet ?‎ ‎ A．They would spend a lot of money on delivery .B．They can not find out the new items .‎ ‎ C．The food is very expensive . D．They can’t pick out the things themselves .‎ ‎63．If you , you can’t do shopping online .‎ ‎ A．can find a parking space B．know nothing about computer ‎ ‎ C．have a lot of spare time D．have to work shorter hours ‎ C San Francisco is going to do what many other cities have already done—provide free bicycles to the public . The mayor of San Francisco supports the bicycle program . He wants to improve the terrible traffic problems in the city .‎ At first , 40 to 60 bikes will be available only to city workers . People will give their old bikes to the city to use in the program . If this program is successful , one day more than 1000 bicycles will be available . Everyone , not just city workers , will be able to use these bicycles . ‎ People in Fresno, California already have a free bicycle program . In fact , this idea began in Amsterdam over 40years ago . These programs encourage citizens to get out of their cars and onto pollution-free bikes .‎ Fresno’s Yellow Bike Program puts about forty bicycles around the city . The bikes are painted bright yellow so people know they can take them . When people take a yellow bike , they can ride to work or to shopping areas ,and then leave the bike for the next rider .‎ Some people worry that the free bikes will be stolen . However , theft hasn’t been a problem in free-bike cities by now.‎ While most people think the bike program is a good idea , only a few say they will use it . “I will still drive my car,” says Joanna Greene . “San Francisco has a lot of hills . My office is at the top of Potrero Hill . I don’t think I’m in good shape . And , wouldn’t I have to carry a helmet with me all the time ?”‎ Phil Chung agrees , “ There is too much traffic . Riding a bicycle can be dangerous . There are not very many bike lanes.” He continues , “Plus , it’s too cold in the winter . And what if you ride a bike to work , and then there isn’t one to ride home ?”‎ Program leaders know there will be problems . But they think it’s worth trying . “It’s not the solution for everyone,” states Sylvia Pass . “But if just one hundred people use it every day , that’s one hundred cars that aren’t on the streets , one hundred parking spaces that aren’t used . I think it’s a great beginning .”‎ ‎64．San Francisco provides bicycles to the public because .‎ ‎ A．there are many bikes available B．many people don’t have cars of their own ‎ ‎ C．many other cities have already done so D．the traffic problems are terrible ‎ ‎65．The following statements are the disadvantages of free bike program in Sam Francisco except that .‎ ‎ A．free bikes will be stolen B．San Francisco is not flat at all ‎ C．riding a bike is not safe enough D．it will be too cold in the winter ‎ ‎66．What does “I’m in good shape” in the sixth paragraph mean ?‎ ‎ A．I’m beautiful . B．I’m healthy and strong .‎ ‎ C．I have a good figure . D．I’m heavy and strong .‎ ‎67．The program leaders think the program is worth trying NOT because .‎ ‎ A．there will be more problems B．they can’t solve problems for everyone ‎ ‎ C．there will be less cars on the streets anyway D．there will be more parking spaces ‎ D The phones , the caffeine , the boss , dinging faxes , deadlines , doubling up for laid-off colleagues , fear of being fired yourself—eek , pretty soon your body is a clenched fist and you haven’t stood up from the desk in hours .‎ You need to relax . But who can remember to —and who has time ? You do ! It only takes five minutes .‎ Scientists say the opposite of the stress response is the relaxation response . They suggest a quick mantra meditation（快速入静疗法）when you feel yourself breathing shallowly and tensing up .‎ ‎“There are two things to remember about this,” scientists say . “First , repetition is the key , and second , when you feel other thoughts coming —and they will—you must let them pass by and not deal with them .”‎ Here’s what you do : At your desk , close your eyes , consciously relax your muscles , breathe in and out slowly ,say a meaningful word , for example love .‎ Breathe in , say the word silently while breathing out . When thoughts come ,let them drift past . Do this for three or four minutes , open your eyes , and get back to work . Scientists recommend doing this each morning before breakfast , too , for more than ten minutes , but less than twenty minutes . This will set the practice in your mind , so when you need it at work , it will produce relief almost immediately .‎ Scientists have another way of causing the body to unclench itself. And that’s by making it even more stressed ! Run up a flight of stairs . Put demands on your body —this will cause the same pathways in the brain and nervous system as stress does and fool the body into thinking it needs to go into recovery . Scientists even suggest dropping down in your room and doing ten pushups（俯卧撑）quickly .‎ According to scientists , you can relax your body by muscle group . Tense your facial muscles for five seconds , then relax . Then neck and shoulders . Work your way down . Shaking your arms and legs like a wet dog is also recommended.‎ ‎68．Which of the following states is true according to the passage ?‎ ‎ A．You must avoid other thoughts’ coming when you are in a quick mantra meditation .‎ ‎ B．You have to remember the practice in case you need it at work .‎ ‎ C．Running up a flight of stairs will make you even more tired .‎ ‎ D．Doing ten pushups will let you drop down .‎ ‎69．Which of the following best explains the meaning of the sentence “Work your way down.” as it is used in the passage ?‎ ‎ A．Stop your work . B．Go on with your work . C．Then relax again . ‎ ‎ D．Go on with the practice from upper parts of your body to lower parts .‎ ‎70．How many ways do the scientists give you for relaxation according to the passage ?‎ ‎ A．Two . B．Three. C．Four . D．Five .‎ ‎71．What is mainly discussed in the passage ?‎ ‎ A．Ways to relax in a hurry . B．You need to relax .‎ ‎ C．Ways to be healthy . D．Scientists’ suggestions .‎ E Bulls and humans alike slipped and slid on the cobblestone streets , but the first of Pamplona’s yearly runs with the bulls was largely injury free as thousands of daredevils rushed with the half-ton animals .‎ Some runners , sounding disappointed , said they’d seek out greater danger in coming days as the wildly popular , centuries-old San Fermin festival serves up six more runs this week .‎ ‎“It was a bit fearful, to be honest . Nowhere near as scary as in the books ,” said Johnny , 26, from New Zealand , here for the first time after reading about San Fermin on a Website .‎ ‎“Tomorrow we’re gong to try and run a bit closer to the bulls and get a bit more excited,” added his friend ,Richard ,26, holding the day’s first beer .‎ The streets were slightly wet with morning dew as six fighting bulls and six steers (小公牛)dashed from a corral along the 900-yard course through the city’s old quarter to the bull ring .‎ No one was gored （拱、戳）, although four people who were trampled were hospitalized for treatment of head , chest , rib or leg injuries . None was seriously hurt .‎ The steers are meant to keep the bulls more or less in a group—a frightened , isolated bull is very dangerous —and that’s pretty much what happened Monday .‎ At two sharp turns , several bulls slipped and went down heavily , and two bulls were separated from the pack . And a minor pileup of fallen runners formed at the tunnel leading into the bull ring . Bulls jumped and stepped over the runners .‎ Thousands of people watching in the street and from balconies shouted as the bulls rumbled (发隆隆声)through the city’s old quarter , taking just over two and a half minutes to cover course .‎ The fiesta , famous for its all-night street parties , dates back to the late 16th century but gained world fame from Ernest Hemingway’s 1926 novel The Sun Also Rises .‎ Tens of thousands from all over the world have been pouring into Pamplona for the yearly festival ever since .‎ ‎72．In the first of Pamplona’s yearly runs , some runners .‎ ‎ A．were injured badly B．sought out greater danger ‎ ‎ C．rushed with bulls D．read about San Fermin on a Website ‎ ‎73．What Johnny said means the first run of the bulls .‎ ‎ A．was not as fearful as in the books B．was a bit more fearful than in the books ‎ ‎ C．was terribly scary D．was as scary as in the books ‎ ‎74．Six steers were freed from the corral because .‎ ‎ A．the streets were a little bit wet B．there are six bulls ‎ ‎ C．the 900-yard course is through the city’s old quarter ‎ ‎ D．they might keep the bulls in a group ‎ ‎75．The Pamplona’s yearly festival became world famous because .‎ ‎ A．there are all-night street parties ‎ ‎ B．Ernest Hemingway wrote the novel The Sun Also Rises ‎ ‎ C．many people from all over the world go to Pamplona ‎ ‎ D．bulls jumped or stepped over the runners ‎ ‎★专题（36）‎ A The first jazz musicians played in New Orleans during the early ‎1900’‎s. After 1917, many of the New Orleans musicians moved to the south side of Chicago, where they continued to play their style of Jazz. Soon Chicage was the new center for jazz.‎ Several out standing musicians appeared as leading jazz artists in Chicago. Daniel Louis “Satchmo” Armstrong, born in New Orleans in 1900, was one. Another leading musician was Joseph “King” Oliver, who was also believed with having discovered Armstrong when they were both in New Orleans. While in Chicago, Oliver asked Armstrong, who was in New Orleans, to join his band.‎ In 1923 King Oliver’ Creole Jazz Band made the first important set of recordings by a Black band in the history of jazz. The Red Hot Peppers band led by Jelly Roll Morton and the Hot Five and Hot Seven Bands under Louis Armstrong also made recordings of special note.‎ Although Chicago’s South side was the main jazz center, some musicians in New York were also demanding attention in jazz circles. In 1923 Fletcer Henderson already had a ten-piece band that played jazz. ‎ During the early ‎1930’‎s, the number of players grew to sixteen, Henderson’s band was considered a leader in what some people have called the Big Band Era.‎ By the ‎1930’‎s, big dance bands were the rage. Large numbers of people went to ballrooms to dance to jazz music played by big bands.‎ One of the most popular and long a very famous jazz band was the Duke Ellington Band. Edward “Duke” Ellington was born in Washton, D.C, in 1899 and died in New York City in 1974. He studied the piano as a young boy and later began writing original musical compositions.‎ The first of Ellington’s European tours came in 1933. He soon received international fame for his talent as a band leader, composer, and arranger. Ten years later, Ellington began giving annual concerts at Carnegie Hall in New York City. People began to listen to jazz in the same way that they had always listened to classical music.‎ ‎56．What is the main purpose of the passage?‎ ‎ A．To compare jazz to other types of music. B．To criticize jazz musicians and their music.‎ ‎ C．To describe the careers of important jazz musicians in the ‎1930’‎s.‎ ‎ D．To trace the development of jazz in the United States.‎ ‎57．It can be inferred from the passage that Louis Armstrong went to Chicago for which of the following reasons? A．to form his own band. B．To learn to play Chicago-style jazz.‎ ‎ C．To play in Joseph Oliver’s band. D．To make recordings with the Hot Five.‎ ‎58．According to the passage, which of the following Black bands was the first to make a significant set of jazz recordings?‎ ‎ A．The hot Sevsn band. B．Fletcher Henderson’s band.‎ ‎ C．The red hot Peppers band. D．King Oliver’s Creole Jazz Band.‎ ‎59．The passage supports which of the following conclusions?‎ ‎ A．By the ‎1930’‎s jazz was appreciated by a wide audience.‎ ‎ B．Classical music had a great hit on jazz.‎ ‎ C．Jazz was born in New Orleans in the early 19th century.‎ ‎ D．Jazz bands were better known in Europe than in the United States.‎ ‎61．Which of the following cities is NOT mentioned in the passage as a center of Jazz?‎ ‎ A．New York B．Washton, D. C C．Chicago D．New Orleans B A new project is being set up to discover the best ways of sorting and separating rubbish. When this project is completed, rubbish will be processed(处理) like this: First, it will pass through sharp metal spikes(尖状物) which will tear open the plastic bags in which rubbish is usually packed; then it will pass through a powerful fan to separate the lightest elements from the heavy solids; after that crushers and rollers will break up everything that can be broken. Finally, the rubbish will pass under magnets(磁铁) which will remove the bits of iron and steel; the rubber and plastic will be then sorted out in the final stage.‎ The first full- scale giant recycling plants are, perhaps, years away. But in some big industrial areas, where rubbish has been dumped for so long that there are no holes to fill up with rubbish, these new automatic recycling plants may be built sooner. Indeed, with the growing cost of transporting rubbish to more distant dumps, some big cities will be forced to build their own recycling plants before long.‎ ‎61．Crushers and rollers are used to __________-‎ ‎ A．remove the sharp metal objects B．reduce items to small pieces ‎ C．separate the light elements D．tear open the plastic bags ‎62．Among the problems big cities are facing, the basic one is that ________.‎ ‎ A．there are too many holes B．there is a labor shortage ‎ C．moving rubbish to faraway dumps is too costly ‎ D．finding a new way for recycling is difficult C Every animal is a living radiator(散热器)－heat formed in its cells is given off through its skin. Warm-blooded animals maintain a steady temperature by constantly replacing lost surface heat; smaller animals, which have more skin for every ounce of body weight, must produce heat faster than bigger ones. Because smaller animals burn fuel faster, scientists say that they live faster.‎ The speed at which an animal lives is determined by measuring the rate at which it uses oxygen. A chicken, for example, uses one-half cubic centimeter of oxygen every hour for each gram it weighs. The tiny shrew uses four cubic centimeters of oxygen every hour for each gram it weighs. Because it uses oxygen eight times as fast, it is said that the mouselike shrew is living eight times as fast as the chicken. The smallest of the ‎ warm-blooded creatures, the hummingbird, lives a hundred times as fast as an elephant.‎ There is a limit to how small a warm-blooded animal can be. A mammal or bird that weighted only two and a half grams would starve to death. It would burn up its food too rapidly and would not be able to eat fast enough to supply more fuel.‎ ‎63．Warm-blooded animals maintain a steady temperature by ________.‎ ‎ A．regulating the amount of heat produced B．storing heat in their body cells ‎ C．controlling the amount of heat given off D．constantly replacing lost surface heat ‎64．The speed at which an animal lives is determined by measuring __________.‎ ‎ A．the amount of food it eats B．the rate at which it uses oxygen ‎ C．the amount of oxygen it uses D．its body temperature ‎65．The amount of oxygen an animal uses depends on _________.‎ ‎ A．its body weight B．the food it eats ‎ C．its general size and shape D．the length of time it lives ‎66．Form the selection, we can infer that __________.‎ ‎ A．the hummingbird lives faster than any other warm-blooded creature ‎ B．there is no limit as to how large a warm-blooded animal can be.‎ ‎ C．small animals have less skin for their body weight than large ones .‎ ‎ D．the hummingbird is the smallest animal in the world.‎ D Children have their own rules in playing games. They seldom need a referee(裁判) and rarely trouble to keep scores. They don’t care much about who wins or loses, and it doesn’t seem to worry them if the game is not finished. Yet, they like games that depend a lot on luck, so that their personal abilities cannot be directly compared. They also enjoy games that move in stages, in which each stage, the choosing of leaders, the picking-up of sides, or the determining of which side shall start, is a game in itself.‎ Grown-ups can hardly find children’s games exciting, and they often feel puzzled at why their kids play such simple games again and again. However, it is found that a child plays games for very important reasons. He can be a good player without having to think whether he is a popular person, and he can find himself being a useful partner to someone of whom he is ordinarily afraid. He becomes a leader when it comes to his turn. He can be confident, too, in particular games, that it is his place to give orders, to pretend to be dead, to throw a ball actually at someone, or to kiss some one he has caught.‎ It appears to us that when children play a game they imagine a situation under their control. Everyone knows the rules, and, more importantly, everyone plays according to the rules. Those rules may be childish, but they make sure that every child has a chance to win.‎ ‎67．What is true about children when they play games?‎ ‎ A．They can stop playing at any time they like. B．They can test their personal abilities.‎ ‎ C．They want to pick a better team. D．They don’t need rules.‎ ‎68．To become a leader in a game the child has to __________.‎ ‎ A．play well B．wait for his turn ‎ C．be confident in himself D．be popular among his playmates ‎69．What do we know about grown-ups?‎ ‎ A．They are not interested in games. B．They find children’s games easy.‎ ‎ C．They don’t need a reason to play games. D．They don’t understand children’s games.‎ ‎70．Why does a child like playing games?‎ ‎ A．Because he can be someone other than himself.‎ ‎ B．Because he can become popular among friends.‎ ‎ C．Because he finds he is always lucky in games.‎ ‎ D．Because he likes the place where he places a game.‎ ‎71．The writer believes that _________.‎ ‎ A．children should make better rules for their games ‎ B．children should invite grown-ups to play with them ‎ C．children’s games can do them a lot of good D．children play games without reasons E After the age of sixteen, the number of brain cells begins to decrease at a speed of several million a year. They simply die off. We know that in certain types of activity, the human brain is at its peak(高峰) in the early twenties, when it has collected enough information to be able to use the vast number of cells freely in the most effective way. Pure mathematics is one of the fields in which this happens, and we know that Albert ‎ Einstein made all his world-shaking discoveries between the age of about 20 and 25, and spent the rest of his life tidying them up and arranging them.‎ But in certain other types of activity (of which being an author is perhaps one) experience is more important than sharpness of brain, and there one usually finds that a person reaches his or her peak much later in life.‎ Besides sharpness of brain and experience, here is another thing that is very important; and that is wisdom; one can have a very quick, inventive brain and plenty of experience, but if one uses these foolishly, one harms both oneself and others. Wisdom does not always come with age－there are plenty of foolish middle－aged people about－but the average person tends to learn wisdom as he gets older, usually by making painful of embarrassing mistakes.‎ Leaning to be wise is basically learning what is not possible; and what is possible but so difficult that it is not worth all the trouble one has to go through go get there. Mostly, it is learning about human nature; how real people behave and react, as against how one would like them to behave and react. One can read and hear lot of idealistic stuff(空想的东西) about how to make the world a better place, which would be found if it was based on an accurate (准确) observation of human nature, but which is basically a waste of time because it is not.‎ ‎72．According to the writer, the great discoveries made by Albert Einstein were mainly a result in __________. A．years of hard work B．sharpness of the brain ‎ C．rich experience D．his deep understanding of the nuture ‎73．Some people achieve success much later in life because ______.‎ A.their work often requires much experience ‎ B．they do not have a chance to show their talent ‎ C．they have to learn lessons from failures ‎ D．they fail to realize earlier the importance of hard work ‎74．The importance of wisdom lies in the fact that __________.‎ ‎ A．it helps to avoid various mistakes B．it contributes to one’s creativity ‎ C．it encourages one to go forward in face of difficulty ‎ D．it provides the right direction of efforts ‎75．The writer came to believe that ________.‎ ‎ A．it is always a waste of time to make plans about the future ‎ B．it is human nature to make attempts on what looks impossible ‎ C．one should always challenge the impossible to push the society forward ‎ D．one has to use wisdom in deciding what is the best thing to do ‎ ‎★专题（37）‎ A ‎ When he took office, George W. Bush, son of former president George Herbert Walker Bush, became the first son to follow his father into the White House since John Quincy Adams followed John Adams in the early 19th century.‎ ‎ Bush was born on July 6, 1946, in New Haven, Connecticut, the first child of George Herbert Walker Bush and Barbara Pierce Bush. Although George Herbert Walker Bush began his career in the oil industry, he finally served as a congressman（国会议员）,and vice（副的）president and president of the United States.‎ ‎ At the age of two, Bush moved with his parents from Connecticut to Odessa, Texas, where his father took up the oil business. After a year in Texas, the family moved to California for business reasons. A year later, the family returned to Texas and settled in Midland, where Bush lived from 1950 to 1959.‎ ‎ In 1959, again for business reasons, the family moved to Houston, Texas. In 1961 Bush left Texas and went to Andover, Massachusetts, to attend Phillips Academy, a boarding（寄宿）school that his father had also attended.‎ ‎ At Phillips, Bush played basketball, baseball, and football. He was best known for being head cheerleader. In 1964 he enrolled at Yale University in Connecticut; his father and grandfather had also attended Yale. At Yale, Bush was considered an average student, but he was popular with his classmates.‎ ‎ Bush graduated from Yale with a bachelor’s degree in history in 1968. Then he joined the Air National Guard and remained in the Guard until 1973. After earning his MBA form Harvard in 1975, Bush returned to Midland. Like his father, he first entered the oil industry as a “landsman”.‎ ‎ However, Bush’s oil companies never enjoyed great success. He took more interest in politics. He helped his father to become president and in 1994 he himself was elected governor of Texas.‎ ‎ In the summer of 1999, Bush began to run for the president of the USA and on January 20,2001, George ‎ W. Bush, hand raised, took the oath（宣誓）of office to become the 43rd president of the US.‎ ‎56．What does the writer intend to tell us in the first paragraph?‎ ‎ A．George W. Bush is the first son in American history to follow his father into the White House.‎ B．George W. Bush is the first son of former president George Herbert Walker Bush.‎ C．John Quincy Adams and his father were both former American presidents.‎ D．George W. Bush is the second one in American history to follow his father into the White House.‎ ‎57．We may learn from the text that young Bush .‎ A.got on very well at the universities B．was very good at basketball, baseball and football ‎ C．did everything as his father had done D．is a very successful politician like his father ‎58．From the year when Bush was two to the year 1959, the Bush family moved in all.‎ ‎ A．three times B．four times C．five times D．six times ‎59．Which of the following is NOT true about George W. Bush?‎ ‎ A．Young Bush lived with his family in Texas from 1948 to 1961.‎ ‎ B．He once studied at a university that his father and grandfather had also attended.‎ ‎ C．He once ruled over an American state before he entered the White House.‎ ‎ D．He once served at the Air National Guard for about five years.‎ B Happy Vacations at the Hotel of Your Choice THE BAY MOTEL The Welcome Inn Quality and Economy A tradition for wise travelers Everything you need, nothing you don’t! Since 1932‎ ‎⊙80 rooms with color TV ⊙54 rooms, color TV ‎⊙Restaurant and bar ⊙Heated swimming pool ‎⊙5 miles form downtown ⊙Restaurant, bar, room service ‎ San Francisco ⊙In the heart of San Francisco!‎ ‎⊙Free parking service! ⊙Fantastic rates: $35 1 person,‎ ‎⊙Modern—opened 1995 $ 45 2 persons ‎⊙And—$29 single! $ 39 double!‎ ‎60．“The Bay Motel”is most probably .‎ ‎ A．a hotel specially for traveling motorists ‎ B．a traditional hotel that is near to a beautiful bay ‎ C．a nice hotel that provides everything the customers need ‎ D．a large hotel that provides the best service but charges the least ‎61．It can be learned from the two advertisements that .‎ ‎ A．aged travelers will usually choose the Welcome Inn ‎ B．guests in the Bay Motel only pay a little for parking ‎ C．wise travelers always put up at the Welcome Inn ‎ D．guests in the Welcome Inn can have food or drinks in their rooms ‎62．The most possible reason why the Bay Motel is cheaper than the Welcome Inn is that .‎ ‎ A．it has been open for only a few years B．it is not in the center of the city ‎ C．it has a parking place D．it has more rooms C ‎ On hearing the words“Just do it!”, you will know there is a Nike product nearby. If it’s “Always Coca-Cola”, you can be sure someone wants to sell you a refreshing drink.‎ ‎ An advertising slogan is to a brand what eyes are to a person. The slogan helps people understand the brand better by telling them what it wants to sell to its customers. Good slogans leave a message inside people’s minds. It’s almost certain that every brand has a popular slogan.‎ ‎ Here are a few examples:‎ ‎ “Just do it!”—This slogan speaks out to teens. It tells them to do something, but only if they think it’s worth it. And if so, why not do it wearing Nike?‎ ‎ “Always Coca-Cola.”—Coke’s slogans change every few years, but this one has enjoyed a lasting popularity because it shows the brand’s spirit. It seems to say“Coke is the only drink there is; there are no other forms of drinks.”‎ ‎ “Share moments, share life.”—This slogan from Kodak connects photos and beauty. It asks people to remember the happy moments in life by taking photos of them —using Kodak film of course!‎ ‎63．What would be the best title for the text?‎ ‎ A．Just Do It! B．Slogan And Brand ‎ C．Famous Slogans D．What Is A Good Slogan?‎ ‎64．Which of the following can best explain the underlined sentence（paragraph 2）?‎ ‎ A．A good advertising slogan should draw people’s attention.‎ ‎ B．A brand should have an advertising slogan just as people have eyes.‎ ‎ C．An advertising slogan is as important to a brand as eyes are to a person.‎ ‎ D．An advertising slogan acts as the eyes of a brand.‎ ‎65．The word “them” in the last paragraph refers to . ‎ ‎ A．people B．the happy moments C．photos and beauty D．Kodak films ‎66．Which of the following tables can best match the slogans with their brands?‎ ‎ A B Slogan Brand Slogan Brand Obey your thirst.‎ Volkswagen Obey your thirst.‎ Canon If anyone can, Canon can.‎ Eastern Airlines If anyone can, Canon can.‎ Volkswagen The wings of man.‎ Casio Watches The wings of man.‎ Eastern Airlines Drivers wanted.‎ jobworld.co.uk.‎ Drivers wanted.‎ Casio Watches Technology for life.‎ Sprite Technology for life.‎ jobworld.co.uk Download a better future.‎ Canon Download a better future Sprite ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ C D ‎ Slogan Brand Slogan Brand Obey your thirst.‎ Casio Watches Obey your thirst.‎ Sprite If anyone can, Canon can.‎ Canon If anyone can, Canon can.‎ Canon The wings of man.‎ Eastern Airlines The wings of man.‎ Eastern Airlines Drivers wanted.‎ Sprite Drivers wanted.‎ Volkswagen Technology for life.‎ jobworld.co.uk Technology for life.‎ Casio Watches Download a better future.‎ Volkswagen Download a better future jobworld.co.uk ‎ ‎ ‎ D ‎ London Thursday July 26（Reuters）—Ian Johnstone missed his girlfriend so much that he flew back to Britain from Australia to propose to her. The problem is that she flew in the opposite direction.‎ ‎ He and Amy Dolby even managed to miss each other when they sat in the same airport waiting-room in Singapore at the same time to wait for connecting flights.‎ ‎ Dolby, heartbroken when she arrived at Johnstone’s Sydney apartment to find he had flown to London, told the Times: “It was as though someone was playing a cruel joke on us. He is the most romantic person I have ever known. I think our problem is that we are both quite impulsive（冲动的）people. We are always ‎ trying to surprise each other.”‎ ‎ After an 11,000-mile flight across the globe, she was greeted by Johnstone’s astonished flat mate asking what she was doing there.‎ ‎ “The terrible truth dawned when I found that Ian’s rucksack and most of his clothes were missing. I sat on the end of his bed and cried my eyes out. And that really annoyed me,” she said.‎ ‎ Johnstone, a 27—year—old bricklayer, had taken a year off to travel round Australia. But he was missing Dolby, a 26—year—old secretary, so much he got a job on a Sydney building site and started saving for a surprise.‎ ‎ He then flew home to Britain and went to her apartment armed with an engagement ring, champagne and flowers.‎ ‎ “I really missed Amy and I’d been thinking about her all the time. I thought she was winding me up when she phoned me from Australia,”he said.‎ ‎ Johnstone then asked Dolby to marry him on the phone. “I didn’t know whether to laugh or cry but I accepted, ”she said.‎ ‎ Dolby was given a short tour of Sydney by Johnstone’s friends and Johnstone had to stay in Britain for two weeks because he could not change his ticket.‎ ‎67．It can be learned from the text that .‎ ‎ A．Johnstone got a job in Sydney so that he could start saving money for a surprise to Dolby ‎ B．Dolby was heartbroken because someone was playing a cruel joke on her ‎ C．Dolby was greeted by Johnstone’s flat mate at the airport.‎ ‎ D．Dolby was not so impulsive as Johnstone ‎68．According to the text, it seemed that .‎ ‎ A．Johnstone and Dolby could have seen each other in the same airport waiting-room in Singapore.‎ ‎ B．the couple pretended not to see each other in the same airport waiting-room in Singapore ‎ C．the young lovestruck couple had both intended to propose to each other ‎ D．Dolby stayed longer in Sydney than Johnstone stayed in Britain ‎69．When Johnstone asked her to marry him on the phone, Dolby didn’t know whether to laugh or cry because she had a mixed feeling of .‎ ‎ A．love, hatred and nervousness B．excitement, anger and shyness ‎ C．cheer, regret and annoyance D．happiness, surprise and sadness ‎70．Which of the following shows the right order of what happened in the story?‎ ‎ a．Johnstone flew back to Britain to propose to his girlfriend, Amy Dolby.‎ ‎ b．Johnstone started working at a Sydney building site.‎ ‎ c．Johnstone went to Amy’s apartment in Britain with an engagement ring.‎ ‎ d．Johnstone proposed to Dolby over the phone.‎ ‎ e．They were waiting for their connecting flight in the airport lounge in Singapore.‎ ‎ f．Dolby called Johnstone from Australia.‎ E ‎ The group of tourists walking through Stockholm’s old street never knew what hit them. As they admired Swedish art works in a storefront window, one of their mobile phones chirped（唧唧叫）with an anonymous（匿名的）note:“Try the blue sweaters. They keep you warm in the winter.”‎ ‎ The tourist had just been“bluejacked”—secretly sent a text message using short-range wireless technology called Bluetooth.‎ ‎ The more people get Bluetooth-enabled mobile phones—both sender and receiver need them for this to work—the more there is likely to be mischievous（恶作剧的）messaging.‎ ‎ Websites are already offering tips on bluejacking, and collections of astonished reactions quickly turn up on the Internet. One site, www, bluejackq. com, was set up by a British teenager.‎ ‎ “I bluejacked three or four people,” says 13-year-old Ellie in UK, who runs the site and makes bluejacking a daily affair. Bluetooth has a range of about nine metres. Ellie used it to send a note ‎ to a man in a cafe asking how his coffee was and saying that she liked his wife’s glasses.‎ ‎ Ellie says he looked here and there to try to figure out where the message came from, even ‎ sending text messages back and forth with his wife, but to no avail.‎ ‎ Bluetooth is fast becoming more common on new mobile phones, though Forrester Research ‎ says at present only 9 per cent of phones in Europe have such a function.‎ ‎ The technology is handy for people wanting to use wireless headsets with their phones or for ‎ sending data by phone to Bluetooth-enabled printers.‎ ‎ When Bluetooth is activated（激活）, it seeks out other equipped mobile phones by itself and ‎ sets up a link. Bluetooth phones can be set to block anonymous messaging, but people who carry ‎ them don’t necessarily know that.‎ ‎71．What is mainly discussed in the text?‎ ‎ A．The meaning of the word“bluejack” B．The technology called Bluetooth ‎ C．Anonymous messages D．Tips on bluejacking.‎ ‎72．When a tourist was“bluejacked”,he or she might .‎ ‎ A．receive an anonymous and often mischievous message ‎ B．send others a text message using short-range wireless technology called Bluetooth ‎ C．be persuaded to buy a blue sweater ‎ D．get a Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone ‎73．We may learn from the text that .‎ ‎ A．with Bluetooth-enabled mobile phones people can send anonymous notes to friends far ‎ away ‎ B．13-year-old Ellie makes bluejacking to earn some money by advertising ‎ C．not many people in Europe now carry Bluetooth mobile phones ‎ D．It’s not easy for activated Bluetooth to set up a link with other equipped mobile phones ‎74．People often receive anonymous messages though they don’t want to because .‎ ‎ A．Without a reply B．Of no use.‎ ‎ C．No problem. D．No signal.‎ ‎75．People often receive anonymous messages though they don’t want to because .‎ ‎ A．many of them probably don’t know how to block such messages ‎ B．it’s not necessary for people to know how to block such messages ‎ C．their phones are not able to block anonymous messaging ‎ D．it’s just impossible for people to reject any messages ‎★专题（38）‎ A Our boat floated on , between walls of forest too thick to allow us a view of the land we were passing through , though we knew from the map that our river must from time to time be passing through chains of hills which crossed the jungle plains . Nowhere did we find a place where we could have landed: where the jungle did not actually spread right down into the river , banks of soft mud prevented us going ashore . In any case , what would we have sailed by landing ? The country was full of snakes and other dangerous creatures , and the jungle so thick that one would be able to move forward only slowly , cutting one’s way with knives the whole way . So we stayed in the boat , hoping that when we reached the sea , a friendly fisherman would pick us up and take us to civilization .‎ We lived on fish , caught with a home-made net of string (we had no hooks ), and fruits and nuts we could pick up out of the water . As we had no fire , we had to eat everything , including the fish ,raw . I had never tasted raw fish before , and I must say I did not much enjoy the experience: perhaps sea fish , which do not live in the mud , are less tasteless . After eating my raw fish , I lay back and dreamed of such things as fried chicken and rice ,and ice-cream . In the never-ending damp heat of the jungle , ice-cream was a particularly frequent dream .‎ As for water , there was a choice ; we could drink the muddy river water , or die of thirst . We drank the water . Men who have just escaped what had appeared to be certain death lose all worries about such small things as diseases caused by dirty water . In fact , none of us suffered from any illness as a result .‎ One day we passed another village , but fortunately nobody saw us . We did not wish to risk being taken prisoners a second time : we might not be so lucky to escape in a stolen boat again .‎ ‎56．What they could see in the boat was only .‎ A．high walls B．villages from time to time C．vast land D．heavy woods ‎ ‎57．They couldn’t land because .‎ ‎ A．the mud on the shore was too soft B．the forest was too thick to let them go through ‎ ‎ C．they could not find the mark on the map D．they could not find anyone ‎ ‎58．The passage implies（暗示）that the forest was .‎ ‎ A．rich of fruits and fish to be served as food ‎ ‎ B．not very thick as they could advance slowly by cutting the branches ‎ ‎ C．full of various dangerous beings D．full of ancient tress ‎ ‎59．The best title for this passage might be .‎ ‎ A．Escape B．Exploration of A River ‎ ‎ C．How to Live on A Boat D．A New Experience ‎ B Amy Tan , the American-born daughter of Chinese immigrants , received the Commonwealth Club Gold Award in 1989 for her first work of fiction , the best selling Joy Luck Club . The sixteen stories that make up the work alternate（交替）the tales of four Chinese immigrant mothers and their Americanized daughters , in an exploration of the generational and cultural tensions （紧张关系）experienced by many first-generation daughters of immigrants . ‎ Tan’s parents , like many immigrants , had high expectations for their children and often set puzzling standards , expecting Amy and her two brothers to think like Chinese but to speak perfect English , be excellent at school work , and take advantage of every situation that might lead to success . Tan , however , rebelled （反叛）against her parents’ expectations and devoted herself to being thoroughly American and dreaming of being a fiction writer .‎ Tan got a bachelor’s degree in English and linguistics（语言学）and a master’s degree in linguistics and established herself as a highly successful business writer . Tan , however , was not satisfied in spite of her material success . Turning to her life long dream , she wrote her first short story , “ Endgame,” and then a second , “Waiting between the trees .” In 1987 Tan visited her half-sisters in China with her mother , a trip that proved to be a turning point in her life and career . Tan felt a sense of completeness , a tie with the country and its culture that she had never expected . Returning from China , Tan was surprised to learn that on the strength of her short stories she had received an advance from a publisher . Tan closed her business and wrote the remaining stories for the Joy Luck Club . It was a great success , well received by the public and appearing on the New York Times bestseller list . It has been translated into seventeen languages , including Chinese , and was made into a movie in 1993 .‎ ‎60．What is the writer’s main purpose in this passage ?‎ ‎ A．To analyze（分析）Amy Tan’s works ‎ ‎ B．To support Amy Tan’s decision to become a fiction writer ‎ ‎ C．To present Amy Tan’s personal information ‎ ‎ D．To criticize Amy Tan’s rebellion against her parents ‎ ‎61．According to the passage , Amy Tan’s visit to China .‎ ‎ A．was disappointing B．had a great pushing effect on her ‎ ‎ C．was not surprising in the least D．was a trip she had always dreamed of taking ‎ ‎62．The underlined words “the work” in paragraph 1 refer to .‎ ‎ A．stories B．writing ‎ ‎ C．Commonwealth Club Gold Award D．Joy Luck Club ‎ ‎63．It can be concluded from this passage that .‎ ‎ A．parents don’t know how to educate their children ‎ ‎ B．Tan did not use personal experience in her writing ‎ ‎ C．Tan made the right decision when she closed her business ‎ ‎ D．Tan thinks and lives more in a American way than in Chinese .‎ C FIRE INSTRUCTIONS THE PERSON DISCOVERING A FIRE WILL :‎ ‎1)OPERATE THE NEAREST FIRE ALARM .(This will cause the Alarm Bells to ring , and also send a signal to the telephone switchboard operator who will immediately call the Fire Brigade ).‎ ‎2)ATTACK THE TIRE WITH THE AVAILABLE(可得到的)EQUIPMENT, IF IT IS SAFE TO DO SO .‎ FIRE ALARMBELLS The Fire Alarm Bells will ring either in the area of A Block (working shops and Administration（行政的）Offices ) or in the area of B Block (Teaching ) and C Block (Sports Hall). Those in the area where the Alarm Bells are ringing should take action as indicated （指示）below . Others should continue with their work .‎ ON HEARING YOUR FIRE ALARM :‎ ‎1. Those in class : will go to the Assembly（集合）Area under instructions given by the teacher.‎ ‎2. Those elsewhere : will go to the Assemble Area by the most sensible route , and stay near the Head of their department .‎ ASSEMBLY AREA :‎ The Assembly Area is the playing field which is south of the Sports Hall . Here names will be checked .‎ PROCEDURE（步骤）‎ ‎1. Move quickly .‎ ‎2. Do NOT stop to collect your personal belongings .‎ ‎3. Do NOT attempt to pass others on your way to the Assembly Area .‎ ‎4. Do NOT use the lift .‎ FIRE ALARMS Fire Alarms are situated as fallows :‎ ‎1. Administrative Block ‎ ‎ At the reception desks : at the east end of the connecting corridor（走郎）; outside the kitchen door; back of the stage in the main Hall ‎ ‎2. Teaching Blocks ‎ ‎ At the bottom of each stairways and on each landing .‎ ‎3. Workshops ‎ ‎ Outside the Machines Shop No1; Engineering Machine Shop No2 . ‎ ‎4. Sports Hall ‎ ‎ Inside the entrance lobby（门廊）.‎ ‎64．This passage gives advice on fire safety for .‎ ‎ A．people using a new kind of equipment B．workers in engineering factory ‎ ‎ C．young children at school D．students at college ‎ ‎65．Every one in the block where the fire bells has rung must gather together .‎ ‎ A．in another block B．in the administration ‎ ‎ C．in one of the playing fields D．in the sports hall ‎ ‎66．Imagine that you are a teacher , what is your first duty in case of a fire ?‎ ‎ A．to check the names of your students from the list ‎ ‎ B．to lead your students out of the building ‎ ‎ C．to get detailed（细节的）instructions from your Head of Department ‎ ‎ D．to patrol （巡查）the stairways and landings ‎ ‎67．When a person discovers a fire , what is the first thing he should do ?‎ ‎ A．attempt to put it out B．telephone switchboard operator .‎ ‎ C．start the alarm bells D．contact（取得联系）the fire brigade ‎ D People can be addicted to different things , e . g., alcohol , drugs , certain foods , or even television. People who have such an addiction are compulsive （难以抑制的）; i . e. , they have a very powerful psychological need that they feel they must satisfy . According to psychologists , many people are compulsive spenders : they feel that they must spend money . This compulsion , like most others , is irrational—impossible to explain reasonably . For compulsive spenders who buy on credit , charge accounts （按月付款）are even more exciting than money . In other words , compulsive spenders feel that with credit , they can do anything . Their pleasure in spending enormous amounts is actually greater than the pleasure that they get from the things they buy .‎ There is even a special psychology of bargain hunting . To save money , of course , most people look for sales , low prices , and discounts . Compulsive bargain hunters , however , often buy things that they don’t need just because they are cheap . They want to believe that they are helping their budgets ，（预算）, but they feel that they are winning . Most people, experts claim , have two reasons for their behavior : a good reason for the things that they do and the real reason .‎ It is not only scientists , of course , who understand the psychology of spending habits , but also business-people . Stores , companies and advertisers use psychology to increase business: they consider people’s need for love , power , or influence , their basic values , their beliefs and opinions , and so on in their advertising and sales methods .‎ Psychologists often use a method called “behavior therapy” to help individuals solve their personality problems . In the same way , they can help people who feel that they have problems with money .‎ ‎68．According to psychologists , a compulsive spender is one who spends large amounts of money .‎ ‎ A．and takes great pleasure from what he or she buys ‎ ‎ B．in order to satisfy his or her basic needs in life ‎ ‎ C．just to meet his or her strong psychological need ‎ ‎ D．entirely with an irrational eagerness ‎ ‎69．According to the writer , compulsive bargain hunters are often in search of the lowest possible prices .‎ ‎ A．because they want to save money to help their budgets ‎ ‎ B．because they can openly boast of their victory over others in getting things for less money ‎ ‎ C．and will not have money problems if they can keep to their budget ‎ ‎ D．but they seldom admit they feel satisfied if they can’t get things for less money than others ‎ ‎70．The passage is mainly talking about .‎ ‎ A．the psychology of money-spending habits ‎ ‎ B．the purchasing habits of compulsive spenders ‎ ‎ C．a special psychology of bargain hunting ‎ ‎ D．the use of the psychology of spending habits in business ‎ ‎71．From the passage we may safely conclude that compulsive spenders or compulsive bargain hunters __________.‎ ‎ A．are really unreasonable B．need special treatment ‎ C．can’t be cured D．can never get any help to solve their problems with money E The most noticeable trend among today’s media companies is vertical integration(融合), an attempt to control several related aspects of the media business at once, each part helping the other. Besides publishing magazines and books, Time Warner, for example, owns Home Box Office (HBO), Warner movie studios, various cable TV systems throughout the United States and CNN as well. The Japanese company Matsushita own MCA Records and Universal Studios and manufactures broadcast production equipment.‎ To describe the financial status of today’s media is also to talk about acquisitions(获得). The media are buying and selling each other in unprecedented(史无前例的) numbers and forming media groups to position themselves in the market place to maintain and increase their profits. In 1986, the first time a broadcast network had been sold, two networks were sold that year, ABC and NBC.‎ Media acquisitions have increased sharply since 1980 for two reasons. The first is that most big corporations today are publicly traded companies, which means that their stock is traded on one of the nation’s stock exchanges. This makes acquisitions relatively easy.‎ A media company that wants to buy a publicly owned company can buy that company’s stock when the stock becomes available. The open availability of stock in these companies means that anybody with enough money can invest in the American media industries, which is exactly how Rupert Murdoch joined the media business.‎ The second reason for the increase in media alliances is that beginning in 1980, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) gradually removed the regulations from the broadcast media. Before 1980, for example, the FCC allowed one company to own only five TV stations, five AM radio stations, and five FM radio stations; companies also were required to hold onto a station for three years before the station could be sold. The post-1980 FCC got rid of the three-year rule and raised the number of broadcast holdings allowed for one owner. This trend of media acquisitions is continuing throughout the 1990s, as changing technology expands the market for media products.‎ The issue of media ownership is important. If only a few corporations direct the media industries in this country, the outlets for differing political viewpoints and creative ideas could be limited.‎ ‎72．Which of the following is true of the media?‎ ‎ A．They used to sell and buy each other in great numbers.‎ ‎ B．They are trading each other in great numbers today.‎ ‎ C．They used to be controlled by two networks ABC and NBC.‎ ‎ D．They have stopped the trend of acquisitions in the 1990s.‎ ‎73．According to the passage, what makes acquisitions easier?‎ ‎ A．The changing technology employed by the media.‎ ‎ B．The media’s increasing profits in the marketplace.‎ ‎ C．The ever tougher regulations of the FCC on the media since 1980.‎ ‎ D．The availability of the media’s stocks on stock exchanges.‎ ‎74．What is the FCC’s new policy regarding media alliances ( )?‎ ‎ A．It allows companies to sell their stocks publicly.‎ ‎ B．It doesn’t allow companies to sell their stock publicly.‎ ‎ C．It permits one company to own more media businesses at the same time.‎ ‎ D．It has got rid of all post-1980 companies.‎ ‎75．The issue of media ownership is important because __________.‎ ‎ A．it affects the amount of money the stockholder will make ‎ B．it decides whether we can have different aspects of the media ‎ C．it affects the channels through which to express opinions ‎ D．it means that more and more people will hold onto only a few stations.‎ ‎★专题（39）‎ A Here is a piece of news from a newspaper two years ago.‎ English courses will be offered to primary school students in cities and in country schools beginning next year, said the director of the Department of Basic Education of Ministry of Education, Li Lianning.‎ Primary school students will be required to take the English course beginning in Grade Three. In cities some primary schools may open the course for Grade One students. And in some country primary schools, the program won’t be started until 2002.‎ A new teaching method will be used for this English course. More emphasis will be placed on students’ speaking and reading abilities, instead of the traditional grammar and pronunciation teaching method.‎ It is expected that students will learn more in a certain environment. Therefore, a situational method will be used during the class. Four English periods each week will be required. The lessons could be short, 20 or 30 minutes, but at least two lessons among the four should be 40 minutes.‎ An eight-level test system will be used to cover all level of English from primary school students to senior highs. This would be the first official English assessment（评定）introduced into the high school education system.‎ A junior high student is required to pass Band Five and a senior high should pass Band Seven. Students will not be required to pass Band Eight. This requires a large vocabulary of 4,500 words. The programme is one of the key parts of the education reform started by the Ministry of Education in the spirit of helping quality education.‎ The reform is aimed at improving students’ comprehensive（理解）and lifelong learning abilities. The first five years of the ten-year plan is to introduce new teaching materials. These materials will be used by schools over the country in the following five.‎ ‎56．Teachers will pay more attention to in the coming English course.‎ ‎ A．reading and writing B．speaking and reading ‎ C．speaking and writing D．grammar and pronunciation ‎57．Primary school students are asked to learn English because .‎ ‎ A．it will do good to the 2008 OlympicsB．they have a good memory when they are young ‎ C．it suits the needs of modern society ‎ D．this will help to improve students’ comprehensive and lifelong learning abilities ‎58．The main idea of the passage is .‎ ‎ A．English is showing its importance in daily life ‎ B．primary school students should pay enough attention to English ‎ C．primary school students will learn English ‎ D．how to teach English in the English course B Here are some advertisements taken from a newspaper.‎ ‎(1)‎ Dear Drew Carter,‎ Your first year on this earth has been a pleasure ride for all of us. We love you!‎ Love,‎ Dad and Mom and many friends ‎(2)‎ Lawlis—Clarke The Doctors Virgil and Marjorie Lawlis are pleased to announce the engagement（订婚）of their daughter Diana Susan to Mr. Robert Brent Clarke, son of Mr. and Mrs. James Clarke of Herford, Texas.‎ A spring wedding is planned in Houston.‎ ‎(3)‎ Isbell—Foss Mr. And Mrs. Davis K. Isbell announce the marriage of their daughter Dang to Mr. Stanley Foss, son of Mrs. John Sipe of Ada, Minnesota.‎ The wedding will be early April at Abiding Love Lutheran Church.‎ ‎(4)‎ Story—Kurio Miss Stephanie Story and Mr. Warren Kurio married on February 5, at half past seven o’clock in the evening at Highland Park Presbyterian Church in Dallas, Texas. The bride（新娘）is the daughter of Mr. and Mrs, Herbert Brule Story Jr. of Dallas. The groom（新郎）is the son of Mr. and Mrs. Gerald Stanley Kurio of Austin.‎ ‎59．What would be the best title for the first advertisement?‎ ‎ A．We Love You B．Happy 1st Birthday ‎ C．One Year Old D．Our One-Year-Old Son ‎60．Lawlis and Clarke are going to get married .‎ ‎ A．in a church B．where Clarke’s parents live ‎ C．against their parents’ will D．to Lawlis’s parents’ joy ‎61．Who got or will get married in spring?‎ ‎ A．Not only Lawlis and Clarke but also Isbell and Foss.‎ ‎ B．Neither Lawlis and Clarke nor Isbell and Foss.‎ ‎ C．Either Isbell and Foss or Story and Kurio.‎ ‎ D．Neither Lawlis and Clarke nor Story and Kurio.‎ ‎62．Who are now a married couple?‎ ‎ A．Lawlis and Clarke. B．Dand Isbell and Foss.‎ ‎ C．Story and Kurio. D．The text doesn’t say.‎ ‎(C)‎ Long ago, the love apple was grown in flower gardens. The plant’s small yellow flowers were not very bright, but it has very beautiful fruit, round, smooth, and shiny, which turned bright red or yellow as it ripened（成熟）. It was beautiful but poisonous, or people believed so. Other people believed it had magic powers to cause.‎ Early Spanish explorers（探索者）who found this plant growing wild is South and Central America, carried it back to Europe. These plants appeared in gardens in Italy as early as 1554. They must have been the kind that had yellow fruit, because the Italians called the plant “pomidoro”, or apple of gold. By 1750, the plant was grown as a curious plant throughout Europe. Some people were even daring enough to eat the fruit.‎ ‎1781 in‎ America, Thomas Jefferson raised and ate love apples, but few followed his example. Thirty years later, the love apples were used as food in Louisiana, and by 1835, a few people in the northern states were willing to experiment with them too. But even as late as 1900, there were people who still believed that these “apples of gold” were poisonous.‎ Although people did not eat fruit of this plant, they liked looking at it in their gardens. Later, when they learned it was both good-tasting and good for them, they moved the love apple plant from the flower garden to the vegetable garden. They learned to call it by a new name “tomato”‎ ‎63．On the whole, the article tells about .‎ ‎ A．poisonous fruits in America B．Italians who are very curious ‎ C．the history of the tomato plant D．the fruits eaten by Thomas Jefferson ‎64．We can know from the passage that .‎ ‎ A．some people are afraid to try new things B．all poisonous fruits are really tomatoes ‎ C．all poisonous fruits are bright and colorful D．northerners are more daring than southerners ‎65．Why did people raise this plant in their gardens? .‎ ‎ A．They liked eating it B．They enjoyed looking at it ‎ C．They thought gold would grow D．It was the only choice they had ‎ ‎66．Which seems true according to the passage? .‎ ‎ A．What is not popular today may be popular tomorrow ‎ B．The apple of gold belongs only in flower gardens ‎ C．Thomas Jefferson ate all his plants D．It was the Americans who first ate tomatoes ‎(D)‎ In the United States, friends can be close, constant, intense, generous, and real, yet fade away in a short time if circumstances（环境）change. Neither side feels hurt by this. Both may exchange Christmas greetings for a year or two, perhaps a few letters for a while then no more. If the same two people meet again by chance, even years later, they pick up the friendship where it left out and are delighted.‎ In the States, you can feel free to visit people’s homes, share their holidays, enjoy their children and their ‎ lies without fear that you taking on a lasting obligation（负担）. Do not hesitate to accept hospitality（款待）because you can’t give it in … welcome or for various other reasons, such as crowded space, language difficulties, or family custom, outsiders are not invited into homes.‎ In the United States both methods are used, but it is often considered more friendly to invite a person to one’s home than to go to a public place, except in purely business relationships. So, if your host or hostess brings you home, do not feel that you are being shown inferior（次的）treatment.‎ Don’t feel neglected if you do not find flowers awaiting you in your hotel room either. Flowers are very expensive there, hotel delivery is uncertain, arrival times are delayed, changed, or canceled so flowers are not customarily sent as a welcoming touch. Please do not feel unwanted! Outward signs vary in different lands, the inward welcome is what matters, and this will be real.‎ ‎67．In the United States, you will find friendships if circumstances change.‎ ‎ A．die suddenly B．pass away C．disappear gradually D．last forever ‎68．Americans their foreign friends to make a return for their hospitality.‎ ‎ A．ask B．wish C．never allow D．don’t expect ‎69．In some other counties, giving a dinner party at home is considered than in a restaurant.‎ ‎ A．less friendly B．less hospitable C．more natural D．more popular ‎70．According to the passage, which of the following is NOT true? .‎ ‎ A．Flowers are available at all time B．Flowers are expensive ‎ C．Flowers are signs of outward welcome D．Flowers are not necessarily sent to guests ‎71．Which of the following is the best title for this passage? .‎ ‎ A．American Hospitality B．American Friendships ‎ C．American Invitation D．American Welcome ‎(E)‎ Have you ever been at a meeting while someone was making a speech and realized suddenly that your mind was a million miles away? You probably felt sorry and made up your mind to pay attention and always have been told that daydreaming is a waste of time.‎ ‎“On the contrary,” says L. Giambra, an expert in psychology, “daydreaming is quite necessary. Without it, the mind couldn’t get done all the thinking it has to do during a normal day. You can’t possibly do all your thinking with a conscious（有意识）mind. Instead, your unconscious mind is working out problems all the time. Daydreaming then may be one way that the unconscious and conscious states of mind have silent dialogues.”‎ Early experts in psychology paid no attention to the importance of daydreams or even considered them harmful. At one time daydreaming was thought to be a cause of some mental illnesses. They did not have a better understanding of daydreams until the late 1980s. Eric Klinger, a professor of psychology, is the writer of the book Daydreaming. Klinger says, “We know now that daydreaming is one of the main ways that we organize our lives, learn from our experiences, and plan for our futures. Daydreams really are a window on the things we fear and the things we long for in life.”‎ Daydreams are usually very simple and direct, quite unlike sleep dreams, which may be hard to understand. It’s easier to gain a deep understanding of your life by paying close attention to your daydreams than by trying to examine your sleep dreams carefully. Daydreams help you recognize the difficult situations in your life and find out a possible way of dealing with them.‎ Daydreams cannot be predicated（预料）. They move off in unexpected directions which may be creative and full of ideas. For many famous artists and scientists, daydreams were and are a main source of creative energy.‎ ‎72．The writer of this passage considers daydreams .‎ ‎ A．hard to understand B．important and helpful ‎ C．harmful and unimportant D．the same as sleep dreams ‎73．The writer quoted（引用）L. Giambra and Eric Klinger to .‎ ‎ A．point out the wrong ideas of early experts B．list two different ideas ‎ C．support his own idea D．report the latest research on daydreams ‎74．Which of the following is TRUE?‎ ‎ A．An unconscious mind can work all the problems out.‎ ‎ B．Daydreaming can give artists and scientists ideas for creation.‎ ‎ C．Professor Eric Klinger has a better idea than L. Giambra.‎ ‎ D．Early experts fully understood what daydreams were.‎ ‎75．What is the main difference between daydreams and sleep dreams?‎ ‎ A．People have daydreams and sleep dreams at different times.‎ ‎ B．Daydreams are the result of unconscious mind while sleep dreams are that of conscious ‎ ‎ mind.‎ ‎ C．Daydreams are more harmful. D．Daydreams are more helpful in solving problems.‎ ‎★专题（40）‎ A Microsoft founder Bill Gates said that he planned to give away almost all of his vast fortune , largely to the cause of global health , during the course of his lifetime . With an estimated（估计）worth of more than $ 40 billion , according to Forbes , the project will be no small feat （功绩）for Gates . Having already provided the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation with $ 24 billion to address global health issues , Gates said that eventually his entire fortune will be put towards the cause except “a few percent left for the kids.” ‎ So what has made the richest man in the world to channel his resources so heavily into one interest ? Gates believes that “the equality of opportunity” in which Americans take such pride needs to extend to other nations around the world . Improving the health of the populations , he says , has proven to be an essential method in helping poor countries to be financially successful . “National borders allow inequalities ,” said Gates : “We all need to take a more global view , rather than just saying my country is doing well . We have to step up these health issues , knowing how few resources are going into them .”‎ Gates said that both his parents set an example for him as a child . His father , William H. Gates , was the head of the local Planned Parenthood , and his mother , Mary , volunteered for the United Way . As he gathered his fortune , Gates knew he would eventually want to give back as well , but he didn’t expect to devote himself whole-heartedly to one project until he was about 60.‎ However , Gates , 47 , began to question his ability to wait that long . “It seemed there was a real time urgency,” Gates said . “I started to think , How many lives could I save before then ?”‎ ‎56．Bill Gates will give away his vast fortune to .‎ ‎ A．improve the health of population in America alone ‎ ‎ B．improve the health of population all over the world ‎ ‎ C．avoid leaving his children too much money ‎ ‎ D．spare the American government the burden of health care ‎ ‎57．Bill Gates believes that one important way of developing poor countries is .‎ ‎ A．to set up more foundations for them B．to aid them with natural resources ‎ ‎ C．to put more effort into the health issues in them ‎ ‎ D．to help them take a more global view ‎ ‎58．It can be learned from the text that Bill Gates thinks .‎ ‎ A．Americans should care about people in other countries ‎ ‎ B．Americans should treat fellow citizens well ‎ ‎ C．Americans should devote themselves to certain projects ‎ ‎ D．Americans can be world-famous by giving away vast fortune ‎ ‎59．Bill Gates gave away his vast fortune earlier than he had expected because of .‎ ‎ A．his weakening health condition B．his parents’ suggestions ‎ ‎ C．his great success in business D．his concerns for suffering people ‎ B ‎ An unlucky Singaporean thief picked up six years of hard labor after the unique（独特的）ring of the mobile phone he stole led police straight to him . Pretending to be a police detective , Rahman Magundario robbed two teenagers in a park , told them to turn their backs and stole the $140 phone , court documents show . If he had chosen another target （目标）in the mobile mad city state , he might have got off the hook . His number was up a short while later when the victim（受害人）heard the characteristic tune he had programmed into the phone . An unsuspecting buyer , who paid $‎70 in a coffee shop for what he thought was Magundario’s mobile , pointed police to the thief . The 39-year-old was sentenced for threatening the teenagers and pretending a police officer . “He got six years of corrective training ,” a court official said. “It’s worse than a prison sentence.”‎ ‎60．The police caught the thief without any difficulty mainly because .‎ ‎ A．the buyer pointed police to the thief B．the thief pretended a police officer ‎ ‎ C．the ring of the stolen mobile phone was different from that of others ‎ ‎ D．the thief robbed two teenagers in a park ‎ ‎61．It can be learned from the text that Magundario .‎ ‎ A．stole the phone for money B．sold the mobile phone for its unique ring ‎ ‎ C．pretended a police officer because he looked like a policeman ‎ ‎ D．was sentenced six years in prison ‎ ‎62．What can be inferred from the story ?‎ ‎ A．Many people in the city have mobile phones .‎ ‎ B．The thief would rather pick up six years of hard labor .‎ ‎ C．The thief would have escaped being caught if he hadn’t sold the stolen phone .‎ ‎ D．The police recognized the thief when they heard the ring .‎ ‎63．By saying “His number was up a short while later” , the writer means .‎ ‎ A．the thief knew the mobile phone number soon afterwards ‎ ‎ B．the thief lost his luck before long ‎ ‎ C．the thief forgot the mobile phone number a moment later ‎ ‎ D．someone dialed the mobile phone number at that time ‎ C ‎ How might you drag a good writer’s work down to the level of a scribe （抄写员）? Try the spell-check button . A study at the University of Pittsburgh indicates spell-check soft-ware may level the playing field between people with differing levels of language skills , hampering （妨碍）the work of writers and editors who place too much trust in the software . In the study , 33 undergraduate students were asked to proofread（校对）a one-page business letter—half of them using Microsoft Word with red and green lines underlining potential errors（潜在错误）. The other half did it the old-fashioned way , using only their heads . Without grammar or spelling software , students with higher SAT scores made , on average , 5 errors , compared with 12.3 errors for students with lower scores . Using the software , students with higher scores reading the same page made , on average , 16 errors , compared with 17 errors for students with lower scores . Dennis Galletta , a professor of information systems at the Katz Business School , said spell-check software is so sophisticated that some have come to trust it too thoroughly . “It’s not a software problem , it’s a behavior problem,” he said . Microsoft technical specialist Tim Pash said grammar and spelling technology is meant to help writers and editors , not solve all their problems . The study found the software helped students find and correct errors in the letter , but in some cases they also changed phrases or sentences marked by the software as grammatically suspicious （可疑的）, even though they were correct .‎ ‎64．The writer wants to tell us that .‎ ‎ A．spell-check software is very helpful B．spell-check software has some problems ‎ ‎ C．it’s not wise to depend too much on the spell-check software ‎ ‎ D．spell-check software will bring trouble to writers and editors ‎ ‎65．The experiment is used to show us that .‎ ‎ A．spell-check software helps only those with low SAT scores ‎ ‎ B．spell-check software can sometimes make things worse ‎ ‎ C．all problems cannot be solved by spell-check software ‎ ‎ D．those with higher SAT scores make fewer mistakes than those with low scores ‎ ‎66．What can be learned from the passage ?‎ ‎ A．33 students were divide into four different groups in the experiment .‎ ‎ B．Spell-check software can be of great help to writers and editors .‎ ‎ C．With the help of spell-check software those with lower SAT scores will make fewer mistakes .‎ ‎ D．Students often make more mistakes in writing if they trust spell-check software too much .‎ ‎67．Which of the following best explains the meaning of the word “sophisticated” as it is used in the text ? A．Easy . B．Complex . C．Simple . D．Advanced .‎ D To protect you and your fellow passengers , the Transportation Security Administration (TSA ) is required by law to inspect all checked baggage . As part of this process , some bags are opened and inspected . Your bag was among those selected for inspection .‎ During the inspection , your bag and its contents may have been searched for items forbidden by law such as fireworks , fuels , gun powder , etc . At the completion of the inspection , the contents were returned to your bag , which was resealed（重新封口）with a “special” lock .‎ If the TSA screener was unable to open your bag for inspection because it was locked , the screener may have been forced to break the locks on your bag . TSA sincerely regrets having to do this , and has taken care to reseal your bag upon completion of inspection . However , TSA is not liable for damage to your locks resulting from this necessary security precaution（预防措施）.‎ For packing tips and other suggestions that may assist you during your next trip ,visit : ‎ WWW.TSATravelTips.us ‎ We appreciate your understanding and cooperation . If you have questions , comments , or concerns ,please feel free to contact（联系）the Transportation Security Administration Consumer Response Center :‎ Phone : toll-free at (866) 289-9673‎ Email : TellTSA@tas.dot.gov ‎*Section 110(b)of the Aviation and Transportation Security Act of 2001, 49, U. S. C.§44901(c)-(e)‎ ‎68．This leaflet (宣传单) is trying to .‎ ‎ A．introduce one of the security acts B．persuade people to contact TSA ‎ C．inform people of baggage inspection D．warn against the damage of locking the baggage ‎ ‎69．The leaflet is most probably provided by TSA to those who .‎ ‎ A．refused to check in their baggage B．had their baggage selected for inspection ‎ ‎ C．kept some damaged items in their baggage D．left their baggage unlocked ‎ ‎70．What is the meaning of “liable” as it is used in the text ?‎ ‎ A．responsible by law B．permitted by law ‎ ‎ C．suitable by law D．prepared by law ‎ ‎71．Which of the following items is probably allowed in the checked baggage ?‎ E All plant cells are capable of taking up water . Even dead ones do to a certain degree . Absorption of water by dead cell walls makes wood become larger . In common land plants , the living cells of roots take up most of the water . Land plants without roots do exist , however . Those greenish-yellow lichens（苔藓）you seen on rocks in the high mountains have no roots . Half a billion years ago , when water plants started to enter the land , the first land plants did not have roots .‎ Even among the flowering plants , one finds rootless forms . These flowering plants are “the higher plants” because they evolved（进化） recently and are thus considered higher on the evolutionary scale（进化树）. In the Peruvian desert , there grows one of these rootless higher plants , a bromeliad . It is a relative of the pineapple . Even if this plant had roots , they would be of no use , because where the plant grows , it never rains . The plant gets its water only from the dew（露水）it collects at night , when its leaves cool off . Such rootless plants , of course , can be moved with ease , but they will only grow when they are placed out in the open . If they are placed too near a house , the radiation from the heat of the house prevents the leaves from cooling and so prevents dew from forming , and the plant dies . In the southern United States and in Puerto Rico , one sees bromeliads growing high above the streets on the insulation（绝缘物）of electric wires . These plants get their water from rain , and the only soil they ever come in contact with is the dust that may blow on their leaves . ‎ ‎72．Wood becomes larger because of .‎ ‎ A．dead cell walls B．water entering dead cells ‎ ‎ C．the growth of cells D．the death of cells ‎ ‎73．From the passage we know that the evolutionary scale is graded according to .‎ ‎ A．evolutionary cycles B．heights and depths C．time D．kinds ‎ ‎74．The “bromeliad” is a plant that .‎ ‎ A．has useless roots B．is a pineapple ‎ ‎ C．can grow anywhere D．takes up water through its leaves ‎ ‎75．The most suitable title for this passage is “ ”.‎ ‎ A．Absorption of water by plants B．Rootless plants ‎ ‎ C．Plants in the desert D．Higher plants ‎ ‎★专题（41）‎ A WASHINGTON---Worldwide sales of personal computer in 1995 rose 24.7 percent over 1994 with Compaq（美国康柏电脑公司）holding its first—place position while IBM overcame（击败）Apple for the No.2 slot （表上排名）,according to Dataquest.‎ A total of 59.7 million computers were sold around the world with important gains（获得）in Japan and Europe.‎ Compaq sold 5.99 million computers ,or 10percent of the market ,unchanged from 1994.‎ IBM sold 4.7 million with an 8 percent share of the market compared with 8.2 percent in 1994 .‎ Apple sold 4.7 million ,or 7.8 percent of the trade ,compared with 8.4 percent in 1994.‎ Their lost market share was taken up by Packard Bell and NEC ,which sold 3.1 million and 2.8 million computers separately.‎ ‎56．Which company was the first in selling computers in 1994? ‎ ‎ A．Compaq B．IBM C．Apple D．NEC ‎57．Which company sold the third most computers in 1995?‎ ‎ A．Compaq B．IBM C．Apple D．NEC ‎ ‎58．What was the market share of Compaq in 1994?‎ ‎ A．5.99% B．8.2% C．8.4% D．10%‎ ‎59．Packard Bell and NEC take up about of the market share in 1995.‎ ‎ A．8.2% B．52% C．10% D．5%‎ B It’s no secret that we’re into computers .And why not? On the Internet ,we can catch up on news ,plan vacations ,pay bills and make friends. But for some once they type their way onto the Internet ,they just can’t stop.‎ Internet addiction（沉溺）can happen to anyone who’s lonely ,and that includes two surprising groups: college students and homemakers. Away from their families ,homesick and overwhelmed , many college students seek connections .Their brightest freshmen were failing to maintain good grades ,they realized half were using the Internet excessively（过度的）!They couldn’t forbid it ,because students needed it for schoolwork. So they provided counseling（咨询）to help students adjust to college—and a year later ,the number of web junkie flunkers（不及格的学生）dropped by half .And homemakers are prone to （有……的倾向）addiction too ,if they’re shy .But the more on –line connection vulnerable （易受伤害的）people make ,the more they may neglect the connections they hold dear in real life.‎ In recent study ,51 percent of men and 42 percent of women named the Internet as one of the reasons they’re not getting enough sleep! And 68 percent of Internet addicts surveyed （被调查的）said their on—line usage was destroying their relationships .The person will retire to the computers at night instead of the bedroom and from cyberspace（网络空间）relationships with strangers instead of communication with a spouse.‎ There are steps to take to make sure your family doesn’t get hooked （上瘾，入迷）,such as :‎ Putting the computer in a common area like a living room where you can’t spend hour after uninterrupted hour on—line ;using a timer to limit on—line time ; joining a club or taking up a hobby .Anyone with balance and face—to—face contact with others isn’t likely to get hooked.‎ ‎ Your family member or friend could be a cyberholic（电脑狂）if :They’re lying about how much time they spend on—line. They’re spending more and more time on—line and less and less time with you .They get anxious when they try to cut back on on—line time .They’re losing sleep to go on—line .‎ ‎60．What can we do on the Internet?‎ ‎ A．Keep up with news and makes friends. B．Design holidays.‎ ‎ C．Check in. D．All of the above.‎ ‎61．What kinds of people easily get hooked?‎ ‎ A．People who are alone. B．People who are lonely.‎ ‎ C．students. D．People who are busy.‎ ‎62．According to the passage ,the following are all harm that Internet addition does except:‎ ‎ A．Not enough sleep B．Bad family relationship.‎ ‎ C．Bad eyesight. D．Low grades.‎ ‎63．The following are measures to prevent your family from getting hooked except:‎ ‎ A．Forbid your child from using a computer. B．Use a timer to limit on the time.‎ ‎ C．Put the computer in a sitting room. D．Join a club or take up a hobby.‎ ‎64．What’s the main idea of the passage?‎ ‎ A．Problems caused by the computer and how to solve them.‎ ‎ B．Who get hooked easily?‎ ‎ C．Measures to stop Internet addiction D．What harm does Internet addition do?‎ C Women’s roles have changed throughout the world in recent years, but nowhere so obviously as in America .As the roles of women have changed ,so have men’s .In many American homes today ,the husband still carries on his traditional role of breadwinner ,while his homemaker wife is in charge of the home and child—raising. But it is more and more common to find that the children are left in day –care centers or nursery schools while both parents work .The woman may earn as much or more money than her husband. At home ,household duties are shared in varying degrees by all family members .It is not unusual to find father cooking dinner ,cleaning the living room or changing the baby .Mother might be outside mowing the lawn or washing the car .Children have responsibilities ,too .One of the goals of the Women’s Liberation Movement has been to have both men and women share in childcare, housework and financial responsibility. Today many American women will not marry a man who is not willing to share equally in household responsibilities.‎ The high cost of living has made it necessary for many women to have jobs outside the home ,but women often choose to have jobs in order to use their skills and education or to seek a more fulfilling and interesting life .Many American women enjoy the independence that an outside job and the salary give men and even some women—sometimes are not for women working outside the home ,and in some cases ,a woman might be paid less than a man who performs the same job .American women ,however ,have met challenges（挑战）since pioneer days ,and they continue to work for true equality.‎ ‎65．Many American women go out to work in order to .‎ ‎ A．earn enough money to support the family ‎ B．make their husbands share in the housework ‎ C．enjoy independence D．get more money than their husbands ‎66．What does sex discrimination mean, EXCEPT ?‎ ‎ A．It’s harder for women to get a same job as men ‎ B．Women get less paid than men at the same position ‎ C．Women do most of the housework D．Women have jobs outside house ‎67． for the women to win true equality.‎ ‎ A．It’s impossible B．It takes a long time ‎ C．It’s greatly successful D．It’s not difficult ‎68．From the text we known .‎ ‎ A．women’s roles in the world have changed a lot but men’s roles haven’t changed ‎ B．American women continued to work for their true equality ‎ C．in all areas of American men and women got paid equally ‎ D．most women began to work outside the home D THE FINANCIAL TRAINING COMPANY CFA 2002 SEMINAR ‎ Come to our FREE information seminar and learn about the Cartered Financial Analyst (CFA) Program ,study materials and how to plan for your study.‎ ‎ Date: 28 January 2002(Monday)‎ ‎ Time :7:30 pm ‎ Venue: Jing An Hilton Hotel(Shanghai)‎ ‎ Language : English ‎ For reservation（预定），visit www.ftcasiapacific.com ‎ For enquiries （问询）,email cfainfo@financialtrainins.com..hk ‎ ‎ Or call (852) 25263686(Hong Kong)‎ ‎69．Here is an advertisement in China Daily .After we read it ,we can know that the word ‎ ‎ “Seminar” refers to a .‎ ‎ A．school of English B．company of information ‎ C．hotel for students in vacation D．class for research and discussion ‎70．If we read the advertisement ,we draw a conclusion that .‎ ‎ A．CFA is another name of the company ‎ B．suppose someone wants to visit the head office of the company in person ,probably he ‎ ‎ ought to go to Hong Kong ‎ C．only English is used in this company ‎ ‎ D．a branch of the company will be set up in Shanghai in Jan .2002.‎ E ‎ Shakespeare ,more perhaps than any other writer ,made full use of the greatest resources of the English Language .Most of us use about five thousand words in our normal employment of English ;Shakespeare in his works used about twenty—five thousand! There is probably no better way for a foreigner to appreciate the richness and variety of the English language than by studying the various ways in which Shakespeare uses it .Such a study is well worth the effort, even though some aspects of English usage ,and the meaning of many words ,have changed since Shakespeare’s day.‎ ‎ However ,it is surprising that we should know comparatively little about the life of the greatest English author. We know that Shakespeare was born in ‎1564 in Stratford—on—Avon ,and that he died there in 1616.He almost certainly attended the Grammer School in the town ,but of this we cannot be sure .We know he was married there in 1582 to Anne Hathaway and that he had three children .We know that he spent much of his life in London writing his masterpieces .But this is almost all that we do know .‎ ‎ However ,what is important about Shakespeare’s life is not its incidental details but its products , the plays and the poems .For many years scholars have been trying to add a few facts about Shakespeare’s life to the small number we already possess and for an equally long tine critics（批评）have been theorizing（理论化）about the plays .Sometimes ,indeed ,it seems that the poetry of Shakespeare will disappear under the great mass of comment that has been written upon it .‎ ‎ Fortunately this is not likely to happen .Shakespeare’s people have long delighted not just the English but lovers of literature everywhere ,and will continue to do so after the scholars and critics and all their works have been forgotten.‎ ‎71．This passage is about .‎ ‎ A．the great length of each chapter B．the great varieties in writing styles ‎ C．the richness of the content in Shakespeare’s works ‎ D．the rich English language used by Shakespeare in his works ‎72．According to the writer ,which of the following remains uncertain about Shakespeare?‎ ‎ A．His date of birth. B．His marriage.‎ ‎ C．His life in the Grammer School. D．His date of death.‎ ‎73．It can be inferred from Para 3 that .‎ ‎ A．not all the comments on Shakespeare’s works have produced good effects ‎ B．scholars have successfully collected facts about Shakespeare’s life ‎ C．critics are more interested in Shakespeare’s play than his poetry ‎ D．the details of Shakespeare’s life are more important than his literary works ‎74．What does the last sentence in Para 3 mean ?‎ ‎ A．People don’t think the poetry of Shakespeare good any more.‎ B．People pay more attention to the comment than the poetry of Shakespeare.‎ C．People can’t see the poetry of Shakespeare any more.‎ D．The comment is printed on the poetry of Shakespeare.‎ ‎75．“Shakespeare’s people” in Para 4refers to .‎ A．the characters in Shakespeare’s products B．the people whose native language is English C．the people living in Shakespeare’s day D．the readers of Shakespeare’s works ‎★专题（42）‎ A BAM，Iran:56—year—old man was rescued alive after spending 13 days below ruins of the earthquake—flattened Iranian city of Bam ,but he then slipped into a coma and doctors said yesterday they feared for his life .‎ The man was found by rescuers on Wednesday afternoon trapped below a wardrobe （衣柜）which had apparently saved his life .‎ ‎“It seems he had some water because around him was wet ,” said medic Mehdi Shadnoush , part of a Ukrainian-Iranian team .‎ ‎“When he arrived at the hospital his signs of life were very weak . He was frozen and now he is in a coma ,” Shadnoush said .‎ The man lay on a hospital bed covered by a white blanket and had an oxygen mask over his mouth and nose . He looked very thin and had a white-and-black beard .‎ ‎“We are following his condition minute by minute but we don’t hold out too much hope ,” Shad -noush said .‎ State radio had originally reported the man’s age as 57. But doctors said that when he was first brought to the hospital he had been able to give his first name , Jalil , and his age , 56. He then slipped into a coma overnight .‎ He was the first survivor to come alive out of the ruins of the ancient Silk Road city 1,000 kilometres southeast of Teheran since a woman in her 90s was rescued on January 3.‎ The December 26 earthquake , which measured 6.8 on the Richter scale , struck just before dawn , destroying 90 per cent of the city’s buildings and killing more than 30,000 people .‎ Experts say it is very rare for people to survive for more than 72 hours in such conditions . Temperatures have fallen to around freezing most nights since the earthquake struck .‎ Tremors（震动）continued to shake another region of Iran for a third day yesterday , causing damage to buildings but no persons , the official Iranian news agency reported .‎ The small earthquakes , measuring 3.4 and 4.2 on the Richter scale were the latest of more than 30 tremors to make nervous the southwestern province‎ of ‎Khuzestan . There were no reports of any damage to its many oil installations （设置）.‎ Fearful that the tremors foretell a major quake , schools in Khuzestan have been closed , ambulance and fire brigade services moved out into the open and many persons have spent the last few nights sleeping in tents .‎ In Bam yesterday , United Nations officials , aid workers and foreign diplomats toured the destroyed city to mark the launch of a 90-day UN request for funds to help the city and its survivors .‎ ‎“Altogether I think US$ 100 million has been given and promised by the international community , which is an impressive sign of international solidarity （团结）,” said Jan Egeland , UN under-secretary for humanitarian affairs .‎ Aid workers said the man rescued on Wednesday afternoon had traveled from a nearby village to Bam for medical treatment and was staying with his sister when the earthquake hit .‎ ‎“We have sent people to his village to bring his wife to the hospital ,” said Iranian aid worker Mohammad Reza Tahmasbi .‎ Rescue workers were pushed to look for the man after a woman living nearby noticed his body had not yet been got back .‎ ‎56．Which of the following is the best title of this passage ?‎ ‎ A．A 56-year-old Man Spends 13 Days in Quake Ruins .‎ ‎ B．The Rescue Workers Try to Save an Old Man .‎ ‎ C．United officials , Aid Workers Tour the City .‎ ‎ D．A 56-year-old Man Saved .‎ ‎57．What does the author think saved the 56-year man ?‎ ‎ A．Water . B．A wardrobe . C．Long life . D．workers’ carefulness .‎ ‎58．The 56-year-old man was .‎ ‎ A．a person living in Bam B．a villager living near Bam ‎ ‎ C．a traveler D．a survivor ‎ ‎59．What will the future of the 56-year-old man be like ?‎ ‎ A．Unknown . B．Dead . C．Healthy . D．Bright .‎ ‎60．The word “coma” in the passage probably means .‎ ‎ A．nervousness B．anxiousness C．sleep D．unconsciousness B Personally , I like Chinese New Year’s movies very much . Because they are filled with joyous themes , and this kind of movie is a good choice for people who finally finish a year’s hard work and wish to add some refreshment to their new year .‎ And it proved to be true that Chinese New Year’s movies are in need , for they were well received by common people in the late 1990s. However , after less than 10 years of flourishing , they are now facing a great decline in box office income .‎ I think the failure of Chinese New Year’s movies is for two main reasons : lack of creation and low quality of production . ‎ Audiences are not fools . They watch movies in order to get satisfaction , happiness and enlightenment（启发）,not to be tricked by meaningless , same stories . If a movie tells a boring story , how can filmmakers expect applause （鼓掌）from the audience .‎ And at the same time we hope that directors choose actors and actresses carefully . The success of a movie is mostly determined by a fine story and good performances . If performers aren’t able to communicate ‎ a character’s emotions exactly , no matter how wonderful a story is , the movie may be a failure . So a popular New Year’s movie ought to be creative and elaborately（精心地）produced .‎ My favourite Chinese New Year’s movie is “Be There or Be Square” (Bu Jian Bu San), directed by Feng Xiaogang . It’s a story about love and life . The hero is a Chinese man who struggles hard in the US . One day , he meets a girl from Beijing . The two share the same goal : making their fortunes in America . After a series of ups and downs , they fail to realize their dreams . But , they finally fall in love with each other and decide to go back to China to make a brand new start .‎ Feng is good at providing humorous and simple lines with deep and strongly felt meaning . As far as the audience is concerned , it was acceptable and interesting . And the leading actor and actress showed superior performances . They cooperated so well and acted so naturally that it seemed they were truly a pair of lovers .‎ From the simple but moving story , I got a lot . Besides money and fame , there are many other beautiful things worth pursuing（追求）and loving .‎ Good stories and actors are what the audience desire . Whether Chinese New Year’s movies will last in the New Year’s film market depends mostly on the filmmakers’ attitude towards movie production . I hope that in the coming new year , I can spend several hours in a cinema enjoying a good movie instead of just chatting with my friends to escape a boring movie .‎ ‎61．From the passage we know .‎ ‎ A．the author thinks highly of the present New Year’s movies ‎ ‎ B．the author are complaining of some New Year’s movies ‎ ‎ C．people don’t need New Year’s movies now ‎ ‎ D．none of New Year’s movies are well produced ‎ ‎62．In the opinion of the author , New Year’s movie should solve the following problems except ‎ .‎ ‎ A．lack of creation B．low-quality of production ‎ ‎ C．directors’ careful choices of actors and actresses D．simplicity ‎ ‎63．One of the things that make the author like the movie “Be There or Be Square” (Bu Jain Bu San )is .‎ ‎ A．humor , simplicity and satisfactory end B．nature , enlightenment and sad background ‎ ‎ C．good theme , good performances and a brand new start ‎ ‎ D．creation , good production and natural performances ‎ ‎64．Film-makers’ attitude to movie production will .‎ ‎ A．mostly determine whether the New Year’s film market will last ‎ ‎ B．determine the success of the future New Year’s movies ‎ ‎ C．mostly determine whether Chinese New Year’s movies will last in the New Year’s film market D．determine Chinese film market ‎ C George E. Elliott Jr , who has died , aged 85 , gave the unnoticed warning about aircraft coming near Pearl Harbour , in 1941 , as described in history books and movies like “Tora , Tora , Tora” . ‎ Elliott died on Saturday of complications （并发症）from a stroke（中风）,his family said .‎ The former Army radar operator detected incoming Japanese aircraft on December 7, 1941. He then gave a warning , but it was brushed aside. Nearly an hour later , the enemy planes reached the US Navy’s fleet (舰队) in the harbour .‎ In a 50-year anniversary（周年）story , a reporter from the US’s Associated Press told how Elliott and another soldier , Joseph L. Lockard ,had been on duty that day since 4 am at Kahuku Point on the northern tip of Oahu Island , Hawaii . They had been familiarizing themselves with a strange new invention that could “see” 130 miles (208 kilometres ) out to sea —something called “radar .”‎ Just after 7 am , Elliott saw “something completely out of the ordinary” on the screen , a huge blip (信号) , due north , 137 miles (219.2 kilometres )out . The information was called in to headquarters , and the operators were told it was a flight of B-17 Flying Fortresses due in from California . ‎ They kept tracking for practice , and the blip grew so large that Lockard figured the set was broken . They turned it off at 7:45 , after the blip disappeared behind Oahu’s mountains .‎ About 10 minutes later , the first bombs were falling on the battleships in the harbour .‎ Later that morning , when Elliott and Lockard arrived back at their base , they learned the significance of what they had observed .‎ Elliott served in the Army until 1945 , and then worked for New Jersey Bell Telephone for 33 years before retiring .‎ In later years , his warning at Pearl Harbour brought him reward . The actions of the radar operators were ‎ described in the 1970 movie “Tora , Tora , Tora,” and on television specials and in history books .‎ ‎65．What made George E. Elliott Jr rewarded ?‎ ‎ A．His job . B．His invention .C．His warning at Pearl Harbor .D．His specials .‎ ‎66．The word “ brushed aside” in the 3rd paragraph means .‎ ‎ A．accepted B．loved C．detected D．refused to pay attention to ‎ ‎67．From the passage we know George E. Elliot , Jr once mainly did kinds of jobs .‎ ‎ A．1 B．‎2 ‎C．3 D．4‎ D Excited by the successful landing of the rover (探测机器人) on Mars , scientists from NASA( the US National Aeronautics and Space Administration ) have spent the last few days studying data (数据)from the robot and working on getting it ready to roll .‎ Spirit made a dangerous , but safe , landing on Mars on Sunday on what scientists believe is the rocky bed of an ancient lake that once may have contained life .‎ Just three hours later , the six-wheeled rover began sending black-and –white photos of its surroundings back 170 million kilometers to Earth . The rover sent back a few colour photos on Monday .‎ The scientists were overjoyed by the success . Two of every three past purpose of landings on Mars have failed .‎ ‎“It’s a big step forward for all humanity . Now we have another rover on another planet , exploring a new world . What more could you ask for ?” said Charles Elachi, director of NASA’s Jet Propulsion Laboratory . ‎ The first images from Spirit show a flat , wind-damaged surface dotted with small rocks . The scene made scientists eager to send the rover around the planet in search of evidence （证据）that the landing site was once covered with water .‎ The US$ 820 million project also includes a twin golf cart-sized rover called Opportunity , set to land on Mars’ other side on January 24.‎ The dozens of initial（开始的）,low-resolution（分辨能力）photos show Spirit landed upright （垂直的）,level and facing south on a flat stretch of the hole the scientists believe once contained a lake .‎ It will be about a week before the six-wheeled robot is ready to roll off its lander and move around Mars .‎ Spirit’s successful landing has ended the trend of failed missions to Mars . NASA’s last attempt to land on Mars , in 1999 , ended in failure . Its last successful landing was in 1997 , when Pathfinder carried the tiny Sojourner rover to the surface of Mars .‎ Over the next three months , the robot will use a range of instruments to look for evidence of past water activity in the rocks and soil of the planet .‎ ‎68．What is inferred in the passage ?‎ ‎ A．NASA is pleased with its rover . B．NASA is disappointed with its rover .‎ ‎ C．NASA is curious about its rover D．NASA is sad about its rover ‎ ‎69．Mars is according to the first images from Spirit .‎ ‎ A．a rocky bed of an ancient lake that once contained life ‎ ‎ B．a flat , wind-damaged surface dotted with small rocks ‎ ‎ C．a flat stretch of the hole that once contained a lake ‎ ‎ D．a landing site once covered with water ‎ ‎70．The US$ 820 million project at least includes rovers .‎ ‎ A．2 B．‎3 ‎C．4 D．5‎ E August has always been difficult for me . It is the time when I realize that the books my English teacher assigned （布置）to me are not going to read themselves and that I have a difficult month in front of me .‎ You might think that I don’t want to spend my summer reading , but that’s not the problem : I love reading . On the first day of my summer holiday this year , I went to the library and got “ A Gathering of Old Men” by African-American writer Ernest Gaines . I enjoyed it very much . I read all the magazines that my parents subscribe to （订阅）and spend about 30 minutes every day with the morning paper .‎ So why do I hate summer reading for school ? Because the books on summer reading lists are often slow-going and just uninviting （不吸引人）. Teachers and librarians don’t understand that summer reading can be entertaining as well as educational . They choose books that a friend of my mother’s calls “spinach books” : good for you , but not much fun to take in . Every summer , I read them , hate them and get bitter about the experience .‎ This bitterness started three years ago when I was about to begin high school . As preparation , my ‎ English teacher told me to read “ The Age of Innocence” (《纯真年代》)by American author Edith Wharton .I’m sure there are many people who enjoyed “The Age of Innocence” ——some might even say it’s their favourite book .‎ But I don’t think any of these people read it as a 14-year-old boy on his summer vacation .‎ ‎“The Age of Innocence” is the story of a forbidden romance in New York 100years ago . At 14, my only experience with romance was my love for baseball .I couldn’t imagine being in love , much less being in love in 1900. “The Age of Innocence” was totally different to my life .‎ Most of my required summer reading has been like that——books written in a style that plays up the adjectives and plays down the verbs . I guess teachers don’t think exciting plots make for “good literature” . To me , though , a good writer describes events and characters in a way that makes the reader want to know what happens next .‎ If I ware making up a summer reading list , it would include “The Friends of Eddie Coyle” by George V. Higgins , “The Right Stuff” by Tom Wolfe , and “Into Thin Air” by Jon Krakauer . These are all books that have literary value but , just as important , can also entertain kids on vacation . If the teachers could stand a little fun in the books they assign , my Augusts would be a lot more enjoyable .‎ ‎71．The author thinks he/she will have a difficult August because .‎ ‎ A．he/she doesn’t like reading in summer vacation ‎ ‎ B．he/she is to read the books , boring and not right for kids .‎ ‎ C．he/she hates the English teacher assigning homework .‎ ‎ D．he/she hates August .‎ ‎72．What can make students interested in August reading ought to be .‎ ‎ A．romantic B．out of date ‎ ‎ C．entertaining and educational D．pure ‎ ‎73．The authour listed such books as The Friends of Eddie Coyle because he/she thinks .‎ ‎ A．they can change his/her opinion B．he/she can learn a lot more from them ‎ ‎ C．they are of literary value , and enjoyable D．he/she has to do as teachers tell ‎ ‎74．In the opinion of the author of this passage a good write should be .‎ ‎ A．one who describes events and characters in different ways ‎ ‎ B．one who uses a way of describing that makes the reader wish to know what to happen next C．one who is learned D．one who is full of imagination ‎ ‎75．The best title of this passage should be .‎ ‎ A．Why Can’t Teacher Set Us Books that Are Fun ?‎ ‎ B．I don’t Like Reading on the Vacation ‎ ‎ C．Teachers , don’t Set Us Any Reading Assignments D．Teachers , Set us Free ‎ ‎★专题（43）‎ A Classified Ads LOST AND FOUND ROOMMATES FOUND：Cat, 6 months old, black and white marking. Found near Linden and South U. Steve,800-4661.‎ FEMALE ROOMMATE WANTED Own room near campus. Available December 1. Rent $80 per month until March 1st. $129 thereafter. Call Jill for details, 800-7839.‎ LOST：Gold wire rim glasses in brown case. Campus area. Reward. Call Gregg 800-2896.‎ NEED PERSON to assume lease for own bedroom in apt. near campus, $92/mo. Starting Jan. 1. Call 800-6157 after 5:00‎ FOR SALE HELP WANTED MOVING：Must sell. TV b/w 12″，$50； AE/FM transistor radio A/C or battery, $15; cassette tape recorder, $10;music records. Call John or Pat, 800-0739 after 5 or weekends.‎ BABYSITTER—MY HOME If you are available a few hours during the day, some evenings and occasional weekends to care for 2 school-age children, please call Gayle Moore days 800-1111, evenings and weekends 800-4964.‎ USED FUR COATS and JACKETS. GOOD condition. $50-$125. Call 800-0436 after 12 noon.‎ WAITRESS WANTED:‎10 a.m.—2p.m.or 10:‎30 a.m.—5 p.m. Apply in person, 207S. Main. Curtis Restaurant.‎ ‎56．If you want a job of taking care of children, which ad will you answer?‎ ‎ A．LOST AND FOUND B．ROOMMATES ‎ C．FOR SALE D．HELP WANTED ‎57．You will call—if you want to buy a radio.‎ ‎ A．800-0436 B．800‎-0739 ‎C．800-4661 D．800-4964‎ B ‎ It seems that the Englishmen just cannot live without sports of some kind. A famous French humourist once said that this is because the English insist on behaving like children all their lives. Wherever you go in this country, you will see both children and grown-ups knocking a ball about with a stick or something, as if in Britain men shall always remain boys and women girls! Still, it can never be bad to get exercise, can it?‎ ‎ Taking all amateur（业余）and professional sports in Britain into consideration, there can be no doubt that football is at the top of the list. It is called soccer in the United States. The game originated（起源于）in Britain and was played in the Middle Ages or even earlier, though as an organized game, or“association football”, it dates only from the beginning of the 19th century.‎ ‎ The next is rugby, which is called“football”in the United States. It is a kind of football played by two teams of fifteen players than eleven. In rugby, an oval-shaped ball is used which can be handled as well as kicked. It is a pretty rough game.‎ ‎ In summer, cricket is the most popular sport. In fact, it has sometimes been called the English national game. Most foreigners find the game rather slow or even boring, but it enjoys great popularity among the British.‎ ‎ Tennis rates high on the list, too. It was introduced into England from France in the 15th century, but it was from England that it spread to practically every country in the world.‎ ‎ Table tennis, or“ping-pong”,surely is not played on a great scale as it is in China or Japan. Basketball and volleyball were introduced into Britain during the late 19th century from America and are gaining popularity. Horse-back riding, swimming, rowing and golf all attract a lot of people.‎ ‎58．The main purpose of Paragraph l is to tell us that the English .‎ ‎ A．are all sports lovers B．behave like children ‎ C．like to kick a ball around D．can remain young all their lives ‎59．According to the passage, which of the following is NOT true about football and rugby?‎ ‎ A．They differ in the shape of the ball. B．They are played by different numbers of players. C．They both can be handled. D．They both can be kicked.‎ ‎60．The game that was never played in Britain until the late 19th century is .‎ ‎ A．basketball B．tennis C．rugby D．football ‎61．What would be the best title for this passage?‎ ‎ A．The Most Popular Sports B．The English Sports ‎ C．History of Sports D．Sports in Britain C Have you ever suddenly felt that someone you knew was in trouble—and was he? Have you ever dreamed something that came true later? Maybe you have ESP （超感觉知觉）.‎ ESP stands for Extrasensory Perception. It may be called a sixth sense. It seems to let people know about events before they happen, or events that are happening some distance away.‎ Here’s an example. A woman was ironing clothes. Suddenly she screamed, “My father is dead! I saw him sitting in the chair!” Just then, a telegram came. The woman’s father died of a heart attack. He died sitting in a chair.‎ There are thousands of stories like this one on record. Scientists are studying them to find out what’s behind these strange mental messages. Here’s another example—one of hundreds of dreams that have come true. ‎ A man dreamed he was walking along a road when a horse and carriage came by. The driver said, “There’s room for one more.” The man felt the driver seemed dead, so he ran away. The next day, when the man was getting on a crowded bus, the bus driver said,“There’s room for one more.”‎ Then the man saw that the driver’s face was the same face he had seen in the dream. He wouldn’t get on the bus. As the bus drove off, it crashed and burst into flames. Everyone was killed!‎ Some people say stories like these are coincidences. Others, including some scientists, say that ESP is real. From studies of ESP, we may someday learn more about the human mind.‎ ‎62．According to the passage, the author believes that the sixth sense is .‎ ‎ A．in existence B．imaginative C．not real D．impossible ‎63．ESP lets people know.‎ ‎ A．about events before they happen B．about events after they happen ‎ C．about events that are happening some distance away D．A and C ‎64．By studying ESP, scientists may get to .‎ ‎ A．learn how people tell lies B．know more about human dreams ‎ C．know more about human mind D．learn how strange things happen ‎65．In the last paragraph the underlined word “coincidences” probably means .‎ ‎ A．things that may not happen B．things that happen in a dream ‎ C．things that must happen D．things that happen by accident ‎66．This article is mainly about .‎ ‎ A．the human dream B．the sixth senseC．the human mind D．a crowded bus D ‎（1）Mr. Brown( the motorist)‎ At about 9;20 p.m. on October 14th, I was driving along ‎ Market Road in the direction of Midwick. I wanted to ‎ go to Sturham to collect my wife, who had been visiting ‎ some friends. I prepared to turn into Sturham Road, which was on my right. In the distance, I saw the lights of a car moving towards me but it was a long way from me. I put out my hand to show that I was going to turn right. Then I started to turn slowly towards Sturham Road. Suddenly there was a loud noise on the passenger’s(near) side of the car. I stopped the car and got out. A motorcycle had hit my car. The motorcyclist had been thrown over the car. He was injured, so I ran to a shop to phone for help.‎ ‎(2)Mr. Smith(the injured motorcyclist)‎ On the evening of October 14th, I was going home along Market Road towards Newtown. I was riding my motorcycle. I was going slowly because some of the streetlights were out and the road was wet and slippery. Just before Sturham Road, a car suddenly drove right across my path. The driver did not flash his lights to give a warning. I could not turn in time, so I hit the side of the car. When I woke up, I was lying in a hospital in Market Road.‎ ‎(3)Mr. Lee(another motorcyclist)‎ ‎ At about 9:10 p.m. on October 14th, I left my home in Midwick. Ten minutes later I was riding my motorcycle along Market Road. I was going to Newtown. There was a motorcycle about 40 metres in front of me. It was not going very quickly. The man on it was riding near the curb（路边）but I was near the center of the road. The motorcyclist in front of me tried to turn to his right but there was no time. He hit the car and was injured. There was no car going along in front of us or put by the road.‎ ‎67．Which of these pictures exactly shows the scene of the accident?‎ X=the place where the motorcycle hit the car; N=Newtown; M=Midwick; S=Sturham.(Note that cars and motorcycles always keep to the left in England.)‎ ‎68．Which of these statements about the accident is probably correct?‎ ‎ A．Mr. Brown wrongly supposed that the lights of the two motorcycles were those of a car.‎ ‎ B．The lights of the car moving towards Mr. Brown made him unable to see.‎ ‎ C．Mr. Brown knocked down a motorcyclist on purpose.‎ ‎ D．The accident was caused by the carelessness of the first motorcyclist.‎ ‎69．It seems probable from the statements that Mr. Brown .‎ ‎ A．gave no signal to show that he was turning right ‎ B．did not give any signal until he was actually turning ‎ C．failed to give a proper signal at that time ‎ D．flashed his light to show that he was going to turn ‎70．We would expect to find that Mr. Brown’s car was damaged on its side.‎ ‎ A．front B．left C．right D．driver’s E In every British town, large and small, you will find shops that sell second-hand goods. Sometimes such shops deal mostly in furniture, sometimes in books, sometimes in ornaments（装饰） and household goods, sometimes even in clothes.‎ The furniture may often be “antique”, and it may well have changed hands many times. It may also be very valuable, although the most valuable piece will usually go to the London salerooms, where one piece might well be sold for hundreds of thousands of pounds. As you look around these shops and see the polished wood of chests and tables, you cannot help thinking of those long-dead hands which polished that wood, of those now-closed eyes which once looked at these pieces with love.‎ The books, too, may be antique and very precious; some may be rare first printings. Often when someone dies or has to move house, his books may all be sold, so that sometimes you may find whole libraries in one shop. One the border between England and Wales, there is a town which has become a huge bookshop as well. Even the cinema and castle have been taken over, and now books have replaced sheep as the town’s main trade.‎ There are also much more humble shops, sometimes simply called “junk shops”, where you can buy small household pieces very cheaply. Sometimes the profits（利润）from these shops go to charity（慈善事业）. Even these pieces, though, can make you feel sad; you think of those people who once treasured them, but who have moved on to another country or to death.‎ Although the British do not worship（崇拜）their ancestors, they do treasure the past and the things of the past. This is true of houses as well. These days no one knocks them down; they are rebuilt until they are often better than new. In Britain, people do not buy something just because it is new. Old things are treasured for their proven worth; new things have to prove themselves before they are accepted.‎ ‎71．Books found in second-hand book shops may .‎ ‎ A．be copies of the earliest printings B．be on sale for the first time ‎ C．never be worth very much D．never be rare ‎72．What is the small town on the border between England and Wales famous for?‎ ‎ A．Its sheep. B．Its bookshops. C．Its cinema. D．Its castle.‎ ‎73．Second-hand goods sometimes fill you with sadness because .‎ ‎ A．they are too expensive for average buyers B．they remind you of the original owners ‎ C．they are now forgotten D．they are sold for charity ‎74．The average British person .‎ ‎ A．does not respect old things because they are not fashionable ‎ B．likes to build new houses simply because it is fashionable to do so ‎ C．likes to buy new things because they are fashionable.‎ ‎ D．does not like to buy things simply because they are fashionable ‎75．What does the underlined word “them” (Paragraph 4) refer to?‎ ‎ A．junk shops B．profits from shops C．old things D．old houses ‎★专题（44）‎ A Suppose you work in a big firm and find English important for your job because you often deal with foreign businessmen. Now you are looking for a place where you can improve your English, especially your spoken English. Here are some ads about English language training from newspapers. You may find the information you need.‎ Global English Center ‎*General English in all four skills: listening, speaking, reading and writing.‎ ‎*3—month(700 yuan),6—month(1,200 yuan) and one year(2,000 yuan) courses.‎ ‎*Choice of morning or evening classes, 3 hours per day, Mon. －Fri.‎ ‎*Experienced college English teachers.‎ ‎*Close to city center and bus stops.‎ Tel:67605270‎ Add:105 Zhongshan Road, 100082‎ Modern Language School ‎*Special courses in English for business, travel, banking, hotel management and office skills.‎ ‎*Small classes(12-16students) on Sat. & Sun. From 2:00 to 5:00 p.m.‎ ‎*Native English teachers from Canada and USA.‎ ‎*Language lab and computers supplied.‎ ‎*3-month(1,050 yuan), 6-month(1,850 yuan)‎ Write or phone:Modern Language School, 675 Park Road, 100056‎ Tel:67353019‎ The 2lst Century English Training Center ‎*We specialize in elective teaching at all levels.‎ ‎*We offer morning or afternoon classes, both of which last three months and a half at a cost of 800 yuan. Entrance exams: June I and Dec.1.‎ ‎*We also have a six-week TOFEL preparation class during winter and summer holidays. ‎ ‎*Only 15-minute walk from city center.‎ Call 67801642 for more information.‎ The International House of English ‎*3/6-month English courses for students of all levels at very low cost: 60 yuan for 12 hours per week; convenient class hours:9‎-12 a.m. and 2-5p.m.‎ ‎*A 4-month evening classes for developing speaking skills(same cost as day classes).‎ ‎*Well-trained Chinese and foreign teachers experienced in teaching English as a 2nd foreign language.‎ ‎*Free sightseeing and social activities.‎ ‎*Very close to the Central Park.‎ For further information call 67432308.‎ ‎56．You work from 9:‎00 a.m. to 4:30p.m. every day. Which schools will you choose?‎ ‎ A．Global English Center and Modern Language School.‎ ‎ B．Global English Center and International House of English.‎ ‎ C．Modern Language School and the 21st Century English Training Center.‎ ‎ D．The 21st Century English Training Center and the International House of English.‎ ‎57．The 21st Century English Training Center is different from the other 3 schools in that .‎ ‎ A．its teaching quality is better B．it is nearest to the city center ‎ C．its courses are more advanced D．it requires an entrance examination ‎58．You’ll probably prefer to go to the International House of English because it .‎ ‎ A．offers free sightseeing and social activitiesB．has a special course in spoken English ‎ C．costs less that the other schools D．has native English teachers ‎59．If you take the evening classes at International House of English, you’ll pay about yuan. A．60 B．‎240 ‎C．720 D．1,000‎ B There are three branches of medicine. One is called “doctor medicine”, or “scientific medicine.” Scientific doctors try to observe sicknesses, look for logical patterns, and then find out how the human body works. From there they figure out what treatments may work. This kind of medicine is believed to date from the 4th century BC. Although nowadays it is successful, in the ancient world this approach probably did not cure many patients.‎ A second kind of medicine is called “natural cures,” or “folk medicine,” in which less educated people try to cure sicknesses with various herbs（药草）. These folk healers also use observation and logic, but they ‎ are not so aware of it. They try things until they find something that seems to work, and then they keep doing that. Folk medicine flourished long before the development of scientific medicine and was more successful in ancient times than doctor medicine.‎ The third kind is called “health spas（矿泉疗养地）,” or “faith healing.” Sometimes this may be as simple as touching the holy man and being immediately healed. Other times, a magician may make you a magic charm, or say a spell, to cure you. Some religious groups organize special healing shrines for the sick. In these places people rest, get plenty of sleep, eat healthy food, drink water instead of wine, and exercise in various ways. They also talk to the priests and pray to the gods. If you are feeling depressed or you have been working too hard, going to these places may be just the right thing to make you feel better.‎ ‎60．Doctor medicine .‎ ‎ A．has a longer history than folk medicine B．has been practiced for around 1,600 years ‎ C．bases its treatments on observation and logic ‎ D．was very successful in curing sicknesses in ancient times ‎61．According to the passage, which of the following is NOT used in health spas?‎ ‎ A．Magic power. B．Various herbs. C．Religious faith. D．A healthy life style.‎ ‎62．According to the passage, which of the following statements is true?‎ ‎ A．Folk healers choose different herbs to cure diseases without any sound basis.‎ ‎ B．people who practice folk medicine need lots of formal education on herbs.‎ ‎ C．The success of folk medicine led to the development of doctor medicine.‎ ‎ D．Natural cures worked better than scientific medicine in ancient times.‎ ‎63．The author’s primary purpose in this passage is to .‎ ‎ A．describe different types of medicine ‎ B．argue for the importance of medicine in health care ‎ C．show the crucial role religion plays in medical treatments ‎ D．compare the educational background of three different types of patients C TUVALU, a tiny country in the Pacific Ocean, has asked for help as it fears it will be swallowed up by the sea.‎ Storms and huge waves are a constant threat and none of Tuvalu’s nine little islands is more than five meters above sea leavel, Salt water is already entering the country’s drinking water supply, as well as damaging plants that produce fruit and vegetable. Without urgent help, the country’s days are numbered.‎ But Tuvalu is not the first place to face sinking into the sea. Venice, a historic city in Italy best known for its canals, has sunk about ‎24 cm over the past 100 years. Experts say that it will have sunk another 20‎-50cm by 2050. A century ago, St. Mark’s Square, the lowest point in the city, flooded about nine times a year, Nowadays, it happens more that 100 times. While Venice is slowly sinking into the mud on which it stands, Tuvalu’s rising sea level is caused by global warming.‎ The average global temperature has increased by almost 0.5 centigrade degrees over the past century; scientists expect it to rise by extra 1-3 degrees over the next 100 years.‎ Warmer weather makes glaciers（冰川）melt, adding more water to the ocean. The warmer temperatures also make water expand, so it takes up more space, causing the sea level to rise. The sea level has risen about 10－‎25 cm in the last 100 years.‎ The main cause of global warming is human pollution. Through burning coal, oil and gas, people have been increasing the greenhouse gases in the atmosphere, such as CO2. This adds to the power of the greenhouse effect, making the planet even warmer.‎ Many scientists believe that, if the warming is not stopped, there will be huge climate changes. The sea level could rise by one meter this century.‎ Should this come true, the sea will swallow up millions of homes and the world will be flooded with “climate refugees” looking for somewhere to live.‎ ‎64．We can infer from the second paragraph that .‎ ‎ A．Tuvalu is in danger of being swallowed up by the sea ‎ B．all Tuvalu’s islands are about five meters above the sea level ‎ C．drinking water in Tuvalu has been destroyed ‎ D．Tuvalu is often flooded by storms and waves ‎65．The author uses Tuvalu and Venice as examples in order to explain .‎ ‎ A．they are the first places sinking into the sea ‎ B．they are both sinking into the mud where they stand ‎ C．they will disappear in the future ‎ D．their trouble is caused by global warming ‎66．What does “climate refugees” mean?‎ ‎ A．People who are forced away from their homeland by climate.‎ ‎ B．Climate changes. C．Rare animals. D．Climate effect.‎ ‎67．Which of the following is NOT true according to the passage?‎ ‎ A．Tuvalu’s nine little islands are less than five meters above the sea level.‎ ‎ B．The average global temperature has risen by 1-3 centigrade degrees over the past 100 years.‎ ‎ C．The warmer temperature causes the sea level to rise.‎ ‎ D．There will be huge climate changes unless the warming is stopped.‎ D Americans are proud of their variety and individuality, yet they love and respect few things more than a uniform, whether it is the uniform of an elevator operator or the uniform of a five-star general. Why are uniform so popular in the USA?‎ Among the arguments for uniforms, one of the first is that in the eye of most people they look more professional than civilian clothes（便服）.People have become conditioned to expect superior quality from a man who wears a uniform. The television repairman who wears a uniform tends to inspire more trust than one who appears in civilian clothes. Faith in the skill of a garage mechanic is increased by a uniform. What easier way is there for a nurse, a policeman, a barber, or a waiter to lose professional identity than to step out of uniform?‎ Uniforms also have many practical benefits. They save on other clothes. They save laundry（洗衣店）bills. They are tax-deductible（可减税的）.They are often more comfortable and more long-lasting than civilian clothes.‎ Primary among the arguments against uniforms is their lack of variety and the consequent（随之而引发的）loss of individuality experienced by people who must wear them. Though there are many types of uniforms, the wearer of any particular type is generally stuck with it, without change, until retirement. When people look alike, they tend to think, speak, and act similarly, on the job at least.‎ Uniforms also give rise to some practical problems. Though they are long-lasting, often their initial（最初的）expense is greater than the cost of civilian clothes. Some uniforms are also expensive to maintain, requiring professional dry cleaning rather than the home laundering possible with many types of civilian clothes.‎ ‎68．It is surprising that Americans who worship（崇尚）variety and individuality .‎ ‎ A．still judge a man by his clothes B．hold the uniform in such high regard ‎ C．enjoy having a professional identity ‎ D．will respect an elevator operator as much as a general in uniform ‎69．People are used to thinking that a man in uniform .‎ ‎ A．suggets quality work B．discards（抛弃）his social identity ‎ C．appears to be more practical D．looks superior to a person in civilian clothes ‎70．The chief function of a uniform is to .‎ ‎ A．provide practial benefits to the wearer B．make the wearer catch the public eye ‎ C．inspire the wearer’s confidence in himself ‎ D．provide the wearer with a professional identity ‎71．According to the passage, people wearing uniforms .‎ ‎ A．are usually helpful B．have little or no individual freedom ‎ C．tend to lose their individuality D．enjoy greater popularity E While the threat of a reappearance of SARS is still there, it is reassuring to learn about the latest developments in vaccine research.‎ More that 1,400 vaccine shots for SARS have been produced in China, and an application for clinical tests has been referred to the State Food and Drug Administration（SFDA）， according to a Xinhua report on Sunday.‎ ‎“If everything goes smoothly, conducting of clinical experiments will be agreed before the end of December,” said Yin Hongzhang, head of Biological Product Section of the SFDA.‎ So far, China is far ahead of other countries in the search for a SARS vaccine, claimed Yin. At that time, volunteers will be sought in Beijing and Guangzhou to take part in experiments using the new vaccine. However, while cheering for the research breakthrough, voices of reason should also be heard.‎ What medical workers should always maintain is a cool head and careful attitude, which are essential in any scientific research. This is especially true when conducting experiments on human beings, because they are directly concerned with the volunteers’ health and even their lives, and also because knowledge of the deadly virus（病毒） still too limited.‎ Media reports indicate that members of the public are reacting actively to the news of selecting volunteers and are expressing their readiness. Their courage is well worth our admiration. The trust they are placing in these medical researchers is the biggest support of their work.‎ The researchers have no other choice but to be highly cautious in the expected experiments. The safety of volunteers should always be the first consideration. Scientists from different countries have been put in a race in uncovering the mystery surrounding the virus. But to play a leading role should by no means be the ultimate pursuit（最终目标）of the scientific workers. It is people’s safety and health that remain the biggest concerns.‎ While there are still so many mysteries to be solved, it is too early to celebrate.‎ ‎72．According to the passage, which of the following is not true? ‎ ‎ A．The developments in vaccine research in SARS are encouraging.‎ ‎ B．More that 1,400 vaccine shots for SARS have been applied to clinical test.‎ ‎ C．China is now leading in the search for a SARS vaccine.‎ ‎ D．Experiments using the new vaccine will be carried out only in Beijing and Guangzhou.‎ ‎73．From the passage, we could see that the author’s attitude towards the new vaccine is quite .‎ ‎ A．praising B．critical C．matter-of-fact D．humorous ‎74．Which of the following may serve as the best title?‎ ‎ A．Keep a Cool Head While Fighting SARS B．A Breakthrough in Fighting SARS ‎ C．A Leading Role in Fighting SARS D．Volunteers Wanted While Fighting SARS ‎75．The underined word “cautious” most probably means .‎ ‎ A．cheerful B．dutiful C．helpful D．careful ‎★专题（45）‎ A Dear editor,‎ ‎ Several days ago, I heard that a dear friend of mine had killed herself. I was deep in sorrow by the sudden news. I can’t keep calm any longer. I’m always thinking about life and death.‎ ‎ Life is so precious. If we can slip into death in an impulsive (冲动的) moment, what use in all our efforts and hopes? Our families, our ambitions, everything is flung into total darkness. And death allows no time for regret.‎ ‎ Nevertheless, the suicide rate increases year by year, particularly of young people. Reasons may vary from person to person, yet I think they share something in common.‎ ‎ First, today’s young people are morally weak. They hunger for success but can not face failure; they are eager to be understood but afraid of opening their hearts to others. They live in a wide world, from east to west, ancient to present, but their hearts beat in a narrow desert, closed tight, unable to communicate. Each becomes an isolated fortress (孤堡), lonely, and weak.‎ ‎ My friend is a good example of that. As a young teacher, she was devoted to her work but was disappointed with her students’ occasional failures. She fell in love with a colleague but he deserted her. With no close friends, disappointed at work and in love, death seemed to her the only remaining choice and she took it.‎ ‎ Another reason for the weakness of today’s youth, in my opinion, comes from society’s pressures. The young are forced to try too hard to succeed. On the other hand, society refuses to accept that children sometimes do fail. But failure is more important because it can teach the young how to win next time.‎ ‎ What can we do to save the desperate young?‎ ‎56. The passage wants to tell us .‎ ‎ A. a lot of young people choose death to escape from the society ‎ B. the number of people who take suicide is larger and larger ‎ C. the young people should go to see doctors to solve the spiritual problems ‎ D. the reason why the young kill themselves lies in two main kinds ‎57. In the writer’s opinion, failure is .‎ ‎ A. the mother of success B. the key to success ‎ ‎ C. good for the young D. bad for the young ‎58. Among the following, which one is NOT the cause of “my friend’s death”?‎ ‎ A. She has too much society’s pressure. B. She is not well content with her work.‎ ‎ C. She is disappointed in love. D. She doesn’t get on well with others.‎ ‎59. The passage suggests those people would be most likely to take suicide.‎ ‎ A. who are alone B. who are weak-minded ‎ C. who fail in love D. who suffer from society’s pressures B ‎ Amy tan, the American-born daughter of Chinese immigrants, received the Commonwealth Gold Award in 1989 for her first work of fiction, the best-selling Joy Luck Club. The sixteen stories that make up the work alternate (交替) the tales of four Chinese immigrant mothers and their Americanized daughters, in an exploration of the generational and cultural tensions (紧张关系) experienced by many first-generation daughters of immigrants.‎ ‎ Tan’s parents, like many immigrants, had high expectations for their children and often set puzzling standards, expecting Amy and her two brothers to think like Chinese but to speak perfect English, be excellent at school work, and take advantage of every situation that might lead to success. Tan, however, rebelled (反叛) against her parents’ expectations and devoted herself to being thoroughly American and dreaming of being a fiction writer.‎ ‎ Tan got a bachelor’s degree in English and linguistics (语言学) and a master’s degree in linguistics and established herself as a highly successful business writer. Tan, however, was not satisfied in spite of her material success. Turning to her life long dream, she wrote her first short story, “Endgame,” and then a second, “Waiting between the trees.” In 1987 Tan visited her half-sisters in China with her mother, a trip that proved to be a turning point in her life and career. Tan felt a sense of completeness, a tie with the country and its culture that she had never expected. Returning from China, Tan was surprised to learn that on the strength of her short stories she had received an advance from a publisher. Tan closed her business and wrote the remaining stories for the Joy Luck Club. It was a great success, well received by the public and appearing on the New York Times bestseller list. It has been translated into seventeen languages, including Chinese, and was made into a movie in 1993.‎ ‎60. What is the writer’s main purpose in this passage?‎ ‎ A. To analyze (分析)Amy Tan’s works.‎ ‎ B. To support Amy Tan’s decision to become a fiction writer.‎ ‎ C. To present Amy Tan’s personal experiences.‎ ‎ D. To criticize Amy Tan’s rebellion against her parents.‎ ‎61. According to the passage, Amy Tan’s visit to China .‎ ‎ A. was disappointing B. had a great pushing effect on her.‎ ‎ C. was not surprising in the least. D. was a trip she had always dreamed of taking.‎ ‎62. The underlined words “the work” in paragraph 1 refer to .‎ ‎ A. stories B. writing ‎ ‎ C. Commonwealth Club Gold Award D. Joy Luck Club ‎63. It can be concluded from this passage that .‎ ‎ A. parents don’t know how to educate their children.‎ ‎ B. Tan did not use personal experience in her writing.‎ ‎ C. Tan made the right decision when she closed her business.‎ ‎ D. Tan thinks and lives more in an American way than in a Chinese way.‎ C BRITAIN is a popular tourist place. But tours of the country have pros and cons.‎ Good news Free museums. No charge for outstanding collections of art and antiquities. Pop music. Britain is the only country to rival (与……比敌) the US on this score.‎ Black cabs. London taxi drivers know where they are going even if there are never enough of them at weekends or night.‎ Choice of food. Visitors can find everything from Ethiopian to Swedish restaurants.‎ Fashion. Not only do fashion followers love deeply and respect highly brand names such as Vivienne Westwood, Alexander McQueen; street styles are justly loved, too.‎ Bad news ‎ Poor service. “It’s part of the image of the place. People can dine out on the rudeness they have experienced,” says Professor Tony Seaton, of Luton University’s International Tourism Research Center.‎ ‎ Poor public transport. Trains and buses are promised to defeat the keenest tourists, although the ‎ over-crowded London tube is unbelievable popular.‎ ‎ Lack of languages. Speaking slowly and clearly may not get many foreign visitors very far, even in the tourist traps .‎ ‎ Rain. Still in the number one complaint.‎ No air-conditioning. So that even splendidly hot summers become as unbearable as the down-pours.‎ Overpriced hotels. The only European country with a higher rate of tax on hotel rooms is Denmark.‎ Licensing hours. Alcohol (酒) is in short supply after 11p.m. even in “24-hour cities.”‎ ‎64. What do tourists complain most?‎ ‎ A. Poor service. B. Poor public transport. C. Rain. D. Overpriced hotels.‎ ‎65. What do we learn about pop music in Britain and the US through this passage?‎ ‎ A. Pop music in Britain is better than that in the US.‎ ‎ B. Pop music in Britain is as good as that in the US.‎ ‎ C. Pop music in Britain is worse than that in the US.‎ ‎ D. Pop music in Britain is quite different from that in the US.‎ ‎66.When is alcohol not able to get easily?‎ ‎ A. At 9:00 p.m. B. At 10:00 p.m. C. At 11:00 p.m. D. At 12:00p.m.‎ ‎67. Which of the following is true according to the passage?‎ ‎ A. You have to pay to visit the museums. B. It’s very cheap to travel by taxi there.‎ ‎ C. You cannot find Chinese food there. D. The public transport is poor there.‎ D ‎ When I asked my daughter which item she would keep: the phone, the car, the cooker, the computer, the TV, or her boyfriend, she said “the phone”. Personally, I could do without the phone entirely, which makes me unusual. Because the telephone is changing our lives more than any other piece of technology.‎ ‎ Point 1 The telephone creates the need to communicate, in the same way that more roads create more traffic. My daughter comes home from school at 4:00 pm and then spends an hour on the phone talking to the very people she has been at school with all day. If the phone did not exist, would she have anything to talk about?‎ ‎ Point 2 The mobile phone means that we are never alone. “The mobile saved my life,” says Crystal Johnstone. She had an accident in her Volvo on the A45 between Otley and Skipton. Trapped inside, she managed to make the call that brought the ambulance to her rescues.‎ ‎ Point 3 The mobile removes our secret. It allows marketing manager of Haba Deutsch, Carl Nicolaisen, to ring his sales staff all round the world at any time of day to ask where they are, where they are going, and how their last meeting went.‎ ‎ Point 4 The telephone separates us. Antomella Bramante in Rome says, “We worked in separate offices but I could see him through the window. It was easy to get his number. We were so near-but we didn’t meet for the first two weeks!”‎ ‎ Point 5 The telephone allows us to reach out beyond our own lives. Today we can talk to several complete strangers at once on chat lines (at least my daughter does. I wouldn’t know what to talk about). We can talk across the world. We can even talk to astronauts (if you know any) while they’re space-walking. And, with the phone line hooked up to the computer, we can access to the Internet, the biggest library on Earth. ‎ ‎68. How do you understand “Point 1-The telephone creates the need to communicate?”‎ A. People don’t communicate without telephone.‎ B. People communicate because of the creating of the telephone.‎ C. People communicate more since telephone has been created.‎ D. People communicate more because of more traffic.‎ ‎69. Which of the following best shows people’s attitude towards mobile phones?‎ A. Mobile phones help people deal with the emergency.‎ B. Mobile phones bring convenience as well as little secret to people.‎ C. Mobile phones are so important and should be encouraged.‎ D. Mobile phones are part of people’s life.‎ ‎70．Which points do you think support the idea that phones improve people’s life?‎ ‎ a. Point 1 b. Point ‎2 c. Point 3 d. Point 4 e. Point 5‎ A. c, b B. a, e C. a, c D. b, e ‎ ‎71. The best heading for the passage is .‎ A. Phone Power B. Kinds of Phone C. How to Use Phones D. Advantage of Phones E Although we already know a great deal about influenza, and although the World Health Organizations is constantly collecting detailed information from its chain of influenza reference laboratories throughout the world, it is extremely difficult for epidemiologists, who study infectious (传染的) diseases, to predict when and where the next flu epidemic(流感) will occur, and how serious it will be.‎ ‎ There are three kinds of influenza virus, known as A, B and C. Influenza C virus is relatively stable and causes mild infections that do not spread far through the population. The A and B types are unstable, and are responsible for the epidemics that cause frequent concern. Following any virus attack, the human body builds up antibodies which can be changed into immunity（免疫力） to that strain of virus but a virus with the ability to change its character is able to bypass this protection. Variability is less developed in the influenza B virus, which affects only human beings. As influenza B virus may cause a widespread epidemic but will have little effect if introduced into the same community soon afterwards, since nearly everyone will have built up antibodies and will be immune. The influenza A virus, which affects animals also, is extremely unstable and is responsible for some of the worst outbreaks of the disease, such as the world epidemic, of 1918&1919, when about half the world’s population were infected and about twenty million people died, some from pneumonia caused by the virus itself and some from secondary complication caused by bacteria. Accurate prediction is difficult because of the complication of the factors. A particular virus may be related to one to which some of the population have partial involved immunity. The extent to which it will spread will depend on factors such as its own strength, or virulence, the ease with which it can be transmitted and the strength of the opposition in encounters. Scientists, however, have a reliable general picture of the world situation. ‎ ‎72. Which of the following is the most appropriate title for the passage?‎ ‎ A. Symptoms of Influenza. B. Man Vs Influenza Virus.‎ ‎ C. World Health Organization: Forefront against Influenza Virus.‎ ‎ D. Variability of Influenza Virus.‎ ‎73. What does the author say about the influenza B virus?‎ ‎ A. B Virus is relatively stable and causes mild infections that do not spread far through the population.‎ B. B Virus is unstable, and is responsible for the epidemics that cause frequent concern.‎ C. B virus is extremely unstable and is responsible for some of the worst outbreaks of the disease.‎ ‎ D. B virus has a very developed variability, and it affects only human beings.‎ ‎74. Which of the following is NOT mentioned as a factor contributing to the extent to which a virus spreads?‎ ‎ A. The strength of the virus. B. The strength of the opposition. ‎ ‎ C. The virus encounters the ease with which the virus can be transmitted. ‎ ‎ D. The immunity the virus can bring about.‎ ‎ 75. This article is quite probably .‎ ‎ A. a piece of news B. a special science report ‎ C. an introduction to a book D. a scientific fiction ‎★专题（46）‎ A Toronto—A pleasant attitude can do wonders for patients’ recovery, according to researchers who reviewed 16 studies that looked at patients’ attitudes toward health. The studies lasted 30 years and looked at patients’ attitudes after operation.‎ ‎“In each case the better a patient’s expectations about how they would do after operation or some health procedure, the better they did,” said the author Donald Cole, of the Institute for Work and Health in Toronto.‎ ‎“This mind-body connection that we have been toying with for the past couple of decades really does have hard science behind it. The result shows that the power of positive thinking is real,” Cole said.‎ New York—A Pablo Picasso painting sold at Christie’s auction house in New York Wednesday for 55-million dollars. The price set a new auction record for a Picasso, and is the fifth-highest price ever paid for any work of art at auction.‎ The painting—Woman with her arms crossed—was purchased by an telephone bidder(投标者). Painted in ‎1902 in Barcelona, the portrait is one of the best-known works from what is called Picasso’s blue period.‎ Christie’s says the painting by the famous Spanish artist is of a quality not seen on the market in more than 10 years. It sold for more than twice its pre-sale estimate.‎ Xinhua Agency—A report that three kindergarten teachers knelt down before a South Korean couple to apologize, in Nanjing, of East China’s Jiangsu Province, has triggered wide criticism.‎ At a local kindergarten, a Chinese teacher frightened a South Korean child by saying she would cut off his fingers if he continued to make mischief. Although the kindergarten had apologized to the couple and ‎ dismissed the teacher surnamed Yang, the mother insisted that Yang should kneel down before her.‎ Sheng Dalin, a columnist, wrote in the XINXI SHIBAO that it was enough to fire the teacher and make an apology to the couple, but the mother’s request was beyond all reason.‎ ‎56．News Item 1 intends to make us believe that .‎ ‎ A．positive thinking can make people healthy ‎ B．a better attitude results in a better operation ‎ C．researchers have observed 16 patients’ recovery during the past 30 years ‎ D．great attention has been paid to how attitudes affect health ‎57．Which of the following is NOT true about the painting Woman with her arms crossed?‎ ‎ A．The painting was once thought to be worth around $25 million.‎ ‎ B．The painting is one of the most expensive pictures ever sold at auction.‎ ‎ C．The painting was purchased through telephone.‎ ‎ D．The painting has not been seen on the market for more than 10 years.‎ ‎58．The report in News Item 3 has caused wide criticism because _________.‎ ‎ A．the kindergarten fired the teacher surnamed Yang ‎ B．the mother demanded an unreasonable apology from the teachers ‎ C．the teacher frightened a South Korean boy ‎ D．the kindergarten punished a boy so severely B ‎ Thousands of people began pouring into Pennsylvania from other states. They wanted to buy lottery tickets. The tickets cost only $0.9 each. But that small spending could bring them a reward of $90 million. That was the second largest lottery jackpot(积累奖金)in history.‎ ‎ More than 87 million tickets were bought for the Pennsylvania lottery drawing. Those who bought tickets had to choose seven numbers from 1 to 80. The chance of winning was one in 9.6 million. But that little chance certainly didn’t affect ticket sales. In the last few days before the drawing, tickets were selling at the unbelievable rate of 500 per second.‎ ‎ Experts say many people buy lottery tickets because they just want to have a piece of the action. Others say the lottery is a stock market for poor people. It allows them to dream about wealth they’ll probably never have.‎ ‎ But many people believe lotteries are no better than legalized (合法化的)gambling. Some critics(批评家)note that most people who play are poor and may not be able to afford the tickets. There are also many addicts(成瘾者)who take the game seriously. They may pour their life savings into lottery tickets. Some clubs have been formed to help them kick the habit.‎ ‎ Politicians like lotteries because they provide money that would otherwise have to come from new taxes. The profits from lotteries are usually used to pay for education or programs for senior citizens. But critics say this arrangement just allows states to legalize vice(恶习), under the name of social progress.‎ ‎ No matter whether you regard state lotteries right or not, you cannot refuse to accept their extreme popularity with many Amercians.‎ ‎59．The main idea of the passage is that __________.‎ ‎ A．lotteries are of great benefit to everyone who buys them ‎ B．playing a lottery is just like investing in the stock market ‎ C．a lot of people buy lottery tickets, but lotteries cause disagreement ‎ D．lotteries are just legalized vice ‎60．Which of the following is TRUE according to the passage?‎ ‎ A．Politicians like lotteries because they don’t have to pay extra tax.‎ ‎ B．The popularity of lotteries in America actually is social progress.‎ ‎ C．Some critics don’t like lotteries because many poor people waste their money on them.‎ ‎ D．People love the lottery because it is a stock market.‎ ‎61．In just one hour in the last few days, the Pennsylvania lottery sold tickets totaling_______.‎ ‎ A．$1.62 million B．$90 million C．$9.6 million D．$87 million ‎62．People who are addicted to playing lotteries should _________.‎ ‎ A．join a club B．kick the habit ‎ C．win the Pennsylvania D．save every cent C ‎ Alexis was hot and tired. With rage in her voice she shouted, “Pull me up！I give up, I hate this. This is stupid!” It was at that moment when Jason, the adviser on the trip, looked at me and said, “Ed, I’m going to go ‎ down and talk with her.” I then shouted down to Alexis, “Hold on! You can do this. We know you can!”‎ ‎ Jason grasped another rope, put his climbing harness(系带)on and began to repel down the cliff. Within moments Jason was beside Alexis. She had her cheek directly against the face of the rock with her feet barely resting on a small piece of the cliff that jetted outward. Jason said to Alexis, “I know that you have been on this cliff now for what seems like a long time. Your feet and fingers are cramping(痉挛)up and your forearms feel as though they are on fire. But , Alexis, you are strong, look how far up you are already. You have taken one of the more difficult paths up the cliff. Look Alexis, look at the path you have taken.”‎ ‎ At that moment, Alexis moved her cheek away from the rock face and looked down. The bright white chalk she used on her hands to give her a better hold, showed the path where her tired hands had moved her upward on the cliff. Jason was right. Alexis had taken the hardest way up the cliff. Jason then looked straight into Alexis’ eyes and in a calm voice he said, “You are not alone out here, there are people who care about you, who want to help you and see you succeed. We are going to do this together. Are you ready?” Slowly she shook her head yes and took a deep breath.‎ ‎63．Jason went down the cliff because _________.‎ ‎ A．Alexis took a wrong path B．Alexis was trapped in rocks ‎ C．Alexis didn’t believe in herself D．Alexis’ forearms were badly hurt ‎64．We can infer from the passage that ________.‎ ‎ A．Alexis was finally pulled up by Ed ‎ B．Alexis regretted having taken the wrong path up the cliff ‎ C．Alexis was immediately sent to hospital after she was pulled up ‎ D．Alexis successfully rock climbed ‎65．The underlined word “hot” in the story means _________.‎ ‎ A．disappointed B．angry ‎ C．uncomfortable D．running a high body temperature ‎66．Alexis would probably become _________.‎ ‎ A．more strong-minded B．easier to give up ‎ C．poorer in health D．less interested in rock climbing D ‎ About six years ago I was eating lunch in a restaurant in New York City when a woman and a young boy sat down at the next table, I couldn’t help overhearing parts of their conversation. At one point the woman asked, “So, how have you been?” And the boy — who could not have been more than seven or eight years old — replied. “Frankly, I’ve been feeling a little depressed lately.”‎ ‎ This incident stuck in my mind because it confirmed (确认) my growing belief that children are changing. As far as I can remember, my friends and I didn’t find out we were “depressed”, that is, in low spirits, until we were in high school.‎ ‎ Undoubtedly a change in children has increased steadily in recent years. Children don’t seem childlike anymore. Children speak more like adults, dress more like adults and behave more like adults than they used to.‎ ‎ Whether this is good or bad is difficult to say, but it certainly is different. Childhood as it once was no longer exists. Why?‎ ‎ Human development is depended not only on born biological states, but also on patterns of gaining social knowledge. Movement from one social role to another usually involves learning the secrets of the new social positions. Children have always been taught adult secrets, but slowly and in stages; traditionally, we tell sixth graders things we keep hidden from fifth graders.‎ ‎ In the last 30 years, however, a secret-revelation (揭示) machine has been equipped in 98 percent of American homes. It is called television. Television passes information to all viewers alike, whether they are children or adults. Unable to resist the temptation (诱惑) , many children turn their attention from printed texts to the less challenging, more attractive moving pictures.‎ ‎ Communication through print, as a matter of fact, allows for a great deal of control over the social information which children will gain. Children must read simple books before they can read complex materials.‎ ‎67．According to the author, feeling depressed is ________.‎ ‎ A．a sure sign of a mental problem in a child ‎ B．a mental state present in all humans, including children ‎ C．something that cannot be avoided in children’s mental development ‎ D．something hardly to be expected in a young child ‎68．Traditionally, a child is supposed to learn about the adult world _________.‎ ‎ A．through connection with society B．gradually and under guidance ‎ C．naturally without being taught D．through watching television ‎69．According to the author, that today’s children seem adultlike results from ______.‎ ‎ A．the widespread influence of television B．the poor arrangement of teaching content ‎ C．the fast pace of human scientific development D．the rising standard of living ‎70．What does the author think of communication through print for children?‎ ‎ A．It enables children to gain more social information.‎ ‎ B．It develops children’s interest in reading and writing.‎ ‎ C．It helps children to read and write well.‎ ‎ D．It can control what children are to learn.‎ ‎71．What does the author think of the change in today’s children?‎ ‎ A．He feels their adultlike behavior is so funny. B．He thinks the change worthy of note.‎ ‎ C．He considers it a rapid development. D．He seems to be upset about it.‎ E Many of us like cooking but never have much time for it. Helen Fry’s new book Quick Cooking has been specially written for busy people. It has over 1,000 recipes, from the famous Spanish gazpacho to Swedish smorgasbord. The book is well written and the photographs and drawings are clear. (They are like those in the excellent little Quick Dressmaking and Quick Gardening.) The book has a strong plastic cover. It is easy to find your way around it too. And busy people, notice this! Mrs Fry tells you how much time you need in order to get each dish ready.‎ Quick Cooking has 4 parts, one for each season. This helps you to use fresh fruit and vegetables when they are cheaper — and, of course, better. There are a lot of exciting ideas from foreign countries, and most of the recipes are easy to follow. You take something simple like a chicken or some cheese, and make an unusual dish out of it. For example, there are no fewer than 40 recipes for eggs! Mrs Fry does not plan complete meals for the “quick book”. The beginners will have to find out a lot of things for himself — or herself. But this ought not to be difficult with such a good book. I wanted to try many of the recipes as soon as I read them. For people with little spare time, Helen Fry’s Quick Cooking is excellent value.‎ ‎72．Helen Fry’s book is called Quick Cooking because .‎ ‎ A．you can cook all the dishes in it quickly ‎ B．there is over 1,000 recipes in it ‎ ‎ C．it is written for people who don’t have much time ‎ D．it tells you how to cook all kinds of food quickly ‎73．Busy people should notice that .‎ ‎ A．all the recipes in the book are easy to follow ‎ B．there are clear photographs and drawings in the book ‎ C．the book has a strong cover ‎ D．they are told how long each dish takes to cook ‎74．This passage is most probably .‎ ‎ A．a book review B．a notice ‎ C．a letter to an editor D．an introduction on cooking ‎75．We can infer from the passage that .‎ ‎ A．Helen Fry is good at writing books quickly ‎ B．Complete meals are planned only for beginners ‎ C．There are quite a few “quick books” for busy people ‎ D．Beginners are advised to start making meals out of the cheapest materials ‎★专题（47）‎ A X-rays were first discovered by a German scientist , Wilhelm Konrad Rontgen , in 1895 , almost by accident . He and several other scientists were experimenting with passing electric currents through certain gases in a special glass tube from which the air had been moved . One day Rontgen noticed that , even when the tube was covered with black paper , some strange kind of radiation was coming through and making a screen nearby glow. Rontgen could not see anything coming out of the tube ,but then he discovered that if he put the screen in the next room on the other side of a closed door , the rays could pass not only through black paper but also through wood .‎ The next thing he found out was that if he put his hand between the rays and a photographic plate , the ‎ rays would print a shadow of the bony framework of his hand on the plate .In fact , the rays could pass as easily through the fleshy part of his hand as through the black paper , but hardly at all through the bone . So Rontgen made the first X-ray picture of a hand , showing just how the bones in the hand fit together .‎ ‎56．What puzzled Rontgen one day during his experiment was .‎ ‎ A．some passing electric current B．some radiation coming through the covered tube ‎ ‎ C．the black-paper-covered tube D．the screen nearby ‎ ‎57．The screen didn’t stop glowing even when .‎ ‎ A．it was moved to the next room B．it was moved to the other side of the room ‎ ‎ C．the door was closed D．the black paper was moved from the tube ‎ ‎58．Rontgen put his hand between the rays and a photographic plate in order to .‎ ‎ A．stop the radiation B．make an X-ray photo of it ‎ ‎ C．find out more about the rays D．see through the bones of his hand ‎ ‎59．The rays proved to be incapable ( 不能的)of passing through .‎ ‎ A．wood B．flesh C．bone D．black paper ‎ ‎60．From the passage , we know X-rays are .‎ ‎ A．invisible B．changeable C．white D．bright ‎ B A shopping center is a place where many different shops and stores are collected under one roof . You can buy everything there , and there are also banks restaurants and , sometimes , a post office .‎ There are other places in the United States which are called five-and –ten-cent stores because they used to sell things for 5 to 10 cents . Today they sell almost anything and some of the things cost several dollars . Supermarkets are found in all the cities . They sell food and many other goods . You walk around the supermarket , choose the things you want , put them into a special basket prepared by the store and pay for them all together at the door . Supermarkets often stay open later than other stores .‎ Stores are usually open every day of the week except on Sunday . Some close on Saturdays in July and August .‎ ‎61．The shops and stores in a shopping center are .‎ ‎ A．close to your house B．on the top of a big roof ‎ ‎ C．in the same building D．near banks and restaurants ‎ ‎62．A five-and-ten-cent store usually sells .‎ ‎ A．small and cheap things B．expensive things ‎ ‎ C．things worth a few dollars D．everything you need in the house ‎ ‎63． have baskets ready for people to carry the things they are going to buy .‎ ‎ A．Shopping centers B．Supermarkets ‎ ‎ C．Five-and-ten-cent stores D．Fine stores in America ‎ ‎64．Which of the following can be the topic of the article ?‎ ‎ A．What a shopping Center is B．Why people like supermarket ‎ ‎ C．Old and new stores D．Three types of Places for shopping ‎ ‎65．This article suggests that people cannot buy things .‎ ‎ A．from Monday to Friday B．on Sundays ‎ ‎ C．in July and August D．on Saturdays ‎ C HOLIDAY HOMES IN MALLORCA Holiday apartments in Mallorcan sailing and fishing port-quiet even in summer season beautifully situated apartments with views of sea and mountains , yet near to shops and restaurants . Cars and bicycles for hire . Sailing and sports clubs nearby .‎ ITALY IN COMFORT Luxury（豪华的）coach (=carriage ) tours of Italy , out of normal holiday season . 21 leisurely（休闲） days to visit five Italian cities starting from London 1st May , 1st September . The tours are guided by professor Martin Davis , formerly Head of Italian Studies , London University . See the arts and culture of history Italy .‎ KIBBUTZ HOLIDAYS IN ISRAEL Working holidays on a kibbutz(cooperative farm ) in Israel . All nationalities welcome for one of three months , if prepared to work morning with kibbutz members . Accommodation (住), food and trip to historic sights all provided free-you pay only for the special low-cost return flight .‎ TWO WEEKS ON A CARRIBBEAN ISLAND Two-week holidays in the luxurious Hotel Splendid , on a lovely beach with golden sands and deep-blue sea . Tennis , golf , sailing and all water sports . Trips and tours around the islands arranged . Near to town of Castries with lively evening entertainment（娱乐）dancing to local bands .‎ ‎1st November-31st March=$720 per person ‎ ‎1st April-31th October=850 per person ‎ Jack and his wife Mary , who have recently retired ,want to see places of cultural and historic interest abroad , but Mary hates flying .‎ Peter and Maria , university students , want to travel as far as possible on very little money , and would like to know a country by working there for three months with other young people .‎ Michael , a young computer programmer , has been working hard and needs holiday to relax —in winter . He would like to go somewhere warm and sunny , where he can swim in the sea , and he enjoys sports and dancing .‎ Harry and Kate , both teachers and their two teenage sons , have to take their holiday during the school summer holidays . There must be plenty for the boys to do , although Harry and Kate want beautiful scenery , good food and wine —and peace .‎ ‎66．Michael would most enjoy , where you can go in winter .‎ ‎ A．spending two weeks in the splendid hotel on the Caribbean island .‎ ‎ B．visiting five Italian cities starting from London ‎ ‎ C．seeing splendid arts and culture of historic city ‎ ‎ D．driving cars and bicycles along the seaside ‎ ‎67．The most suitable holiday for Peter and Maria would be , as it is cheap and sounds very interesting .‎ ‎ A．the summer holiday in Mallorca B．the tours guided by a professor ‎ ‎ C．the kibbutz in Israel D．the tours arranged near to town of Castries ‎ ‎68．The best holiday for Jack and Mary would be .‎ ‎ A．the leisurely 21-day coach tour of Italy ‎ ‎ B．the working holidays for 1-3months on a farm ‎ ‎ C．the splendid 14-day trip around the islands ‎ ‎ D．the interesting 2-week stay in luxurious hotel ‎ ‎69．Harry and Kate and their sons would like , which is quiet even in the busy summer season .‎ ‎ A．a holiday working on a kibbutz in Israel ‎ ‎ B．a holiday visiting ancients cities by coach in Italy ‎ ‎ C．a holiday hotel on a lovely beach on the Caribbean island ‎ ‎ D．a holiday apartment in the fishing port in Mallorca ‎ D The dream of flying into outer space , owned by the Chinese people for centuries , will soon come true . China launched（发射）its fourth unmanned spacecraft “Shenzhou IV” on December 30, at the Jiuquan Satellite Launch Center in Gansu Province . It was the 27th consecutive and successful launch of China-made rockets since October 1996. This launch has made it more realistic for China to send a person into space on its own-following Russia and US.‎ China launched the “Shenzhou I” , “Shenzhou II”and “Shenzhou III” spacecraft in 1999 ,2001 and 2002separately .‎ ‎“Shenzhou IV” was to make it a more comfortable place in which astronauts can live and work . All parts of the application（应用）system for manned flight are aboard the “Shenzhou IV” craft in all test flights . China’s manned flight program began in 1992 .A number of unmanned test flights will be launched before Chinese astronauts are sent into space .‎ Leading scientists in charge of China’s manned space program said the successful launch of the “Shenzhou IV” showed that China had the ability of sending its astronauts to outer space . The spacecraft returned to Earth on January 5 , after completing seven experiments in space . ‎ Officials in the center said that “Shenzhou V” , a manned spacecraft , is expected to be launched later this year .‎ ‎70．When did “Shenzhou” manned flight project begin according to the text ?‎ ‎ A．In 1992 B．In ‎1996 ‎C．In 1999 D．In 2002‎ ‎71．The underlined（下画线）word “consecutive” means .‎ ‎ A．difficult B．continuous C．frequent D．common ‎ ‎72．How long did it take the “Shenzhou IV” to fly in space and land successfully ?‎ ‎ A．5 days B．6 days C．7days D．8 days ‎ E Beijing is a safe place to live in and visit as the “atypical pneumonia” (非典)—also known as “Severe Acute Respiratory Syndrome” (SARS)—has been brought under effective control , the nation’s health minister said yesterday .‎ ‎“The daily living and work order of the Chinese people , including residents in Guangdong , is as normal ,” he said , stressing（强调）that various preventive measures will be undertaken to protect the health of expatriates（流动人口）living , visiting or attending meetings in the capital .‎ The minister , who held a press conference yesterday , appealed （呼吁）to some foreign organizations and companies which had cancelled（取消）their staff’s trips to China to reconsider their decisions .‎ Also yesterday , Foreign Ministry spokesman Liu Jianchao urged some countries not to misunderstand the situation and not to disturb normal exchanges with China . He said China has experience in preventing and treating the disease , and the number of SARS cases is falling dramatically .‎ He said 1,190 SARS cases had been reported by March 31 , with ‎1153 in South China’s Guangdong Province . There have been 46 deaths from the disease on the Chinese mainland and ‎40 in Guangdong .‎ Among all of the cases , 934 people had been cured and released from hospital—‎911 in Guangdong , eight in the nearby Guangxi Zhuang Autonomous Region and one in Beijing .‎ ‎73．Of 1,190 SARS cases , .‎ ‎ A．6 patients died in Beijing and Guangxi B．23 patients alive are outside Guangdong ‎ ‎ C．202 patients are still in hospital D．210 patients are still under treatment in hospital ‎ ‎74．After the disease appeared in China , .‎ ‎ A．some countries stopped normal exchanges with China ‎ ‎ B．people from abroad came to China on business as usual ‎ ‎ C．foreign reporters didn’t tell the truth about the disease ‎ ‎ D．the disease didn’t bring about changes to people’s lives ‎ ‎75．The press conference was held .‎ ‎ A．to invite foreigners to come to China B．to tell reporters of the numbers of death ‎ ‎ C．to make sure no more people will die from the disease ‎ ‎ D．to make some facts clear to the public , especially to foreigners ‎ ‎★专题（48）‎ A Without the atmosphere there would be no weather , no wind , rain , snow , or clouds . Air is all around us ; we live at the bottom of a great ocean of air . It is invisible , but we can feel it when it moves . There are miles of air above us , pressing down with great weight on the earth and everything on it . Because air presses down on us from all directions at the same time , and because we are able to bear（忍受）this weight , we do not seem to feel it . But scientists have proved that air has this weight , and that anything that has weight creates （产生）a force called pressure . As changes in air pressure take place , they make air move .‎ Air is a gas that expands （膨胀）when heated , gets lighter , and moves upward . When air is cooled , it gets heavier , sinks close to the earth’s surface , and flows like water in a great river . As warm air rises , cold air rushes in to take its place . Thus winds originate（起源）. The winds that blow high above us are caused by the warmer air running away from colder air . The wind we feel near the earth’s surface is the heavy colder air trying hard to catch the warmer air . Changes in temperature cause the air to move . And of course there are many changes , so air movements are taking place practically all the time .‎ ‎56．The first paragraph mainly tells us the causes of .‎ ‎ A．why we don’t feel air B．whey atmosphere is important to us ‎ ‎ C．why there is air surrounding us D．why there is air pressure ‎ ‎57．Air moves under such conditions that .‎ ‎ A．there is air pressure B．the air is heavy ‎ ‎ C．air pressure doesn’t remain the same all the time D．air comes up and down ‎ ‎58．Which of the following pictures best tells the movements of warm air and cold air ?‎ ‎59．According to the passage , in some areas if farmers who grow grapes（葡萄）light fires in the early morning , that is because the farmers want to .‎ ‎ A．drive away warm air B．prevent cold air from coming to harm their plants ‎ ‎ C．cause more wind D．stop warm air running away ‎ B Alzheimer’s disease is a major national health problem. Nearly 2 million Americans over the age of 65 have Alzheimer’s disease . It is a leading cause of death among the elderly . But Alzheimer’s disease is not confined（限于）to the aged . There may be a million or more people under the age of 65 suffering from the disease .‎ At one time , people suffering from the disease were said to be “getting old”. The disease was thought to be a natural part of growing old , but it is now known that Alzheimer’s disease strikes young and old alike . It is an organic（器官的）disease that destroys brain cells .‎ Alzheimer’s disease affects the patient’s memory , speech , and movement . In the beginning stages of the disease , the patient may seem slightly confused . He may have trouble speaking . Then the patient’s memory begins to fail . He may forget dates , telephone numbers , names and plans .‎ As the disease progresses , the patient may not recognize family and friends . These symptoms（症状）often cause terrible anxiety in the patient . He may feel lost and frightened . Sometimes the patient reacts with wild and bad behavior.‎ In the last stages of the disease , the patient may not be able to take care of himself . He may have lost the ability to speak and walk .‎ Scientists don’t know exactly what causes Alzheimer’s disease . It may be caused by a virus（病毒）. It may be caused by a poisonous substance（物质）in the environment . At present, there is no cure for the disease . But there are ways to slow its progress . Exercise and physical treatment can help the patients of this disease .‎ ‎60．The main idea of the passage is that Alzheimer’s disease .‎ ‎ A．is a terrible part of the aging process ‎ ‎ B．is an organic disease that affects young and old ‎ ‎ C．can be cured by physical treatment D．causes forgetfulness ‎ ‎61．All of the following are symptoms of Alzheimer’s disease EXCEPT .‎ ‎ A．forgetfulness B．difficulty in speaking ‎ ‎ C．loss of sight D．loss of the ability to walk ‎ ‎62．According to the passage , which of the following may be a cause of Alzheimer’s disease ?‎ ‎ A．Poisons produced by the brain . B．Getting old .‎ ‎ C．A virus . D．Lack of exercise .‎ ‎63．The progress of Alzheimer’s disease can be slowed by .‎ ‎ A．operation B．a change in environment ‎ ‎ C．medicines D．physical treatment and exercise ‎ C What’s On Stage ‎ An acrobatic（杂技）soul: To celebrate its 50th anniversary , the China Acrobatic Troupe will present “The Soul of China”, where the seemingly impossible is made real . Chills（寒战）will run down your spine（脊柱）as you watch breathlessly as performers take their art and their bodies to the edge .‎ Time : 7:30 p.m , September13—19‎ Place : Capital Theatre , 22 Wangfujing Dajie , Dongcheng District ‎ Exhibitions ‎ Joint Show : A group ink painting exhibition is running at the Huangshicheng Art Gallery in Beijing .‎ ‎ About 50 works by 25 young artists including Ge Yun and Yu Yang are on display .‎ Time : ‎9 a .m —5p. m. until September 10‎ Place : Huangshicheng Gallery , 136 Nanchizi Dajie , Dongcheng Distirct ‎ Oil paintings : The Wanfung Art Galley will host a joint show of oil paintings by 10 young and middle-aged artists . On display are more than 30 of their latest works , which capture（捕捉）the wonderous variety of life in unique（独特的）styles .‎ Time : ‎9 a.m. —4p.m until September 15‎ Place: 136 Nachizi Street , Dongcheng District ‎ Literature（文学）museum : The National Museum of Modern Chinese Literature offers an indepth study of the evolution of Chinese contemporary literature from 1919 to 1949 .‎ Time : ‎9 a. m —4 p.m , daily ‎ Place: 45 Anyuan Donglu , Chaoyang District（Shaoyaoju area ）‎ Concerts Beijing rocks : “ The Fashionow Night of Chinese Rock” is set to bring rock fans out by the thousands next month . Nine Chinese rock bands will perform at the concert , including older generation bands , middle generation and some recent arrivals The audience（听众）will be given a chance to decide what songs they want to hear , which is sure to bring a storm .‎ Time: September 16‎ Place: The Olympic Center ‎ Belgium Orchestra（管弦乐队）:La Petite Bande , the Baroque Orchestra of Belgium will perform in Beijing at the Grand Theatre of the Cultural Palace of Nationalities as part of activities across the world to commemorate（纪念）the 250th anniversary of Bach’s death .‎ Time: 7:30 p.m . September11—14 ‎ Place: Grand Theatre of the Cultural Palace of Nationalities ‎ ‎64．What do you think of the acrobatic show mentioned here ?‎ ‎ A．When you watch it , you will certainly feel cold .‎ ‎ B．Something strange will puzzle everyone , including scientists .‎ ‎ C．Unexpected things will make you excited and surprised .‎ ‎ D．Even the bravest ones will be too frightened to go on watching .‎ ‎65．The most characterisic thing about the Fashionow Night of Chinese Rock is that .‎ ‎ A．it will let the audience choose the performers and the music ‎ ‎ B．it is to bring thousands of rock fans out of their homes ‎ ‎ C．it will certainly cause a rock storm throughout China ‎ ‎ D．it is to be held in memory of one of the greatest musicians ‎ ‎66．Suppose it is September 14 today , how many activities can people choose to attend ?‎ ‎ A．2 B．‎3 ‎C．4 D．5‎ ‎67．On the whole ,we can conclude .‎ ‎ A．people in Beijing prefer modern culture to something traditional ‎ ‎ B．there are usually more cultural activities in September than in any other month ‎ ‎ C．most of the cultural activities in Beijing are for foreign visitors only ‎ ‎ D．we can enjoy a large variety of cultural activities in Beijing ‎ D In general , people talk about two groups of colors : warm colors and cool colors . Researchers in psychology think that there are also two groups of people : people who prefer warm colors and people who prefer cool colors . ‎ The warm colors are red , orange and yellow . Where there are warm colors and a lot of light , people usually want to be active . People think that red , for example , is exciting. Sociable people , those who like to be with others , like red . The cool colors are green , blue and violet . These colors , unlike warm colors are relaxing . Where there are cool colors , people are usually quiet . People who like to spend time alone often prefer blue .‎ Red may be exciting , but one researcher says that time seems to pass more slowly in a room with warm colors than in a room with cool colors . He suggests that a warm color , such as red or orange is a good color for a living room or restaurant . People who are relaxing or eating do not want time to pass quickly . Cool colors are better for offices or factories if the people who are working there want time to pass quickly .‎ Researchers do not know why people think some colors are warm and other colors are cool . However , almost everyone agrees that red , orange , and yellow are warm and that green , blue , and violet are cool .‎ ‎ Perhaps warm colors remind people of warm days and the cool colors remind them of cool days . Because in the north the sun is higher during summer , the hot summer sunlight appears yellow .‎ ‎68．Which of the following colors belong to cool colors ?‎ ‎ A．Yellow, green . B．Blue , violet . C．Black , blue . D．Brown , white .‎ ‎69．Which of the following statements is not true ?‎ ‎ A．Sociable people like warm colors . B．Warm colors can make people excited .‎ ‎ C．People who like to be with others don’t like red .‎ ‎ D．Where there are warm colors , people want to be active .‎ ‎70．Which is the right color for different rooms ?‎ ‎ A．Red or orange for offices . B．Orange for dining-rooms .‎ ‎ C．Blue for bedrooms . D．Red for studies .‎ ‎71．What is the main idea of the last paragraph ?‎ ‎ A．It shows the reason why people think some colors are warm and others are cool .‎ ‎ B．Warm colors remind people of warm days .‎ ‎ C．Cool colors remind people of cool days .‎ ‎ D．People have an agreeable opinion of warm colors and cool colors .‎ E Disposing（处理）of waste has been a problem since humans started producing it . As more and more people choose to live close together in cities , the waste-disposal problem becomes increasingly difficult . ‎ During the eighteenth century, it was usual for several neighboring towns to get together to select a faraway spot as a dump site . Residents or trash haulers（垃圾拖运者）would transport household rubbish , rotted wood , and old possessions to the site . Periodically（定期的）some of the trash was burned and the rest was buried . The unpleasant sights and smells caused no problem because nobody lived close by .‎ Factories , mills , and other industrial sites also had waste to be disposed of . Those located on rivers often just dumped the unwanted remains into the water . Others built huge burners with chimneys to deal with the problem .‎ Several facts make these choices unacceptable to modern society . The first problem is space Dumps , which are now called landfills , are most needed in heavily populated areas . Such areas rarely have empty land suitable for this purpose . Property is either too expensive or too close to residential（住宅区的）neighborhoods . Long-distance trash hauling has been a common practice but once farm areas are refusing to accept rubbish from elsewhere ,cheap land within trucking distance of major city areas is almost nonexistent .‎ Awareness（意识）of pollution dangers has resulted in more strict rules of waste disposal. Pollution of rivers , ground water ,land and air is a price people can no longer pay to get rid of waste . The amount of waste ,however , continues to grow .‎ Recycling efforts have become commonplace , and many towns require their people to take part . Even he most efficient recycling programs ,however , can hope to deal with only about 50 percent of a city’s reusable waste .‎ ‎72．The most suitable title for this passage would be .‎ ‎ A．Places for Disposing Waste B．Waste Pollution Dangers ‎ ‎ C．Ways of Getting Rid of Waste D．Waste Disposal Problem ‎ ‎73．During the 18th century , people disposed their waste in many ways EXCEPT for .‎ ‎ A．burying it B．recycling it C．burning it D．throwing it into rivers ‎ ‎74．What can be inferred from the fourth paragraph ?‎ ‎ A．Farm areas accept waste from the city in modern society .‎ ‎ B．There is cheap land to bury waste in modern society .‎ ‎ C．It is difficult to find space to bury waste in modern society .‎ ‎ D．Ways to deal with waste in modern society stay the same .‎ ‎75．The main purpose of writing this article is to .‎ ‎ A．draw people’s attention to waste management ‎ ‎ B．warn people of the pollution dangers we are facing ‎ ‎ C．call on people to take part in recycling programs ‎ ‎ D．tell people a better way to get rid of the waste ‎ ‎★专题（50）‎ A When I was younger, bedtime was always my favourite part of the day. Wearing soft pajamas and with ‎ Ian, my stuffed monkey, in my arms, I felt no pressure at all.‎ I named Ian after my uncle when I compared Ian’s long arms and legs to his. One night I ran up to Uncle Ian at a family party and told him I had named my monkey after him. His eyebrows wrinkled in confusion, then a chuckle（哈哈笑）escaped his lips. I guess he didn’t understand how important it was to me.‎ Even if Uncle Ian didn’t think my monkey was special, I certainly did. I dressed him in a white baby nightgown. My mother thought that Ian was the best-dressed stuffed animal in the world. Yes, he was certainly a fashionable creature. The strong cologne（科隆香水）I used on him years ago makes him still smell “pretty”.‎ For a long time, Ian went everywhere with me. He was my best friend, and I told him everything. But when I turned twelve, I realized I was too old for stuffed animals. I thought people would think I was babyish, so I put him in the cupboard with the rest of my teddy bears and dolls. I begged him to understand why I was doing this, but at the same time I longed to talk to him again.‎ It took me several years to realize that it was OK to miss Ian. I know now that maturity（成熟）doesn’t only mean growing up and taking on more responsibility. It also means holding on to your childhood and acting young sometimes.‎ Ian has been with me since I was six years old holding him in my arms connects me to my past and my present as I continue to grow and understand myself.‎ ‎56．Which of the following is not true according to the text?‎ ‎ A．Bedtime used to be the writer’s favourite part of the day because of the stuffed monkey.‎ ‎ B．Uncle Ian liked the stuffed monkey as much as the writer.‎ ‎ C．The writer used to carry the monkey with her wherever she went.‎ ‎ D．Years later the writer realized that it was not wrong to miss Monkey Ian.‎ ‎57．The writer loved Monkey Ian deeply because __________.‎ ‎ A．he could understand her B．he was a fashionable monkey ‎ C．he could talk with her D．he was her most honest listener ‎58．We can learn from the text that the writer believes ________.‎ ‎ A．keeping stuffed animals is babyish ‎ B．maturity doesn’t mean growing up and taking on more responsibility ‎ C．one should keep to his childhood and act young sometimes even when he has grown up ‎ D．human beings should be kind to animals ‎59．We can infer from the text that _________.‎ ‎ A．the writer is still a teenager B．the writer is now a middle-aged woman ‎ C．Monkey Ian got angry for being left alone D．Uncle Ian has a monkey-like face B ‎ “The Lord of the Rings”, one of the best sellers in the new millennium（千年）, was made up of three parts——“The Fellowship of the Ring”, “Two Towers”, and “The Return of the King”. Millions upon millions of people have read it in over 25 different languages, but fewer know about the author and the history of the composition of the creative materwork.‎ ‎ John Ronald Reuel Tolkien was born in South Africa in 1892. His parents died when he was a child. Living in England with his aunt, Tolkien and his cousins made up play languages, a hobby that led to Tolkien’s becoming skilled in Welsh, Greek, Gothic, Old Norse and Anglo-Saxon.‎ ‎ After graduating from Oxford, Tolkien served in World War I. In 1917, while recovering from trench fever, he began composing the mythology for The Rings. As a professor of Anglo-Saxon in 1930s at Oxford, Tolkien was part of an informal discussion group called the Inklings, which included several writers. The group was soon listening to chapters of Tolkien’s imaginative work “The Hobbit”.‎ ‎ Hobbit was a name Tolkien created for a local people that could best be described as half-sized members of the English rural（乡村的）class. Hobbits live in hillside holes. One of them, Bilbo Baggins, looks for treasures with a group of dwarves（侏儒）. On the way, he meets the twisted, pitiful creature Gollum, from whom he sees a golden ring that makes the holder invisible.‎ ‎ One of Tolkien’s students persuaded her employer, publisher Allen & Unwin, to look at a draft（草稿）. The chairman of the firm, Stanley Unwin, thought that the best judge for a children’s book would be his ten-year-old son. The boy earned a shilling for reporting back that the adventure was exciting, and “The Hobbit” was published in 1937.‎ ‎ It sold so well that Unwin asked for a continuation. Over a dozen years later, in 1954, Tolkien produced “The Lord of the Rings”, a series of books so creative that they hold readers—new and old —after their publication.‎ ‎60．What can we learn from the text?‎ ‎ A． “The Lord of the Rings” didn’t sell well in the last millennium.‎ ‎ B．People know better about Tolkien himself than about his works.‎ ‎ C．Tolkien was quite familiar with Old English.‎ ‎ D．Tolkien knew very well about different kinds of local languages in Africa.‎ ‎61．What can we learn about “Hobbit” that Tolkien created in his works?‎ ‎ A．Hobbit was a race living in English downtown areas.‎ ‎ B．Hobbit was a local people who were very tall and strong.‎ ‎ C．Hobbit was a social group of people who lived in old castles.‎ ‎ D．Hobbit was a group of people who were mostly dwarves.‎ ‎62．Which of the following helped most in making “The Hobbit” published?‎ ‎ A．One of Tolkien’s students. B．Stanley Unwin’s son.‎ ‎ C．Allen & Unwin. D．Bilbo Baggins.‎ ‎63．What is mainly discussed in the text?‎ ‎ A． “The Lord of the Rings” and its writer.‎ ‎ B．A completely new masterwork in the new millennium.‎ ‎ C．a famous professor at Oxford University.‎ ‎ D．The power of the magic ring.‎ ‎64．Which of the following shows the right order of Mr J.R.R.Tolkien’s life experience?‎ ‎ a．He had his “The Hobbit” published.‎ ‎ b．He became a member of the lnklings. c．He served in World WarⅠ ‎ d．He became an undergraduate at Oxford.‎ ‎ e．His work “The Lord of the Rings” came to the world.‎ ‎ f．He moved to England to live with his aunt.‎ ‎ A．f-d-b-c-a-e B．f-d-c-b-a-e C．f-c-d-b-e-a D．d-f-c-a-b-e C ‎★This Week’s Highlights ‎●Visit the new College of Engineering Alumni Web for ‎ coming events, photo collections, and career services.‎ ‎●Reunion Weekend 2004 is just around the corner, and we ‎ invite you back to BU to take part in all the fun.‎ ‎★BU Breaking News ‎□Boston University Professor demands Napping at the Workplace in His Speech.(3/18)‎ ‎□Boston University Hosts Discussion on Putin, U.S.-Russian ties for Future.(3/11)‎ ‎□BU Physicist Receives Boltzmann Award For Excellent Work In Physics at the Conference.(3/8)‎ ‎★Features ‎□Learn more about the Young Alumni Council, serving alumni up to 15 years out of BU.‎ ‎□Offer students jobs for earning income to pay their taxes.‎ ‎★Student Village will be the center of BU life.‎ ‎□Four BU students share their homeschooling experiences, ‎ and the lessons they learned.‎ ‎□Scientists at the South End will study the world’s most ‎ The Alumni Magazine Winter 2003‎ dangerous microbes（微生物）, and develop measures to ‎ bioterrorism.‎ ‎65．Which of the following statements is true according to the webpage?‎ ‎ A．Alumni Web cares about BU’s scientific research rather than international situations.‎ ‎ B．BU provides students with homeschooling.‎ ‎ C．Reunion Weekend 2004 is one of the most important news of this week.‎ ‎ D．Amumni Web was set up 15 years ago.‎ ‎66．The underlined word “around the corner” probably means “_________”.‎ ‎ A．in the immediate future B．at present ‎ C．in the distant future D．around here ‎67．If you are a biology student at BU, what is most probably your first choice after you finish reading the webpage?‎ ‎ A．Watch the video of the Discussion. B．Buy the magazine Bostonia.‎ ‎ C．Watch the video of the Conference. D．Book tickets for the Reunion Weekend.‎ D American researchers say drinking tea may help strengthen the body’s defense system against infection（感染）. Doctors at Brigham and Women’s Hospital in Boston, Massachusetts, did the study. The team studied a chemical found in black, green, oolong and pekoe tea. This chemical is an amino acid（氨基酸）called L-theanine. The scientists say it may increase the strength of gamma delta T cells. That’s the letter T, not the drink. Gamma delta T cells are part of the body’s defenses.‎ First, the researchers mixed some of these cells with antigens（抗原）found in the amino acid. Antigens help the body react to infection. Then the scientists added some bacteria（细菌）. Within twenty-four hours, the cells produced a lot of interferon, a substance that fights infection. Cells not mixed with the antigens did not produce interferon.‎ In the second part of the study, eleven people drank five to six cups of black tea every day. Ten other people drank the same amount of instant coffee. That is dried coffee mixed with hot water.‎ Two weeks later, and again two weeks after that, the researchers tested the blood of all twenty-one people. They also looked at what happened when they added bacteria to the blood cells. They found that the tea drinkers produced five times more interferon after they started drinking tea. The coffee drinkers did not produce interferon.‎ Doctor Jack Bukowski led the study. He says the antigens added to the gamma delta T cells were responsible for the increased reaction to the bacteria. He says the study also showed that the cells were able to remember the bacteria and fight them again the next time.‎ Earlier research already has found that tea can help prevent heart disease and cancer. Doctor Bukowski says the new study must be repeated with more people. If the findings prove to be true, he says, then tea drinking might also help protect against bacterial infections. He says the amino acid L-theanine could be removed from tea and used as a drug to strengthen the body’s defenses.‎ ‎68．We may know from the text that ________ can be found in different kinds of tea.‎ ‎ A．Gamma delta T cells B．L-theanine C．interferon D．bacteria ‎69．Tea may help strengthen the body’s defense system because it helps ________.‎ A．the body to produce more interferon B．the body to produce more gamma delta T cells C．to add some bacteria to the blood cells D．to mix antigens with some of the cells in the body ‎70．According to Dr Bukowski, ________.‎ ‎ A．the findings of the study have already proved to be true ‎ B．he has taken some amino acid L-theanine from tea and made a drug with it ‎ C．further study is needed to prove the findings true ‎ D．he is not sure whether tea can help prevent heart disease and cancer ‎71．What would be the best title for this Text?‎ ‎ A．Tea Is Better Than Coffee. B．Tea May Help Fight Infection ‎ C．Tea Can Help Prevent Cancer. D．Our Body Needs Tea E ‎ Maybe you never opened that account, but someone else did ——someone who used your name and personal information to commit fraud（造假）. When an imposter uses your name, your credit card number, or some other piece of your personal information for their own purpose –in short, when someone takes your personal information without your knowledge –it’s a crime, pure and simple.‎ ‎ The biggest problem is that you may not know your identity（身份）has been stolen until you notice that something’s wrong: you may get bills for a credit card account you never opened, your credit report may include debts you never knew you had, a billing cycle may pass without your receiving a statement, or you may see charges on your bills that you didn’t sign for, and even don’t know anything about.‎ ‎ If someone has stolen your identity, the Federal Trade Commission (FTC) suggests that you take three actions immediately.‎ ‎ First, contact the fraud departments of each of the three major credit offices. Tell them to flag your file with a fraud alert（警告）including a statement that creditors should get your permission before opening any ‎ new accounts in your name.‎ ‎ Then, ask the credit offices for copies of your credit reports. Credit offices must give you a free copy of your report if it is not correct because of fraud. Review your reports carefully to make sure no additional fraudulent accounts have been opened in your name or unauthorized（侵权的）changes made to your present accounts. In a few months, order new copies of your reports to check your corrections and changes, and to make sure no new fraudulent activity has occurred.‎ ‎72．What’s the subject discussed in the text?‎ A.What you should do if your credit card is stolen. ‎ B．What you should do if your identity is stolen.‎ C.What an imposter always does to make money. ‎ ‎ D．What the Federal Trade Commission is about.‎ ‎73．What should you do first when you find your identity is stolen?‎ ‎ A．Inform creditors not to open any new accounts in your name without your permission.‎ ‎ B．Ask for copies of your credit reports and make sure no other frauds have been made.‎ ‎ C．Keep ordering new copies to check what you have already changed and corrected.‎ ‎ D．Always lock your ID card in your cupboard in case it should be stolen.‎ ‎74．What is the most difficult thing for people to deal with identity frauds?‎ ‎ A．No measures can work on the billing cycle. B．There is no strict law for this kind of behaviors.‎ ‎ C．It might be a long time before you realize that. D．The FTC does nothing except for three suggestions.‎ ‎75．Which is the least possible if a fraud has happened to you?‎ ‎ A．You may have debts in your credit card.‎ ‎ B．You may find charges on your bills unauthorized.‎ ‎ C．A new credit card may be opened in your name.‎ ‎ D．The fraud departments can find out the imposter right away.‎ Keys ‎2007年高考英语阅读专题训练 专题（1）56.B 57.D 58.A 59.B 60.A 61.A 62.D 63.A 64.B 65.A 66.C 67.D 68.C 69.D 70.D 71.B 72.B 73.A 74.C 75.A 专题（2）56—60 CBDBD 61—65 CBCDA 66—70 CABDA 71—75 BCABB ‎★专题（3）56—60 CCDCB61—65 ADAAC 66—70 DBDCB 71—75 ABCDA ‎★专题（4）56-60 BDDAA 61-65 CDCCA 66-70BCDAD 71-75ABCBC ‎★专题（5）56—60 D C B A C 61—‎65 A A C B A 66—‎70 C C B C B 71～75 D A C B D ‎★专题（6）36—40 BCCAD 41—45 BDBDD 46—50 ACBDA51—55 CBDAD ‎★专题（7）56—60 CCDCB61—65 ADAAC 66—70 DBDCB 71—75 ABCDA ‎★专题（8）56—60 ADCBD 61—65 DABAB 66—70 DBADA 71—75 CDCDB ‎★专题（9）56—59ABDC 60—63DDAA 64—68CADCB69—71BAA 72—75ADDC ‎★专题（10）56．B 57．C 58．D 59．C 60．D61．B 62．D 63．C 64．B 65．A 66．A 67．D 68．C 69．C 70．D71．A 72．C 73．A 74．A 75．B ‎★专题（11）56．D 57．A 58．C 59．C 60．B61．C 62．A 63．D 64．A 65．D 66．B 67．A 68．C 69．D 70．A71．D 72．C 73．B 74．D 75．C ‎★专题（12）56. C 57.D 58.A 59.B 60.B 61.C 62.D 63. A 64.D 65.C 66.A 67.B 68.C 69.D 70.A 71.B 72.B 73.C 74.A 75.D ‎ ‎★专题（13）56—60 CABCB61—65 CBDAB 66—70 DBDAC 71—75 DCCBA ‎★专题（14）56．B57．A 58．C 59．C 60．C 61．D 62．B 63．A 64．B 65．C 66．D 67．B 68．A 69．D 70．A 71．B 72．D 73．A 74．D 75．C ‎ ‎★专题（15）56—60 ADBCC 61—65 BCDBD 66—70 BDDBD 71—75 ABABD ‎★专题（16）56~60CBBDB 61~65DCCAB66~70DCBCD 71~75CBCBD ‎★专题（17）56—60BCDAB61—65ACACD 66—70CBBDA 71—75BBCDB ‎ ★专题（18）56—60 CDAAC61—65 DBCAD 66—70 ABABC 71—75 BDADC ‎★专题（19）56—75： CACAB CBDDA BCABA ACCDC ‎★专题（20）56—60 AACBB 61—65 CACCA 66—70 BACCD 71—75 BDCAD ‎★专题（21）56—60 DCBAA 61—65 BDDCD 66—70 ABCDA 71—75 ACCBA ‎★专题（22）56—60BBABA 61—65BADBA 66—70CCCBA 71—75DACDB ‎★专题（23）56—60 BCCCB 61—65 BBDDA 66—70 BAACB 71—75 DCABD ‎★专题（24）56—60：DACAC61—65：BDACA 66—70DBCDB 71-75：ABBDC ‎★专题（25）56—60DADDD 61—65CBBCC66—70ADDAC 71—75BDBBA ‎★专题（26）56—60ADACB61—65BAADC 66—70BCDAC 71—75 ACADD ‎ ‎★专题（27）56—60BAADC 61—65CCBCD 66—70CABAC 71—75DAABD ‎★专题（28）56—60 CCDDA 61—65 BBACB 66—70 BBACD 71—75 AABDB ‎★专题（29）A. 56-58 DCD B. 59-62 CCDD C. 63-66 BABC D. 67-70 BCCDE. 71-75 ACCAB ‎★专题（30）56—60 CBDAC61—65 CACBC 66—70 BAABA 71—75 CCAAC ‎ ‎★专题（31）56—60CDBAC61—65ACAAD 66—70ABBCB 71—75ACBCA ‎★专题（32）56—60 AACBB 61—65 CACCA 66—70 BACCD 71—75 BDCAD ‎★专题（33）56—60BDBDC61—65BDAA 66—70ABBAD 71—75CBCAD ‎★专题（34）56—60BDCAC 61—65BDCBC 66—70DABCD 71—75ABBCD ‎★专题（35）56-60DABAD 61-65CABDA 66-70BABDB 71-75ACADB ‎ ‎★专题（36）56.D 57.C 58.D 59.A 60.B 61.B 62.C 63.D 64.B 65.A 66.A 67.A 68.B 69.B 70.A 71.C 72.B 73.A 74.D 75.D ‎★专题（37）56．D 57．D 58．B 59．A 60．A 61．D 62．B 63．B 64．C 65．B66．D 67．A 68．A 69．C 70．C 71．B 72．A 73．C 74．B 75．A ‎★专题（38）56—60 DAAAC 61—65 BDDDC 66—70BCCDA 71—75 BBDCC ‎★专题（39）56.B 57.C 58.B 59.B 60.D 61.A 62.C 63.C 64.A 65.B 66.A 67.C 68.D 69.B 70.A 71.B 72.B 73.C 74.B 75.D ‎★专题（40）56—60BCADC 61—65ACBCB 66—70DDCBA 71—75CBCDA ‎★专题（41）56—60 ACDCD 61—64 BCAAC 66—70 BBBDB 71—75 DCABA ‎★专题（42）56—60 ABBAD61—65 BDDCC 66—70 DBABA 71—75 BCCBA ‎★专题（43）56．D 57．B 58．A 59．C 60．A61．D 62．A 63．D 64．C 65．D 66．B 67．C 68．A 69．C 70．B71．A 72．B 73．B 74．D 75．C ‎★专题（44）56—60BDBDC 61—65BDAAD66—70ABBAD 71—75CBCAD ‎★专题（45） 56---60 DCDBC61---65 BDDCB 66---70 DDCBD 71---75 ABBDB ‎★专题（46）56．A 57．D 58．B 59．C 60．C 61．A 62．B 63．C 64．D 65．B 66．A ‎67．D 68．B 69．A 70．D 71．B 72．C 73．D 74．A 75．C ‎★专题（47）56—60 BACCA 61—65 CABDB 66—70 ACADA 71—75 BCDAD ‎★专题（48）56.A57.C 58.B 59.B 60.B 61.C 62.C 63.D 64.C 65.B 66.C 67.D68.B 69.C 70.B 71.A 72.D 73.B 74.D 75.A 专题（49）56.B 57.C 58.C 59.A 60.B61.A 62.D 63.C 64.B 65.C 66.A 67.D 68.B 69.A 70.D71.C 72.D 73.B 74.B 75.D ‎★专题（50）56—60 BDCAC 61—65 DBABC66—70 ABBAC71—75 BBACD ‎ ‎